CODE OF FEDERAL REGULATIONS40
CONTAINING
A CODIFICATION OF DOCUMENTS
OF GENERAL APPLICABILITY
AND FUTURE EFFECT
Published by
the Office of the Federal Register
National Archives and Records
Administration
as a Special Edition of
the Federal Register
For sale by U.S. Government Printing Office
Superintendent of Documents, Mail Stop: SSOP, Washington, DC 20402-9328
Cite this Code:
The Code of Federal Regulations is a codification of the general and permanent rules published in the Federal Register by the Executive departments and agencies of the Federal Government. The Code is divided into 50 titles which represent broad areas subject to Federal regulation. Each title is divided into chapters which usually bear the name of the issuing agency. Each chapter is further subdivided into parts covering specific regulatory areas.
Each volume of the Code is revised at least once each calendar year and issued on a quarterly basis approximately as follows:
Title 1 through Title 16
Title 17 through Title 27
Title 28 through Title 41
Title 42 through Title 50
The appropriate revision date is printed on the cover of each volume.
The contents of the Federal Register are required to be judicially noticed (44 U.S.C. 1507). The Code of Federal Regulations is prima facie evidence of the text of the original documents (44 U.S.C. 1510).
The Code of Federal Regulations is kept up to date by the individual issues of the Federal Register. These two publications must be used together to determine the latest version of any given rule.
To determine whether a Code volume has been amended since its revision date (in this case, July 1, 1998), consult the “List of CFR Sections Affected (LSA),” which is issued monthly, and the “Cumulative List of Parts Affected,” which appears in the Reader Aids section of the daily Federal Register. These two lists will identify the Federal Register page number of the latest amendment of any given rule.
Each volume of the Code contains amendments published in the Federal Register since the last revision of that volume of the Code. Source citations for the regulations are referred to by volume number and page number of the Federal Register and date of publication. Publication dates and effective dates are usually not the same and care must be exercised by the user in determining the actual effective date. In instances where the effective date is beyond the cut-off date for the Code a note has been inserted to reflect the future effective date. In those instances where a regulation published in the Federal Register states a date certain for expiration, an appropriate note will be inserted following the text.
The Paperwork Reduction Act of 1980 (Pub. L. 96-511) requires Federal agencies to display an OMB control number with their information collection request.
Provisions that become obsolete before the revision date stated on the cover of each volume are not carried. Code users may find the text of provisions in effect on a given date in the past by using the appropriate numerical list of sections affected. For the period before January 1, 1986, consult either the List of CFR Sections Affected, 1949-1963, 1964-1972, or 1973-1985, published in seven separate volumes. For the period beginning January 1, 1986, a “List of CFR Sections Affected” is published at the end of each CFR volume.
(a) The incorporation will substantially reduce the volume of material published in the Federal Register.
(b) The matter incorporated is in fact available to the extent necessary to afford fairness and uniformity in the administrative process.
(c) The incorporating document is drafted and submitted for publication in accordance with 1 CFR part 51.
Properly approved incorporations by reference in this volume are listed in the Finding Aids at the end of this volume.
A subject index to the Code of Federal Regulations is contained in a separate volume, revised annually as of January 1, entitled CFR
An index to the text of “Title 3—The President” is carried within that volume.
The Federal Register Index is issued monthly in cumulative form. This index is based on a consolidation of the “Contents” entries in the daily Federal Register.
A List of CFR Sections Affected (LSA) is published monthly, keyed to the revision dates of the 50 CFR titles.
There are no restrictions on the republication of material appearing in the Code of Federal Regulations.
For a legal interpretation or explanation of any regulation in this volume, contact the issuing agency. The issuing agency's name appears at the top of odd-numbered pages.
For inquiries concerning CFR reference assistance, call 202-523-5227 or write to the Director, Office of the Federal Register, National Archives and Records Administration, Washington, DC 20408.
The Government Printing Office (GPO) processes all sales and distribution of the CFR. For payment by credit card, call 202-512-1800, M-F, 8 a.m. to 4 p.m. e.s.t. or fax your order to 202-512-2233, 24 hours a day. For payment by check, write to the Superintendent of Documents, Attn: New Orders, P.O. Box 371954, Pittsburgh, PA 15250-7954. For GPO Customer Service call 202-512-1803.
The full text of the Code of Federal Regulations, The United States Government Manual, the Federal Register, Public Laws, Weekly Compilation of Presidential Documents and the Privacy Act Compilation are available in electronic format at www.access.gpo.gov/nara (``GPO Access''). For more information, contact Electronic Information Dissemination Services, U.S. Government Printing Office. Phone 202-512-1530, or 888-293-6498 (toll-free). E-mail, gpoaccess@gpo.gov.
The Office of the Federal Register also offers a free service on the National Archives and Records Administration's (NARA) World Wide Web site for public law numbers, Federal Register finding aids, and related information. Connect to NARA's web site at www.nara.gov/fedreg. The NARA site also contains links to GPO Access.
Title 40—
Chapter I—Environmental Protection Agency appears in all twenty-two volumes. A Pesticide Tolerance Commodity/Chemical Index appears in parts 150-189. A Toxic Substances Chemical—CAS Number Index appears in parts 700-789 and part 790 to end. Redesignation Tables appear in the volumes containing parts 50-51, parts 150-189, and parts 700-789. Regulations issued by the Council on Environmental Quality appear in the volume containing part 790 to end.
The OMB control numbers for title 40 appear in § 9.1 of this chapter. For the convenience of the user, § 9.1 appears in the Finding Aids section of the volumes containing part 50 to the end.
For this volume, Karen A. Thornton was Chief Editor. The Code of Federal Regulations publication program is under the direction of Frances D. McDonald, assisted by Alomha S. Morris.
42 U.S.C. 7401, 7412, 7413, 7414, 7416, 7601 and 7602.
(a) The following list presents the substances that, pursuant to section 112 of the Act, have been designated as hazardous air pollutants. The
(b) The following list presents other substances for which a
(c) This part applies to the owner or operator of any stationary source for which a standard is prescribed under this part.
(d) In addition to complying with the provisions of this part, the owner or operator of a stationary source subject to a standard in this part may be required to obtain an operating permit issued to stationary sources by an authorized State air pollution control agency or by the Administrator of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) pursuant to title V of the Clean Air Act (Act) as amended November 15,
The terms used in this part are defined in the Act or in this section as follows:
(1) The State air pollution control agency, local agency, other State agency, or other agency authorized by the Administrator to carry out a permit program under part 70 of this chapter; or
(2) The Administrator, in the case of EPA-implemented permit programs under title V of the Act (42 U.S.C. 7661).
(1) The provisions of this part; and/or
(2) The permit program established under part 70 of this chapter. The term State shall have its conventional meaning where clear from the context.
Used in this part are abbreviations and symbols of units of measure. These are defined as follows:
(a) System International (SI) units of measure:
(b) Other units of measure:
(c) Chemical nomenclature:
(d) Miscellaneous:
(a) All requests, reports, applications, submittals, and other communications to the Administrator pursuant to this part shall be submitted in duplicate to the appropriate Regional Office of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency to the attention of the Director of the Division indicated in the following list of EPA Regional Offices.
Region V (Illinois, Indiana, Michigan, Minnesota, Ohio, Wisconsin), Director, Air and Radiation Division, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 77 West Jackson Boulevard, Chicago, IL 60604-3590.
(b) Section 112(d) directs the Administrator to delegate to each State, when appropriate, the authority to implement and enforce national emission standards for hazardous air pollutants for stationary sources located in such State. If the authority to implement and enforce a standard under this part has been delegated to a State, all information required to be submitted to EPA under paragraph (a) of this section shall also be submitted to the appropriate State agency (provided, that each specific delegation may exempt sources from a certain Federal or State reporting requirement). The Administrator may permit all or some of the information to be submitted to the appropriate State agency only, instead of to EPA and the State agency. The appropriate mailing address for those States whose delegation request has been approved is as follows:
(A) [Reserved]
(B) State of Alabama, Air Pollution Control Division, Air Pollution Control Commission, 645 S. McDonough Street, Montgomery, AL 36104.
(C) State of Alaska, Department of Environmental Conservation, 3220 Hospital Drive, Juneau, AK 99811.
(D) Arizona.
(E) State of Arkansas: Chief, Division of Air Pollution Control, Arkansas Department of Pollution Control and Ecology, 8001 National Drive, P.O. Box 9583, Little Rock, AR 72209.
(F) California.
(G) State of Colorado, Department of Health, Air Pollution Control Division, 4210 East 11th Avenue, Denver, CO 80220.
For a table listing Region VIII's NESHAPs delegation status, see paragraph (c) of this section.
(H) State of Connecticut, Bureau of Air Management, Department of Environmental Protection, State Office Building, 165 Capitol Avenue, Hartford, CT 06106.
(I) State of Delaware:
(J) [Reserved]
(K) Bureau of Air Quality Management, Department of Environmental Regulation, Twin Towers Office Building, 2600 Blair Stone Road, Tallahassee, FL 32301.
(L) State of Georgia, Environmental Protection Division, Department of Natural Resources, 270 Washington Street, SW., Atlanta, GA 30334.
(M) Hawaii Department of Health, 1250 Punchbowl Street, Honolulu, HI 96813.
(N) [Reserved]
(O) State of Illinois, Bureau of Air, Division of Air Pollution Control, Illinois Environmental Protection Agency, 2200 Churchill Road, Springfield, IL 62794-9276.
(P) State of Indiana, Indiana Department of Environmental Management, 100 North Senate Avenue, P.O. Box 6015, Indianapolis, Indiana 46206-6015.
(Q) State of Iowa: Iowa Department of Natural Resources, Environmental Protection Division, Henry A. Wallace Building, 900 East Grand, Des Moines, IA 50319.
(R) State of Kansas: Kansas Department of Health and Environment, Bureau of Air Quality and Radiation Control, Forbes Field, Topeka, KS 66620.
(S) Division of Air Pollution Control, Department for Natural Resources and Environmental Protection, U.S. 127, Frankfort, KY 40601.
(T) State of Louisiana: Program Administrator, Air Quality Division, Louisiana Department of Environmental Quality, P.O. Box 44096, Baton Rouge, LA 70804.
(U) State of Maine, Bureau of Air Quality Control, Department of Environmental Protection, State House, Station No. 17, Augusta, ME 04333.
(V) State of Maryland, Bureau of Air Quality and Noise Control, Maryland State Department of Health and Mental Hygiene, 201 West Preston Street, Baltimore, MD 21201.
(W) Commonwealth of Massachusetts, Division of Air Quality Control, Department of Environmental Protection, One Winter Street, 7th floor, Boston, MA 02108.
(X) State of Michigan, Air Quality Division, Michigan Department of Environmental Quality, P.O. Box 30260, Lansing, Michigan 48909.
(Y) Minnesota Pollution Control Agency, Division of Air Quality, 520 Lafayette Road, St. Paul, MN 55155.
(Z) Bureau of Pollution Control, Department of Natural Resources, P.O. Box 10385, Jackson, MS 39209.
(AA) State of Missouri: Missouri Department of Natural Resources, Division of Environmental Quality, P.O. Box 176, Jefferson City, MO 65102.
(BB) State of Montana, Department of Health and Environmental Services, Air Quality Bureau, Cogswell Building, Helena, MT 59601.
For a table listing Region VIII's NESHAPs delegation status, see paragraph (c) of this section.
(CC) State of Nebraska, Nebraska Department of Environmental Control, P.O. Box 94877, State House Station, Lincoln, NE 68509.
(DD) Nevada.
(EE) State of New Hampshire, Air Resources Division, Department of Environmental Services, 64 North Main Street, Caller Box 2033, Concord, NH 03302-2033.
(FF) State of New Jersey: New Jersey Department of Environmental Protection, John Fitch Plaza, P.O. Box 2807, Trenton, NJ 08625.
(GG) State of New Mexico: Director, New Mexico Environmental Improvement Division, Health and Environment Department, 1190 St. Francis Drive, Santa Fe, NM 87503.
(i) The City of Albuquerque and Bernalillo County: Director, The Albuquerque Environmental Health Department, The City of Albuquerque, P.O. Box 1293, Albuquerque, NM 87103.
(HH) New York: New York State Department of Environmental Conservation, 50 Wolf Road, Albany, NY 12233, attention: Division of Air Resources.
(II) North Carolina Environmental Management Commission, Department of Natural and Economic Resources, Division of Environmental Management, P.O. Box 27687, Raleigh, NC 27611. Attention: Air Quality Section.
(JJ) State of North Dakota, State Department of Health and Consolidated Laboratories, Division of Environmental Engineering, State Capitol, Bismarck, ND 58505.
For a table listing Region VIII's NESHAPs delegation status, see paragraph (c) of this section.
(KK) State of Ohio—
(i) Medina, Summit and Portage Counties: Director, Akron Regional Air Quality Management District, 177 South Broadway, Akron, OH 44308.
(ii) Stark County: Air Pollution Control Division, 420 Market Avenue North, Canton, Ohio 44702-3335.
(iii) Butler, Clermont, Hamilton, and Warren Counties: Air Program Manager, Hamilton County Department of Environmental Services, 1632 Central Parkway, Cincinnati, Ohio 45210.
(iv) Cuyahoga County: Commissioner, Department of Public Health & Welfare, Division of Air Pollution Control, 1925 Saint Clair, Cleveland, Ohio 44114.
(v) Belmont, Carroll, Columbiana, Harrison, Jefferson, and Monroe Counties: Director, North Ohio Valley Air Authority (NOVAA), 814 Adams Street, Steubenville, OH 43952.
(vi) Clark, Darke, Greene, Miami, Montgomery, and Preble Counties: Director, Regional Air Pollution Control Agency (RAPCA), 451 West Third Street, Dayton, Ohio 45402.
(vii) Lucas County and the City of Rossford (in Wood County): Director, Toledo Environmental Services Agency, 26 Main Street, Toledo, OH 43605.
(viii) Adams, Brown, Lawrence, and Scioto Counties: Engineer-Director, Air Division, Portsmouth City Health Department, 740 Second Street, Portsmouth, OH 45662.
(ix) Allen, Ashland, Auglaize, Crawford, Defiance, Erie, Fulton, Hancock, Hardin, Henry, Huron, Marion, Mercer, Ottawa, Paulding, Putnam, Richland, Sandusky, Seneca, Van Wert, Williams, Wood (except City of Rossford), and Wyandot Counties: Ohio Environmental Protection Agency, Northwest District Office, Air Pollution Control, 347 Dunbridge Rd., Bowling Green, Ohio 43402.
(x) Ashtabula, Holmes, Lorain, and Wayne Counties: Ohio Environmental Protection Agency, Northeast District Office, Air Pollution Unit, 2110 East Aurora Road, Twinsburg, OH 44087.
(xi) Athens, Coshocton, Gallia, Guernsey, Hocking, Jackson, Meigs, Morgan, Muskingum, Noble, Perry, Pike, Ross, Tuscarawas, Vinton, and Washington Counties: Ohio Environmental Protection Agency, Southeast District Office, Air Pollution Unit, 2195 Front Street, Logan, OH 43138.
(xii) Champaign, Clinton, Highland, Logan, and Shelby Counties: Ohio Environmental Protection Agency, Southwest District Office, Air Pollution Unit, 401 East Fifth Street, Dayton, Ohio 45402-2911.
(xiii) Delaware, Fairfield, Fayette, Franklin, Knox, Licking, Madison, Morrow, Pickaway, and Union Counties: Ohio Environmental Protection Agency, Central District Office, Air Pollution Control, 3232 Alum Creek Drive, Columbus, Ohio, 43207-3417.
(xiv) Geauga and Lake Counties: Lake County General Health District, Air Pollution Control, 105 Main Street, Painesville, OH 44077.
(xv) Mahoning and Trumbull Counties: Mahoning-Trumbull Air Pollution Control Agency, 9 West Front Street, Youngstown, OH 44503.
(LL) State of Oklahoma, Oklahoma State Department of Health, Air Quality Service, P.O. Box 53551, Oklahoma City, OK 73152.
(i) Oklahoma City and County: Director, Oklahoma City-County Health Department, 921 Northeast 23rd Street, Oklahoma City, OK 73105.
(ii) Tulsa County: Tulsa City-County Health Department, 4616 East Fifteenth Street, Tulsa, OK 74112.
(MM) State of Oregon, Department of Environmental Quality, Yeon Building, 522 SW. Fifth, Portland, OR 97204.
(i)-(vii) [Reserved]
(viii) Lane Regional Air Pollution Authority, 225 North Fifth, suite 501, Springfield, OR 97477.
(NN) Pennsylvania.
(i) City of Philadelphia: Philadelphia Department of Public Health, Air Management Services, 500 S. Broad Street, Philadelphia, PA 19146.
(ii) Commonwealth of Pennsylvania: Department of Environmental Resources, Post Office Box 2063, Harrisburg, PA 17120.
(iii) Allegheny County: Allegheny County Health Department, Bureau of Air Pollution Control, 301 Thirty-ninth Street, Pittsburgh, PA 15201.
(OO) State of Rhode Island, Division of Air and Hazardous Materials, Department of Environmental Management, 291 Promenade Street, Providence, RI 02908.
(PP) State of South Carolina, Office of Environmental Quality Control, Department of Health and Environmental Control, 2600 Bull Street, Columbia, SC 29201.
(QQ) State of South Dakota, Department of Water and Natural Resources, Office of Air Quality and Solid Waste, Joe Foss Building, 523 East Capitol, Pierre, SD 57501-3181.
For a table listing Region VIII's NESHAPs delegation status, see paragraph (c) of this section.
(RR) Division of Air Pollution Control, Tennessee Department of Public Health, 256 Capitol Hill Building, Nashville, TN 37219.
Knox County Department of Air Pollution, City/County Building, room L222, 400 Main Avenue, Knoxville, TN 37902.
Air Pollution Control Bureau, Metropolitan Health Department, 311 23rd Avenue North, Nashville, TN 37203.
(SS) State of Texas, Texas Air Control Board, 6330 Highway 290 East, Austin, TX 78723.
(TT) State of Utah, Department of Health, Bureau of Air Quality, 288 North 1460 West, P.O. Box 16690, Salt Lake City, UT 84116-0690.
For a table listing Region VIII's NESHAPs delegation status, see paragraph (c) of this section.
(UU) State of Vermont, Air Pollution Control Division, Agency of Natural Resources, Building 3 South, 103 South Main Street, Waterbury, VT 05676.
(VV) Commonwealth of Virginia, Virginia State Air Pollution Control Board, room 1106, Ninth Street Office Building, Richmond, VA 23219.
(WW)(i) Washington; State of Washington, Department of Ecology, Olympia, WA 98504.
(ii) Northwest Air Pollution Authority, 207 Pioneer Building, Second and Pine Streets, Mount Vernon, WA 98273.
(iii) Puget Sound Air Pollution Control Agency, 200 West Mercer Street, room 205, Seattle, WA 98119-3958.
(iv) Spokane County Air Pollution Control Authority, North 811 Jefferson, Spokane, WA 99201.
(v) Yakima County Clean Air Authority, County Courthouse, Yakima, WA 98901.
(vi) Olympic Air Pollution Control Authority, 120 East State Avenue, Olympia, WA 98501.
(vii) Southwest Air Pollution Control Authority, suite 7601 H, NE Hazel Dell Avenue, Vancouver, WA 98665.
(viii) Grant County Clean Air Authority, P.O. Box 37, Ephrata, WA 98823.
(XX) State of West Virginia: Air Pollution Control Commission, 1558 Washington Street, East, Charleston, WV 25311.
(YY) Wisconsin—Wisconsin Department of Natural Resources, P.O. Box 7921, Madison, WI 53707.
(ZZ)-(AAA) [Reserved]
(BBB) Commonwealth of Puerto Rico: Commonwealth of Puerto Rico Environmental Quality Board, P.O. Box 11785, Santurce, PR 00910.
(CCC) U.S. Virgin Islands: U.S. Virgin Islands Department of Conservation and Cultural Affairs, P.O. Box 578, Charlotte Amalie, St. Thomas, U.S. Virgin Islands 00801.
(c) The following is a table indicating the delegation status of National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants in Region VIII.
For
(a) After the effective date of any standard, no owner or operator shall construct or modify any stationary source subject to that standard without first obtaining written approval from the Administrator in accordance with this subpart, except under an exemption granted by the President under section 112(c)(2) of the Act. Sources, the construction or modification of which commenced after the publication date of the standards proposed to be applicable to the sources, are subject to this prohibition.
(b) After the effective date of any standard, no owner or operator shall operate a new stationary source subject to that standard in violation of the standard, except under an exemption granted by the President under section 112(c)(2) of the Act.
(c) Ninety days after the effective date of any standard, no owner or operator shall operate any existing source subject to that standard in violation of the standard, except under a waiver granted by the Administrator under this part or under an exemption granted by the President under section 112(c)(2) of the Act.
(d) No owner or operator subject to the provisions of this part shall fail to report, revise reports, or report source test results as required under this part.
An owner or operator may submit to the Administrator a written application for a determination of whether actions intended to be taken by the owner or operator constitute construction or modification, or commencement thereof, of a source subject to a standard. The Administrator will notify the owner or operator of his determination within 30 days after receiving sufficient information to evaluate the application.
(a) The owner or operator shall submit to the Administrator an application for approval of the construction of any new source or modification of any existing source. The application shall be submitted before the construction or modification is planned to commence, or within 30 days after the effective date if the construction or modification had commenced before the effective date and initial startup has not occurred. A separate application shall be submitted for each stationary source.
(b) Each application for approval of construction shall include—
(1) The name and address of the applicant;
(2) The location or proposed location of the source; and
(3) Technical information describing the proposed nature, size, design, operating design capacity, and method of operation of the source, including a description of any equipment to be used for control of emissions. Such technical information shall include calculations of emission estimates in sufficient detail to permit assessment of the validity of the calculations.
(c) Each application for approval of modification shall include, in addition to the information required in paragraph (b) of this section—
(1) The precise nature of the proposed changes;
(2) The productive capacity of the source before and after the changes are completed; and
(3) Calculations of estimates of emissions before and after the changes are completed, in sufficient detail to permit assessment of the validity of the calculations.
(a) The Administrator will notify the owner or operator of approval or intention to deny approval of construction or modification within 60 days after receipt of sufficient information to evaluate an application under § 61.07.
(b) If the Administrator determines that a stationary source for which an application under § 61.07 was submitted will not cause emissions in violation of a standard if properly operated, the Administrator will approve the construction or modification.
(c) Before denying any application for approval of construction or modification, the Administrator will notify the applicant of the Administrator's intention to issue the denial together with—
(1) Notice of the information and findings on which the intended denial is based; and
(2) Notice of opportunity for the applicant to present, within such time limit as the Administrator shall specify, additional information or arguments to the Administrator before final action on the application.
(d) A final determination to deny any application for approval will be in writing and will specify the grounds on which the denial is based. The final determination will be made within 60 days of presentation of additional information or arguments, or 60 days after the final date specified for presentation if no presentation is made.
(e) Neither the submission of an application for approval nor the Administrator's approval of construction or modification shall—
(1) Relieve an owner or operator of legal responsibility for compliance with any applicable provisions of this part or of any other applicable Federal, State, or local requirement; or
(2) Prevent the Administrator from implementing or enforcing this part or taking any other action under the Act.
(a) The owner or operator of each stationary source which has an initial startup after the effective date of a standard shall furnish the Administrator with written notification as follows:
(1) A notification of the anticipated date of initial startup of the source not more than 60 days nor less than 30 days before that date.
(2) A notification of the actual date of initial startup of the source within 15 days after that date.
(b) If any State or local agency requires a notice which contains all the information required in the notification in paragraph (a) of this section, sending the Administrator a copy of that notification will satisfy paragraph (a) of this section.
(a) The owner or operator of each existing source or each new source which had an initial startup before the effective date shall provide the following information in writing to the Administrator within 90 days after the effective date:
(1) Name and address of the owner or operator.
(2) The location of the source.
(3) The type of hazardous pollutants emitted by the stationary source.
(4) A brief description of the nature, size, design, and method of operation of the stationary source including the operating design capacity of the source. Identify each point of emission for each hazardous pollutant.
(5) The average weight per month of the hazardous materials being proc-essed by the source, over the last 12 months preceding the date of the report.
(6) A description of the existing control equipment for each emission point including—
(i) Each control device for each hazardous pollutant; and
(ii) Estimated control efficiency (percent) for each control device.
(7) A statement by the owner or operator of the source as to whether the source can comply with the standards within 90 days after the effective date.
(b) The owner or operator of an existing source unable to comply with an applicable standard may request a waiver of compliance with that standard for a period not exceeding 2 years after the effective date. Any request shall be in writing and shall include the following information:
(1) A description of the controls to be installed to comply with the stand-ard.
(2) A compliance schedule, including the date each step toward compliance will be reached. The list shall include as a minimum the following dates:
(i) Date by which contracts for emission control systems or process changes for emission control will be awarded, or date by which orders will
(ii) Date of initiation of onsite construction or installation of emission control equipment or process change;
(iii) Date by which onsite construction or installation of emission control equipment or process change is to be completed; and
(iv) Date by which final compliance is to be achieved.
(3) A description of interim emission control steps which will be taken during the waiver period.
(c) Any change in the information provided under paragraph (a) of this section or § 61.07(b) shall be provided to the Administrator within 30 days after the change. However, if any change will result from modification of the source, §§ 61.07(c) and 61.08 apply.
(d) A possible format for reporting under this section is included as appendix A of this part. Advice on reporting the status of compliance may be obtained from the Administrator.
(e) For the purposes of this part, time periods specified in days shall be measured in calendar days, even if the word “calendar” is absent, unless otherwise specified in an applicable requirement.
(f) For the purposes of this part, if an explicit postmark deadline is not specified in an applicable requirement for the submittal of a notification, application, report, or other written communication to the Administrator, the owner or operator shall postmark the submittal on or before the number of days specified in the applicable requirement. For example, if a notification must be submitted 15 days before a particular event is scheduled to take place, the notification shall be postmarked on or before 15 days preceding the event; likewise, if a notification must be submitted 15 days after a particular event takes place, the notification shall be postmarked on or before 15 days following the end of the event. The use of reliable non-Government mail carriers that provide indications of verifiable delivery of information required to be submitted to the Administrator, similar to the postmark provided by the U.S. Postal Service, or alternative means of delivery agreed to by the permitting authority, is acceptable.
(g) Notwithstanding time periods or postmark deadlines specified in this part for the submittal of information to the Administrator by an owner or operator, or the review of such information by the Administrator, such time periods or deadlines may be changed by mutual agreement between the owner or operator and the Administrator. Procedures governing the implementation of this provision are specified in paragraph (j) of this section.
(h) If an owner or operator of a stationary source in a State with delegated authority is required to submit reports under this part to the State, and if the State has an established timeline for the submission of reports that is consistent with the reporting frequency(ies) specified for such source under this part, the owner or operator may change the dates by which reports under this part shall be submitted (without changing the frequency of reporting) to be consistent with the State's schedule by mutual agreement between the owner or operator and the State. The allowance in the previous sentence applies in each State beginning 1 year after the source is required to be in compliance with the applicable subpart in this part. Procedures governing the implementation of this provision are specified in paragraph (j) of this section.
(i) If an owner or operator supervises one or more stationary sources affected by standards set under this part and standards set under part 60, part 63, or both such parts of this chapter, he/she may arrange by mutual agreement between the owner or operator and the Administrator (or the State with an approved permit program) a common schedule on which reports required by each applicable standard shall be submitted throughout the year. The allowance in the previous sentence applies in each State beginning 1 year after the source is required to be in compliance with the applicable subpart in this part, or 1 year after the source is required to be in compliance with the applicable part 60 or part 63 standard,
(j)(1)(i) Until an adjustment of a time period or postmark deadline has been approved by the Administrator under paragraphs (j)(2) and (j)(3) of this section, the owner or operator of an affected source remains strictly subject to the requirements of this part.
(ii) An owner or operator shall request the adjustment provided for in paragraphs (j)(2) and (j)(3) of this section each time he or she wishes to change an applicable time period or postmark deadline specified in this part.
(2) Notwithstanding time periods or postmark deadlines specified in this part for the submittal of information to the Administrator by an owner or operator, or the review of such information by the Administrator, such time periods or deadlines may be changed by mutual agreement between the owner or operator and the Administrator. An owner or operator who wishes to request a change in a time period or postmark deadline for a particular requirement shall request the adjustment in writing as soon as practicable before the subject activity is required to take place. The owner or operator shall include in the request whatever information he or she considers useful to convince the Administrator that an adjustment is warranted.
(3) If, in the Administrator's judgment, an owner or operator's request for an adjustment to a particular time period or postmark deadline is warranted, the Administrator will approve the adjustment. The Administrator will notify the owner or operator in writing of approval or disapproval of the request for an adjustment within 15 calendar days of receiving sufficient information to evaluate the request.
(4) If the Administrator is unable to meet a specified deadline, he or she will notify the owner or operator of any significant delay and inform the owner or operator of the amended schedule.
(a) Based on the information provided in any request under § 61.10, or other information, the Administrator may grant a waiver of compliance with a standard for a period not exceeding 2 years after the effective date of the standard.
(b) The waiver will be in writing and will—
(1) Identify the stationary source covered;
(2) Specify the termination date of the waiver;
(3) Specify dates by which steps toward compliance are to be taken; and
(4) Specify any additional conditions which the Administrator determines necessary to assure installation of the necessary controls within the waiver period and to assure protection of the health of persons during the waiver period.
(c) The Administrator may terminate the waiver at an earlier date than specified if any specification under paragraphs (b)(3) and (b)(4) of this section are not met.
(d) Before denying any request for a waiver, the Administrator will notify the owner or operator making the request of the Administrator's intention to issue the denial, together with—
(1) Notice of the information and findings on which the intended denial is based; and
(2) Notice of opportunity for the owner or operator to present, within the time limit the Administrator specifies, additional information or arguments to the Administrator before final action on the request.
(e) A final determination to deny any request for a waiver will be in writing and will set forth the specific grounds on which the denial is based. The final determination will be made within 60 days after presentation of additional information or argument; or within 60 days after the final date specified for the presentation if no presentation is made.
(f) The granting of a waiver under this section shall not abrogate the Administrator's authority under section 114 of the Act.
(a) Compliance with numerical emission limits shall be determined in accordance with emission tests established in § 61.13 or as otherwise specified in an individual subpart.
(b) Compliance with design, equipment, work practice or operational standards shall be determined as specified in an individual subpart.
(c) The owner or operator of each stationary source shall maintain and operate the source, including associated equipment for air pollution control, in a manner consistent with good air pollution control practice for minimizing emissions. Determination of whether acceptable operating and maintenance procedures are being used will be based on information available to the Administrator which may include, but is not limited to, monitoring results, review of operating and maintenance procedures, and inspection of the source.
(d)(1) If, in the Administrator's judgment, an alternative means of emission limitation will achieve a reduction in emissions of a pollutant from a source at least equivalent to the reduction in emissions of that pollutant from that source achieved under any design, equipment, work practice or operational standard, the Administrator will publish in the
(2) Any notice under paragraph (d)(1) shall be published only after notice and an opportunity for a hearing.
(3) Any person seeking permission under this subsection shall, unless otherwise specified in the applicable subpart, submit a proposed test plan or the results of testing and monitoring, a description of the procedures followed in testing or monitoring, and a description of pertinent conditions during testing or monitoring.
(e) For the purpose of submitting compliance certifications or establishing whether or not a person has violated or is in violation of any standard in this part, nothing in this part shall preclude the use, including the exclusive use, of any credible evidence or information, relevant to whether a source would have been in compliance with applicable requirements if the appropriate performance or compliance test had been performed.
(a) If required to do emission testing by an applicable subpart and unless a waiver of emission testing is obtained under this section, the owner or operator shall test emissions from the source—
(1) Within 90 days after the effective date, for an existing source or a new source which has an initial startup date before the effective date; or
(2) Within 90 days after initial startup, for a new source which has an initial startup date after the effective date.
(b) The Administrator may require an owner or operator to test emissions from the source at any other time when the action is authorized by section 114 of the Act.
(c) The owner or operator shall notify the Administrator of the emission test at least 30 days before the emission test to allow the Administrator the opportunity to have an observer present during the test.
(d) If required to do emission testing, the owner or operator of each new source and, at the request of the Administrator, the owner or operator of each existing source shall provide emission testing facilities as follows:
(1) Sampling ports adequate for test methods applicable to each source.
(2) Safe sampling platform(s).
(3) Safe access to sampling plat-form(s).
(4) Utilities for sampling and testing equipment.
(5) Any other facilities that the Administrator needs to safely and properly test a source.
(e) Each emission test shall be conducted under such conditions as the Administrator shall specify based on design and operational characteristics of the source.
(f) Unless otherwise specified in an applicable subpart, samples shall be analyzed and emissions determined within 30 days after each emission test has been completed. The owner or operator shall report the determinations of the emission test to the Administrator by a registered letter sent before the close of business on the 31st day following the completion of the emission test.
(g) The owner or operator shall retain at the source and make available, upon request, for inspection by the Administrator, for a minimum of 2 years, records of emission test results and other data needed to determine emissions.
(h)(1) Emission tests shall be conducted as set forth in this section, the applicable subpart and appendix B unless the Ad-min-i-stra-tor—
(i) Specifies or approves the use of a reference method with minor changes in methodology; or
(ii) Approves the use of an alternative method; or
(iii) Waives the requirement for emission testing because the owner or operator of a source has demonstrated by other means to the Administrator's satisfaction that the source is in compliance with the standard.
(2) If the Administrator finds reasonable grounds to dispute the results obtained by an alternative method, he may require the use of a reference method. If the results of the reference and alternative methods do not agree, the results obtained by the reference method prevail.
(3) The owner or operator may request approval for the use of an alternative method at any time, except—
(i) For an existing source or a new source that had an initial startup before the effective date, any request for use of an alternative method during the initial emission test shall be submitted to the Administrator within 30 days after the effective date, or with the request for a waiver of compliance if one is submitted under § 60.10(b); or
(ii) For a new source that has an initial startup after the effective date, any request for use of an alternative method during the initial emission test shall be submitted to the Administrator no later than with the notification of anticipated startup required under § 60.09.
(i)(1) Emission tests may be waived upon written application to the Administrator if, in the Administrator's judgment, the source is meeting the standard, or the source is being operated under a waiver or compliance, or the owner or operator has requested a waiver of compliance and the Administrator is still considering that request.
(2) If application for waiver of the emission test is made, the application shall accompany the information required by § 61.10 or the notification of startup required by § 61.09, whichever is applicable. A possible format is contained in appendix A to this part.
(3) Approval of any waiver granted under this section shall not abrogate the Administrator's authority under the Act or in any way prohibit the Administrator from later cancelling the waiver. The cancellation will be made only after notice is given to the owner or operator of the source.
(a) Unless otherwise specified, this section applies to each monitoring system required under each subpart which requires monitoring.
(b) Each owner or operator shall maintain and operate each monitoring system as specified in the applicable subpart and in a manner consistent with good air pollution control practice for minimizing emissions. Any unavoidable breakdown or malfunction of the monitoring system should be repaired or adjusted as soon as practicable after its occurrence. The Administrator's determination of whether acceptable operating and maintenance procedures are being used will be based on information which may include, but not be limited to, review of operating and maintenance procedures, manufacturer recommendations and specifications, and inspection of the monitoring system.
(c) When required by the applicable subpart, and at any other time the Administrator may require, the owner or operator of a source being monitored shall conduct a performance evaluation of the monitoring system and furnish the Administrator with a copy of a written report of the results within 60 days of the evaluation. Such a performance evaluation shall be conducted according to the applicable specifications and procedures described in the applicable subpart. The owner or operator of the source shall furnish the Administrator with written notification of the date of the performance evaluation at least 30 days before the evaluation is to begin.
(d) When the effluents from a single source, or from two or more sources subject to the same emission standards, are combined before being released to the atmosphere, the owner or operator shall install a monitoring system on each effluent or on the combined effluent. If two or more sources are not subject to the same emission standards, the owner or operator shall install a separate monitoring system on each effluent, unless otherwise specified. If the applicable standard is a mass emission standard and the effluent from one source is released to the atmosphere through more than one point, the owner or operator shall install a monitoring system at each emission point unless the installation of fewer systems is approved by the Administrator.
(e) The owner or operator of each monitoring system shall reduce the monitoring data as specified in each applicable subpart. Monitoring data recorded during periods of unavoidable monitoring system breakdowns, repairs, calibration checks, and zero and span adjustments shall not be included in any data average.
(f) The owner or operator shall maintain records of monitoring data, monitoring system calibration checks, and the occurrence and duration of any period during which the monitoring system is malfunctioning or inoperative. These records shall be maintained at the source for a minimum of 2 years and made available, upon request, for inspection by the Administrator.
(g)(1) Monitoring shall be conducted as set forth in this section and the applicable subpart unless the Administrator—
(i) Specifies or approves the use of the specified monitoring requirements and procedures with minor changes in methodology; or
(ii) Approves the use of alternatives to any monitoring requirements or procedures.
(2) If the Administrator finds reasonable grounds to dispute the results obtained by an alternative monitoring method, the Administrator may require the monitoring requirements and procedures specified in this part.
(a) Except as provided under paragraph (d) of this section, any physical or operational change to a stationary source which results in an increase in the rate of emission to the atmosphere of a hazardous pollutant to which a standard applies shall be considered a modification.
(b) Upon modification, an existing source shall become a new source for each hazardous pollutant for which the rate of emission to the atmosphere increases and to which a standard applies.
(c) Emission rate shall be expressed as kg/hr of any hazardous pollutant discharged into the atmosphere for which a standard is applicable. The Administrator shall use the following to determine the emission rate:
(1) Emission factors as specified in the background information document (BID) for the applicable standard, or in the latest issue of “Compilation of Air Pollutant Emission Factors,” EPA Publication No. AP-42, or other emission factors determined by the Administrator to be superior to AP-42 emission factors, in cases where use of emission factors demonstrates that the emission rate will clearly increase or clearly not increase as a result of the physical or operational change.
(2) Material balances, monitoring data, or manual emission tests in cases where use of emission factors, as referenced in paragraph (c)(1) of this section, does not demonstrate to the Administrator's satisfaction that the
(d) The following shall not, by themselves, be considered modifications under this part:
(1) Maintenance, repair, and replacement which the Administrator determines to be routine for a source category.
(2) An increase in production rate of a stationary source, if that increase can be accomplished without a capital expenditure on the stationary source.
(3) An increase in the hours of operation.
(4) Any conversion to coal that meets the requirements specified in section 111(a)(8) of the Act.
(5) The relocation or change in ownership of a stationary source. However, such activities must be reported in accordance with § 61.10(c).
The availability to the public of information provided to, or otherwise obtained by, the Administrator under this part shall be governed by part 2 of this chapter.
(a) This part shall not be construed to preclude any State or political subdivision thereof from—
(1) Adopting and enforcing any emission limiting regulation applicable to a stationary source, provided that such emission limiting regulation is not less stringent than the standards prescribed under this part; or
(2) Requiring the owner or operator of a stationary source to obtain permits, licenses, or approvals prior to initiating construction, modification, or operation of the source.
The materials listed below are incorporated by reference in the corresponding sections noted. These in-corp-ora-tions by reference were approved by the Director of the Federal Register on the date listed. These materials are incorporated as they exist on the date of the approval, and a notice of any change in these materials will be published in the
(a) The following material is available for purchase from at least one of the following addresses: American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), 1916 Race Street, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania 19103; or University Microfilms International, 300 North Zeeb Road, Ann Arbor, Michigan 48106.
(1) ASTM D737-75, Standard Test Method for Air Permeability of Textile Fabrics, incorporation by reference (IBR) approved January 27, 1983, for § 61.23(a).
(2) ASTM D 1193-77, Standard Specification for Reagent Water, IBR approved for Method 101, par. 6.1.1; Method 101A, par. 6.1.1; Method 104, par. 3.1.2.
(3) ASTM D 2986-71 (Reapproved 1978), Standard Method for Evaluation of Air,
(4) ASTM D2267-68 (reapproved 1978) Aromatics in Light Naphthas and Aviation Gasoline by Gas Chromatography, IBR approved June 6, 1984, for § 61.245(d)(1) and IBR approved September 30, 1986 for § 61.67(h)(1).
(5) ASTM D 2382-76, Heat of Combustion of Hydrocarbon Fuels by Bomb Calorimeter (High-Precision Method), IBR approved June 6, 1984, for § 61.245(e)(3).
(6) ASTM D 2504-67 (Reapproved 1977), Noncondensable Gases in C
(7) ASTM D 836-84, Standard Specification for Industrial Grade Benzene, IBR approved September 14, 1989, for § 61.270(a).
(8) ASTM D 835-85, Standard Specification for Refined Benzene-485, IBR approved September 14, 1989, for § 61.270(a).
(9) ASTM D 2359-85a, Standard Specification for Refined Benzene-535, IBR approved September 14, 1989, for § 61.270(a).
(10) ASTM D 4734-87, Standard Specification for Refined Benzene-545, IBR approved September 14, 1989, for § 61.270(a).
(11) ASTM E 50-82 (reapproved 1986), Standard Practices for Apparatus Reagents, and Safety Precautions for Chemical Analysis of Metals, IBR approved for Method 108C, par. 2.1.4.
(b) The following material is available from the U.S. EPA Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati, Ohio 45268.
(1) Method 601, Test Method for Purgeable Halocarbons, July 1982, IBR approved September 30, 1986, for § 61.67(g)(2).
(c) The following material is available for purchase from the American National Standards Institute, Inc., 1430 Broadway, New York, NY 10018.
(1) ANSI N13.1—1969, “Guide to Sampling Airborne Radioactive Materials in Nuclear Facilities.” IBR approved for §§ 61.93(b)(2)(ii); 61.107(b)(2)(ii); and Method 114, par. 2.1 of appendix B to part 61.
(d) The following material is available from the Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402-9325, telephone (202) 783-3238.
(1) Test Methods for Evaluating Solid Waste, Physical/Chemical Methods, EPA Publication SW-846, Third Edition, November 1986, as amended by Revision I, December 1987, Order Number 955-001-00000-1:
(i) Method 8020, Aromatic Volatile Or-gan-ics, IBR approved March 7, 1990, for § 61.355(c)(2)(iv)(A).
(ii) Method 8021, Volatile Organic Compounds in Water by Purge and Trap Capillary Column Gas Chromatography with Photo-ion-iz-a-tion and Electrolytic Conductivity Detectors in Series, IBR approved March 7, 1990, for § 61.355(c)(2)(iv)(B).
(iii) Method 8240, Gas Chromatography/Mass Spectrometry for Volatile Organics, IBR approved March 7, 1990, for § 61.355(c)(2)(iv)(C).
(iv) Method 8260, Gas Chromatography/Mass Spectrometry for Volatile Organics: Capillary Column Technique, IBR approved March 7, 1990, for § 61.355(c)(2)(iv)(D).
No owner or operator shall build, erect, install, or use any article machine, equipment, process, or method, the use of which conceals an emission which would otherwise constitute a violation of an applicable standard. Such concealment includes, but is not limited to, the use of gaseous dilutants to achieve compliance with a visible emissions standard, and the piecemeal carrying out of an operation to avoid coverage by a standard that applies only to operations larger than a specified size.
The provisions of this subpart are applicable to the owner or operator of an active underground uranium mine which:
(a) Has mined, will mine or is designed to mine over 100,000 tons of ore during the life of the mine; or
(b) Has had or will have an annual ore production rate greater than 10,000 tons, unless it can be demonstrated to EPA that the mine will not exceed total ore production of 100,000 tons during the life of the mine.
As used in this subpart, all terms not defined here have the meaning given them in the Clean Air Act or subpart A of part 61. The following terms shall have the following specific meanings:
(a)
(b)
(c)
Emissions of radon-222 to the ambient air from an underground uranium mine shall not exceed those amounts that would cause any member of the public to receive in any year an effective dose equivalent of 10 mrem/y.
(a) Compliance with the emission standard in this subpart shall be determined and the effective dose equivalent calculated by the EPA computer code COMPLY-R. An underground uranium mine owner or operator shall calculate the source terms to be used for input into COMPLY-R by conducting testing in accordance with the procedures described in appendix B, Method 115, or
(b) Owners or operators may demonstrate compliance with the emission standard in this subpart through the use of computer models that are equivalent to COMPLY-R provided that the model has received prior approval from EPA headquarters. EPA may approve a model in whole or in part and may limit its use to specific circumstances.
(a) The mine owner or operator shall annually calculate and report the results of the compliance calculations in § 61.23 and the input parameters used in making the calculation. Such report shall cover the emissions of a calendar year and shall be sent to EPA by March 31 of the following year. Each report shall also include the following information:
(1) The name and location of the mine.
(2) The name of the person responsible for the operation of the facility and the name of the person preparing the report (if different).
(3) The results of the emissions testing conducted and the dose calculated using the procedures in § 61.23.
(4) A list of the stacks or vents or other points where radioactive materials are released to the atmosphere, including their location, diameter, flow rate, effluent temperature and release height.
(5) A description of the effluent controls that are used on each stack, vent, or other release point and the effluent controls used inside the mine, and an estimate of the efficiency of each control method or device.
(6) Distances from the points of release to the nearest residence, school, business or office and the nearest farms producing vegetables, milk, and meat.
(7) The values used for all other user-supplied input parameters for the computer models (e.g., meteorological data) and the source of these data.
(8) Each report shall be signed and dated by a corporate officer in charge of the facility and contain the following declaration immediately above the signature line: “I certify under penalty of law that I have personally examined and am familiar with the information submitted herein and based on my inquiry of those individuals immediately responsible for obtaining the information, I believe that the submitted information is true, accurate and complete. I am aware that there are significant
(b) lf the facility is not in compliance with the emission standard of § 61.22 in the calendar year covered by the report, the facility must then commence reporting to the Administrator on a monthly basis the information listed in paragraph (a) of this section for the preceding month. These reports will start the month immediately following the submittal of the annual report for the year in noncompliance and will be due 30 days following the end of each month. This increased level of reporting will continue until the Administrator has determined that the monthly reports are no longer necessary. In addition to all the information required in paragraph (a) of this section, monthly reports shall also include the following information:
(1) All controls or other changes in operation of the facility that will be or are being installed to bring the facility into compliance.
(2) If the facility is under a judicial or administrative enforcement decree the report will describe the facilities performance under the terms of the decree.
(c) The first report will cover the emissions of calendar year 1990.
The owner or operator of a mine must maintain records documenting the source of input parameters including the results of all measurements upon which they are based, the calculations and/or analytical methods used to derive values for input parameters, and the procedure used to determine compliance. In addition, the documentation should be sufficient to allow an independent auditor to verify the accuracy of the determination made concerning the facility's compliance with the standard. These records must be kept at the mine or by the owner or operator for at least five years and upon request be made available for inspection by the Administrator, or his authorized representative.
All facilities designated under this subpart are exempt from the reporting requirements of 40 CFR 61.10.
The provisions of this subpart are applicable to the following stationary sources:
(a) Extraction plans, ceramic plants, foundries, incinerators, and propellant plants which process beryllium ore, beryllium, beryllium oxide, beryllium alloys, or beryllium-containing waste.
(b) Machine shops which process beryllium, beryllium oxides, or any alloy when such alloy contains more than 5 percent beryllium by weight.
Terms used in this subpart are defined in the act, in subpart A of this part, or in this section as follows:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
(k)
(a) Emissions to the atmosphere from stationary sources subject to the provisions of this subpart shall not exceed 10 grams of beryllium over a 24-hour period, except as provided in paragraph (b) of this section.
(b) Rather than meet the requirement of paragraph (a) of this section, an owner or operator may request approval from the Administrator to meet an ambient concentration limit on beryllium in the vicinity of the stationary source of 0.01
(1) Approval of such requests may be granted by the Administrator provided that:
(i) At least 3 years of data is available which in the judgment of the Administrator demonstrates that the future ambient concentrations of beryllium in the vicinity of the stationary source will not exceed 0.01
(ii) The owner or operator requests such approval in writing within 30 days after the effective date of this standard.
(iii) The owner or operator submits a report to the Administrator within 45 days after the effective date of this standard which report includes the following information:
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(2) Within 60 days after receiving such report, the Administrator will notify the owner or operator in writing whether approval is granted or denied. Prior to denying approval to comply with the provisions of paragraph (b) of this section, the Administrator will consult with representatives of the statutory source for which the demonstration report was submitted.
(c) The burning of beryllium and/or beryllium-containing waste, except propellants, is prohibited except in incinerators, emissions from which must comply with the standard.
(a) Unless a waiver of emission testing is obtained under § 61.13, each owner or operator required to comply with §61.32(a) shall test emissions from the source according to Method 104 of appendix B to this part. Method 103 of
(1) Within 90 days of the effective date in the case of an existing source or a new source which has an initial startup date preceding the effective date; or
(2) Within 90 days of startup in the case of a new source which did not have an initial startup date preceding the effective date.
(b) The Administrator shall be notified at least 30 days prior to an emission test so that he may at his option observe the test.
(c) Samples shall be taken over such a period or periods as are necessary to accurately determine the maximum emissions which will occur in any 24-hour period. Where emissions depend upon the relative frequency of operation of different types of processes, operating hours, operating capacities, or other factors, the calculation of maximum 24-hour-period emissions will be based on that combination of factors which is likely to occur during the subject period and which result in the maximum emissions. No changes in the operation shall be made, which would potentially increase emissions above that determined by the most recent source test, until a new emission level has been estimated by calculation and the results reported to the Administrator.
(d) All samples shall be analyzed and beryllium emissions shall be determined within 30 days after the source test. All determinations shall be reported to the Administrator by a registered letter dispatched before the close of the next business day following such determination.
(e) Records of emission test results and other data needed to determine total emissions shall be retained at the source and made available, for inspection by the Administrator, for a minimum of 2 years.
(a) Stationary sources subject to § 61.32(b) shall locate air sampling sites in accordance with a plan approved by the Administrator. Such sites shall be located in such a manner as is calculated to detect maximum concentrations of beryllium in the ambient air.
(b) All monitoring sites shall be operated continuously except for a reasonable time allowance for instrument maintenance and calibration, for chang-ing filters, or for replacement of equipment needing major repair.
(c) Filters shall be analyzed and concentrations calculated within 30 days after filters are collected. Records of concentrations at all sampling sites and other data needed to determine such concentrations shall be retained at the source and made available, for inspection by the Administrator, for a minimum of 2 years.
(d) Concentrations measured at all sampling sites shall be reported to the Administrator every 30 days by a registered letter.
(e) The Administrator may at any time require changes in, or expansion of, the sampling network.
The provisions of this subpart are applicable to rocket motor test sites.
Terms used in this subpart are defined in the Act, in subpart A of this part, or in this section as follows:
(a)
(b)
(a) Emissions to the atmosphere from rocket-motor test sites shall not cause time-weighted atmospheric concentrations of beryllium to exceed 75 micro-gram minutes per cubic meter of air within the limits of 10 to 60 minutes, accumulated during any 2 consecutive weeks, in any area in which an effect adverse to public health could occur.
(b) If combustion products from the firing of beryllium propellant are collected in a closed tank, emissions from such tank shall not exceed 2 grams per hour and a maximum of 10 grams per day.
(a) Ambient air concentrations shall be measured during and after firing of a rocket motor or propellant disposal and in such a manner that the effect of these emissions can be compared with the standard. Such sampling techniques shall be approved by the Administrator.
(b) All samples shall be analyzed and results shall be calculated within 30 days after samples are taken and before any subsequent rocket motor firing or propellant disposal at the given site. All results shall be reported to the Administrator by a registered letter dispatched before the close of the next business day following determination of such results.
(c) Records of air sampling test results and other data needed to determine integrated intermittent concentrations shall be retained at the source and made available, for inspection by the Administrator, for a minimum of 2 years.
(d) The Administrator shall be notified at least 30 days prior to an air sampling test, so that he may at his option observe the test.
(a) Sources subject to § 61.42(b) shall be continuously sampled, during release of combustion products from the tank, according to Method 104 of appendix B to this part. Method 103 of appendix B to this part is approved by the Administrator as an alternative method for sources subject to § 61.42(b).
(b) All samples shall be analyzed, and beryllium emissions shall be determined within 30 days after samples are taken and before any subsequent rocket motor firing or propellant disposal at the given site. All determinations shall be reported to the Administrator by a registered letter dispatched before the close of the next business day following such determinations.
(c) Records of emission test results and other data needed to determine total emissions shall be retained at the source and made available, for inspection by the Administrator, for a minimum of 2 years.
(d) The Administrator shall be notified at least 30 days prior to an emission test, so that he may at his option observe the test.
The provisions of this subpart are applicable to those stationary sources which process mercury ore to recover mercury, use mercury chlor-alkali cells to produce chlorine gas and alkali metal hydroxide, and incinerate or dry wastewater treatment plant sludge.
Terms used in this subpart are defined in the act, in subpart A of this part, or in this section as follows:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
(k)
(l)
(m)
(a) Emissions to the atmosphere from mercury ore processing facilities and mercury cell chlor-alkali plants shall not exceed 2300 grams of mercury per 24-hour period.
(b) Emissions to the atmosphere from sludge incineration plants, sludge drying plants, or a combination of these that process wastewater treatment plant sludges shall not exceed 3200 grams of mercury per 24-hour period.
(a)
(i) Within 90 days of the effective date in the case of an existing source or a new source which has an initial start-up date preceding the effective date; or
(ii) Within 90 days of startup in the case of a new source which did not have an initial startup date preceding the effective date.
(2) The Administrator shall be notified at least 30 days prior to an emission test, so that he may at his option observe the test.
(3) Samples shall be taken over such a period or periods as are necessary to accurately determine the maximum emissions which will occur in a 24-hour period. No changes in the operation shall be made, which would potentially increase emissions above that determined by the most recent source test, until the new emission level has been estimated by calculation and the results reported to the Administrator.
(4) All samples shall be analyzed and mercury emissions shall be determined within 30 days after the stack test. Each determination shall be reported to the Administrator by a registered letter dispatched within 15 calendar days following the date such determination is completed.
(5) Records of emission test results and other data needed to determine total emissions shall be retained at the source and made available, for inspection by the Administrator, for a minimum of 2 years.
(b)
(i) Within 90 days of the effective date in the case of an existing source or a new source which has an initial startup date preceding the effective date; or
(ii) Within 90 days of startup in the case of a new source which did not have an initial startup date preceding the effective date.
(2) The Administrator shall be notified at least 30 days prior to an emission test, so that he may at his option observe the test.
(3) Samples shall be taken over such a period or periods as are necessary to accurately determine the maximum emissions which will occur in a 24-hour period. No changes in the operation shall be made, which would potentially increase emissions above that determined by the most recent source test, until the new emission has been estimated by calculation and the results reported to the Administrator.
(4) All samples shall be analyzed and mercury emissions shall be determined within 30 days after the stack test. Each determination shall be reported to the Administrator by a registered letter dispatched within 15 calendar days following the date such determination is completed.
(5) Records of emission test results and other data needed to determine total emissions shall be retained at the source and made available, for inspection by the Administrator, for a minimum of 2 years.
(c)
(2) Unless a waiver of emission testing is obtained under § 61.13, each owner or operator shall pass all cell room air in force gas streams through stacks suitable for testing and shall test emissions from the source according to Method 101 in appendix B to this part. The emission test shall be performed—
(i) Within 90 days of the effective date in the case of an existing source or a new source which has an initial startup date preceding the effective date; or
(ii) Within 90 days of startup in the case of a new source which did not have an initial startup date preceding the effective date.
(3) The Administrator shall be notified at least 30 days prior to an emission test, so that he may at his option observe the test.
(4) An owner or operator may carry out approved design, maintenance, and housekeeping practices. A list of approved practices is provided in appendix A of “Review of National Emission Standards for Mercury,” EPA-450/3-84-014a, December 1984. Copies are available from EPA's Central Docket Section, Docket item number A-84-41, III-B-1.
(d)
(2) Method 101A in appendix B to this part shall be used to test emissions as follows:
(i) The test shall be performed within 90 days of the effective date of these regulations in the case of an existing source or a new source which has an initial startup date preceding the effective date.
(ii) The test shall be performed within 90 days of startup in the case of a new source which did not have an initial startup date preceding the effective date.
(3) The Administrator shall be notified at least 30 days prior to an emission test, so that he may at his option observe the test.
(4) Samples shall be taken over such a period or periods as are necessary to determine accurately the maximum emissions which will occur in a 24-hour period. No changes shall be made in the operation which would potentially increase emissions above the level determined by the most recent stack test, until the new emission level has been estimated by calculation and the results reported to the Administrator.
(5) All samples shall be analyzed and mercury emissions shall be determined within 30 days after the stack test. Each determination shall be reported to the Administrator by a registered letter dispatched within 15 calendar days following the date such determination is completed.
(6) Records of emission test results and other data needed to determine total emissions shall be retained at the source and shall be made available, for inspection by the Administrator, for a minimum of 2 years.
(a) As an alternative means for demonstrating compliance with § 61.52(b), an owner or operator may use Method 105 of appendix B and the procedures specified in this section.
(1) A sludge test shall be conducted within 90 days of the effective date of these regulations in the case of an existing source or a new source which has an initial startup date preceding the effective date; or
(2) A sludge test shall be conducted within 90 days of startup in the case of a new source which did not have an initial startup date preceding the effective date.
(b) The Administrator shall be notified at least 30 days prior to a sludge sampling test, so that he may at his option observe the test.
(c) Sludge shall be sampled according to paragraph (c)(1) of this section, sludge charging rate for the plant shall be determined according to paragraph (c)(2) of this section, and the sludge analysis shall be performed according to paragraph (c)(3) of this section.
(1) The sludge shall be sampled according to Method 105—Determination of Mercury in Wastewater Treatment Plant Sewage Sludges. A total of three composite samples shall be obtained within an operating period of 24 hours. When the 24-hour operating period is not continuous, the total sampling period shall not exceed 72 hours after the first grab sample is obtained. Samples shall not be exposed to any condition that may result in mercury contamination or loss.
(2) The maximum 24-hour period sludge incineration or drying rate shall be determined by use of a flow rate measurement device that can measure the mass rate of sludge charged to the incinerator or dryer with an accuracy of
(3) The sampling, handling, preparation, and analysis of sludge samples shall be accomplished according to Method 105 in appendix B of this part.
(d) The mercury emissions shall be determined by use of the following equation.
(e) No changes in the operation of a plant shall be made after a sludge test has been conducted which would potentially increase emissions above the level determined by the most recent sludge test, until the new emission level has been estimated by calculation and the results reported to the Administrator.
(f) All sludge samples shall be analyzed for mercury content within 30 days after the sludge sample is collected. Each determination shall be reported to the Administrator by a registered letter dispatched within 15 calendar days following the date such determination is completed.
(g) Records of sludge sampling, charg-ing rate determination and other data needed to determine mercury content of wastewater treatment plant sludges shall be retained at the source and made available, for inspection by the Administrator, for a minimum of 2 years.
(a)
(b)
(2) During tests specified in paragraph (b)(1) of this section, the following control device parameters shall be monitored, except as provided in paragraph (c) of this section, and recorded manually or automatically at least once every 15 minutes:
(i) The exit gas temperature from uncontrolled streams;
(ii) The outlet temperature of the gas stream for the final (i.e., the farthest downstream) cooling system when no control devices other than coolers and demisters are used;
(iii) The outlet temperature of the gas stream from the final cooling system when the cooling system is followed by a molecular sieve or carbon adsorber;
(iv) Outlet concentration of available chlorine, pH, liquid flow rate, and inlet gas temperature of chlorinated brine scrubbers and hypochlorite scrubbers;
(v) The liquid flow rate and exit gas temperature for water scrubbers;
(vi) The inlet gas temperature of carbon adsorption systems; and
(vii) The temperature during the heating phase of the regeneration cycle for carbon adsorbers or molecular sieves.
(3) The recorded parameters in paragraphs (b)(2)(i) through (b)(2)(vi) of this section shall be averaged over the test period (a minimum of 6 hours) to provide an average number. The highest temperature reading that is measured in paragraph (b)(2)(vii) of this section is to be identified as the reference temperature for use in paragraph (b)(6)(ii) of this section.
(4)(i) Immediately following completion of the emission tests specified in paragraph (b)(1) of this section, the owner or operator of a mercury cell chlor-alkali plant shall monitor and record manually or automatically at least once per hour the same parameters specified in paragraphs (b)(2)(i) through (b)(2)(vi) of this section.
(ii) Immediately following completion of the emission tests specified in paragraph (b)(1) of this section, the owner or operator shall monitor and record manually or automatically, during each heating phase of the regeneration cycle, the temperature specified in paragraph (b)(2)(vii) of this section.
(5) Monitoring devices used in accordance with paragraphs (b)(2) and (b)(4) of this section shall be certified by their manufacturer to be accurate to within 10 percent, and shall be operated, maintained, and calibrated according to the manufacturer's instructions. Records of the certifications and calibrations shall be retained at the chlor-alkali plant and made available for inspection by the Administrator as follows: Certification, for as long as the device is used for this purpose; calibration for a minimum of 2 years.
(6)(i) When the hourly value of a parameter monitored in accordance with paragraph (b)(4)(i) of this section exceeds, or in the case of liquid flow rate and available chlorine falls below the value of that same parameter determined in paragraph (b)(2) of this section for 24 consecutive hours, the Administrator is to be notified within the next 10 days.
(ii) When the maximum hourly value of the temperature measured in accordance with paragraph (b)(4)(ii) of this section is below the reference temperature recorded according to paragraph
(7) Semiannual reports shall be submitted to the Administrator indicating the time and date on which the hourly value of each parameter monitored according to paragraphs (b)(4)(i) and (b)(4)(ii) of this section fell outside the value of that same parameter determined under paragraph (b)(3) of this section; and corrective action taken, and the time and date of the corrective action. Parameter excursions will be considered unacceptable operation and maintenance of the emission control system. In addition, while compliance with the emission limits is determined primarily by conducting a performance test according to the procedures in § 61.53(b), reports of parameter excursions may be used as evidence in judging the duration of a violation that is determined by a performance test.
(8) Semiannual reports required in paragraph (b)(7) of this section shall be submitted to the Administrator on September 15 and March 15 of each year. The first semiannual report is to be submitted following the first full 6 month reporting period. The semiannual report due on September 15 (March 15) shall include all excursions monitored through August 31 (February 28) of the same calendar year.
(c) As an alternative to the monitoring, recordkeeping, and reporting requirements in paragraphs (b)(2) through (8) of this section, an owner or operator may develop and submit for the Administrator's review and approval a plant-specific monitoring plan. To be approved, such a plan must ensure not only compliance with the emission limits of § 61.52(a) but also proper operation and maintenance of emissions control systems. Any site-specific monitoring plan submitted must, at a minimum, include the following:
(1) Identification of the critical parameter or parameters for the hydrogen stream and for the end-box ventilation stream that are to be monitored and an explanation of why the critical parameter(s) selected is the best indicator of proper control system performance and of mercury emission rates.
(2) Identification of the maximum or minimum value of each parameter (e.g., degrees temperature, concentration of mercury) that is not to be exceeded. The level(s) is to be directly correlated to the results of a performance test, conducted no more than 180 days prior to submittal of the plan, when the facility was in compliance with the emission limits of § 61.52(a).
(3) Designation of the frequency for recording the parameter measurements, with justification if the frequency is less than hourly. A longer recording frequency must be justified on the basis of the amount of time that could elapse during periods of process or control system upsets before the emission limits would be exceeded, and consideration is to be given to the time that would be necessary to repair the failure.
(4) Designation of the immediate actions to be taken in the event of an excursion beyond the value of the parameter established in 2.
(5) Provisions for reporting, semiannually, parameter excursions and the corrective actions taken, and provisions for reporting within 10 days any significant excursion.
(6) Identification of the accuracy of the monitoring device(s) or of the readings obtained.
(7) Recordkeeping requirements for certifications and calibrations.
(d)
(2) The results of monitoring shall be recorded, retained at the source, and made available for inspection by the Administrator for a minimum of 2 years.
(a) In delegating implementation and enforcement authority to a State under section 112(d) of the Act, the authorities contained in paragraph (b) of this section shall be retained by the Administrator and not transferred to a State.
(b) Authorities which will not be delegated to States: Sections 61.53(c)(4) and 61.55(d). The authorities not delegated to States listed are in addition to the authorities in the General Provisions, subpart A of 40 CFR part 61, that will not be delegated to States (§§ 61.04(b), 61.12(d)(1), and 61.13(h)(1)(ii)).
(a) This subpart applies to plants which produce:
(1) Ethylene dichloride by reaction of oxygen and hydrogen chloride with ethylene,
(2) Vinyl chloride by any process, and/or
(3) One or more polymers containing any fraction of polymerized vinyl chloride.
(b) This subpart does not apply to equipment used in research and development if the reactor used to polymerize the vinyl chloride processed in the equipment has a capacity of no more than 0.19 m
(c) Sections of this subpart other than §§ 61.61; 61.64 (a)(1), (b), (c), and (d); 61.67; 61.68; 61.69; 61.70; and 61.71 do not apply to equipment used in research and development if the reactor used to polymerize the vinyl chloride processed in the equipment has a capacity of greater than 0.19 m
Terms used in this subpart are defined in the Act, in subpart A of this part, or in this section as follows:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
(k)
(l)
(m)
(n)
(o)
(p)
(q)
(r)
(s)
(t)
(u)
(v)
(w)
(1) An instrument reading of 10,000 ppm or greater measured according to Method 21 (see appendix A of 40 CFR part 60);
(2) A sensor detection of failure of a seal system, failure of a barrier fluid system, or both;
(3) Detectable emissions as indicated by an instrument reading of greater than 500 ppm above background for equipment designated for no detectable emissions measured according to Test Method 21 (see appendix A of 40 CFR part 60); and
(4) In the case of pump seals regulated under § 61.242-2, indications of liquid dripping constituting a leak under § 61.242-2.
(x)
(y)
(z)
(a)
(b)
An owner or operator of a vinyl chloride plant shall comply with the requirements of this section and § 61.65.
(a) Vinyl chloride formation and purification: The concentration of vinyl chloride in each exhaust gas stream from any equipment used in vinyl chloride formation and/or purification is not to exceed 10 ppm (average for 3-hour period), except as provided in § 61.65(a). This requirement does not preclude combining of exhaust gas streams provided the combined steam is ducted through a control system from which the concentration of vinyl chloride in the exhaust gases does not exceed 10 ppm, or equivalent as provided in § 61.66. This requirement does not apply to equipment that has been opened, is out of operation, and met the requirement in § 61.65(b)(6)(i) before being opened.
An owner or operator of a polyvinyl chloride plant shall comply with the requirements of this section and § 61.65.
(a)
(1) The concentration of vinyl chloride in each exhaust gas stream from each reactor is not to exceed 10 ppm (average for 3-hour period), except as provided in paragraph (a)(2) of this section and § 61.65(a).
(2) The reactor opening loss from each reactor is not to exceed 0.02 g vinyl chloride/kg (0.00002 lb vinyl chloride/lb) of polyvinyl chloride product, except as provided in paragraph (f)(1) of this section, with the product determined on a dry solids basis. This requirement does not apply to pre-poly-mer-iza-tion reactors in the bulk process. This requirement does apply to post-poly-mer-iza-tion reactors in the bulk process, where the product means the gross product of pre-poly-mer-iza-tion and post-poly-mer-iza-tion.
(3) Manual vent valve discharge. Except for an emergency manual vent valve discharge, there is to be no discharge to the atmosphere from any manual vent valve on a polyvinyl chloride reactor in vinyl chloride service. An emergency manual vent valve discharge means a discharge to the atmosphere which could not have been avoided by taking measures to prevent the discharge. Within 10 days of any discharge to the atmosphere from any
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(1) In polyvinyl chloride plants using stripping technology to control vinyl chloride emissions, the weighted average residual vinyl chloride concentration in all grades of polyvinyl chloride resin processed through the stripping operation on each calendar day, measured immediately after the stripping operation is completed, may not exceed:
(i) 2000 ppm for polyvinyl chloride dispersion resins, excluding latex resins;
(ii) 400 ppm for all other polyvinyl chloride resins, including latex resins, averaged separately for each type of resin; or
(2) In polyvinyl chloride plants controlling vinyl chloride emissions with technology other than stripping or in addition to stripping, emissions of vinyl chloride to the atmosphere may not exceed:
(i) 2 g/kg (0.002 lb/lb) product from the stripper(s) [or reactor(s) if the plant has no stripper(s)] for dispersion polyvinyl chloride resins, excluding latex resins, with the product determined on a dry solids basis;
(ii) 0.4 g/kg (0.0004 lb/lb) product from the strippers [or reactor(s) if the plant has no stripper(s)] for all other polyvinyl chloride resins, including latex resins, with the product determined on a dry solids basis.
(3) The provisions of this paragraph apply at all times including when off-specification or other types of resins are made.
(f)
(1) The weighted average emissions of vinyl chloride from reactor opening loss and all sources following the reactor used as a stripper from all grades of polyvinyl chloride resin stripped in the reactor on each calendar day may not exceed:
(i) 2.02 g/kg (0.00202 lb/lb) of polyvinyl chloride product for dispersion polyvinyl chloride resins, excluding latex resins, with the product determined on a dry solids basis.
(ii) 0.42 g/kg (0.00042 lb/lb) of polyvinyl chloride product for all other polyvinyl chloride resins, including latex resins, with the product determined on a dry solids basis.
An owner or operator of an ethylene dichloride, vinyl chloride, and/or polyvinyl chloride plant shall comply with the requirements of this section.
(a)
(b)
(i) After each loading or unloading operation and before opening a loading or unloading line to the atmosphere, the quantity of vinyl chloride in all parts of each loading or unloading line that are to be opened to the atmosphere is to be reduced so that the parts combined contain no greater than 0.0038 m
(ii) Any vinyl chloride removed from a loading or unloading line in accordance with paragraph (b)(1)(i) of this section is to be ducted through a control system from which the concentration of vinyl chloride in the exhaust gases does not exceed 10 ppm (average for 3-hour period), or equivalent as provided in § 61.66.
(2)
(3) Leakage from pump, compressor, and agitator seals:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(i) Before opening any equipment for any reason, the quantity of vinyl chloride which is contained therein is to be reduced to an amount which occupies a volume of no more than 2.0 percent of the equipment's containment volume or 0.0950 cubic meters (25 gallons), whichever is larger, at standard temperature and pressure.
(ii) Any vinyl chloride removed from the equipment in accordance with paragraph (b)(6)(i) of this section is to be ducted through a control system from which the concentration of vinyl chloride in the exhaust gases does not exceed 10 ppm (average for 3-hour period); or equivalent as provided in § 61.66.
(7)
(8)
(i) A reliable and accurate vinyl chloride monitoring system shall be operated for detection of major leaks and identification of the general area of the plant where a leak is located. A vinyl chloride monitoring system means a device which obtains air samples from one or more points on a continuous sequential basis and analyzes the samples with gas chromatography or, if the owner or operator assumes that all hydrocarbons measured are vinyl chloride, with infrared spectrophotometry, flame ion detection, or an equivalent or alternative method. The vinyl chloride monitoring system shall be operated according to a program developed by the plant owner or operator. The owner or operator shall submit a description of the program to the Administrator within 45 days of the effective date of these regulations, unless a waiver of compliance is granted under § 61.11, or the program has been approved and the Administrator does not request a review of the program. Approval of a program will be granted by the Administrator provided he finds:
(A) The location and number of points to be monitored and the frequency of monitoring provided for in the program are acceptable when they are compared with the number of pieces of equipment in vinyl chloride service and size and physical layout of the plant.
(B) It contains a definition of leak which is acceptable when compared with the background concentrations of vinyl chloride in the areas of the plant to be monitored by the vinyl chloride monitoring system. Measurements of background concentrations of vinyl chloride in the areas of the plant to be monitored by the vinyl chloride monitoring system are to be included with the description of the program. The definition of leak for a given plant may vary among the different areas within the plant and is also to change over time as background concentrations in the plant are reduced.
(C) It contains an acceptable plan of action to be taken when a leak is detected.
(D) It provides for an acceptable calibration and maintenance schedule for the vinyl chloride monitoring system and portable hydrocarbon detector. For the vinyl chloride monitoring system, a daily span check is to be conducted with a concentration of vinyl chloride equal to the concentration defined as a leak according to paragraph (b)(8)(i)(B) of this section. The calibration is to be done with either:
(
(
(ii) For each process unit subject to this subpart, a formal leak detection and repair program shall be implemented consistent with subpart V of this part, except as provided in paragraph (b)(8)(iii) of this section. This program is to be implemented within 90 days of the effective date of these regulations, unless a waiver of compliance is granted under § 61.11. Except as provided in paragraph (b)(8)(ii)(E) of this section, an owner or operator shall be exempt from § 61.242-1(d), § 61.242-7 (a), (b), and (c), § 61.246, and § 61.247 of subpart V of this part for any process unit in which the percentage of leaking
(A) A performance test as specified in paragraph (b)(8)(ii)(B) of this section shall be conducted initially within 90 days of the effective date of these regulations, annually, and at times requested by the Administrator.
(B) For each performance test, a minimum of 200 or 90 percent, whichever is less, of the total valves in VOC service (as defined in § 60.481 of subpart VV of part 60) within the process unit shall be randomly selected and monitored within 1 week by the methods specified in § 61.245(b) of this part. If an instrument reading of 10,000 ppm or greater is measured, a leak is detected. The leak percentage shall be determined by dividing the number of valves in VOC service for which leaks are detected by the number of tested valves in VOC service.
(C) If a leak is detected, it shall be repaired in accordance with § 61.242-7 (d) and (e) of subpart V of this part.
(D) The results of the performance test shall be submitted in writing to the Administrator in the first quarterly report following the performance test as part of the reporting requirements of § 61.70.
(E) Any process unit in which the percentage of leaking valves is found to be greater than 2.0 percent according to the performance test prescribed in paragraph (b)(8)(ii)(B) of this section must comply with all provisions of subpart V of this part within 90 days.
(iii) Open-ended valves or lines located on multiple service process lines which operate in vinyl chloride service less than 10 percent of the time are exempt from the requirements of § 61.242-6 of subpart V, provided the open-ended valves or lines are addressed in the monitoring system required by paragraph (b)(8)(i) of this section. The Administrator may apply this exemption to other existing open-ended valves or lines that are demonstrated to require significant retrofit cost to comply with the requirements of § 61.242-6 of subpart V.
(9)
(i) The concentration of vinyl chloride in each inprocess wastewater stream containing greater than 10 ppm vinyl chloride measured immediately as it leaves a piece of equipment and before being mixed with any other inprocess wastewater stream is to be reduced to no more than 10 ppm by weight before being mixed with any other inprocess wastewater stream which contains less than 10 ppm vinyl chloride; before being exposed to the atmosphere; before being discharged to a wastewater treatment process; or before being discharged untreated as a wastewater. This paragraph does apply to water which is used to displace vinyl chloride from equipment before it is opened to the atmosphere in accordance with § 61.64(a)(2) or paragraph (b)(6) of this section, but does not apply to water which is used to wash out equipment after the equipment has already been opened to the atmosphere in accordance with § 61.64(a)(2) or paragraph (b)(6) of this section.
(ii) Any vinyl chloride removed from the inprocess wastewater in accordance with paragraph (b)(9)(i) of this section is to be ducted through a control system from which the concentration of vinyl chloride in the exhaust gases does not exceed 10 ppm (average for 3-hour period); or equivalent as provided in § 61.66.
(c) The requirements in paragraphs (b)(1), (b)(2), (b)(5), (b)(6), (b)(7) and (b)(8) of this section are to be incorporated into a standard operating procedure, and made available upon request for inspection by the Administrator. The standard operating procedure is to include provisions for measuring the vinyl chloride in equipment 4.75 m
(d) A RVD that is ducted to a control device that is continually operating while emissions from the release are present at the device is subject to the following requirements:
(1) A discharge from a control device other than a flare shall not exceed 10
(2) For a discharge routed to a flare, the flare shall comply with the requirements of § 60.18.
(i) Flare operations shall be monitored in accordance with the requirements of §§ 60.18(d) and 60.18(f)(2). For the purposes of § 60.18(d), the volume and component concentration of each relief valve discharge shall be estimated and calculation shall be made to verify ongoing compliance with the design and operating requirements of §§ 60.18 (c)(3) through (c)(6). If more than one relief valve is discharged simultaneously to a single flare, these calculations shall account for the cumulative effect of all such relief valve discharges. These calculations shall be made and reported quarterly for all discharges within the quarter. Failure to comply with any of the requirements of this paragraph will be a violation of § 61.65(d)(2). Monitoring for the presence of a flare pilot flame shall be conducted in accordance with § 60.18(f)(2). If the results of this monitoring or any other information shows that the pilot flame is not present 100 percent of the time during which a relief valve discharge is routed to the flare, the relief valve discharge is subject to the provisions of § 61.65(a).
(ii) A report describing the flare design shall be provided to the Administrator not later than 90 days after the adoption of this provision or within 30 days of the installation of a flare system for control of relief valve discharge whichever is later. The flare design report shall include calculations based upon expected relief valve discharge component concentrations and net heating values (for PVC this calculation shall be based on values expected if a release occurred at the instant the polymerization starts); and estimated maximum exit velocities based upon the design throat capacity of the gas in the relief valve.
Upon written application from an owner or operator, the Administrator may approve use of equipment or procedures which have been demonstrated to his satisfaction to be equivalent in terms of reducing vinyl chloride emissions to the atmosphere to those prescribed for compliance with a specific paragraph of this subpart.
(a) Unless a waiver of emission testing is obtained under § 61.13, the owner or operator of a source to which this subpart applies shall test emissions from the source,
(1) Within 90 days of the effective date in the case of an existing source or a new source which has an initial startup date preceding the effective date, or
(2) Within 90 days of startup in the case of a new source, initial startup of which occurs after the effective date.
(b) The owner or operator shall provide the Administrator at least 30 days prior notice of an emission test to afford the Administrator the opportunity to have an observer present during the test.
(c) Any emission test is to be conducted while the equipment being tested is operating at the maximum production rate at which the equipment will be operated and under other relevant conditions as may be specified by the Administrator based on representative performance of the source.
(d) [Reserved]
(e) When at all possible, each sample is to be analyzed within 24 hours, but in no case in excess of 72 hours of sample collection. Vinyl chloride emissions are to be determined within 30 days after the emission test. The owner or operator shall report the determinations to the Administrator by a registered letter dispatched before the close of the next business day following the determination.
(f) The owner or operator shall retain at the plant and make available, upon request, for inspection by the Administrator, for a minimum of 3 years, records of emission test results and
(g) Unless otherwise specified, the owner or operator shall use test Test Methods in appendix B to this part for each test as required by paragraphs (g)(1), (g)(2), (g)(3), (g)(4), and (g)(5) of this section, unless an alternative method has been approved by the Administrator. If the Administrator finds reasonable grounds to dispute the results obtained by an alternative method, he may require the use of a reference method. If the results of the reference and alternative methods do not agree, the results obtained by the reference method prevail, and the Administrator may notify the owner or operator that approval of the method previously considered to be alternative is withdrawn. Whenever Test Method 107 is specified, and the conditions in Section 1.1, “Applicability” of Method 107A are met, Method 107A may be used.
(1) Test Method 106 is to be used to determine the vinyl chloride emissions from any source for which an emission limit is prescribed in § 61.62 (a) or (b) § 61.63(a), or § 61.64 (a)(1), (b), (c), or (d), or from any control system to which reactor emissions are required to be ducted in § 61.64(a)(2) or to which fugitive emissions are required to be ducted is § 61.65 (b)(1)(ii), (b)(2), (b)(5), (b)(6)(ii), or (b)(9)(ii).
(i) For each run, one sample is to be collected. The sampling site is to be at least two stack or duct diameters downstream and one half diameter upstream from any flow disturbance such as a bend, expansion, contraction, or visible flame. For a rectangular cross section an equivalent diameter is to be determined from the following equation:
(ii) Each emission test is to consist of three runs. For the purpose of determining emissions, the average of results of all runs is to apply. The average is to be computed on a time weighted basis.
(iii) For gas streams containing more than 10 percent oxygen the concentration of vinyl chloride as determined by Test Method 106 is to be corrected to 10 percent oxygen (dry basis) for determination of emissions by using the following equation:
(iv) For those emission sources where the emission limit is prescribed in terms of mass rather than concentration, mass emissions in kg/100 kg product are to be determined by using the following equation:
(2) Test Method 107 or Method 601 (incorporated by reference as specified in § 61.18) is to be used to determine the concentration of vinyl chloride in each inprocess wastewater stream for which an emission limit is prescribed in § 61.65(b)(9)(i).
(3) When a stripping operation is used to attain the emission limits in § 61.64
(i) The number of strippers (or reactors used as strippers) and samples and the types and grades of resin to be sampled are to be determined by the Administrator for each individual plant at the time of the test based on the plant's operation.
(ii) Each sample is to be taken immediately following the stripping operation.
(iii) The corresponding quantity of material processed by each stripper (or reactor used as a stripper) is to be determined on a dry solids basis and by a method submitted to and approved by the Administrator.
(iv) At the prior request of the Administrator, the owner or operator shall provide duplicates of the samples required in paragraph (g)(3)(i) of this section.
(4) Where control technology other than or in addition to a stripping operation is used to attain the emission limit in § 61.64(e), emissions are to be determined as follows:
(i) Test Method 106 is to be used to determine atmospheric emissions from all of the process equipment simultaneously. The requirements of paragraph (g)(1) of this section are to be met.
(ii) Test Method 107 is to be used to determine the concentration of vinyl chloride in each inprocess wastewater stream subject to the emission limit prescribed in § 61.64(e). The mass of vinyl chloride in kg/100 kg product in each inprocess wastewater stream is to be determined by using the following equation:>
(5) The reactor opening loss for which an emission limit is prescribed in § 61.64(a)(2) is to be determined. The number of reactors for which the determination is to be made is to be specified by the Administrator for each individual plant at the time of the determination based on the plant's operation.
(i) Except as provided in paragraph (g)(5)(ii) of this section, the reactor opening loss is to be determined using the following equation:
(A) If Method 106 is used to determine the concentration of vinyl chloride (Cb), the sample is to be withdrawn at a constant rate with a probe of sufficient length to reach the vessel bottom from the manhole. Samples are to be taken for 5 minutes within 6 inches of the vessel bottom, 5 minutes near the vessel center, and 5 minutes near the vessel top.
(B) If a portable hydrocarbon detector is used to determine the concentration of vinyl chloride (Cb), a probe of sufficient length to reach the vessel bottom from the manhole is to be used to make the measurements. One measurement will be made within 6 inches of the vessel bottom, one near the vessel center and one near the vessel top. Measurements are to be made at each location until the reading is stabilized. All hydrocarbons measured are to be assumed to be vinyl chloride.
(C) The production rate of polyvinyl chloride (Z) is to be determined by a method submitted to and approved by the Administrator.
(ii) A calculation based on the number of evacuations, the vacuum involved, and the volume of gas in the reactor is hereby approved by the Administrator as an alternative method for determining reactor opening loss for postpolymerization reactors in the manufacture of bulk resins. Calculation methods based on techniques other than repeated evacuation of the reactor may be approved by the Administrator for determining reactor opening loss for postpolymerization reactors in the manufacture of bulk resins.
(6) For a reactor that is used as a stripper, the emissions of vinyl chloride from reactor opening loss and all sources following the reactor used as a stripper for which an emission limit is prescribed in § 61.64(f) are to be determined. The number of reactors for which the determination is to be made is to be specified by the Administrator for each individual plant at the time of the determination based on the plant's operation.
(i) For each batch stripped in the reactor, the following measurements are to be made:
(A) The concentration (ppm) of vinyl chloride in resin after stripping, measured according to paragraph (g)(3) of this section;
(B) The reactor vacuum (mm Hg) at end of strip from plant instrument; and
(C) The reactor temperature (
(ii) For each batch stripped in the reactor, the following information is to be determined:
(A) The vapor pressure (mm Hg) of water in the reactor at end of strip from the following table:
(B) The partial pressure (mm Hg) of vinyl chloride in reactor at end of strip from the following equation:
(C) The reactor vapor space volume (m
(iii) For each batch stripped in the reactor, the combined reactor opening loss and emissions from all sources following the reactor used as a stripper is to be determined using the following equation:
(h)(1) Each piece of equipment within a process unit that can reasonably contain equipment in vinyl chloride service is presumed to be in vinyl chloride service unless an owner or operator demonstrates that the piece of equipment is not in vinyl chloride service. For a piece of equipment to be considered not in vinyl chloride service, it must be determined that the percent vinyl chloride content can be reasonably expected not to exceed 10 percent by weight for liquid streams or contained liquid volumes and 10 percent by volume for gas streams or contained gas volumes, which also includes gas volumes above liquid streams or contained liquid volumes. For purposes of determining the percent vinyl chloride content of the process fluid that is contained in or contacts equipment, procedures that conform to the methods described in ASTM Method D-2267 (incorporated by reference as specified in § 61.18) shall be used.
(2)(i) An owner or operator may use engineering judgment rather than the procedures in paragraph (h)(1) of this section to demonstrate that the percent vinyl chloride content does not exceed 10 percent by weight for liquid streams and 10 percent by volume for gas streams, provided that the engineering judgment demonstrates that the vinyl chloride content clearly does not exceed 10 percent. When an owner or operator and the Administrator do not agree on whether a piece of equipment is not in vinyl chloride service, however, the procedures in paragraph (h)(1) of this section shall be used to resolve the disagreement.
(ii) If an owner or operator determines that a piece of equipment is in vinyl chloride service, the determination can be revised only after following the procedures in paragraph (h)(1) of this section.
(3) Samples used in determining the percent vinyl chloride content shall be representative of the process fluid that is contained in or contacts the equipment.
(a) A vinyl chloride monitoring system is to be used to monitor on a continuous basis the emissions from the sources for which emission limits are prescribed in §§ 61.62 (a) and (b), 61.63(a), and 61.64 (a)(1), (b), (c), and (d), and for any control system to which reactor emissions are required to be ducted in § 61.64(a)(2) or to which fugitive emissions are required to be ducted in § 61.65
(b) The vinyl chloride monitoring system(s) used to meet the requirement in paragraph (a) of this section is to be a device which obtains representative samples from one or more applicable emission points on a continuous sequential basis and analyzes the samples with gas chromatography or, if the owner or operator assumes that all hydrocarbons measured are vinyl chloride, with infrared spectrophotometry, flame ion detection, or an alternative method. The vinyl chloride monitoring system used to meet the requirements in § 61.65(b)(8)(i) may be used to meet the requirements of this section.
(c) A daily span check is to be conducted for each vinyl chloride monitoring system used. For all of the emission sources listed in paragraph (a) of this section, except the one for which an emission limit is prescribed in § 61.62(b), the daily span check is to be conducted with a concentration of vinyl chloride equal to 10 ppm. For the emission source for which an emission limit is prescribed in § 61.62(b), the daily span check is to be conducted with a concentration of vinyl chloride which is determined to be equivalent to the emission limit for that source based on the emission test required by § 61.67. The calibration is to be done with either:
(1) A calibration gas mixture prepared from the gases specified in sections 5.2.1 and 5.2.2 of Test Method 106 and in accordance with section 7.1 of Test Method 106, or
(2) A calibration gas cylinder standard containing the appropriate concentration of vinyl chloride. The gas composition of the calibration gas cylinder standard is to have been certified by the manufacturer. The manufacturer must have recommended a maximum shelf life for each cylinder so that the concentration does not change greater than
(d) When exhaust gas(es), having emission limits that are subject to the requirement of paragraph (a) of this section, are emitted to the atmosphere without passing through the control system and required vinyl chloride monitoring system, the vinyl chloride content of the emission shall be calculated (in units of each applicable emission limit) by best practical engineering judgment based on the discharge duration and known VC concentrations in the affected equipment as determined in accordance with § 61.67(h) or other acceptable method.
(e) For each 3-hour period, the vinyl chloride content of emissions subject to the requirements of paragraphs (a) and (d) of this section shall be averaged (weighted according to the proportion of time that emissions were continuously monitored and that emissions bypassed the continuous monitor) for purposes of reporting excess emissions under § 61.70(c)(1).
(f) For each vinyl chloride emission to the atmosphere determined in accordance with paragraph (e) of this section to be in excess of the applicable emission limits, the owner or operator shall record the identity of the source(s), the date, time, and duration of the excess emission, the cause of the excess emission, and the approximate total vinyl chloride loss during the excess emission, and the method used for determining the vinyl chloride loss. This information shall be retained and made available for inspection by the Administrator as required by § 61.71(a).
(a) An owner or operator of any source to which this subpart applies shall submit a statement in writing notifying the Administrator that the
(b)(1) In the case of an existing source or a new source which has an initial startup date preceding the effective date, the statement is to be submitted within 90 days of the effective date, unless a waiver of compliance is granted under § 61.11, along with the information required under § 61.10. If a waiver of compliance is granted, the statement is to be submitted on a date scheduled by the Administrator.
(2) In the case of a new source which did not have an initial startup date preceding the effective date, the statement is to be submitted within 90 days of the initial startup date.
(c) The statement is to contain the following information:
(1) A list of the equipment installed for compliance,
(2) A description of the physical and functional characteristics of each piece of equipment,
(3) A description of the methods which have been incorporated into the standard operating procedures for measuring or calculating the emissions for which emission limits are prescribed in § 61.65 (b)(1)(i) and (b)(6)(i),
(4) A statement that each piece of equipment is installed and that each piece of equipment and each procedure is being used.
(a)(1) The owner or operator of any source to which this subpart applies shall submit to the Administrator on March 15, June 15, September 15, and December 15 of each year a report in writing containing the information required by this section. The first report is to be submitted following the first full 3-month reporting period after the initial report is submitted.
(2) In the case of an existing source, the approved reporting schedule shall be used. In addition, quarterly reports shall be submitted exactly 3 months following the current reporting dates.
(b)(1) In the case of an existing source or a new source which has an initial startup date preceding the effective date, the first report is to be submitted within 180 days of the effective date, unless a waiver of compliance is granted under § 61.11. If a waiver of compliance is granted, the first report is to be submitted on a date scheduled by the Administrator.
(2) In the case of a new source which did not have an initial startup date preceding the effective date, the first report is to be submitted within 180 days of the initial startup date.
(c) Unless otherwise specified, the owner or operator shall use the Test Methods in appendix B to this part to conduct emission tests as required by paragraphs (c)(2) and (c)(3) of this section, unless an alternative method has been approved by the Administrator. If the Administrator finds reasonable grounds to dispute the results obtained by an alternative method, he may require the use of a reference method. If the results of the reference and alternative methods do not agree, the results obtained by the reference method prevail, and the Administrator may notify the owner or operator that approval of the method previously considered to be alternative is withdrawn.
(1) The owner or operator shall include in the report a record of the vinyl chloride content of emissions for each 3-hour period during which average emissions are in excess of the emission limits in § 61.62 (a) or (b), § 61.63 (a), or § 61.64 (a)(1), (b), (c), or (d), or during which average emissions are in excess of the emission limits specified for any control system to which reactor emissions are required to be ducted in § 61.64 (a)(2) or to which fugitive emissions are required to be ducted in § 61.65 (b)(i)(ii), (b)(2), (b)(5), (b)(6)(ii), or (b)(9)(ii).The number of 3-hour periods for which average emissions were determined during the reporting period shall be reported. If emissions in excess of the emission limits are not detected, the report shall contain a statement that no excess emissions have been detected. The emissions are to be determined in accordance with § 61.68(e).
(2) In polyvinyl chloride plants for which a stripping operation is used to attain the emission level prescribed in § 61.64(e), the owner or operator shall include in the report a record of the vinyl chloride content in the polyvinyl chloride resin.
(i) If batch stripping is used, one representative sample of polyvinyl chloride resin is to be taken from each batch of each grade of resin immediately following the completion of the stripping operation, and identified by resin type and grade and the date and time the batch is completed. The corresponding quantity of material processed in each stripper batch is to be recorded and identified by resin type and grade and the date and time the batch is completed.
(ii) If continuous stripping is used, one representative sample of polyvinyl chloride resin is to be taken for each grade of resin processed or at intervals of 8 hours for each grade of resin which is being processed, whichever is more frequent. The sample is to be taken as the resin flows out of the stripper and identified by resin type and grade and the date and time the sample was taken. The corresponding quantity of material processed by each stripper over the time period represented by the sample during the 8-hour period, is to be recorded and identified by resin type and grade and the date and time it represents.
(iii) The vinyl chloride content in each sample is to be determined by Test Method 107 as prescribed in § 61.67(g)(3).
(iv) [Reserved]
(v) The report to the Administrator by the owner or operator is to include a record of any 24-hour average resin vinyl chloride concentration, as determined in this paragraph, in excess of the limits prescribed in § 61.64(e). The vinyl chloride content found in each sample required by paragraphs (c)(2)(i) and (c)(2)(ii) of this section shall be averaged separately for each type of resin, over each calendar day and weighted according to the quantity of each grade of resin processed by the stripper(s) that calendar day, according to the following equation:
The number of 24-hour average concentrations for each resin type determined during the reporting period shall be reported. If no 24-hour average resin vinyl chloride concentrations in excess of the limits prescribed in § 61.64(e) are measured, the report shall state that no excess resin vinyl chloride concentrations were measured.
(vi) The owner or operator shall retain at the source and make available for inspection by the Administrator for a minimum of 3 years records of all data needed to furnish the information required by paragraph (c)(2)(v) of this section. The records are to contain the following information:
(A) The vinyl chloride content found in all the samples required in paragraphs (c)(2)(i) and (c)(2)(ii) of this section, identified by the resin type and grade and the time and date of the sample, and
(B) The corresponding quantity of polyvinyl chloride resin processed by the stripper(s), identified by the resin type and grade and the time and date it represents.
(3) The owner or operator shall include in the report a record of any emissions from each reactor opening in excess of the emission limits prescribed in § 61.64(a)(2). Emissions are to be determined in accordance with § 61.67(g)(5), except that emissions for
(4) In polyvinyl chloride plants for which stripping in the reactor is used to attain the emission level prescribed in § 61.64(f), the owner or operator shall include in the report a record of the vinyl chloride emissions from reactor opening loss and all sources following the reactor used as a stripper.
(i) One representative sample of polyvinyl chloride resin is to be taken from each batch of each grade of resin immediately following the completion of the stripping operation, and identified by resin type and grade and the date and time the batch is completed. The corresponding quantity of material processed in each stripper batch is to be recorded and identified by resin type and grade and the date and time the batch is completed.
(ii) The vinyl chloride content in each sample is to be determined by Test Method 107 as prescribed in § 61.67(g)(3).
(iii) The combined emissions from reactor opening loss and all sources following the reactor used as a stripper are to be determined for each batch stripped in a reactor according to the procedure prescribed in § 61.67(g)(6).
(iv) The report to the Administrator by the owner or operator is to include a record of any 24-hour average combined reactor opening loss and emissions from all sources following the reactor used as a stripper as determined in this paragraph, in excess of the limits prescribed in § 61.64(f). The combined reactor opening loss and emissions from all sources following the reactor used as a stripper associated with each batch are to be averaged separately for each type of resin, over each calendar day and weighted according to the quantity of each grade of resin stripped in reactors that calendar day as follows:
For each type of resin (suspension, dispersion, latex, bulk, other), the following calculation is to be performed:
The number of 24-hour average emissions determined during the reporting period shall be reported. If no 24-hour average combined reactor opening loss and emissions from all sources following the reactor used a stripper in excess of the limits prescribed in § 61.64(f) are determined, the report shall state that no excess vinyl chloride emissions were determined.
(a) The owner or operator of any source to which this subpart applies shall retain the following information at the source and make it available for inspection to the Administrator for a minimum of 3 years:
(1) A record of the leaks detected by the vinyl chloride monitoring system, as required by § 61.65(b)(8), including the concentrations of vinyl chloride measured, analyzed, and recorded by the vinyl chloride detector, the location of each measurement and the date and approximate time of each measurement.
(2) A record of the leaks detected during routine monitoring with the portable hydrocarbon detector and the action taken to repair the leaks, as required by § 61.65(b)(8), including a brief statement explaining the location and cause of each leak detected with the portable hydrocarbon detector, the date and time of the leak, and any action taken to eliminate that leak.
(3) A record of emissions measured in accordance with § 61.68.
(4) A daily operating record for each polyvinyl chloride reactor, including pressures and temperatures.
The provisions of this subpart apply to operations at any facility owned or operated by the Department of Energy that emits any radionuclide other than radon-222 and radon-220 into the air, except that this subpart does not apply to disposal at facilities subject to 40 CFR part 191, subpart B or 40 CFR part 192.
As used in this subpart, all terms not defined here have the meaning given them in the Clean Air Act or 40 CFR part 61, subpart A. The following terms shall have the following specific meanings:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
Emissions of radionuclides to the ambient air from Department of Energy facilities shall not exceed those amounts that would cause any member of the public to receive in any year an effective dose equivalent of 10 mrem/yr.
(a) To determine compliance with the standard, radionuclide emissions shall be determined and effective dose equivalent values to members of the public calculated using EPA approved sampling procedures, computer models CAP-88 or AIRDOS-PC, or other procedures for which EPA has granted prior approval. DOE facilities for which the maximally exposed individual lives within 3 kilometers of all sources of emissions in the facility, may use EPA's COMPLY model and associated
(b) Radionuclide emission rates from point sources (stacks or vents) shall be measured in accordance with the following requirements or other procedures for which EPA has granted prior approval:
(1) Effluent flow rate measurements shall be made using the following methods:
(i) Reference Method 2 of appendix A to part 60 shall be used to determine velocity and volumetric flow rates for stacks and large vents.
(ii) Reference Method 2A of appendix A to part 60 shall be used to measure flow rates through pipes and small vents.
(iii) The frequency of the flow rate measurements shall depend upon the variability of the effluent flow rate. For variable flow rates, continuous or frequent flow rate measurements shall be made. For relatively constant flow rates only periodic measurements are necessary.
(2) Radionuclides shall be directly monitored or extracted, collected and measured using the following methods:
(i) Reference Method 1 of appendix A part 60 shall be used to select monitoring or sampling sites.
(ii) The effluent stream shall be directly monitored continuously with an in-line detector or representative samples of the effluent stream shall be withdrawn continuously from the sampling site following the guidance presented in ANSIN13.1-1969 “Guide to Sampling Airborne Radioactive Materials in Nuclear Facilities” (including the guidance presented in appendix A of ANSIN13.1) (incorporated by reference—see § 61.18). The requirements for continuous sampling are applicable to batch processes when the unit is in operation. Periodic sampling (grab samples) may be used only with EPA's prior approval. Such approval may be granted in cases where continuous sampling is not practical and radionuclide emission rates are relatively constant. In such cases, grab samples shall be collected with sufficient frequency so as to provide a representative sample of the emissions.
(iii) Radionuclides shall be collected and measured using procedures based on the principles of measurement described in appendix B, Method 114. Use of methods based on principles of measurement different from those described in appendix B, Method 114 must have prior approval from the Administrator. EPA reserves the right to approve measurement procedures.
(iv) A quality assurance program shall be conducted that meets the performance requirements described in appendix B, Method 114.
(3) When it is impractical to measure the effluent flow rate at an existing source in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (b)(1) of this section or to monitor or sample an effluent stream at an existing source in accordance with the site selection and sample extraction requirements of paragraph (b)(2) of this section, the facility owner or operator may use alternative effluent flow rate measurement procedures or site selection and sample extraction procedures provided that:
(i) It can be shown that the requirements of paragraph (b) (1) or (2) of this section are impractical for the effluent stream.
(ii) The alternative procedure will not significantly underestimate the emissions.
(iii) The alternative procedure is fully documented.
(iv) The owner or operator has received prior approval from EPA.
(4)(i) Radionuclide emission measurements in conformance with the requirements of paragraph (b) of this section shall be made at all release points which have a potential to discharge radionuclides into the air in quantities which could cause an effective dose equivalent in excess of 1% of the standard. All radionuclides which could contribute greater than 10% of the potential effective dose equivalent for a release point shall be measured. With prior EPA approval, DOE may determine these emissions through alternative procedures. For other release points which have a potential to release radionuclides into the air, periodic confirmatory measurements shall be made to verify the low emissions.
(ii) To determine whether a release point is subject to the emission measurement requirements of paragraph (b)
(5) Environmental measurements of radionuclide air concentrations at critical receptor locations may be used as an alternative to air dispersion calculations in demonstrating compliance with the standard if the owner or operator meets the following criteria:
(i) The air at the point of measurement shall be continuously sampled for collection of radionuclides.
(ii) Those radionuclides released from the facility, which are the major contributors to the effective dose equivalent must be collected and measured as part of the environmental measurement program.
(iii) Radionuclide concentrations which would cause an effective dose equivalent of 10% of the standard shall be readily detectable and distinguishable from background.
(iv) Net measured radionuclide concentrations shall be compared to the concentration levels in Table 2 of appendix E to determine compliance with the standard. In the case of multiple radionuclides being released from a facility, compliance shall be demonstrated if the value for all radionuclides is less than the concentration level in Table 2, and the sum of the fractions that result when each measured concentration value is divided by the value in Table 2 for each radionuclide is less than 1.
(v) A quality assurance program shall be conducted that meets the performance requirements described in appendix B, Method 114.
(vi) Use of environmental measurements to demonstrate compliance with the standard is subject to prior approval of EPA. Applications for approval shall include a detailed description of the sampling and analytical methodology and show how the above criteria will be met.
(a) Compliance with this standard shall be determined by calculating the highest effective dose equivalent to any member of the public at any offsite point where there is a residence, school, business or office. The owners or operators of each facility shall submit an annual report to both EPA headquarters and the appropriate regional office by June 30 which includes the results of the monitoring as recorded in DOE's Effluent Information System and the dose calculations required by § 61.93(a) for the previous calendar year.
(b) In addition to the requirements of paragraph (a) of this section, an annual report shall include the following information:
(1) The name and location of the facility.
(2) A list of the radioactive materials used at the facility.
(3) A description of the handling and processing that the radioactive materials undergo at the facility.
(4) A list of the stacks or vents or other points where radioactive materials are released to the atmosphere.
(5) A description of the effluent controls that are used on each stack, vent, or other release point and an estimate of the efficiency of each control device.
(6) Distances from the points of release to the nearest residence, school, business or office and the nearest farms producing vegetables, milk, and meat.
(7) The values used for all other user-supplied input parameters for the computer models (e.g., meteorological data) and the source of these data.
(8) A brief description of all construction and modifications which were completed in the calendar year for which the report is prepared, but for which the requirement to apply for approval to construct or modify was waived under § 61.96 and associated documentation developed by DOE to support the waiver. EPA reserves the right to require that DOE send to EPA all the information that normally would be required in an application to construct or modify, following receipt of the description and supporting documentation.
(9) Each report shall be signed and dated by a corporate officer or public
(c) If the facility is not in compliance with the emission limits of § 61.92 in the calendar year covered by the report, then the facility must commence reporting to the Administrator on a monthly basis the information listed in paragraph (b) of this section, for the preceding month. These reports will start the month immediately following the submittal of the annual report for the year in noncompliance and will be due 30 days following the end of each month. This increased level of reporting will continue until the Administrator has determined that the monthly reports are no longer necessary. In addition to all the information required in paragraph (b) of this section, monthly reports shall also include the following information:
(1) All controls or other changes in operation of the facility that will be or are being installed to bring the facility into compliance.
(2) If the facility is under a judicial or administrative enforcement decree, the report will describe the facilities performance under the terms of the decree.
(d) In those instances where the information requested is classified, such information will be made available to EPA separate from the report and will be handled and controlled according to applicable security and classification regulations and requirements.
All facilities must maintain records documenting the source of input parameters including the results of all measurements upon which they are based, the calculations and/or analytical methods used to derive values for input parameters, and the procedure used to determine effective dose equivalent. This documentation should be sufficient to allow an independent auditor to verify the accuracy of the determination made concerning the facility's compliance with the standard. These records must be kept at the site of the facility for at least five years and, upon request, be made available for inspection by the Administrator, or his authorized representative.
(a) In addition to any activity that is defined as construction under 40 CFR part 61, subpart A, any fabrication, erection or installation of a new building or structure within a facility that emits radionuclides is also defined as new construction for purposes of 40 CFR part 61, subpart A.
(b) An application for approval under § 61.07 or notification of startup under § 61.09 does not need to be filed for any new construction of or modification within an existing facility if the effective dose equivalent, caused by all emissions from the new construction or modification, is less than 1% of the standard prescribed in § 61.92. For purposes of this paragraph the effective dose equivalent shall be calculated using the source term derived using appendix D as input to the dispersion and other computer models described in § 61.93. DOE may, with prior approval from EPA, use another procedure for estimating the source term for use in this paragraph. A facility is eligible for this exemption only if, based on its last annual report, the facility is in compliance with this subpart.
(c) Conditions to approvals granted under § 61.08 will not contain requirements for post approval reporting on operating conditions beyond those specified in § 61.94.
All facilities designated under this subpart are exempt from the reporting requirements of 40 CFR 61.10.
The provisions of this subpart apply to facilities owned or operated by any Federal agency other than the Department of Energy and not licensed by the Nuclear Regulatory Commission, except that this subpart does not apply to disposal at facilities regulated under 40 CFR part 191, subpart B, or to any uranium mill tailings pile after it has been disposed of under 40 CFR part 192, or to low energy accelerators.
As used in this subpart, all terms not defined here have the meaning given them in the Clean Air Act or subpart A of part 61. The following terms shall have the following specific meanings:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(a) Emissions of radionuclides, including iodine, to the ambient air from a facility regulated under this subpart shall not exceed those amounts that would cause any member of the public to receive in any year an effective dose equivalent of 10 mrem/yr.
(b) Emissions of iodine to the ambient air from a facility regulated under this subpart shall not exceed those amounts that would cause any member of the public to receive in any year an effective dose equivalent of 3 mrem/yr.
(a) Compliance with the emission standard in this subpart shall be determined through the use of either the EPA computer code COMPLY or the alternative requirements of appendix E. Facilities emitting radionuclides not listed in COMPLY or appendix E shall contact EPA to receive the information needed to determine dose. The source terms to be used for input into COMPLY shall be determined through the use of the measurement procedures listed in § 61.107 or the emission factors in appendix D or through alternative procedures for which EPA has granted prior approval; or,
(b) Facilities may demonstrate compliance with the emission standard in this subpart through the use of computer models that are equivalent to COMPLY, provided that the model has received prior approval from EPA headquarters. Any facility using a model other than COMPLY must file an annual report. EPA may approve an alternative model in whole or in part and may limit its use to specific circumstances.
(a) The owner or operator of a facility subject to this subpart must submit an annual report to the EPA covering the emissions of a calendar year by March 31 of the following year.
(1) The report or application for approval to construct or modify as required by 40 CFR part 61, subpart A and § 61.106, must provide the following information:
(i) The name of the facility.
(ii) The name of the person responsible for the operation of the facility and the name of the person preparing the report (if different).
(iii) The location of the facility, including suite and/or building number, street, city, county, state, and zip code.
(iv) The mailing address of the facility, if different from item (iii).
(v) A list of the radioactive materials used at the facility.
(vi) A description of the handling and processing that the radioactive materials undergo at the facility.
(vii) A list of the stacks or vents or other points where radioactive materials are released to the atmosphere.
(viii) A description of the effluent controls that are used on each stack, vent, or other release point and an estimate of the efficiency of each device.
(ix) Distances from the point of release to the nearest residence, school, business or office and the nearest farms producing vegetables, milk, and meat.
(x) The effective dose equivalent calculated using the compliance procedures in § 61.103.
(xi) The physical form and quantity of each radionuclide emitted from each stack, vent or other release point, and the method(s) by which these quantities were determined.
(xii) The volumetric flow, diameter, effluent temperature, and release height for each stack, vent or other release point where radioactive materials are emitted, the method(s) by which these were determined.
(xiii) The height and width of each building from which radionuclides are emitted.
(xiv) The values used for all other user-supplied input parameters (e.g., meteorological data) and the source of these data.
(xv) A brief description of all construction and modifications which were completed in the calendar year for which the report is prepared, but for which the requirement to apply for approval to construct or modify was waived under § 61.106, and associated documentation developed by the licensee to support the waiver. EPA reserves the right to require that the licensee send to EPA all the information that normally would be required in an application to construct or modify, following receipt of the description and supporting documentation.
(xvi) Each report shall be signed and dated by a corporate officer or public official in charge of the facility and contain the following declaration immediately above the signature line: “I certify under penalty of law that I have personally examined and am familiar with the information submitted herein and based on my inquiry of those individuals immediately responsible for obtaining the information, I believe that the submitted information is true, accurate and complete. I am aware that there are significant penalties for submitting false information including the possibility of fine and imprisonment. See, 18 U.S.C. 1001.”
(b) Facilities emitting radionuclides in an amount that would cause less than 10% of the dose standard in § 61.102, as determined by the compliance procedures from § 61.103(a), are exempt from the reporting requirements of § 61.104(a). Facilities shall annually make a new determination whether they are exempt from reporting.
(c) If the facility is not in compliance with the emission limits of § 61.102 in the calendar year covered by the report, the facility must report to the Administrator on a monthly basis the information listed in paragraph (a) of this section, for the preceding month. These reports will start the month immediately following the submittal of the annual report for the year in noncompliance and will be due 30 days following the end of each month. This increased level of reporting will continue until the Administrator has determined that the monthly reports are no longer necessary. In addition to all the information required in paragraph (a) of this section, monthly reports shall also include the following information:
(1) All controls or other changes in operation of the facility that will be or are being installed to bring the facility into compliance.
(2) If the facility is under a judicial or administrative enforcement decree the report will describe the facilities performance under the terms of the decree.
(d) The first report will cover the emissions of calendar year 1990.
The owner or operator of any facility must maintain records documenting the source of input parameters including the results of all measurements upon which they are based, the calculations and/or analytical methods used to derive values for input parameters, and the procedure used to determine compliance. This documentation should be sufficient to allow an independent auditor to verify the accuracy of the determination made concerning the facility's compliance with the standard, and, if claimed, qualification for exemption from reporting. These records must be kept at the site of the facility for at least five years and upon request be made available for inspection by the Administrator, or his authorized representative.
(a) In addition to any activity that is defined as construction under 40 CFR part 61, subpart A, any fabrication, erection or installation of a new building or structure within a facility is also defined as new construction for purposes of 40 CFR part 61, subpart A.
(b) An application under § 61.07 does not need to be filed for any new construction of or modification within an existing facility if one of the following conditions is met:
(1) The effective dose equivalent calculated by using methods described in § 61.103, that is caused by all emissions from the facility including those potentially emitted by the proposed new construction or modification, is less than 10% of the standard prescribed in § 61.102.
(2) The effective dose equivalent calculated by using methods described in § 61.103, that is caused by all emissions from the new construction or modification, is less than 1% of the limit prescribed in § 61.102. A facility is eligible for this exemption only if the facility, based on its last annual report, is in compliance with this subpart.
(a) Facility owners or operators may, in lieu of monitoring, estimate radionuclide emissions in accordance with appendix D, or other procedure for which EPA has granted prior approval.
(b) Radionuclide emission rates from point sources (e.g. stacks or vents) shall be measured in accordance with the following requirements:
(1) Effluent flow rate measurements shall be made using the following methods:
(i) Reference Method 2 of appendix A to part 60 shall be used to determine velocity and volumetric flow rates for stacks and large vents.
(ii) Reference Method 2A of appendix A to part 60 shall be used to measure flow rates through pipes and small vents.
(iii) The frequency of the flow rate measurements shall depend upon the variability of the effluent flow rate. For variable flow rates, continuous or frequent flow rate measurements shall be made. For relatively constant flow rates only periodic measurements are necessary.
(2) Radionuclides shall be directly monitored or extracted, collected, and measured using the following methods:
(i) Reference Method 1 of appendix A part 60 shall be used to select monitoring or sampling sites.
(ii) The effluent stream shall be directly monitored continuously using an in-line detector or representative samples of the effluent stream shall be withdrawn continuously from the sampling site following the guidance presented in ANSIN13.1-1969 “Guide to Sampling Airborne Radioactive Materials in Nuclear Facilities” (including the guidance presented in appendix A of ANSIN13.1) (incorporated by reference—see § 61.18). The requirements for continuous sampling are applicable to batch processes when the unit is in operation. Periodic sampling (grab samples) may be used only with EPA's prior approval. Such approval may be granted in cases where continuous sampling is not practical and radionuclide emission rates are relatively constant. In such cases, grab samples
(iii) Radionuclides shall be collected and measured using procedures based on the principles of measurement described in appendix B, Method 114. Use of methods based on principles of measurement different from those described in appendix B, Method 114 must have prior approval from the Administrator. EPA reserves the right to approve alternative measurement procedures in whole or in part.
(iv) A quality assurance program shall be conducted that meets the performance requirements described in appendix B, method 114.
(3) When it is impractical to measure the effluent flow rate at an existing source in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (b)(1) of this section or to monitor or sample an effluent stream at an existing source in accordance with the site selection and sample extraction requirements of paragraph (b)(2) of this section, the facility owner or operator may use alternative effluent flow rate measurement procedures or site selection and sample extraction procedures provided that:
(i) It can be shown that the requirements of paragraphs (b) (1) and (2) of this section are impractical for the effluent stream.
(ii) The alternative procedure will not significantly underestimate the emissions.
(iii) The alternative procedure is fully documented.
(iv) The owner or operator has received prior approval from EPA.
(4)(i) Radionuclide emission measurements in conformance with the requirements of paragraph (b) of this section shall be made at all release points which have a potential to discharge radionuclides into the air in quantities which could cause an effective dose equivalent in excess of 1% of the standard. All radionuclides which could contribute greater than 10% of the potential effective dose equivalent for a release point shall be measured. For other release points which have a potential to release radionuclides into the air, periodic confirmatory measurements should be made to verify the low emissions.
(ii) To determine whether a release point is subject to the emission measurement requirements of paragraph (b) of this section, it is necessary to evaluate the potential for radionuclide emissions for that release point. In evaluating the potential of a release point to discharge radionuclides into the air, the estimated radionuclide release rates shall be based on the discharge of the uncontrolled effluent stream into the air.
(5) Environmental measurements of radionuclide air concentrations at critical receptor locations may be used as an alternative to air dispersion calculations in demonstrating compliance with the standards if the owner or operator meets the following criteria:
(i) The air at the point of measurement shall be continuously sampled for collection of radionuclides.
(ii) Those radionuclides released from the facility, which are the major contributors to the effective dose equivalent must be collected and measured as part of the environmental measurements program.
(iii) Radionuclide concentrations which would cause an effective dose equivalent greater than or equal to 10% of the standard shall be readily detectable and distinguishable from background.
(iv) Net measured radionuclide concentrations shall be compared to the concentration levels in table 2 of appendix E to determine compliance with the standard. In the case of multiple radionuclides being released from a facility, compliance shall be dem-on-strated if the value for all radio-nu-clides is less than the concentration level in table 2 and the sum of the fractions that result when each measured concentration value is divided by the value in table 2 for each radionuclide is less than 1.
(v) A quality assurance program shall be conducted that meets the performance requirements described in appendix B, method 114.
(vi) Use of environmental measurements to demonstrate compliance with the standard is subject to prior approval of EPA. Applications for approval shall include a detailed description of the sampling and analytical
(c) The following facilities may use either the methodologies and quality assurance programs described in paragraph (b) of this section or may use the following:
(1) [Reserved]
(2) Uranium mills may determine their emissions in conformance with the Nuclear Regulatory Commission's Regulatory Guide 4.14 dated April 1980. In addition, they may conduct a quality assurance program as described in the Nuclear Regulatory Commission's Regulatory Guide 4.15 dated February 1979.
All facilities designated under this subpart are exempt from the reporting requirements of 40 CFR 61.10.
(a) The provisions of this subpart apply to each of the following sources that are intended to operate in benzene service: pumps, compressors, pressure relief devices, sampling connections, systems, open-ended valves or lines, valves, flanges and other connectors, product accumulator vessels, and control devices or systems required by this subpart.
(b) The provisions of this subpart do not apply to sources located in coke by-product plants.
(c)(1) If an owner or operator applies for one of the exemptions in this paragraph, then the owner or operator shall maintain records as required in § 61.246(i).
(2) Any equipment in benzene service that is located at a plant site designed to produce or use less than 1,000 megagrams of benzene per year is exempt from the requirements of § 61.112.
(3) Any process unit (defined in § 61.241) that has no equipment in benzene service is exempt from the requirements of § 61.112.
(d) While the provisions of this subpart are effective, a source to which this subpart applies that is also subject to the provisions of 40 CFR part 60 only will be required to comply with the provisions of this subpart.
As used in this subpart, all terms not defined herein shall have the meaning given them in the Act, in subpart A of part 61, or in subpart V of part 61, and the following terms shall have the specific meanings given them:
(a) Each owner or operator subject to the provisions of this subpart shall comply with the requirements of subpart V of this part.
(b) An owner or operator may elect to comply with the requirements of §§ 61.243-1 and 61.243-2.
(c) An owner or operator may apply to the Administrator for a determination of an alternative means of emission limitation that achieves a reduction in emissions of benzene at least equivalent to the reduction in emissions of benzene achieved by the controls required in this subpart. In doing so, the owner or operator shall comply with requirements of § 61.244.
The provisions of this subpart are applicable to owners or operators of calciners and nodulizing kilns at elemental phosphorus plants.
(a)
(b)
Emissions of polonium-210 to the ambient air from all calciners and nodulizing kilns at an elemental phosphorus plant shall not exceed a total of 2 curies a year; except that compliance with this standard may be conclusively shown if the elemental phosphorus plant:
(a) Installs a Hydro-Sonic
(b) All four scrubber units are operated continuously with a minimum average over any 6-hour period of 40 inches (water column) of pressure drop across each scrubber during calcining of phosphate shale,
(c) The system is used to scrub emissions from all calciners and/or nod-ul-iz-ing kilns at the plant, and
(d) Total emissions of polonium-210 from the plant do not exceed 4.5 curies per year.
(a) Each owner or operator of an elemental phosphorus plant shall test emissions from the plant within 90 days of the effective date of this standard and annually thereafter. The Administrator may temporarily or permanently waive the annual testing requirement or increase the frequency of testing, if the Administrator determines that more testing is required.
(b) The Administrator shall be notified at least 30 days prior to an emission test so that EPA may, at its option, observe the test.
(c) An emission test shall be conducted at each operational calciner or nodulizing kiln. If emissions from a calciner or nodulizing kiln are discharged through more than one stack, then an emission test shall be conducted at each stack and the total emission rate from the calciner or kiln shall be the sum of the emission rates from each of the stacks.
(d) Each emission test shall consist of three sampling runs that meet the requirements of § 61.125. The phosphate rock processing rate during each run shall be recorded. An emission rate in curies per metric ton of phosphate rock processed shall be calculated for each run. The average of all three runs shall apply in computing the emission rate for the test. The annual polonium-210 emission rate from a calciner or nodulizing kiln shall be determined by multiplying the measured polonium-210 emission rate in curies per metric ton of phosphate rock processed by the annual phosphate rock processing rate in metric tons. In determining the annual phosphate rock processing rate, the values used for operating hours and operating capacity shall be values that will maximize the expected processing rate. For determining compliance with
(e) If the owner or operator changes his operation in such a way as to increase his emissions of polonium-210, such as changing the type of rock processed, the temperature of the calciners or kilns, or increasing the annual phosphate rock processing rate, then a new emission test, meeting the requirements of this section, shall be conducted within 45 days under these conditions.
(f) Each owner or operator of an elemental phosphorus plant shall furnish the Administrator with a written report of the results of the emission test within 60 days of conducting the test. The report must provide the following information:
(1) The name and location of the facility.
(2) The name of the person responsible for the operation of the facility and the name of the person preparing the report (if different).
(3) A description of the effluent controls that are used on each stack, vent, or other release point and an estimate of the efficiency of each device.
(4) The results of the testing, including the results of each sampling run completed.
(5) The values used in calculating the emissions and the source of these data.
(6) Each report shall be signed and dated by a corporate officer in charge of the facility and contain the following declaration immediately above the signature line: “I certify under penalty of law that I have personally examined and am familiar with the information submitted herein and based on my inquiry of those individuals immediately responsible for obtaining the information, I believe that the submitted information is true, accurate and complete. I am aware that there are significant penalties for submitting false information including the possibility of fine and imprisonment. See, 18 U.S.C. 1001.”
The owner or operator of any plant must maintain records documenting the source of input parameters including the results of all measurements upon which they are based, the calculations and/or analytical methods used to derive values for input parameters, and the procedure used in emission testing. This documentation should be sufficient to allow an independent auditor to verify the accuracy of the results of the emission testing. These records must be kept at the site of the plant for at least five years and, upon request, be made available for inspection by the Administrator, or his authorized representative.
(a) Each owner or operator of a source required to test emissions under § 61.123, unless an equivalent or alternate method has been approved by the Administrator, shall use the following test methods:
(1) Test Method 1 of appendix A to 40 CFR part 60 shall be used to determine sample and velocity traverses;
(2) Test Method 2 of appendix A to 40 CFR part 60 shall be used to determine velocity and volumetric flow rate;
(3) Test Method 3 of appendix A to 40 CFR part 60 shall be used for gas analysis;
(4) Test Method 5 of appendix A to 40 CFR part 60 shall be used to collect particulate matter containing the polonium-210; and
(5) Test Method 111 of appendix B to 40 CFR part 61 shall be used to determine the polonium-210 emissions.
(a) The owner or operator of any source subject to this subpart using a wet-scrubbing emission control device shall install, calibrate, maintain, and operate a monitoring device for the continuous measurement and recording of the pressure drop of the gas stream across each scrubber. The monitoring device must be certified by the manufacturer to be accurate within
(b) The owner or operator of any source subject to this subpart using an electrostatic precipitator control device shall install, calibrate, maintain, and operate a monitoring device for the continuous measurement and recording of the primary and secondary current and the voltage in each electric field. These continuous measurement recordings shall be maintained at the source and made available for inspection by the Administrator, or his authorized representative, for a minimum of 5 years.
All facilities designated under this subpart are exempt from the reporting requirements of 40 CFR 61.10.
(a) The provisions of this subpart apply to each of the following sources at furnace and foundry coke by-product recovery plants: tar decanters, tar storage tanks, tar-intercepting sumps, flushing-liquor circulation tanks, light-oil sumps, light-oil condensers, light-oil decanters, wash-oil decanters, wash-oil circulation tanks, naphthalene processing, final coolers, final-cooler cooling towers, and the following equipment that are intended to operate in benzene service: pumps, valves, exhausters, pressure relief devices, sampling connection systems, open-ended valves or lines, flanges or other connectors, and control devices or systems required by § 61.135.
(b) The provisions of this subpart also apply to benzene storage tanks, BTX storage tanks, light-oil storage tanks, and excess ammonia-liquor storage tanks at furnace coke by-product recovery plants.
(c) In delegating implementation and enforcement authority to a State under section 112 of the Act, the authorities contained in paragraph (d) of this section shall be retained by the Administrator and not transferred to a State.
(d) Authorities that will not be delegated to States: § 61.136(d).
As used in this subpart, all terms not defined herein shall have the meaning given them in the Act, in subpart A of part 61, and in subpart V of part 61. The following terms shall have the specific meanings given them:
(a)(1) Each owner or operator of a furnace or a foundry coke byproduct recovery plant shall enclose and seal all openings on each process vessel, tar storage tank, and tar-intercepting sump.
(2) The owner or operator shall duct gases from each process vessel, tar storage tank, and tar-intercepting sump to the gas collection system, gas distribution system, or other enclosed point in the by-product recovery process where the benzene in the gas will be recovered or destroyed. This control system shall be designed and operated for no detectable emissions, as indicated by an instrument reading of less than 500 ppm above background and visual inspections, as determined by the methods specified in § 61.245(c). This system can be designed as a closed, positive pressure, gas blanketing system.
(i) Except, the owner or operator may elect to install, operate, and maintain a pressure relief device, vacuum relief device, an access hatch, and a sampling port on each process vessel, tar storage tank, and tar-intercepting sump. Each access hatch and sampling port must be equipped with a gasket and a cover, seal, or lid that must be kept in a closed position at all times, unless in actual use.
(ii) The owner or operator may elect to leave open to the atmosphere the portion of the liquid surface in each tar decanter necessary to permit operation of a sludge conveyor. If the owner or operator elects to maintain an opening on part of the liquid surface of the tar decanter, the owner or operator shall install, operate, and maintain a water leg seal on the tar decanter roof near the sludge discharge chute to ensure enclosure of the major portion of liquid surface not necessary for the operation of the sludge conveyor.
(b) Following the installation of any control equipment used to meet the requirements of paragraph (a) of this section, the owner or operator shall monitor the connections and seals on each control system to determine if it is operating with no detectable emissions, using Reference Method 21 (40 CFR part 60, appendix A) and procedures specified in § 61.245(c), and shall visually inspect each source (including sealing materials) and the ductwork of the control system for evidence of visible defects such as gaps or tears. This monitoring and inspection shall be conducted on a semiannual basis and at any other time after the control system is repressurized with blanketing gas following removal of the cover or opening of the access hatch.
(1) If an instrument reading indicates an organic chemical concentration more than 500 ppm above a background concentration, as measured by Reference Method 21, a leak is detected.
(2) If visible defects such as gaps in sealing materials are observed during a visual inspection, a leak is detected.
(3) When a leak is detected, it shall be repaired as soon as practicable, but not later than 15 calendar days after it is detected.
(4) A first attempt at repair of any leak or visible defect shall be made no
(c) Following the installation of any control system used to meet the requirements of paragraph (a) of this section, the owner or operator shall conduct a maintenance inspection of the control system on an annual basis for evidence of system abnormalities, such as blocked or plugged lines, sticking valves, plugged condensate traps, and other maintenance defects that could result in abnormal system operation. The owner or operator shall make a first attempt at repair within 5 days, with repair within 15 days of detection.
(d) Each owner or operator of a furnace coke by-product recovery plant also shall comply with the requirements of paragraphs (a)-(c) of this section for each benzene storage tank, BTX storage tank, light-oil storage tank, and excess ammonia-liquor storage tank.
(a) Each owner or operator of a light-oil sump shall enclose and seal the liquid surface in the sump to form a closed system to contain the emissions.
(1) Except, the owner or operator may elect to install, operate, and maintain a vent on the light-oil sump cover. Each vent pipe must be equipped with a water leg seal, a pressure relief device, or vacuum relief device.
(2) Except, the owner or operator may elect to install, operate, and maintain an access hatch on each light-oil sump cover. Each access hatch must be equipped with a gasket and a cover, seal, or lid that must be kept in a closed position at all times, unless in actual use.
(3) The light-oil sump cover may be removed for periodic maintenance but must be replaced (with seal) at completion of the maintenance operation.
(b) The venting of steam or other gases from the by-product process to the light-oil sump is not permitted.
(c) Following the installation of any control equipment used to meet the requirements of paragraph (a) of this section, the owner or operator shall monitor the connections and seals on each control system to determine if it is operating with no detectable emissions, using Reference Method 21 (40 CFR part 60, appendix A) and the procedures specified in § 61.245(c), and shall visually inspect each source (including sealing materials) for evidence of visible defects such as gaps or tears. This monitoring and inspection shall be conducted semiannually and at any other time the cover is removed.
(1) If an instrument reading indicates an organic chemical concentration more than 500 ppm above a background concentration, as measured by Reference Method 21, a leak is detected.
(2) If visible defects such as gaps in sealing materials are observed during a visual inspection, a leak is detected.
(3) When a leak is detected, it shall be repaired as soon as practicable, but not later than 15 calendar days after it is detected.
(4) A first attempt at repair of any leak or visible defect shall be made no later than 5 calendar days after each leak is detected.
(a) No (“zero”) emissions are allowed from naphthalene processing, final coolers and final-cooler cooling towers at coke by-product recovery plants.
(a) Each owner or operator of equipment in benzene service shall comply with the requirements of 40 CFR part 61, subpart V, except as provided in this section.
(b) The provisions of § 61.242-3 and § 61.242-9 of subpart V do not apply to this subpart.
(c) Each piece of equipment in benzene service to which this subpart applies shall be marked in such a manner that it can be distinguished readily from other pieces of equipment in benzene service.
(d) Each exhauster shall be monitored quarterly to detect leaks by the methods specified in § 61.245(b) except as provided in § 61.136(d) and paragraphs (e)-(g) of this section.
(1) If an instrument reading of 10,000 ppm or greater is measured, a leak is detected.
(2) When a leak is detected, it shall be repaired as soon as practicable, but no later than 15 calendar days after it
(e) Each exhauster equipped with a seal system that includes a barrier fluid system and that prevents leakage of process fluids to the atmosphere is exempt from the requirements of paragraph (d) of this section provided the following requirements are met:
(1) Each exhauster seal system is:
(i) Operated with the barrier fluid at a pressure that is greater than the exhauster stuffing box pressure; or
(ii) Equipped with a barrier fluid system that is connected by a closed vent system to a control device that complies with the requirements of § 61.242-11; or
(iii) Equipped with a system that purges the barrier fluid into a process stream with zero benzene emissions to the atmosphere.
(2) The barrier fluid is not in benzene service.
(3) Each barrier fluid system shall be equipped with a sensor that will detect failure of the seal system, barrier fluid system, or both.
(4)(i) Each sensor as described in paragraph (e)(3) of this section shall be checked daily or shall be equipped with an audible alarm.
(ii) The owner or operator shall determine, based on design considerations and operating experience, a criterion that indicates failure of the seal system, the barrier fluid system, or both.
(5) If the sensor indicates failure of the seal system, the barrier system, or both (based on the criterion determined under paragraph (e)(4)(ii) of this section), a leak is detected.
(6)(i) When a leak is detected, it shall be repaired as soon as practicable, but not later than 15 calendar days after it is detected, except as provided in § 61.242-10.
(ii) A first attempt at repair shall be made no later than 5 calendar days after each leak is detected.
(f) An exhauster is exempt from the requirements of paragraph (d) of this section if it is equipped with a closed vent system capable of capturing and transporting any leakage from the seal or seals to a control device that complies with the requirements of § 61.242-11 except as provided in paragraph (g) of this section.
(g) Any exhauster that is designated, as described in § 61.246(e) for no detectable emissions, as indicated by an instrument reading of less than 500 ppm above background, is exempt from the requirements of paragraph (d) of this section if the exhauster:
(1) Is demonstrated to be operating with no detectable emissions, as indicated by an instrument reading of less than 500 ppm above background, as measured by the methods specified in § 61.245(c); and
(2) Is tested for compliance with paragraph (g)(1) of this section initially upon designation, annually, and at other times requested by the Administrator.
(h) Any exhauster that is in vacuum service is excluded from the requirements of this subpart if it is identified as required in § 61.246(e)(5).
(a) Each owner or operator subject to the provisions of this subpart shall demonstrate compliance with the requirements of §§ 61.132 through 61.135 for each new and existing source, except as provided under §§ 61.243-1 and 61.243-2.
(b) Compliance with this subpart shall be determined by a review of records, review of performance test results, inspections, or any combination thereof, using the methods and procedures specified in § 61.137.
(c) On the first January 1 after the first year that a plant's annual coke production is less than 75 percent foundry coke, the coke by-product recovery plant becomes a furnace coke by-product recovery plant and shall comply with 61.132(d). Once a plant becomes a furnace coke by-product recovery plant, it will continue to be considered a furnace coke by-product recovery plant, regardless of the coke production in subsequent years.
(d)(1) An owner or operator may request permission to use an alternative means of emission limitation to meet the requirements in §§ 61.132, 61.133, and
(2) When the Administrator evaluates requests for permission to use alternative means of emission limitation for sources subject to §§ 61.132 and 61.133 (except tar decanters) the Administrator shall compare test data for the means of emission limitation to a benzene control efficiency of 98 percent. For tar decanters, the Administrator shall compare test data for the means of emission limitation to a benzene control efficiency of 95 percent.
(3) For any requests for permission to use an alternative to the work practices required under § 61.135, the provisions of § 61.244(c) shall apply.
(a) Each owner or operator subject to the provisions of this subpart shall comply with the requirements in § 61.245 of 40 CFR part 61, subpart V.
(b) To determine whether or not a piece of equipment is in benzene service, the methods in § 61.245(d) shall be used, except that, for exhausters, the percent benzene shall be 1 percent by weight, rather than the 10 percent by weight described in § 61.245(d).
(a) The following information pertaining to the design of control equipment installed to comply with §§ 61.132 through 61.134 shall be recorded and kept in a readily accessible location:
(1) Detailed schematics, design specifications, and piping and instrumentation diagrams.
(2) The dates and descriptions of any changes in the design specifications.
(b) The following information pertaining to sources subject to § 61.132 and sources subject to § 61.133 shall be recorded and maintained for 2 years following each semiannual (and other) inspection and each annual maintenance inspection:
(1) The date of the inspection and the name of the inspector.
(2) A brief description of each visible defect in the source or control equipment and the method and date of repair of the defect.
(3) The presence of a leak, as measured using the method described in § 61.245(c). The record shall include the date of attempted and actual repair and method of repair of the leak.
(4) A brief description of any system abnormalities found during the annual maintenance inspection, the repairs made, the date of attempted repair, and the date of actual repair.
(c) Each owner or operator of a source subject to § 61.135 shall comply with § 61.246.
(d) For foundry coke by-product recovery plants, the annual coke production of both furnace and foundry coke shall be recorded and maintained for 2 years following each determination.
(e)(1) An owner or operator of any source to which this subpart applies shall submit a statement in writing notifying the Administrator that the requirements of this subpart and 40 CFR 61, subpart V, have been implemented.
(2) In the case of an existing source or a new source that has an initial startup date preceding the effective date, the statement is to be submitted within 90 days of the effective date, unless a waiver of compliance is granted under § 61.11, along with the information required under § 61.10. If a waiver of compliance is granted, the statement is to be submitted on a date scheduled by the Administrator.
(3) In the case of a new source that did not have an initial startup date preceding the effective date, the statement shall be submitted with the application for approval of construction, as described under § 61.07.
(4) The statement is to contain the following information for each source:
(i) Type of source (e.g., a light-oil sump or pump).
(ii) For equipment in benzene service, equipment identification number and process unit identification: percent by weight benzene in the fluid at the equipment; and process fluid state in the equipment (gas/vapor or liquid).
(iii) Method of compliance with the standard (e.g., “gas blanketing,” “monthly leak detection and repair,” or “equipped with dual mechanical seals”). This includes whether the plant plans to be a furnace or foundry
(f) A report shall be submitted to the Administrator semiannually starting 6 months after the initial reports required in § 61.138(e) and § 61.10, which includes the following information:
(1) For sources subject to § 61.132 and sources subject to § 61.133,
(i) A brief description of any visible defect in the source or ductwork,
(ii) The number of leaks detected and repaired, and
(iii) A brief description of any system abnormalities found during each annual maintenance inspection that occurred in the reporting period and the repairs made.
(2) For equipment in benzene service subject to § 61.135(a), information required by § 61.247(b).
(3) For each exhauster subject to § 61.135 for each quarter during the semiannual reporting period,
(i) The number of exhausters for which leaks were detected as described in § 61.135 (d) and (e)(5),
(ii) The number of exhausters for which leaks were repaired as required in § 61.135 (d) and (e)(6),
(iii) The results of performance tests to determine compliance with § 61.135(g) conducted within the semiannual reporting period.
(4) A statement signed by the owner or operator stating whether all provisions of 40 CFR part 61, subpart L, have been fulfilled during the semiannual reporting period.
(5) For foundry coke by-product recovery plants, the annual coke production of both furnace and foundry coke, if determined during the reporting period.
(6) Revisions to items reported according to paragraph (e) of this section if changes have occurred since the initial report or subsequent revisions to the initial report.
Compliance with the requirements of § 61.10(c) is not required for revisions documented under this paragraph.
(g) In the first report submitted as required in § 61.138(e), the report shall include a reporting schedule stating the months that semiannual reports shall be submitted. Subsequent reports shall be submitted according to that schedule unless a revised schedule has been submitted in a previous semiannual report.
(h) An owner or operator electing to comply with the provisions of §§ 61.243-1 and 61.243-2 shall notify the Administrator of the alternative standard selected 90 days before implementing either of the provisions.
(i) An application for approval of construction or modification, as required under §§ 61.05(a) and 61.07, will not be required for sources subject to 61.135 if:
(1) The new source complies with § 61.135, and
(2) In the next semiannual report required by § 61.138(f), the information described in § 61.138(e)(4) is reported.
(a) As an alternative means of emission limitation for a source subject to § 61.132(a)(2) or § 61.132(d), the owner or operator may route gases from the source through a closed vent system to a carbon adsorber or vapor incinerator that is at least 98 percent efficient at removing benzene from the gas stream.
(1) The provisions of § 61.132(a)(1) and § 61.132(a) (2)(i) and (ii) shall apply to the source.
(2) The seals on the source and closed vent system shall be designed and operated for no detectable emissions, as indicated by an instrument reading of less than 500 ppm above background and visual inspections, as determined by the methods specified in § 61.245(c).
(3) The provisions of § 61.132(b) shall apply to the seals and closed vent system.
(b) For each carbon ad-sorb-er, the owner or operator shall adhere to the following practices:
(1) Benzene captured by each carbon adsorber shall be recycled or destroyed in a manner that prevents benzene from being emitted to the atmosphere.
(2) Carbon removed from each carbon adsorber shall be regenerated or destroyed in a manner that prevents benzene from being emitted to the atmosphere.
(3) For each regenerative carbon adsorber, the owner or operator shall
(4) For each non-regenerative carbon adsorber, the owner or operator shall replace the carbon at the scheduled replacement time, or as soon as practicable (but not later than 16 hours) after an exceedance of the maximum concentration point is detected, whichever is sooner.
(i) For each non-regenerative carbon adsorber, the scheduled replacement time means the day that is estimated to be 90 percent of the demonstrated bed life, as defined in § 61.139(h)(5).
(ii) For each non-regenerative carbon adsorber, an exceedance of the maximum concentration point shall mean any concentration greater than or equal to the maximum concentration point as determined in § 61.139(h).
(c) Compliance with the provisions of this section shall be determined as follows:
(1) For each carbon adsorber and vapor incinerator, the owner or operator shall demonstrate compliance with the efficiency limit by a compliance test as specified in § 61.13 and § 61.139(g). If a waiver of compliance has been granted under § 61.11, the deadline for conducting the initial compliance test shall be incorporated into the terms of the waiver. The benzene removal efficiency rate for each carbon adsorber and vapor incinerator shall be calculated as in the following equation:
(2) Compliance with all other provisions in this section shall be determined by inspections or the review of records and reports.
(d) For each regenerative carbon adsorber, the owner or operator shall install and operate a monitoring device that continuously indicates and records either the concentration of benzene or the concentration level of organic compounds in the outlet vent of the carbon adsorber. The monitoring device shall be installed, calibrated, maintained and operated in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications.
(1) Measurement of benzene concentration shall be made according to § 61.139(g)(2).
(2) All measurements of organic compound concentration levels shall be reasonable indicators of benzene concentration.
(i) The monitoring device for measuring organic compound concentration levels shall be based on one of the following detection principles: Infrared absorption, flame ionization, catalytic oxidation, photoionization, or thermal conductivity.
(ii) The monitoring device shall meet the requirements of part 60, appendix A, method 21, sections 2, 3, 4.1, 4.2, and 4.4. For the purpose of the application of method 21 to this section, the words “leak definition” shall be the maximum concentration point, which would be estimated until it is established under § 61.139(h). The calibration gas shall either be benzene or methane and shall be at a concentration associated with 125 percent of the expected organic compound concentration level for the carbon adsorber outlet vent.
(e) For each non-regenerative carbon adsorber, the owner or operator shall monitor either the concentration of benzene or the concentration level of organic compounds at the outlet vent of the adsorber. The monitoring device shall be calibrated, operated and maintained in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications.
(1) Measurements of benzene concentration shall be made according to § 61.139(g)(2). The measurement shall be
(2) All measurements of organic compound concentration levels shall be reasonable indicators of benzene concentration.
(i) The monitoring device for measuring organic compound concentration levels shall meet the requirements of paragraphs § 61.139(d)(2) (i) and (ii).
(ii) The probe inlet of the monitoring device shall be placed at approximately the center of the carbon adsorber outlet vent. The probe shall be held there for at least 5 minutes during which flow into the carbon adsorber is expected to occur. The maximum reading during that period shall be used as the measurement.
(3) Monitoring shall be performed at least once within the first 7 days after replacement of the carbon bed occurs, and monthly thereafter until 10 days before the scheduled replacement time, at which point monitoring shall be done daily, except as specified in paragraphs (e)(4) and (e)(5) of this section.
(4) If an owner or operator detects an exceedance of the maximum concentration point during the monthly monitoring or on the first day of daily monitoring as prescribed in paragraph (e)(3) of this section, then, after replacing the bed, the owner or operator shall begin the daily monitoring of the replacement carbon bed on the day after the last scheduled monthly monitoring before the exceedance was detected, or 10 days before the exceedance was detected, whichever is longer.
(5) If an owner or operator detects an exceedance of the maximum concentration point during the daily monitoring as prescribed in paragraph (e)(3) of this section, except on the first day, then, after replacing the bed, the owner or operator shall begin the daily monitoring of the replacement carbon bed 10 days before the exceedance was detected.
(6) If the owner or operator is monitoring on the schedule required in paragraph (e)(4) or paragraph (e)(5) of this section, and the scheduled replacement time is reached without exceeding the maximum concentration point, the owner or operator may return to the monitoring schedule in paragraph (e)(3) of this section for subsequent carbon beds.
This note provides an example of the monitoring schedules in paragraphs (e)(3), (e)(4) and (e)(5) of this section. Assume that the scheduled replacement time for a non-regenerative carbon adsorber is the 105th day after installation. According to the monitoring schedule in paragraph (e)(3) of this section, initial monitoring would be done within 7 days after installation, monthly monitoring would be done on the 30th, 60th and 90th days, and daily monitoring would begin on the 95th day after installation. Now assume that an exceedance of the maximum concentration point is detected on the 90th day after installation. On the replacement carbon bed, the owner or operator would begin daily monitoring on the 61st day after installation (i.e., the day after the last scheduled monthly monitoring before the exceedance was detected), according to the requirements in paragraph (e)(4) of this section. If, instead, the exceedance were detected on the first bed on the 95th day, the daily monitoring of the replacement bed would begin on the 85th day after installation (i.e., 10 days before the point in the cycle where the exceedance was detected); this is a second example of the requirements in paragraph (e)(4) of this section. Finally, assume that an exceedance of the maximum concentration point is detected on the 100th day after the first carbon adsorber was installed. According to paragraph (e)(5) of this section, daily monitoring of the replacement bed would begin on the 90th day after installation (i.e., 10 days earlier than when the exceedance was detected on the previous bed). In all of these examples, the initial monitoring of the replacement bed within 7 days of installation and the monthly monitoring would proceed as set out in paragraph (e)(3) of this section until daily monitoring was required.
(f) For each vapor incinerator, the owner or operator shall comply with the monitoring requirements specified below:
(1) Install, calibrate, maintain, and operate according to the manufacturer's specifications a temperature monitoring device equipped with a continuous recorder and having an accuracy of
(i) Where a vapor incinerator other than a catalytic incinerator is used, the temperature monitoring device shall be installed in the firebox.
(ii) Where a catalytic incinerator is used, temperature monitoring devices
(2) Comply with paragraph (f)(2)(i), paragraph (f)(2)(ii), or paragraph (f)(3)(iii) of this section.
(i) Install, calibrate, maintain and operate according to the manufacturer's specifications a flow indicator that provides a record of vent stream flow to the incinerator at least once every hour for each source. The flow indicator shall be installed in the vent stream from each source at a point closest to the inlet of each vapor incinerator and before being joined with any other vent stream.
(ii) Install, calibrate, maintain and operate according to the manufacturer's specifications a flow indicator that provides a record of vent stream flow away from the vapor incinerator at least once every 15 minutes. The flow indicator shall be installed in each bypass line, immediately downstream of the valve that, if opened, would divert the vent stream away from the vapor incinerator.
(iii) Where a valve that opens a bypass line is secured in the closed position with a car seal or a lock-and-key configuration, a flow indicator is not required. The owner or operator shall perform a visual inspection at least once every month to check the position of the valve and the condition of the car seal or lock-and-key configuration. The owner or operator shall also record the date and duration of each time that the valve was opened and the vent stream diverted away from the vapor incinerator.
(g) In conducting the compliance tests required in § 61.139(c), and measurements specified in § 61.139(d)(1), (e)(1) and (h)(3)(ii), the owner or operator shall use as reference methods the test methods and procedures in appendix A to 40 CFR part 60, or other methods as specified in this paragraph, except as specified in § 61.13.
(1) For compliance tests, as described in § 61.139(c)(1), the following provisions apply.
(i) All tests shall be run under representative emission concentration and vent flow rate conditions. For sources with intermittent flow rates, representative conditions shall include typical emission surges (for example, during the loading of a storage tank).
(ii) Each test shall consist of three separate runs. These runs will be averaged to yield the volumetric flow rates and benzene concentrations in the equation in § 61.139(c)(1). Each run shall be a minimum of 1 hour.
(A) For each regenerative carbon adsorber, each run shall take place in one adsorption cycle, to include a minimum of 1 hour of sampling immediately preceding the initiation of carbon bed regeneration.
(B) For each non-regenerative carbon adsorber, all runs can occur during one adsorption cycle.
(iii) The measurements during the runs shall be paired so that the inlet and outlet to the control device are measured simultaneously.
(iv) Method 1 or 1A shall be used as applicable for locating measurement sites.
(v) Method 2, 2A, or 2D shall be used as applicable for measuring vent flow rates.
(vi) Method 18 shall be used for determining the benzene concentrations (C
(A) If section 7.1 is used, the sample rate shall be adjusted to maintain a constant proportion to vent flow rate.
(B) If section 7.2 is used, then each performance test run shall be conducted in intervals of 5 minutes. For each interval “t,” readings from each measurement shall be recorded, and the flow rate (Q
(2) For testing the benzene concentration at the outlet vent of the carbon adsorber as specified under §§ 61.139(d)(1), (e)(1) and (h)(3)(ii), the following provisions apply.
(i) The measurement shall be conducted over one 5-minute period.
(ii) The requirements in § 61.139(g)(1)(i) shall apply to the extent practicable.
(iii) The requirements in § 61.139(g)(1)(vi) shall apply. Section 7.2 of method 18 shall be used as described in § 61.139(g)(1)(vi)(B) for benzene concentration measurements.
(h) For each carbon adsorber, the maximum concentration point shall be expressed either as a benzene concentration or organic compound concentration level, whichever is to be indicated by the monitoring device chosen under § 61.139 (d) or (e).
(1) For each regenerative carbon adsorber, the owner or operator shall determine the maximum concentration point at the following times:
(i) No later than the deadline for the initial compliance test as specified in § 61.139(c)(1);
(ii) At the request of the Administrator; and
(iii) At any time chosen by the owner or operator.
(2) For each non-regenerative carbon adsorber, the owner or operator shall determine the maximum concentration point at the following times:
(i) On the first carbon bed to be installed in the adsorber;
(ii) At the request of the Administrator;
(iii) On the next carbon bed after the maximum concentration point has been exceeded (before the scheduled replacement time) for each of three previous carbon beds in the adsorber since the most recent determination; and
(iv) At any other time chosen by the owner or operator.
(3) The maximum concentration point for each carbon adsorber shall be determined through the simultaneous measurement of the outlet of the carbon adsorber with the monitoring device and method 18, except as allowed in paragraph (h)(4) of this section.
(i) Several data points shall be collected according to a schedule determined by the owner or operator. The schedule shall be designed to take frequent samples near the expected maximum concentration point.
(ii) Each data point shall consist of one 5-minute benzene concentration measurement using method 18 as specified in § 61.139(g)(2), and of a simultaneous measurement by the monitoring device. The monitoring device measurement shall be conducted according to § 61.139 (d) or (e), whichever is applicable.
(iii) The maximum concentration point shall be the concentration level, as indicated by the monitoring device, for the last data point at which the benzene concentration is less than 2 percent of the average value of the benzene concentration at the inlet to the carbon adsorber during the most recent compliance test.
(4) If the maximum concentration point is expressed as a benzene concentration, the owner or operator may determine it by calibrating the monitoring device with benzene at a concentration that is 2 percent of the average benzene concentration measured at the inlet to the carbon adsorber during the most recent compliance test. The reading on the monitoring device corresponding to the calibration concentration shall be the maximum concentration point. This method of determination would affect the owner or operator as follows:
(i) For a regenerative carbon adsorber, the owner or operator is exempt from the provisions in paragraph (h)(3) of this section.
(ii) For a non-regenerative carbon adsorber, the owner or operator is required to collect the data points in paragraph (h)(3) of this section with only the monitoring device, and is exempt from the simultaneous method 18 measurement.
(5) For each non-regenerative carbon adsorber, the demonstrated bed life shall be the carbon bed life, measured in days from the time the bed is installed until the maximum concentration point is reached, for the carbon bed that is used to determine the maximum concentration point.
(i) The following recordkeeping requirements are applicable to owners and operators of control devices subject to § 61.139. All records shall be kept updated and in a readily accessible location.
(1) The following information shall be recorded for each control device for the life of the control device:
(i) The design characteristics of the control device and a list of the source or sources vented to it.
(ii) A plan for proper operation, maintenance, and corrective action to achieve at least 98 percent control of benzene emissions.
(iii) The dates and descriptions of any changes in the design specifications or plan.
(iv) For each carbon adsorber, the plan in paragraph (i)(1)(ii) of this section shall include the method for handling captured benzene and removed carbon to comply with § 61.139(b) (1) and (2).
(v) For each carbon adsorber for which organic compounds are monitored as provided under § 61.139 (d) and (e), documentation to show that the measurements of organic compound concentrations are reasonable indicators of benzene concentrations.
(2) For each compliance test as specified in § 61.139(c)(1), the date of the test, the results of the test, and other data needed to determine emissions shall be recorded as specified in § 61.13(g) for at least 2 years or until the next compliance test on the control device, whichever is longer.
(3) For each vapor incinerator, the average firebox temperature of the incinerator (or the average temperature upstream and downstream of the catalyst bed for a catalytic incinerator), measured and averaged over the most recent compliance test shall be recorded for at least 2 years or until the next compliance test on the incinerator, whichever is longer.
(4) For each carbon adsorber, for each determination of a maximum concentration point as specified in § 61.139(h), the date of the determination, the maximum concentration point, and data needed to make the determination shall be recorded for at least 2 years or until the next maximum concentration point determination on the carbon adsorber, whichever is longer.
(5) For each carbon absorber, the dates of and data from the monitoring required in § 61.139(d) and (e), the date and time of replacement of each carbon bed, the date of each exceedance of the maximum concentration point, and a brief description of the corrective action taken shall be recorded for at least 2 years. Also, the occurrences when the captured benzene or spent carbon are not handled as required in § 61.139(b)(1) and (2) shall be recorded for at least 2 years.
(6) For each vapor incinerator, the data from the monitoring required in § 61.139(f)(1), the dates of all periods of operation during which the parameter boundaries established during the most recent compliance test are exceeded, and a brief description of the corrective action taken shall be recorded for at least 2 years. A period of operation during which the parameter boundaries are exceeded is a 3-hour period of operation during which:
(i) For each vapor incinerator other than a catalytic incinerator, the average combustion temperature is more than 28°C (50°F) below the average combustion temperature during the most recent performance test.
(ii) For each catalytic incinerator, the average temperature of the vent stream immediately before the catalyst bed is more than 28°C (50°F) below the average temperature of the vent
(7) For each vapor incinerator, the following shall be recorded for at least 2 years:
(i) If subject to § 61.139(f)(2)(i), records of the flow indication, and of all periods when the vent stream is diverted from the vapor incinerator or has no flow rate.
(ii) If subject to § 61.139(f)(2)(ii), records of the flow indication, and of all periods when the vent stream is diverted from the vapor incinerator.
(iii) If subject to § 61.139(f)(2)(iii), records of the conditions found during each monthly inspection, and of each period when the car seal is broken, when the valve position is changed, or when maintenance on the bypass line valve is performed.
(j) The following reporting requirements are applicable to owners or operators of control devices subject to § 61.139:
(1) Compliance tests shall be reported as specified in § 61.13(f).
(2) The following information shall be reported on a quarterly basis. Two of the quarterly reports shall be submitted as part of the semiannual reports required in § 61.138(f).
(i) For each carbon adsorber:
(A) The date and time of detection of each exceedance of the maximum concentration point and a brief description of the time and nature of the corrective action taken.
(B) The date of each time that the captured benzene or removed carbon was not handled as required in § 61.139 (b)(1) and (2), and a brief description of the corrective action taken.
(C) The date of each determination of the maximum concentration point, as described in § 61.139(h), and a brief reason for the determination.
(ii) For each vapor incinerator, the date and duration of each exceedance of the boundary parameters recorded under § 61.139(i)(6) and a brief description of the corrective action taken.
(iii) For each vapor incinerator, the date and duration of each period specified as follows:
(A) Each period recorded under § 61.139(i)(7)(i) when the vent stream is diverted from the control device or has no flow rate;
(B) Each period recorded under § 61.139(i)(7)(ii) when the vent stream is diverted from the control device; and
(C) Each period recorded under § 61.139(i)(7)(iii) when the vent stream is diverted from the control device, when the car seal is broken, when the valve is unlocked, or when the valve position has changed.
(iv) For each vapor incinerator, the owner or operator shall specify the method of monitoring chosen under § 61.139(f)(2) in the first quarterly report. Any time the owner or operator changes that choice, he shall specify the change in the first quarterly report following the change.
(3) If, for a given quarter in which no semiannual report is due under § 61.138(f), there is no information to report under § 61.139(j)(2)(i)(A), (j)(2)(i)(B), (j)(2)(ii)(A), and (j)(2)(ii)(B), then the owner or operator may submit a statement to that effect along with the information to be reported under § 61.139(j)(2)(i)(C) in the next semiannual report, rather than submitting a report at the end of the quarter.
42 U.S.C. 7401, 7412, 7414, 7416, 7601.
The provisions of this subpart are applicable to those sources specified in §§ 61.142 through 61.151, 61.154, and 61.155.
All terms that are used in this subpart and are not defined below are given the same meaning as in the Act and in subpart A of this part.
(a) Each owner or operator of an asbestos mill shall either discharge no visible emissions to the outside air from that asbestos mill, including fugitive sources, or use the methods specified by § 61.152 to clean emissions containing particulate asbestos material before they escape to, or are vented to, the outside air.
(b) Each owner or operator of an asbestos mill shall meet the following requirements:
(1) Monitor each potential source of asbestos emissions from any part of the mill facility, including air cleaning devices, process equipment, and buildings that house equipment for material processing and handling, at least once each day, during daylight hours, for visible emissions to the outside air during periods of operation. The monitoring shall be by visual observation of at least 15 seconds duration per source of emissions.
(2) Inspect each air cleaning device at least once each week for proper operation and for changes that signal the potential for malfunction, including, to the maximum extent possible without dismantling other than opening the device, the presence of tears, holes, and abrasions in filter bags and for dust deposits on the clean side of bags. For air cleaning devices that cannot be inspected on a weekly basis according to this paragraph, submit to the Administrator, and revise as necessary, a written maintenance plan to include, at a minimum, the following:
(i) Maintenance schedule.
(ii) Recordkeeping plan.
(3) Maintain records of the results of visible emissions monitoring and air cleaning device inspections using a format similar to that shown in Figures 1 and 2 and include the following:
(i) Date and time of each inspection.
(ii) Presence or absence of visible emissions.
(iii) Condition of fabric filters, including presence of any tears, holes, and abrasions.
(iv) Presence of dust deposits on clean side of fabric filters.
(v) Brief description of corrective actions taken, including date and time.
(vi) Daily hours of operation for each air cleaning device.
(4) Furnish upon request, and make available at the affected facility during normal business hours for inspection by the Administrator, all records required under this section.
(5) Retain a copy of all monitoring and inspection records for at least 2 years.
(6) Submit quarterly a copy of visible emission monitoring records to the Administrator if visible emissions occurred during the report period. Quarterly reports shall be postmarked by the 30th day following the end of the calendar quarter.
No person may construct or maintain a roadway with asbestos tailings or asbestos-containing waste material on that roadway, unless, for asbestos tailings.
(a) It is a temporary roadway on an area of asbestos ore deposits (asbestos mine): or
(b) It is a temporary roadway at an active asbestos mill site and is encapsulated with a resinous or bituminous binder. The encapsulated road surface must be maintained at a minimum frequency of once per year to prevent dust emissions; or
(c) It is encapsulated in asphalt concrete meeting the specifications contained in section 401 of Standard Specifications for Construction of Roads and Bridges on Federal Highway Projects, FP-85, 1985, or their equivalent.
(a)
(1) The manufacture of cloth, cord, wicks, tubing, tape, twine, rope, thread, yarn, roving, lap, or other textile materials.
(2) The manufacture of cement products.
(3) The manufacture of fireproofing and insulating materials.
(4) The manufacture of friction products.
(5) The manufacture of paper, millboard, and felt.
(6) The manufacture of floor tile.
(7) The manufacture of paints, coatings, caulks, adhesives, and sealants.
(8) The manufacture of plastics and rubber materials.
(9) The manufacture of chlorine utilizing asbestos diaphragm technology.
(10) The manufacture of shotgun shell wads.
(11) The manufacture of asphalt concrete.
(b)
(1) Discharge no visible emissions to the outside air from these operations or from any building or structure in which they are conducted or from any other fugitive sources; or
(2) Use the methods specified by § 61.152 to clean emissions from these operations containing particulate asbestos material before they escape to, or are vented to, the outside air.
(3) Monitor each potential source of asbestos emissions from any part of the manufacturing facility, including air cleaning devices, process equipment, and buildings housing material processing and handling equipment, at least once each day during daylight hours for visible emissions to the outside air during periods of operation. The monitoring shall be by visual observation of at least 15 seconds duration per source of emissions.
(4) Inspect each air cleaning device at least once each week for proper operation and for changes that signal the potential for malfunctions, including, to the maximum extent possible without dismantling other than opening the device, the presence of tears, holes, and abrasions in filter bags and for dust deposits on the clean side of bags. For air cleaning devices that cannot be inspected on a weekly basis according to this paragraph, submit to the Administrator, and revise as necessary, a written maintenance plan to include, at a minimum, the following:
(i) Maintenance schedule.
(ii) Recordkeeping plan.
(5) Maintain records of the results of visible emission monitoring and air cleaning device inspections using a format similar to that shown in Figures 1 and 2 and include the following.
(i) Date and time of each inspection.
(ii) Presence or absence of visible emissions.
(iii) Condition of fabric filters, including presence of any tears, holes and abrasions.
(iv) Presence of dust deposits on clean side of fabric filters.
(v) Brief description of corrective actions taken, including date and time.
(vi) Daily hours of operation for each air cleaning device.
(6) Furnish upon request, and make available at the affected facility during normal business hours for inspection by the Administrator, all records required under this section.
(7) Retain a copy of all monitoring and inspection records for at least 2 years.
(8) Submit quarterly a copy of the visible emission monitoring records to the Administrator if visible emissions
(a)
(1) In a facility being demolished, all the requirements of paragraphs (b) and (c) of this section apply, except as provided in paragraph (a)(3) of this section, if the combined amount of RACM is
(i) At least 80 linear meters (260 linear feet) on pipes or at least 15 square meters (160 square feet) on other facility components, or
(ii) At least 1 cubic meter (35 cubic feet) off facility components where the length or area could not be measured previously.
(2) In a facility being demolished, only the notification requirements of paragraphs (b)(1), (2), (3)(i) and (iv), and (4)(i) through (vii) and (4)(ix) and (xvi) of this section apply, if the combined amount of RACM is
(i) Less than 80 linear meters (260 linear feet) on pipes and less than 15 square meters (160 square feet) on other facility components, and
(ii) Less than one cubic meter (35 cubic feet) off facility components where the length or area could not be measured previously or there is no asbestos.
(3) If the facility is being demolished under an order of a State or local government agency, issued because the facility is structurally unsound and in danger of imminent collapse, only the requirements of paragraphs (b)(1), (b)(2), (b)(3)(iii), (b)(4) (except (b)(4)(viii)), (b)(5), and (c)(4) through (c)(9) of this section apply.
(4) In a facility being renovated, including any individual nonscheduled renovation operation, all the requirements of paragraphs (b) and (c) of this section apply if the combined amount of RACM to be stripped, removed, dislodged, cut, drilled, or similarly disturbed is
(i) At least 80 linear meters (260 linear feet) on pipes or at least 15 square meters (160 square feet) on other facility components, or
(ii) At least 1 cubic meter (35 cubic feet) off facility components where the length or area could not be measured previously.
(iii) To determine whether paragraph (a)(4) of this section applies to planned renovation operations involving individual nonscheduled operations, predict the combined additive amount of RACM to be removed or stripped during a calendar year of January 1 through December 31.
(iv) To determine whether paragraph (a)(4) of this section applies to emergency renovation operations, estimate the combined amount of RACM to be removed or stripped as a result of the sudden, unexpected event that necessitated the renovation.
(5) Owners or operators of demolition and renovation operations are exempt from the requirements of §§ 61.05(a), 61.07, and 61.09.
(b)
(1) Provide the Administrator with written notice of intention to demolish or renovate. Delivery of the notice by U.S. Postal Service, commercial delivery service, or hand delivery is acceptable.
(2) Update notice, as necessary, including when the amount of asbestos affected changes by at least 20 percent.
(3) Postmark or deliver the notice as follows:
(i) At least 10 working days before asbestos stripping or removal work or any other activity begins (such as site
(ii) At least 10 working days before the end of the calendar year preceding the year for which notice is being given for renovations described in paragraph (a)(4)(iii) of this section.
(iii) As early as possible before, but not later than, the following working day if the operation is a demolition ordered according to paragraph (a)(3) of this section or, if the operation is a renovation described in paragraph (a)(4)(iv) of this section.
(iv) For asbestos stripping or removal work in a demolition or renovation operation, described in paragraphs (a) (1) and (4) (except (a)(4)(iii) and (a)(4)(iv)) of this section, and for a demolition described in paragraph (a)(2) of this section, that will begin on a date other than the one contained in the original notice, notice of the new start date must be provided to the Administrator as follows:
(A) When the asbestos stripping or removal operation or demolition operation covered by this paragraph will begin after the date contained in the notice,
(
(
(B) When the asbestos stripping or removal operation or demolition operation covered by this paragraph will begin on a date earlier than the original start date,
(
(
(C) In no event shall an operation covered by this paragraph begin on a date other than the date contained in the written notice of the new start date.
(4) Include the following in the notice:
(i) An indication of whether the notice is the original or a revised notification.
(ii) Name, address, and telephone number of both the facility owner and operator and the asbestos removal contractor owner or operator.
(iii) Type of operation: demolition or renovation.
(iv) Description of the facility or affected part of the facility including the size (square meters [square feet] and number of floors), age, and present and prior use of the facility.
(v) Procedure, including analytical methods, employed to detect the presence of RACM and Category I and Category II nonfriable ACM.
(vi) Estimate of the approximate amount of RACM to be removed from the facility in terms of length of pipe in linear meters (linear feet), surface area in square meters (square feet) on other facility components, or volume in cubic meters (cubic feet) if off the facility components. Also, estimate the approximate amount of Category I and Category II nonfriable ACM in the affected part of the facility that will not be removed before demolition.
(vii) Location and street address (including building number or name and floor or room number, if appropriate), city, county, and state, of the facility being demolished or renovated.
(viii) Scheduled starting and completion dates of asbestos removal work (or any other activity, such as site preparation that would break up, dislodge, or similarly disturb asbestos material) in a demolition or renovation; planned renovation operations involving individual nonscheduled operations shall only include the beginning and ending dates of the report period as described in paragraph (a)(4)(iii) of this section.
(ix) Scheduled starting and completion dates of demolition or renovation.
(x) Description of planned demolition or renovation work to be performed and method(s) to be employed, including demolition or renovation techniques to be used and description of affected facility components.
(xi) Description of work practices and engineering controls to be used to comply with the requirements of this subpart, including asbestos removal and waste-handling emission control procedures.
(xii) Name and location of the waste disposal site where the asbestos-containing waste material will be deposited.
(xiii) A certification that at least one person trained as required by paragraph (c)(8) of this section will supervise the stripping and removal described by this notification. This requirement shall become effective 1 year after promulgation of this regulation.
(xiv) For facilities described in paragraph (a)(3) of this section, the name, title, and authority of the State or local government representative who has ordered the demolition, the date that the order was issued, and the date on which the demolition was ordered to begin. A copy of the order shall be attached to the notification.
(xv) For emergency renovations described in paragraph (a)(4)(iv) of this section, the date and hour that the emergency occurred, a description of the sudden, unexpected event, and an explanation of how the event caused an unsafe condition, or would cause equipment damage or an unreasonable financial burden.
(xvi) Description of procedures to be followed in the event that unexpected RACM is found or Category II nonfriable ACM becomes crumbled, pul-ver-ized, or reduced to powder.
(xvii) Name, address, and telephone number of the waste transporter.
(5) The information required in paragraph (b)(4) of this section must be reported using a form similiar to that shown in Figure 3.
(c)
(1) Remove all RACM from a facility being demolished or renovated before any activity begins that would break up, dislodge, or similarly disturb the material or preclude access to the material for subsequent removal. RACM need not be removed before demolition if:
(i) It is Category I nonfriable ACM that is not in poor condition and is not friable.
(ii) It is on a facility component that is encased in concrete or other similarly hard material and is adequately wet whenever exposed during demolition; or
(iii) It was not accessible for testing and was, therefore, not discovered until after demolition began and, as a result of the demolition, the material cannot be safely removed. If not removed for safety reasons, the exposed RACM and any asbestos-contaminated debris must be treated as asbestos-containing waste material and adequately wet at all times until disposed of.
(iv) They are Category II nonfriable ACM and the probability is low that the materials will become crumbled, pulverized, or reduced to powder during demolition.
(2) When a facility component that contains, is covered with, or is coated with RACM is being taken out of the facility as a unit or in sections:
(i) Adequately wet all RACM exposed during cutting or disjoining operations; and
(ii) Carefully lower each unit or section to the floor and to ground level, not dropping, throwing, sliding, or otherwise damaging or disturbing the RACM.
(3) When RACM is stripped from a facility component while it remains in place in the facility, adequately wet the RACM during the stripping operation.
(i) In renovation operations, wetting is not required if:
(A) The owner or operator has obtained prior written approval from the Administrator based on a written application that wetting to comply with
(B) The owner or operator uses of the following emission control methods:
(
(
(
(ii) In renovation operations where wetting would result in equipment damage or a safety hazard, and the methods allowed in paragraph (c)(3)(i) of this section cannot be used, another method may be used after obtaining written approval from the Administrator based upon a determination that it is equivalent to wetting in controlling emissions or to the methods allowed in paragraph (c)(3)(i) of this section.
(iii) A copy of the Administrator's written approval shall be kept at the worksite and made available for inspection.
(4) After a facility component covered with, coated with, or containing RACM has been taken out of the facility as a unit or in sections pursuant to paragraph (c)(2) of this section, it shall be stripped or contained in leak-tight wrapping, except as described in paragraph (c)(5) of this section. If stripped, either:
(i) Adequately wet the RACM during stripping; or
(ii) Use a local exhaust ventilation and collection system designed and operated to capture the particulate asbestos material produced by the stripping. The system must exhibit no visible emissions to the outside air or be designed and operated in accordance with the requirements in § 61.152.
(5) For large facility components such as reactor vessels, large tanks, and steam generators, but not beams (which must be handled in accordance with paragraphs (c)(2), (3), and (4) of this section), the RACM is not required to be stripped if the following requirements are met:
(i) The component is removed, transported, stored, disposed of, or reused without disturbing or damaging the RACM.
(ii) The component is encased in a leak-tight wrapping.
(iii) The leak-tight wrapping is labeled according to § 61.149(d)(1)(i), (ii), and (iii) during all loading and unloading operations and during storage.
(6) For all RACM, including material that has been removed or stripped:
(i) Adequately wet the material and ensure that it remains wet until collected and contained or treated in preparation for disposal in accordance with § 61.150; and
(ii) Carefully lower the material to the ground and floor, not dropping, throwing, sliding, or otherwise damaging or disturbing the material.
(iii) Transport the material to the ground via leak-tight chutes or containers if it has been removed or stripped more than 50 feet above ground level and was not removed as units or in sections.
(iv) RACM contained in leak-tight wrapping that has been removed in accordance with paragraphs (c)(4) and (c)(3)(i)(B)(
(7) When the temperature at the point of wetting is below 0 °C (32 °F):
(i) The owner or operator need not comply with paragraph (c)(2)(i) and the wetting provisions of paragraph (c)(3) of this section.
(ii) The owner or operator shall remove facility components containing, coated with, or covered with RACM as units or in sections to the maximum extent possible.
(iii) During periods when wetting operations are suspended due to freezing temperatures, the owner or operator must record the temperature in the area containing the facility components at the beginning, middle, and end of each workday and keep daily temperature records available for inspection by the Administrator during normal business hours at the demolition
(8) Effective 1 year after promulgation of this regulation, no RACM shall be stripped, removed, or otherwise handled or disturbed at a facility regulated by this section unless at least one on-site representative, such as a foreman or management-level person or other authorized representative, trained in the provisions of this regulation and the means of complying with them, is present. Every 2 years, the trained on-site individual shall receive refresher training in the provisions of this regulation. The required training shall include as a minimum: applicability; notifications; material identification; control procedures for removals including, at least, wetting, local exhaust ventilation, negative pressure enclosures, glove-bag procedures, and High Efficiency Particulate Air (HEPA) filters; waste disposal work practices; reporting and recordkeeping; and asbestos hazards and worker protection. Evidence that the required training has been completed shall be posted and made available for inspection by the Administrator at the demolition or renovation site.
(9) For facilities described in paragraph (a)(3) of this section, adequately wet the portion of the facility that contains RACM during the wrecking operation.
(10) If a facility is demolished by intentional burning, all RACM including Category I and Category II nonfriable ACM must be removed in accordance with the NESHAP before burning.
The owner or operator of an operation in which asbestos-containing materials are spray applied shall comply with the following requirements:
(a) For spray-on application on buildings, structures, pipes, and conduits, do
(b) For spray-on application of materials that contain more than 1 percent asbestos as determined using the method specified in appendix E, subpart E, 40 CFR part 763, section 1, Polarized Light Microscopy, on equipment and machinery, except as provided in paragraph (c) of this section:
(1) Notify the Administrator at least 20 days before beginning the spraying operation. Include the following information in the notice:
(i) Name and address of owner or operator.
(ii) Location of spraying operation.
(iii) Procedures to be followed to meet the requirements of this paragraph.
(2) Discharge no visible emissions to the outside air from spray-on application of the asbestos-containing material or use the methods specified by § 61.152 to clean emissions containing particulate asbestos material before they escape to, or are vented to, the outside air.
(c) The requirements of paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section do not apply to the spray-on application of materials where the asbestos fibers in the materials are encapsulated with a bituminous or resinous binder during spraying and the materials are not friable after drying.
(d) Owners or operators of sources subject to this paragraph are exempt from the requirements of §§ 61.05(a), 61.07 and 61.09.
(a)
(1) The fabrication of cement building products.
(2) The fabrication of friction products, except those operations that primarily install asbestos friction materials on motor vehicles.
(3) The fabrication of cement or silicate board for ventilation hoods; ovens; electrical panels; laboratory furniture, bulkheads, partitions, and ceilings for marine construction; and flow control devices for the molten metal industry.
(b)
(1) Discharge no visible emissions to the outside air from any of the operations or from any building or structure in which they are conducted or from any other fugitive sources; or
(2) Use the methods specified by § 61.152 to clean emissions containing particulate asbestos material before they escape to, or are vented to, the outside air.
(3) Monitor each potential source of asbestos emissions from any part of the fabricating facility, including air cleaning devices, process equipment, and buildings that house equipment for material processing and handling, at least once each day, during daylight hours, for visible emissions to the outside air during periods of operation. The monitoring shall be by visual observation of at least 15 seconds duration per source of emissions.
(4) Inspect each air cleaning device at least once each week for proper operation and for changes that signal the potential for malfunctions, including, to the maximum extent possible without dismantling other than opening the device, the presence of tears, holes, and abrasions in filter bags and for dust deposits on the clean side of bags. For air cleaning devices that cannot be inspected on a weekly basis according to this paragraph, submit to the Administrator, and revise as necessary, a written maintenance plan to include, at a minimum, the following:
(i) Maintenance schedule.
(ii) Recordkeeping plan.
(5) Maintain records of the results of visible emission monitoring and air cleaning device inspections using a format similar to that shown in Figures 1 and 2 and include the following:
(i) Date and time of each inspection.
(ii) Presence or absence of visible emissions.
(iii) Condition of fabric filters, including presence of any tears, holes, and abrasions.
(iv) Presence of dust deposits on clean side of fabric filters.
(v) Brief description of corrective actions taken, including date and time.
(vi) Daily hours of operation for each air cleaning device.
(6) Furnish upon request and make available at the affected facility during normal business hours for inspection by the Administrator, all records required under this section.
(7) Retain a copy of all monitoring and inspection records for at least 2 years.
(8) Submit quarterly a copy of the visible emission monitoring records to the Administrator if visible emissions occurred during the report period. Quarterly reports shall be postmarked by the 30th day following the end of the calendar quarter.
No owner or operator of a facility may install or reinstall on a facility component any insulating materials that contain commercial asbestos if the materials are either molded and friable or wet-applied and friable after drying. The provisions of this section do not apply to spray-applied insulating materials regulated under § 61.146.
Each owner or operator of any source covered under the provisions of § 61.142 shall:
(a) Deposit all asbestos-containing waste material at a waste disposal site operated in accordance with the provisions of § 61.154; and
(b) Discharge no visible emissions to the outside air from the transfer of control device asbestos waste to the tailings conveyor, or use the methods specified by § 61.152 to clean emissions containing particulate asbestos material before they escape to, or are vented to, the outside air. Dispose of the asbestos waste from control devices in accordance with § 61.150(a) or paragraph (c) of this section; and
(c) Discharge no visible emissions to the outside air during the collection, processing, packaging, or on-site transporting of any asbestos-containing waste material, or use one of the disposal methods specified in paragraphs (c) (1) or (2) of this section, as follows:
(1) Use a wetting agent as follows:
(i) Adequately mix all asbestos-containing waste material with a wetting agent recommended by the manufacturer of the agent to effectively wet dust and tailings, before depositing the material at a waste disposal site. Use the agent as recommended for the particular dust by the manufacturer of the agent.
(ii) Discharge no visible emissions to the outside air from the wetting operation or use the methods specified by § 61.152 to clean emissions containing particulate asbestos material before they escape to, or are vented to, the outside air.
(iii) Wetting may be suspended when the ambient temperature at the waste disposal site is less than −9.5
(2) Use an alternative emission control and waste treatment method that has received prior written approval by the Administrator. To obtain approval for an alternative method, a written application must be submitted to the Administrator demonstrating that the following criteria are met:
(i) The alternative method will control asbestos emissions equivalent to currently required methods.
(ii) The suitability of the alternative method for the intended application.
(iii) The alternative method will not violate other regulations.
(iv) The alternative method will not result in increased water pollution, land pollution, or occupational hazards.
(d) When waste is transported by vehicle to a disposal site:
(1) Mark vehicles used to transport asbestos-containing waste material during the loading and unloading of the waste so that the signs are visible. The markings must:
(i) Be displayed in such a manner and location that a person can easily read the legend.
(ii) Conform to the requirements for 51 cm × 36 cm (20 in × 14 in) upright format signs specified in 29 CFR 1910.145(d)(4) and this paragraph; and
(iii) Display the following legend in the lower panel with letter sizes and styles of a visibility at least equal to those specified in this paragraph.
(2) For off-site disposal, provide a copy of the waste shipment record, described in paragraph (e)(1) of this section, to the disposal site owner or operator at the same time as the asbestos-containing waste material is delivered to the disposal site.
(e) For all asbestos-containing waste material transported off the facility site:
(1) Maintain asbestos waste shipment records, using a form similar to that shown in Figure 4, and include the following information:
(i) The name, address, and telephone number of the waste generator.
(ii) The name and address of the local, State, or EPA Regional agency responsible for administering the asbestos NESHAP program.
(iii) The quantity of the asbestos-containing waste material in cubic meters (cubic yards).
(iv) The name and telephone number of the disposal site operator.
(v) The name and physical site location of the disposal site.
(vi) The date transported.
(vii) The name, address, and telephone number of the transporter(s).
(viii) A certification that the contents of this consignment are fully and accurately described by proper shipping name and are classified, packed, marked, and labeled, and are in all respects in proper condition for transport by highway according to applicable international and government regulations.
(2) For waste shipments where a copy of the waste shipment record, signed by the owner or operator of the designated disposal site, is not received by the waste generator within 35 days of the date the waste was accepted by the initial transporter, contact the transporter and/or the owner or operator of the designated disposal site to determine the status of the waste shipment.
(3) Report in writing to the local, State, or EPA Regional office responsible for administering the asbestos NESHAP program for the waste generator if a copy of the waste shipment record, signed by the owner or operator of the designated waste disposal site, is not received by the waste generator within 45 days of the date the waste was accepted by the initial transporter. Include in the report the following information:
(i) A copy of the waste shipment record for which a confirmation of delivery was not received, and
(ii) A cover letter signed by the waste generator explaining the efforts taken to locate the asbestos waste shipment and the results of those efforts.
(4) Retain a copy of all waste shipment records, including a copy of the waste shipment record signed by the owner or operator of the designated waste disposal site, for at least 2 years.
(f) Furnish upon request, and make available for inspection by the Administrator, all records required under this section.
Each owner or operator of any source covered under the provisions of §§ 61.144, 61.145, 61.146, and 61.147 shall comply with the following provisions:
(a) Discharge no visible emissions to the outside air during the collection, processing (including incineration), pack-ag-ing, or transporting of any asbestos-containing waste material generated by the source, or use one of the emission control and waste treatment methods specified in paragraphs (a) (1) through (4) of this section.
(1) Adequately wet asbestos-containing waste material as follows:
(i) Mix control device asbestos waste to form a slurry; adequately wet other asbestos-containing waste material; and
(ii) Discharge no visible emissions to the outside air from collection, mixing, wetting, and handling operations, or use the methods specified by § 61.152 to clean emissions containing particulate asbestos material before they escape to, or are vented to, the outside air; and
(iii) After wetting, seal all asbestos-containing waste material in leak-tight containers while wet; or, for materials that will not fit into containers without additional breaking, put materials into leak-tight wrapping; and
(iv) Label the containers or wrapped materials specified in paragraph (a)(1)(iii) of this section using warning labels specified by Occupational Safety and Health Standards of the Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) under 29 CFR 1910.1001(j)(2) or 1926.58(k)(2)(iii). The labels shall be printed in letters of sufficient size and contrast so as to be readily visible and legible.
(v) For asbestos-containing waste material to be transported off the facility site, label containers or wrapped materials with the name of the waste generator and the location at which the waste was generated.
(2) Process asbestos-containing waste material into nonfriable forms as follows:
(i) Form all asbestos-containing waste material into nonfriable pellets or other shapes;
(ii) Discharge no visible emissions to the outside air from collection and processing operations, including incineration, or use the method specified by § 61.152 to clean emissions containing particulate asbestos material before they escape to, or are vented to, the outside air.
(3) For facilities demolished where the RACM is not removed prior to demolition according to §§ 61.145(c)(1) (i), (ii), (iii), and (iv) or for facilities demolished according to § 61.145(c)(9), adequately wet asbestos-containing waste material at all times after demolition and keep wet during handling and loading for transport to a disposal site. Asbestos-containing waste materials covered by this paragraph do not have to be sealed in leak-tight containers or wrapping but may be transported and disposed of in bulk.
(4) Use an alternative emission control and waste treatment method that has received prior approval by the Administrator according to the procedure described in § 61.149(c)(2).
(5) As applied to demolition and renovation, the requirements of paragraph (a) of this section do not apply to Category I nonfriable ACM waste and Category II nonfriable ACM waste that did not become crumbled, pulverized, or reduced to powder.
(b) All asbestos-containing waste material shall be deposited as soon as is practical by the waste generator at:
(1) A waste disposal site operated in accordance with the provisions of § 61.154, or
(2) An EPA-approved site that converts RACM and asbestos-containing waste material into nonasbestos (asbestos-free) material according to the provisions of § 61.155.
(3) The requirements of paragraph (b) of this section do not apply to Category I nonfriable ACM that is not RACM.
(c) Mark vehicles used to transport asbestos-containing waste material during the loading and unloading of waste so that the signs are visible. The markings must conform to the requirements of §§ 61.149(d)(1) (i), (ii), and (iii).
(d) For all asbestos-containing waste material transported off the facility site:
(1) Maintain waste shipment records, using a form similar to that shown in Figure 4, and include the following information:
(i) The name, address, and telephone number of the waste generator.
(ii) The name and address of the local, State, or EPA Regional office responsible for administering the asbestos NESHAP program.
(iii) The approximate quantity in cubic meters (cubic yards).
(iv) The name and telephone number of the disposal site operator.
(v) The name and physical site location of the disposal site.
(vi) The date transported.
(vii) The name, address, and telephone number of the transporter(s).
(viii) A certification that the contents of this consignment are fully and accurately described by proper shipping name and are classified, packed, marked, and labeled, and are in all respects in proper condition for transport by highway according to applicable international and government regulations.
(2) Provide a copy of the waste shipment record, described in paragraph (d)(1) of this section, to the disposal site owners or operators at the same time as the asbestos-containing waste material is delivered to the disposal site.
(3) For waste shipments where a copy of the waste shipment record, signed by the owner or operator of the designated disposal site, is not received by the waste generator within 35 days of the date the waste was accepted by the initial transporter, contact the transporter and/or the owner or operator of the designated disposal site to determine the status of the waste shipment.
(4) Report in writing to the local, State, or EPA Regional office responsible for administering the asbestos NESHAP program for the waste generator if a copy of the waste shipment record, signed by the owner or operator of the designated waste disposal site, is not received by the waste generator within 45 days of the date the waste
(i) A copy of the waste shipment record for which a confirmation of delivery was not received, and
(ii) A cover letter signed by the waste generator explaining the efforts taken to locate the asbestos waste shipment and the results of those efforts.
(5) Retain a copy of all waste shipment records, including a copy of the waste shipment record signed by the owner or operator of the designated waste disposal site, for at least 2 years.
(e) Furnish upon request, and make available for inspection by the Administrator, all records required under this section.
Each owner or operator of any inactive waste disposal site that was operated by sources covered under § 61.142, 61.144, or 61.147 and received deposits of asbestos-containing waste material generated by the sources, shall:
(a) Comply with one of the following:
(1) Either discharge no visible emissions to the outside air from an inactive waste disposal site subject to this paragraph; or
(2) Cover the asbestos-containing waste material with at least 15 centimeters (6 inches) of compacted nonasbestos-containing material, and grow and maintain a cover of vegetation on the area adequate to prevent exposure of the asbestos-containing waste material. In desert areas where vegetation would be difficult to maintain, at least 8 additional centimeters (3 inches) of well-graded, nonasbestos crushed rock may be placed on top of the final cover instead of vegetation and maintained to prevent emissions; or
(3) Cover the asbestos-containing waste material with at least 60 centimeters (2 feet) of compacted non-as-best-os-containing material, and maintain it to prevent exposure of the asbestos-containing waste; or
(4) For inactive waste disposal sites for asbestos tailings, a resinous or petroleum-based dust suppression agent that effectively binds dust to control surface air emissions may be used instead of the methods in paragraphs (a) (1), (2), and (3) of this section. Use the agent in the manner and frequency recommended for the particular asbestos tailings by the manufacturer of the dust suppression agent to achieve and maintain dust control. Obtain prior written approval of the Administrator to use other equally effective dust suppression agents. For purposes of this paragraph, any used, spent, or other waste oil is not considered a dust suppression agent.
(b) Unless a natural barrier adequately deters access by the general public, install and maintain warning signs and fencing as follows, or comply with paragraph (a)(2) or (a)(3) of this section.
(1) Display warning signs at all entrances and at intervals of 100 m (328 ft) or less along the property line of the site or along the perimeter of the sections of the site where asbestos-containing waste material was deposited. The warning signs must:
(i) Be posted in such a manner and location that a person can easily read the legend; and
(ii) Conform to the requirements for 51 cm×36 cm (20
(iii) Display the following legend in the lower panel with letter sizes and styles of a visibility at least equal to those specified in this paragraph.
(2) Fence the perimeter of the site in a manner adequate to deter access by the general public.
(3) When requesting a determination on whether a natural barrier adequately deters public access, supply information enabling the Administrator
(c) The owner or operator may use an alternative control method that has received prior approval of the Administrator rather than comply with the requirements of paragraph (a) or (b) of this section.
(d) Notify the Administrator in writing at least 45 days prior to excavating or otherwise disturbing any asbestos-containing waste material that has been deposited at a waste disposal site under this section, and follow the procedures specified in the notification. If the excavation will begin on a date other than the one contained in the original notice, notice of the new start date must be provided to the Administrator at least 10 working days before excavation begins and in no event shall excavation begin earlier than the date specified in the original notification. Include the following information in the notice:
(1) Scheduled starting and completion dates.
(2) Reason for disturbing the waste.
(3) Procedures to be used to control emissions during the excavation, storage, transport, and ultimate disposal of the excavated asbestos-containing waste material. If deemed necessary, the Administrator may require changes in the emission control procedures to be used.
(4) Location of any temporary storage site and the final disposal site.
(e) Within 60 days of a site becoming inactive and after the effective date of this subpart, record, in accordance with State law, a notation on the deed to the facility property and on any other instrument that would normally be examined during a title search; this notation will in perpetuity notify any potential purchaser of the property that:
(1) The land has been used for the disposal of asbestos-containing waste material;
(2) The survey plot and record of the location and quantity of asbestos-containing waste disposed of within the disposal site required in § 61.154(f) have been filed with the Administrator; and
(3) The site is subject to 40 CFR part 61, subpart M.
(a) The owner or operator who uses air cleaning, as specified in §§ 61.142(a), 61.144(b)(2), 61.145(c)(3)(i)(B)(
(1) Use fabric filter collection devices, except as noted in paragraph (b) of this section, doing all of the following:
(i) Ensuring that the airflow permeability, as determined by ASTM Method D737-75, does not exceed 9 m
(ii) Ensuring that felted fabric weighs at least 475 grams per square meter (14 ounces per square yard) and is at least 1.6 millimeters (one-sixteenth inch) thick throughout; and
(iii) Avoiding the use of synthetic fabrics that contain fill yarn other than that which is spun.
(2) Properly install, use, operate, and maintain all air-cleaning equipment authorized by this section. Bypass devices may be used only during upset or emergency conditions and then only for so long as it takes to shut down the operation generating the particulate asbestos material.
(3) For fabric filter collection devices installed after January 10, 1989, provide for easy inspection for faulty bags.
(b) There are the following exceptions to paragraph (a)(1):
(1) After January 10, 1989, if the use of fabric creates a fire or explosion hazard, or the Administrator determines that a fabric filter is not feasible, the Administrator may authorize as a substitute the use of wet collectors designed to operate with a unit contacting energy of at least 9.95 kilopascals (40 inches water gage pressure).
(2) Use a HEPA filter that is certified to be at least 99.97 percent efficient for 0.3 micron particles.
(3) The Administrator may authorize the use of filtering equipment other than described in paragraphs (a)(1) and (b)(1) and (2) of this section if the owner or operator demonstrates to the Administrator's satisfaction that it is equivalent to the described equipment in filtering particulate asbestos material.
(a) Any new source to which this subpart applies (with the exception of sources subject to §§ 61.143, 61.145, 61.146, and 61.148), which has an initial startup date preceding the effective date of this revision, shall provide the following information to the Administrator postmarked or delivered within 90 days of the effective date. In the case of a new source that does not have an initial startup date preceding the effective date, the information shall be provided, postmarked or delivered, within 90 days of the initial startup date. Any owner or operator of an existing source shall provide the following information to the Administrator within 90 days of the effective date of this subpart unless the owner or operator of the existing source has previously provided this information to the Administrator. Any changes in the information provided by any existing source shall be provided to the Administrator, postmarked or delivered, within 30 days after the change.
(1) A description of the emission control equipment used for each process; and
(i) If the fabric device uses a woven fabric, the airflow permeability in m
(ii) If the fabric filter device uses a felted fabric, the density in g/m
(2) If a fabric filter device is used to control emissions,
(i) The airflow permeability in m
(ii) If the fabric filter device uses a felted fabric, the density in g/m
(3) If a HEPA filter is used to control emissions, the certified efficiency.
(4) For sources subject to §§ 61.149 and 61.150:
(i) A brief description of each process that generates asbestos-containing waste material; and
(ii) The average volume of asbestos-containing waste material disposed of, measured in m
(iii) The emission control methods used in all stages of waste disposal; and
(iv) The type of disposal site or incineration site used for ultimate disposal, the name of the site operator, and the name and location of the disposal site.
(5) For sources subject to §§ 61.151 and 61.154:
(i) A brief description of the site; and
(ii) The method or methods used to comply with the standard, or alternative procedures to be used.
(b) The information required by paragraph (a) of this section must accompany the information required by § 61.10. Active waste disposal sites subject to § 61.154 shall also comply with this provision. Roadways, demolition and renovation, spraying, and insulating materials are exempted from the requirements of § 61.10(a). The information described in this section must be reported using the format of appendix A of this part as a guide.
Each owner or operator of an active waste disposal site that receives asbestos-containing waste material from a source covered under § 61.149, 61.150, or 61.155 shall meet the requirements of this section:
(a) Either there must be no visible emissions to the outside air from any active waste disposal site where asbestos-containing waste material has been deposited, or the requirements of paragraph (c) or (d) of this section must be met.
(b) Unless a natural barrier adequately deters access by the general public, either warning signs and fencing must be installed and maintained as follows, or the requirements of paragraph (c)(1) of this section must be met.
(1) Warning signs must be displayed at all entrances and at intervals of 100 m (330 ft) or less along the property line of the site or along the perimeter of the sections of the site where asbestos-containing waste material is deposited. The warning signs must:
(i) Be posted in such a manner and location that a person can easily read the legend; and
(ii) Conform to the requirements of 51 cm × 36 cm (20
(iii) Display the following legend in the lower panel with letter sizes and styles of a visibility at least equal to those specified in this paragraph.
(2) The perimeter of the disposal site must be fenced in a manner adequate to deter access by the general public.
(3) Upon request and supply of appropriate information, the Administrator will determine whether a fence or a natural barrier adequately deters access by the general public.
(c) Rather than meet the no visible emission requirement of paragraph (a) of this section, at the end of each operating day, or at least once every 24-hour period while the site is in continuous operation, the asbestos-containing waste material that has been deposited at the site during the operating day or previous 24-hour period shall:
(1) Be covered with at least 15 centimeters (6 inches) of compacted non-as-best-os-containing material, or
(2) Be covered with a resinous or petroleum-based dust suppression agent that effectively binds dust and controls wind erosion. Such an agent shall be used in the manner and frequency recommended for the particular dust by the dust suppression agent manufacturer to achieve and maintain dust control. Other equally effective dust suppression agents may be used upon prior approval by the Administrator. For purposes of this paragraph, any used, spent, or other waste oil is not considered a dust suppression agent.
(d) Rather than meet the no visible emission requirement of paragraph (a) of this section, use an alternative emissions control method that has received prior written approval by the Administrator according to the procedures described in § 61.149(c)(2).
(e) For all asbestos-containing waste material received, the owner or operator of the active waste disposal site shall:
(1) Maintain waste shipment records, using a form similar to that shown in Figure 4, and include the following information:
(i) The name, address, and telephone number of the waste generator.
(ii) The name, address, and telephone number of the transporter(s).
(iii) The quantity of the asbestos-containing waste material in cubic meters (cubic yards).
(iv) The presence of improperly enclosed or uncovered waste, or any asbestos-containing waste material not sealed in leak-tight containers. Report in writing to the local, State, or EPA Regional office responsible for administering the asbestos NESHAP program for the waste generator (identified in the waste shipment record), and, if different, the local, State, or EPA Regional office responsible for administering the asbestos NESHAP program for the disposal site, by the following working day, the presence of a significant amount of improperly enclosed or uncovered waste. Submit a copy of the waste shipment record along with the report.
(v) The date of the receipt.
(2) As soon as possible and no longer than 30 days after receipt of the waste, send a copy of the signed waste shipment record to the waste generator.
(3) Upon discovering a discrepancy between the quantity of waste designated on the waste shipment records and the quantity actually received, attempt to reconcile the discrepancy with the waste generator. If the discrepancy is not resolved within 15 days after receiving the waste, immediately report in writing to the local, State, or EPA Regional office responsible for administering the asbestos NESHAP program for the waste generator (identified in the waste shipment record), and, if different, the local, State, or EPA Regional office responsible for administering the asbestos NESHAP program for the disposal site. Describe the discrepancy and attempts to reconcile it, and submit a copy of the waste shipment record along with the report.
(4) Retain a copy of all records and reports required by this paragraph for at least 2 years.
(f) Maintain, until closure, records of the location, depth and area, and quantity in cubic meters (cubic yards) of asbestos-containing waste material within the disposal site on a map or diagram of the disposal area.
(g) Upon closure, comply with all the provisions of § 61.151.
(h) Submit to the Administrator, upon closure of the facility, a copy of records of asbestos waste disposal locations and quantities.
(i) Furnish upon request, and make available during normal business hours for inspection by the Administrator, all records required under this section.
(j) Notify the Administrator in writing at least 45 days prior to excavating or otherwise disturbing any asbestos-containing waste material that has been deposited at a waste disposal site and is covered. If the excavation will begin on a date other than the one contained in the original notice, notice of the new start date must be provided to the Administrator at least 10 working days before excavation begins and in no event shall excavation begin earlier than the date specified in the original notification. Include the following information in the notice:
(1) Scheduled starting and completion dates.
(2) Reason for disturbing the waste.
(3) Procedures to be used to control emissions during the excavation, storage, transport, and ultimate disposal of the excavated asbestos-containing waste material. If deemed necessary, the Administrator may require changes in the emission control procedures to be used.
(4) Location of any temporary storage site and the final disposal site.
Each owner or operator of an operation that converts RACM and asbestos-containing waste material into nonasbestos (asbestos-free) material shall:
(a) Obtain the prior written approval of the Administrator to construct the facility. To obtain approval, the owner or operator shall provide the Administrator with the following information:
(1) Application to construct pursuant to § 61.07.
(2) In addition to the information requirements of § 61.07(b)(3), a
(i) Description of waste feed handling and temporary storage.
(ii) Description of process operating conditions.
(iii) Description of the handling and temporary storage of the end product.
(iv) Description of the protocol to be followed when analyzing output materials by transmission electron microscopy.
(3) Performance test protocol, including provisions for obtaining information required under paragraph (b) of this section.
(4) The Administrator may require that a demonstration of the process be performed prior to approval of the application to construct.
(b) Conduct a start-up performance test. Test results shall include:
(1) A detailed description of the types and quantities of nonasbestos material,
(2) Results of analyses, using polarized light microscopy, that document the asbestos content of the wastes processed.
(3) Results of analyses, using transmission electron microscopy, that document that the output materials are free of asbestos. Samples for analysis are to be collected as 8-hour composite samples (one 200-gram (7-ounce) sample per hour), beginning with the initial introduction of RACM or asbestos-containing waste material and continuing until the end of the performance test.
(4) A description of operating parameters, such as temperature and residence time, defining the full range over which the process is expected to operate to produce nonasbestos (asbestos-free) materials. Specify the limits for each operating parameter within which the process will produce nonasbestos (asbestos-free) materials.
(5) The length of the test.
(c) During the initial 90 days of operation,
(1) Continuously monitor and log the operating parameters identified during start-up performance tests that are intended to ensure the production of nonasbestos (asbestos-free) output material.
(2) Monitor input materials to ensure that they are consistent with the test feed materials described during start-up performance tests in paragraph (b)(1) of this section.
(3) Collect and analyze samples, taken as 10-day composite samples (one 200-gram (7-ounce) sample collected every 8 hours of operation) of all output material for the presence of asbestos. Composite samples may be for fewer than 10 days. Transmission electron microscopy (TEM) shall be used to analyze the output material for the presence of asbestos. During the initial 90-day period, all output materials must be stored on-site until analysis shows the material to be asbestos-free or disposed of as asbestos-containing waste material according to § 61.150.
(d) After the initial 90 days of operation,
(1) Continuously monitor and record the operating parameters identified during start-up performance testing and any subsequent performance testing. Any output produced during a period of deviation from the range of operating conditions established to ensure the production of nonasbestos (asbestos-free) output materials shall be:
(i) Disposed of as asbestos-containing waste material according to § 61.150, or
(ii) Recycled as waste feed during process operation within the established range of operating conditions, or
(iii) Stored temporarily on-site in a leak-tight container until analyzed for asbestos content. Any product material that is not asbestos-free shall be either disposed of as asbestos-containing waste material or recycled as waste feed to the process.
(2) Collect and analyze monthly composite samples (one 200-gram (7-ounce) sample collected every 8 hours of operation) of the output material. Transmission electron microscopy shall be used to analyze the output material for the presence of asbestos.
(e) Discharge no visible emissions to the outside air from any part of the operation, or use the methods specified by § 61.152 to clean emissions containing particulate asbestos material before they escape to, or are vented to, the outside air.
(f) Maintain records on-site and include the following information:
(1) Results of start-up performance testing and all subsequent performance testing, including operating parameters, feed characteristic, and analyses of output materials.
(2) Results of the composite analyses required during the initial 90 days of operation under § 61.155(c).
(3) Results of the monthly composite analyses required under § 61.155(d).
(4) Results of continuous monitoring and logs of process operating parameters required under § 61.155 (c) and (d).
(5) The information on waste shipments received as required in § 61.154(e).
(6) For output materials where no analyses were performed to determine the presence of asbestos, record the name and location of the purchaser or
(7) Retain records required by paragraph (f) of this section for at least 2 years.
(g) Submit the following reports to the Administrator:
(1) A report for each analysis of product composite samples performed during the initial 90 days of operation.
(2) A quarterly report, including the following information concerning activities during each consecutive 3-month period:
(i) Results of analyses of monthly product composite samples.
(ii) A description of any deviation from the operating parameters established during performance testing, the duration of the deviation, and steps taken to correct the deviation.
(iii) Disposition of any product produced during a period of deviation, including whether it was recycled, disposed of as asbestos-containing waste material, or stored temporarily on-site until analyzed for asbestos content.
(iv) The information on waste disposal activities as required in § 61.154(f).
(h) Nonasbestos (asbestos-free) output material is not subject to any of the provisions of this subpart. Output materials in which asbestos is detected, or output materials produced when the operating parameters deviated from those established during the start-up performance testing, unless shown by TEM analysis to be asbestos-free, shall be considered to be asbestos-containing waste and shall be handled and disposed of according to §§ 61.150 and 61.154 or reprocessed while all of the established operating parameters are being met.
In addition to this subpart, the regulations referenced in Table 1 also apply to asbestos and may be applicable to those sources specified in §§ 61.142 through 61.151, 61.154, and 61.155 of this subpart. These cross-references are presented for the reader's information and to promote compliance with the cited regulations.
(a) In delegating implementation and enforcement authority to a State under section 112(d) of the Act, the authorities contained in paragraph (b) of this section shall be retained by the Administrator and not transferred to a State.
(b) Authorities that will not be delegated to States:
(1) Section 61.149(c)(2)
(2) Section 61.150(a)(4)
(3) Section 61.151(c)
(4) Section 61.152(b)(3)
(5) Section 61.154(d)
(6) Section 61.155(a).
1.1. Asbestos-containing material (ACM) is material containing more than one percent asbestos as determined using the methods specified in appendix E, subpart E, 40 CFR part 763, section 1, Polarized Light Microscopy. The NESHAP classifies ACM as either “friable” or “nonfriable”. Friable ACM is ACM that, when dry, can be crumbled, pulverized or reduced to powder by hand pressure. Nonfriable ACM is ACM that, when dry, cannot be crumbled, pulverized or reduced to powder by hand pressure.
1.2. Nonfriable ACM is further classified as either Category I ACM or Category II ACM. Category I ACM and Category II ACM are distinguished from each other by their potential to release fibers when damaged. Category I ACM includes asbestos-containing gaskets, packings, resilient floor coverings, resilient floor covering mastic, and asphalt roofing products containing more than one percent asbestos. Asphalt roofing products which may contain asbestos include built-up roofing; asphalt-containing single ply membrane systems; asphalt shingles; asphalt-containing underlayment felts; asphalt-containing roof coatings and mastics; and asphalt-containing base flashings. ACM roofing products that use other bituminous or resinous binders (such as coal tars or pitches) are also considered to be Category I ACM. Category II ACM includes all other nonfriable ACM, for example, asbestos-cement (A/C) shingles, A/C tiles, and transite boards or panels containing more than one percent asbestos. Generally speaking, Category II ACM is more likely to become friable when damaged than is Category I ACM. The applicability of the NESHAP to Category I and II ACM depends on: (1) the condition of the material at the time of demolition or renovation, (2) the nature of the operation to which the material will be subjected, (3) the amount of ACM involved.
1.3. Asbestos-containing material regulated under the NESHAP is referred to as “regulated asbestos-containing material” (RACM). RACM is defined in § 61.141 of the NESHAP and includes: (1) friable asbestos-containing material; (2) Category I nonfriable ACM that has become friable; (3) Category I nonfriable ACM that has been or will be sanded, ground, cut, or abraded; or (4) Category II nonfriable ACM that has already been or is likely to become crumbled, pulverized, or reduced to powder. If the coverage threshold for RACM is met or exceeded in a renovation or demolition operation, then all friable ACM in the operation, and in certain situations, nonfriable ACM in the operation, are subject to the NESHAP.
1.A.1. The NESHAP does not cover roofing projects on single family homes or on residential buildings containing four or fewer dwelling units. 40 CFR 61.141. For other roofing renovation projects, if the total asbestos-containing roof area undergoing renovation is less than 160 ft
1.A.2. For asbestos cement (A/C) shingles (or other Category II roofing material), if the area of the roofing material to be removed is at least 160 ft
1.A.3. Only roofing material that meets the definition of ACM can qualify as RACM subject to the NESHAP. Therefore, to determine if a removal operation that meets or exceeds the coverage threshold is subject to the NESHAP, any suspect roofing material (
1.B.1. A/C shingles, which are Category II nonfriable ACM, become regulated ACM if the material has a high probability of becoming or has become crumbled, pulverized or reduced to powder by the forces expected to act on the material in the course of demolition or renovation operations. 40 CFR 61.141. However, merely breaking an A/C shingle (or any other category II ACM) that is not friable may not necessarily cause the material to become RACM. A/C shingles are typically nailed to buildings on which they are attached. EPA believes that the extent of breakage that will normally result from carefully removing A/C shingles and lowering the shingles to the ground will not result in crumbling, pulverizing or reducing the shingles to powder. Conversely, the extent of breakage that will normally occur if the A/C shingles are dropped from a building or scraped off of a building with heavy machinery would cause the shingles to become RACM. EPA therefore construes the NESHAP to mean that the removal of A/C shingles that are not friable, using methods that do not crumble, pulverize, or reduce the A/C shingles to powder (such as pry bars, spud bars and shovels to carefully pry the material), is not subject to the NESHAP provided that the A/C shingles are properly handled during and after removal, as discussed in this paragraph and the asbestos NESHAP. This interpretation also applies to other Category II nonfriable asbestos-containing roofing materials.
1.C.1. Because of damage to the roofing material, and the potential for fiber release, roof removal operations using rotating blade (RB) roof cutters or other equipment that sand, grind, cut or abrade the roof material are subject to the NESHAP. As EPA interprets the NESHAP, the use of certain manual methods (using equipment such as axes, hatchets, or knives, spud bars, pry bars, and shovels, but not saws) or methods that slice, shear, or punch (using equipment such as a power slicer or power plow) does not constitute “cutting, sanding, grinding or abrading.” This is because these methods do not destroy the structural matrix or integrity of the material such that the material is crumbled, pulverized or reduced to powder. Hence, it is EPA's interpretation that when such methods are used, assuming the roof material is not friable, the removal operation is not subject to the regulation.
1.C.2. Power removers or power tear-off machines are typically used to pry the roofing material up from the deck after the roof membrane has been cut. It is EPA's interpretation that when these machines are used to pry roofing material up, their use is not regulated by the NESHAP.
1.C.3. As noted previously, the NESHAP only applies to the removal of asbestos-containing roofing materials. Thus, the NESHAP does not apply to the use of RB cutters to remove non-asbestos built up roofing (BUR). On roofs containing some asbestos-containing and some non-asbestos-containing materials, coverage under the NESHAP depends on the methods used to remove each type of material in addition to other coverage thresholds specified above. For example, it is not uncommon for existing roofs to be made of non-asbestos BUR and base flashings that do contain asbestos. In that situation, EPA construes the NESHAP to be inapplicable to the removal of the non-asbestos BUR using an RB cutter so long as the RB cutter is not used to cut 5580
2.1. Notification for a demolition is always required under the NESHAP. However, EPA believes that few roof removal jobs constitute “demolitions” as defined in the NESHAP (§ 61.141). In particular, it is EPA's view that the removal of roofing systems (i.e., the roof membrane, insulation, surfacing, coatings, flashings, mastic, shingles, and felt underlayment), when such removal is not a part of a demolition project, constitutes a “renovation” under the NESHAP. If the operation is a renovation, and Category I roofing material is being removed using either manual methods or slicing, notification is not required by the NESHAP. If Category II material is not friable and will be removed without crumbling, pulverizing, or reducing it to powder, no notification is required. Also, if the renovation involves less than the threshold area for applicability as discussed above, then no notification is required. However, if a roof removal meets the applicability and threshold requirements under the NESHAP, then EPA (or the delegated agency) must be notified in advance of the removal in accordance with the requirements of § 61.145(b), as follows:
• Notification must be given in writing at least 10 working days in advance and must include the information in § 61.145(b)(4), except for emergency renovations as discussed below.
• The notice must be updated as necessary, including, for example, when the amount of asbestos-containing roofing material reported changes by 20 percent or more.
• EPA must be notified if the start date of the roof removal changes. If the start date of a roof removal project is changed to an earlier date, EPA must be provided with a written notice of the new start date at least 10 working days in advance. If the start date changes to a later date, EPA must be notified by telephone as soon as possible before the original start date and a written notice must be sent as soon as possible.
• For emergency renovations (as defined in § 61.141), where work must begin immediately to avoid safety or public health hazards, equipment damage, or unreasonable financial burden, the notification must be postmarked or delivered to EPA as soon as possible, but no later than the following work day.
3.A.1. The principal controls contained in the NESHAP for removal operations include requirements that the affected material be adequately wetted, and that asbestos waste be handled, collected, and disposed of properly. The requirements for disposal of waste materials are discussed separately in section IV below. The emission control requirements discussed in this section III apply only to roof removal operations that are covered by the NESHAP as set forth in Section I above.
3.A.2. For any operation subject to the NESHAP, the regulation (§§ 61.145(c)(2)(i), (3), (6)(i)) requires that RACM be adequately wet (as defined in § 61.141) during the operation that damages or disturbs the asbestos material until collected for disposal.
3.A.3. When using an RB roof cutter (or any other method that sands, grinds, cuts or abrades the roofing material) to remove Category I asbestos-containing roofing material, the emission control requirements of § 61.145(c) apply as discussed in Section I above. EPA will consider a roof removal project to be in compliance with the “adequately wet” and “discharge no visible emission” requirements of the NESHAP if the RB roof cutter is equipped and operated with the following: (1) a blade guard that completely encloses the blade and extends down close to the roof surface; and (2) a device for spraying a fine mist of water inside the blade guard, and which device is in operation during the cutting of the roof.
3.B.1. The NESHAP provides that, in certain instances, wetting may not be required during the cutting of Category I asbestos roofing material with an RB roof cutter. If EPA determines in accordance with § 61.145(c)(3)(i), that wetting will unavoidably damage the building, equipment inside the building, or will present a safety hazard while stripping the ACM from a facility component that remains in place, the roof removal operation will be exempted from the requirement to wet during cutting. EPA must have sufficient written information on which to base such a decision. Before proceeding with a dry removal, the contractor must have received EPA's written approval. Such exemptions will be made on a case-by-case basis.
3.B.2. It is EPA's view that, in most instances, exemptions from the wetting requirements are not necessary. Where EPA grants an exemption from wetting because of the potential for damage to the building, damage to equipment within the building or a safety hazard, the NESHAP specifies alternative control methods (§ 61.145(c)(3)(i)(B)).
3.B.3. An exemption from wetting is also allowed when the air or roof surface temperature at the point of wetting is below freezing, as specified in § 61.145(c)(7). If freezing temperatures are indicated as the reason for not wetting, records must be kept of the temperature at the beginning, middle and end of the day on which wetting is not performed and the records of temperature must be retained for at least 2 years. 42 CFR § 61.145(c)(7)(iii). It is EPA's interpretation that in such cases, no written application to, or written approval by the Administrator is needed for using emission control methods listed in § 61.145(c)(3)(i)(B), or alternative emission control methods that have been previously approved by the Administrator. However, such written application or approval is required for alternative emission control methods that have not been previously approved. Any dust and debris collected from cutting must still be kept wet and placed in containers. All of the other requirements for notification and waste disposal would continue to apply as described elsewhere in this notice and the Asbestos NESHAP.
3.C.1. It is EPA's interpretation that waste resulting from slicing and other methods that do not cut, grind, sand or abrade Category I nonfriable asbestos-containing roofing material is not subject to the NESHAP and can be disposed of as nonasbestos waste. EPA further construes the NESHAP to provide that if Category II roofing material (such as A/C shingles) is removed and disposed of without crumbling, pulverizing, or reducing it to powder, the waste from the removal is not subject to the NESHAP waste disposal requirements. EPA also interprets the NESHAP to be inapplicable to waste resulting from roof removal operations that do not meet or exceed the coverage thresholds described in section I above. Of course, other State, local, or Federal regulations may apply.
3.C.2. It is EPA's interpretation that when an RB roof cutter, or other method that similarly damages the roofing material, is used to cut Category I asbestos containing roofing material, the damaged material from the cut (the sawdust or debris) is considered asbestos containing waste subject to § 61.150 of the NESHAP, provided the coverage thresholds discussed above in section 1 are met or exceeded. This sawdust or debris must be disposed of at a disposal site operated in accordance with the NESHAP. It is also EPA's interpretation of the NESHAP that if the remainder of the roof is free of the sawdust and debris generated by the cutting, or if such sawdust or debris is collected as discussed below in paragraphs 3.C.3, 3.C.4, 3.C.5 and 3.C.6, the remainder of the roof can be disposed of as nonasbestos waste because it is considered to be Category I nonfriable material (as long as the remainder of the roof is in fact nonasbestos material or if it is Category I asbestos material and the removal methods do not further sand, grind, cut or abrade the roof material). EPA further believes that if the roof is not cleaned of such sawdust or debris,
3.C.3. In order to be in compliance with the NESHAP while using an RB roof cutter (or device that similarly damages the roofing material) to cut Category I asbestos containing roofing material, the dust and debris resulting from the cutting of the roof should be collected as soon as possible after the cutting operation, and kept wet until collected and placed in leak-tight containers. EPA believes that where the blade guard completely encloses the blade and extends down close to the roof surface and is equipped with a device for spraying a fine mist of water inside the blade guard, and the spraying device is in operation during the cutting, most of the dust and debris from cutting will be confined along the cut. The most efficient methods to collect the dust and debris from cutting are to immediately collect or vacuum up the damaged material where it lies along the cut using a filtered vacuum cleaner or debris collector that meets the requirements of 40 CFR 61.152 to clean up as much of the debris as possible, or to gently sweep up the bulk of the debris, and then use a filtered vacuum cleaner that meets the requirements of 40 CFR 61.152 to clean up as much of the remainder of the debris as possible. On smooth surfaced roofs (nonaggregate roofs), sweeping up the debris and then wet wiping the surface may be done in place of using a filtered vacuum cleaner. It is EPA's view that if these decontamination procedures are followed, the remaining roofing material does not have to be collected and disposed of as asbestos waste. Additionally, it is EPA's view that where such decontamination procedures are followed, if the remaining portions of the roof are non-asbestos or Category I nonfriable asbestos material, and if the remaining portions are removed using removal methods that slice, shear, punch or
3.C.4. In EPA's interpretation, if the debris from the cutting is not collected immediately, it will be necessary to lightly mist the dust or debris, until it is collected, as discussed above, and placed in containers. The dust or debris should be lightly misted frequently enough to prevent the material from drying, and to prevent airborne emissions, prior to collection as described above. It is EPA's interpretation of the NESHAP that if these procedures are followed, the remaining roofing material does not have to be collected and disposed of as asbestos waste, as long as the remaining roof material is in fact nonasbestos material or if it is Category I asbestos material and the removal methods do not further sand, grind, cut or abrade the roof material.
3.C.5. It is EPA's interpretation that, provided the roofing material is not friable prior to the cutting operation, and provided the roofing material has not been made friable by the cutting operation, the appearance of rough, jagged or damaged edges on the remaining roofing material, due to the use of an RB roof cutter, does not require that such remaining roofing material be handled and disposed of as asbestos waste. In addition, it is also EPA's interpretation that if the sawdust or debris generated by the use of an RB roof cutter has been collected as discussed in paragraphs 3.C.3, 3.C.4 and 3.C.6, the presence of dust along the edge of the remaining roof material does not render such material “friable” for purposes of this interpretive rule or the NESHAP, provided the roofing material is not friable prior to the cutting operation, and provided that the remaining roofing material near the cutline has not been made friable by the cutting operation. Where roofing material near the cutline has been made friable by the use of the RB cutter (
3.C.6. As one way to comply with the NESHAP, the dust and debris from cutting can be placed in leak-tight containers, such as plastic bags, and the containers labeled using warning labels required by OSHA (29 CFR 1926.58). In addition, the containers must have labels that identify the waste generator (such as the name of the roofing contractor, abatement contractor, and/or building owner or operator) and the location of the site at which the waste was generated.
4.A.1. Section 61.150(b) requires that, as soon as is practical, all collected dust and debris from cutting as well as any contaminated roofing squares, must be taken to a landfill that is operated in accordance with § 61.154 or to an EPA-approved site that converts asbestos waste to nonasbestos material in accordance with § 61.155. During the loading and unloading of affected waste, asbestos warning signs must be affixed to the vehicles.
4.B.1. For each load of asbestos waste that is regulated under the NESHAP, a waste shipment record (WSR) must be maintained in accordance with § 61.150(d). Information that must be maintained for each waste load includes the following:
• Name, address, and telephone number of the waste generator
• Name and address of the local, State, or EPA regional office responsible for administering the asbestos NESHAP program
• Quantity of waste in cubic meters (or cubic yards)
• Name and telephone number of the disposal site operator
• Name and physical site location of the disposal site
• Date transported
• Name, address, and telephone number of the transporter(s)
• Certification that the contents meet all government regulations for transport by highways.
4.B.2. The waste generator is responsible for ensuring that a copy of the WSR is delivered to the disposal site along with the waste shipment. If a copy of the WSR signed by the disposal site operator is not returned to the waste generator within 35 days, the waste generator must contact the transporter and/or the disposal site to determine the status of the waste shipment. 40 CFR 61.150(d)(3). If the signed WSR is not received within 45 days, the waste generator must report, in writing, to the responsible NESHAP program agency and send along a copy of the WSR. 40 CFR 61.150(d)(4). Copies of WSRs, including those signed by the disposal site operator, must be retained for at least 2 years. 40 CFR 61.150(d)(5).
5.1. For those roof removals that are subject to the NESHAP, at least one on-site supervisor trained in the provisions of the NESHAP must be present during the removal of the asbestos roofing material. 40 CFR 61.145(c)(8). In EPA's view, this person can be a job foreman, a hired consultant, or someone who can represent the building owner or contractor responsible for the removal. In addition to the initial training requirement, a refresher training course is required every 2 years. The NESHAP training requirements became effective on November 20, 1991.
5.2. Asbestos training courses developed specifically to address compliance with the NESHAP in roofing work, as well as courses developed for other purposes can satisfy this requirement of the NESHAP, as long as the course covers the areas specified in the regulation. EPA believes that Asbestos Hazard Emergency Response Act (AHERA) training courses will, for example, satisfy the NESHAP training requirements. However, nothing in this interpretive rule or in the NESHAP shall be deemed to require that roofing contractors or roofing workers performing operations covered by the NESHAP must be trained or accredited under AHERA, as amended by the Asbestos School Hazard Abatement Reauthorization Act (ASHARA). Likewise, state or local authorities may independently impose additional training, licensing, or accreditation requirements on roofing contractors performing operations covered by the NESHAP, but such additional training, licensing or accreditation is not called for by this interpretive rule or the federal NESHAP.
5.3. For removal of Category I asbestos containing roofing material where RB roof cutters or equipment that similarly damages the asbestos-containing roofing material are used, the NESHAP training requirements (§ 61.145(c)(8)) apply as discussed in Section I above. It is EPA's intention that removal of Category I asbestos-containing roofing material using hatchets, axes, knives, and/or the use of spud bars, pry bars and shovels to lift the roofing material, or similar removal methods that slice, punch, or shear the roof membrane are not subject to the training requirements, since these methods do not cause the roof removal to be subject to the NESHAP. Likewise, it is EPA's intention that roof removal operations involving Category II nonfriable ACM are not subject to the training requirements where such operations are not subject to the NESHAP as discussed in section I above.
(a) The source to which this subpart applies is each glass melting furnace that uses commercial arsenic as a raw material. This subpart does not apply to pot furnaces.
(b) Rebricking is not considered construction or modification for the purposes of § 61.05(a).
The terms used in this subpart are defined in the Clean Air Act, in § 61.02, or in this section as follows:
(a) The owner or operator of an existing glass melting furnace subject to the provisions of this subpart shall comply with either paragraph (a)(1) or (a)(2) of this section; except as provided in paragraph (c) of this section.
(1) Uncontrolled total arsenic emissions from the glass melting furnace shall be less than 2.5 Mg per year, or
(2) Total arsenic emissions from the glass melting furnace shall be conveyed to a control device and reduced by at least 85 percent.
(b) The owner or operator of a new or modified glass melting furnace subject to the provisions of this subpart shall comply with either paragraph (b)(1) or (b)(2) of this section, except as provided in paragraph (c) of this section.
(1) Uncontrolled total arsenic emissions from the glass melting furnace shall be less than 0.4 Mg per year, or
(2) Total arsenic emissions from the glass melting furnace shall be conveyed to a control device and reduced by at least 85 percent.
(c) An owner or operator of a source subject to the requirements of this section may, after approval by the Administrator, bypass the control device to which arsenic emissions from the furnace are directed for a limited period of time for designated purposes such as maintenance of the control device, as specified in § 61.165(e).
(d) At all times, including periods of startup, shutdown, and malfunction, the owner or operator of a glass melting furnace subject to the provisions of this subpart shall operate and maintain the furnace and associated air pollution control equipment in a manner consistent with good air pollution control practice for minimizing emissions of inorganic arsenic to the atmosphere
(a) An owner or operator of a glass melting furnace subject to the emission limit in § 61.162(a)(2) or § 61.162(b)(2) shall:
(1) Install, calibrate, maintain, and operate a continuous monitoring system for the measurement of the opacity of emissions discharged into the atmosphere from the control device; and
(2) Install, calibrate, maintain, and operate a monitoring device for the continuous measurement of the temperature of the gas entering the control device.
(b) All continuous monitoring systems and monitoring devices shall be installed and operational prior to performance of an emission test required by § 61.164(a). Verification of operational status shall, at a minimum, consist of an evaluation of the monitoring system in accordance with the requirements and procedures contained in Performance Specification 1 of appendix B of 40 CFR part 60.
(c) During the emission test required in § 61.164(a) each owner or operator subject to paragraph (a) of this section shall:
(1) Conduct continuous opacity monitoring from the beginning of the first test run until the completion of the third test run. Process and control equipment shall be operated in a manner that will minimize opacity of emissions, subject to the Administrator's approval.
(2) Calculate 6-minute opacity averages from 24 or more data points equally spaced over each 6-minute period during the test runs.
(3) Determine, based on the 6-minute opacity averages, the opacity value corresponding to the 97.5 percent upper confidence level of a normal or log-norm-al (whichever the owner or operator determines is more representative) distribution of the average opacity values.
(4) Conduct continuous monitoring of the temperature of the gas entering the control device from the beginning of the first test run until completion of the third test run.
(5) Calculate 15-minute averages of the temperature of the gas entering the control device during each test run.
(d) An owner or operator may redetermine the values described in paragraph (c) of this section during any emission test that demonstrates compliance with the emission limits in § 61.162(a)(2) or § 61.162(b)(2).
(e) The requirements of § 60.13(d) and § 60.13(f) shall apply to an owner or operator subject to paragraph (a) of this section.
(f) Except for system breakdowns, repairs, calibration checks, and zero and span adjustments required under § 60.13(d), all continuous monitoring systems shall be in continuous operation and shall meet minimum frequency of operation requirements by completing a minimum of one cycle of sampling and analyzing for each successive 10-second period and one cycle of data recording for each successive 6-minute period.
(g) An owner or operator subject to paragraph (a) of this section shall:
(1) Reduce all opacity data to 6-minute averages. Six-minute averages shall be calculated from 24 or more data points equally spaced over each 6-minute period. Data recorded during periods of monitoring system breakdowns, repairs, calibration checks, and zero and span adjustments shall not be included in the data averages calculated under this paragraph, and
(2) Calculate 15-minute averages of the temperature of the gas entering the control device for each 15-minute operating period.
(h) After receipt and consideration of written application, the Administrator may approve alternative monitoring systems for the measurement of one or more process or operating parameters that is or are demonstrated to enable accurate and representative monitoring of a properly operating control device. Upon approval of an alternative monitoring system for an affected source, the Administrator will specify
(a) To demonstrate compliance with § 61.162, the owner or operator shall conduct emission tests, reduce test data, and follow the procedures specified in this section unless the Administrator:
(1) Specifies or approves, in specific cases, the use of a reference method with minor changes in methodology;
(2) Approves the use of an equivalent method;
(3) Approves the use of an alternative method the results of which he has determined to be adequate for indicating whether a specific source is in compliance; or
(4) Waives the requirement for emission tests as provided under § 61.13.
(b) Unless a waiver of emission testing is obtained, the owner or operator shall conduct emission tests required by this section:
(1) No later than 90 days after the effective date of this subpart for a source that has an initial startup date preceding the effective date; or
(2) No later than 90 days after startup for a source that has an initial startup date after the effective date.
(3) At such other times as may be required by the Administrator under section 114 of the Act.
(4) While the source is operating under such conditions as the Administrator may specify, based on representative performance of the source.
(c) To demonstrate compliance with § 61.162(a)(1) when less than 8.0 Mg per year of elemental arsenic is added to any existing glass melting furnace, or to demonstrate compliance with § 61.162(b)(1) when less than 1.0 Mg per year of elemental arsenic is added to any new or modified glass melting furnace, an owner or operator shall:
(1) Derive a theoretical uncontrolled arsenic emission factor (T), in grams of elemental arsenic per kilogram of glass produced, based on material balance calculations for each arsenic-containing glass type (i) produced during the 12-month period, as follows:
(2) Estimate theoretical uncontrolled arsenic emissions for the 12-month period for each arsenic-containing glass type as follows:
(3) Estimate the total theoretical uncontrolled arsenic emissions for the 12-month period by finding the sum of the values calculated for Y
(4) If the value determined in paragraph (c)(3) of this section is equal to or greater than the applicable limit in § 61.162(a)(1) or (b)(1), conduct the emission testing and calculations described in paragraphs (d)(1) through (d)(5) of this section. If the value is less than the applicable limit, the source is in compliance and no emission testing or additional calculations are required.
(d) To demonstrate compliance with § 61.162(a)(1) when 8.0 Mg per year or more of elemental arsenic are added to any existing glass melting furnace, or to demonstrate compliance with § 61.162(b)(1) when 1.0 Mg per year or more of elemental arsenic is added to any new or modified glass melting furnace, an owner or operator shall:
(1) Estimate the theoretical uncontrolled arsenic emissions for each glass type for the 12-month period by performing the calculations described in
(2) Conduct emission testing to determine the actual uncontrolled arsenic emission rate during production of the arsenic-containing glass type with the highest theoretical uncontrolled arsenic emissions as calculated under paragraph (d)(1) of this section. The owner or operator shall use the following test methods and procedures:
(i) Use Method 108 in appendix B to this part for determinig the arsenic emission rate (g/h). The emission rate shall equal the arithmetic mean of the results of three 60-minute test runs.
(ii) Use the following methods in appendix A to 40 CFR part 60:
(A) Method 1 for sample and velocity traverse.
(B) Method 2 for velocity and volumetric flowrate.
(C) Method 3 for gas analysis.
(D) For sources equipped with positive pressure fabric filters, use Section 4 of Method 5D to determine a suitable sampling location and procedure.
(3) Determine the actual uncontrolled arsenic emission factor (R
(4) Calculate a correction factor to relate the theoretical and the actual uncontrolled arsenic emission factors as follows:
(5) Determine the uncontrolled arsenic emission rate for the 12-month period, as follows:
(6) If the value determined in paragraph (d)(5) of this section is less than the applicable limit in § 61.162(a)(1) or (b)(1), the source is in compliance.
(e) To demonstrate compliance with § 61.162(a)(2) or (b)(2), an owner or operator shall:
(1) Conduct emission testing to determine the percent reduction of inorganic arsenic emissions being achieved by the control device, using the following test methods and procedures:
(i) Use Method 108 in appendix B to this part to determine the concentration of arsenic in the gas streams entering and exiting the control device. Conduct three 60-minute test runs, each consisting of simultaneous testing of the inlet and outlet gas streams. The gas streams shall contain all the gas exhausted from the glass melting furnace.
(ii) Use the following methods in appendix A to 40 CFR part 60:
(A) Method 1 for sample and velocity traverses.
(B) Method 2 for velocity and volumetric flowrate.
(C) Method 3 for gas analysis.
(D) For sources equipped with positive pressure fabric filters, use Section 4 of Method 5D to determine a suitable sampling location and procedure.
(2) Calculate the percent emission reduction for each run as follows:
(3) Determine the average percent reduction of arsenic by calculating the arithmetic mean of the results for the three runs. If it is at least 85 percent, the source is in compliance.
(a) Each owner or operator of a source subject to the requirements of § 61.162 shall maintain at the source for a period of at least 2 years and make available to the Administrator upon request a file of the following records:
(1) All measurements, including continuous monitoring for measurement of opacity, and temperature of gas entering a control device;
(2) Records of emission test data and all calculations used to produce the required reports of emission estimates to demonstrate compliance with § 61.162;
(3) All continous monitoring system performance evaluations, including calibration checks and adjustments;
(4) The occurrence and duration of all startups, shutdowns, and malfunctions of the furnace;
(5) All malfunctions of the air pollution control system;
(6) All periods during which any continuous monitoring system or monitoring device is inoperative;
(7) all records of maintenance and repairs for each air pollution control system, continuous monitoring system, or monitoring device;
(b) Each owner or operator who is given approval by the Administrator to bypass a control device under paragraph (e) of this section shall maintain at the source for a period of at least 2 years and make available to the Administrator upon request a file of the following records:
(1) The dates the control device is bypassed; and
(2) Steps taken to minimize arsenic emissions during the period the control device was bypassed.
(c) Each owner or operator of a source subject to the emission limit in § 61.162(a)(1) or (b)(1) shall determine and record at the end of every 6 months the uncontrolled arsenic emission rate for the preceding and forthcoming 12-month periods. The determinations shall:
(1) Be made by following the procedures in § 61.164(c)(1), (c)(2), and (c)(3); or in § 61.164(d)(5), whichever is applicable; and
(2) Take into account changes in production rates, types of glass produced, and other factors that would affect the uncontrolled arsenic emission rate.
(d) Each owner or operator of a source subject to the provisions of this subpart shall:
(1) Provide the Administrator 30 days prior notice of any emission test required in §61.164 to afford the Administrator the opportunity to have an observer present; and
(2) Submit to the Administrator a written report of the results of the emission test and associated calculations required in § 61.164(d) or (e), as applicable, within 60 days after conducting the test.
(3) Submit to the Administrator a written report of the arsenic emission estimates calculated under § 61.164(c):
(i) Within 45 days after the effective date of this subpart for a source that has an initial startup date preceding the effective date; or
(ii) Within 45 days after startup for a source that has an initial startup date after the effective date.
(4) Submit to the Adminstrator a written report of the uncontrolled arsenic emission rates determined in accordance with paragraph (c) of this section, if:
(i) The emission rate for the preceding 12-month period (or preceding 6-month period for the first 6-month determination) exceeded the applicable limit in § 61.162(a)(1) or (b)(1).
(ii) The emission rate for the forthcoming 12-month period will exceed the applicable limit in § 61.162(a)(1) or
(5) Ensure that the reports required in paragraph (d)(4) of this section are postmarked by the tenth day following the end of the 6-month reporting period.
(e) To obtain approval to bypass a control device, as provided in § 61.162(c), an owner or operator of a source subject to this subpart may make written application to the Administrator. Each application for such a waiver shall be submitted to the Administrator no later than 60 days before the bypass period would begin and shall include:
(1) Name and address of the owner or operator;
(2) Location of the source;
(3) A brief description of the nature, size, design, and method of operation of the source;
(4) The reason it is necessary to by-pass the control device;
(5) The length of time it will be necessary to by-pass the control device;
(6) Steps that will be taken to minimize arsenic emissions during the period the control device will be by-passed.
(7) The quantity of emissions that would be released while the control device is by-passed if no steps were taken to minimize emissions;
(8) The expected reduction in emissions during the by-pass period due to the steps taken to minimize emissions during this period; and
(9) The type of glass to be produced during the bypass period, and, if applicable, an explanation of why non-arsenic or lower-arsenic-containing glass cannot be melted in the furnace during the bypass period.
(f) Each owner or operator required to install and operate a continuous opacity monitoring system under § 61.163 shall:
(1) Submit a written report to the Administrator of the results of the continuous monitoring system evaluation required under § 61.163(b) within 60 days after conducting the evaluation.
(2) Submit a written report to the Administrator every 6 months if excess opacity occurred during the preceding 6-month period. For purposes of this paragraph, an occurrence of excess opa-ci-ty is any 6-minute period during which the average opacity, as measured by the continuous monitoring system, exceeds the opacity level determined under § 61.163(c)(3) or the opacity level redetermined under § 61.163(d).
(3) Ensure that any semiannual report of excess opacity required by paragraph (f)(2) of this section is postmarked by the thirtieth day following the end of the 6-month period and includes the following information:
(i) The magnitude of excess opacity, any conversion factor(s) used, and the date and time of commencement and completion of each occurrence of excess opacity.
(ii) Specific identification of each occurrence of excess opacity that occurs during startups, shutdowns, and malfunctions of the source.
(iii) The date and time identifying each period during which the continuous monitoring system was inoperative, except for zero and span checks, and the nature of the system repairs or adjustments.
The provisions of this subpart are applicable to each copper converter at any new or existing primary copper smelter, except as noted in § 61.172(a).
All terms used in this subpart shall have the meanings given to them in the Act, in subpart A of part 61, and in this section as follows:
(a) The provisions of paragraphs (b)-(f) of this section do not apply to any copper converter at a facility where the total arsenic charging rate for the copper converter department averaged over a 1-year period is less than 75 kg/h, as determined under § 61.174(f).
(b) The owner or operator of each copper converter subject to the provisions of this subpart shall reduce inorganic arsenic emissions to the atmosphere by meeting the following design, equipment, work practice, and operational requirements:
(1) Install, operate, and maintain a secondary hood system on each copper converter. Each secondary hood system shall consist of a hood enclosure, air curtain fan(s), exhaust system fan(s), and ductwork that conveys the captured emissions to a control device, and shall meet the following specifications:
(i) The configuration and dimensions of the hood enclosure shall be such that the copper converter mouth, charging ladles, skimming ladles, and any other material transfer vessels used will be housed within the confines or influence of the hood enclosure during each mode of copper converter operation.
(ii) The back of the hood enclosure shall be fully enclosed and sealed against the primary hood. Portions of the side-walls in contact with the copper converter shall be sealed against the converter.
(iii) Openings in the top and front of the hood enclosure to allow for the entry and egress of ladles and crane
(iv) The hood enclosure shall be fabricated in such a manner and of materials of sufficient strength to withstand incidental contact with ladles and crane apparatus with no significant damage.
(v) One side-wall of the hood enclosure shall be equipped with a horizontal-slotted plenum along the top, and the opposite side-wall shall be equipped with an exhaust hood. The horizontal-slotted plenum shall be designed to allow the distance from the base to the top of the horizontal slot to be adjustable up to a dimension of 76 mm.
(vi) The horizontal-slotted plenum shall be connected to a fan. When activated, the fan shall push air through the horizontal slot, producing a horizontal air curtain above the copper converter that is directed to the exhaust hood. The fan power output installed shall be sufficient to overcome static pressure losses through the ductwork upstream of the horizontal-slotted plenum and across the plenum, and to deliver at least 22,370 watts (30 air horsepower) at the horizontal-slotted plenum discharge.
(vii) The exhaust hood shall be sized to completely intercept the airstream from the horizontal-slotted plenum combined with the additional airflow resulting from entrainment of the surrounding air. The exhaust hood shall be connected to a fan. When activated, the fan shall pull the combined airstream into the exhaust hood.
(viii) The entire secondary hood system shall be equipped with dampers and instrumentation, as appropriate, so that the desired air curtain and exhaust flow are maintained during each mode of copper converter operation.
(2) Optimize the capture of secondary inorganic arsenic emissions by operating the copper converter and secondary hood system at all times as follows:
(i)
(B) Once rolled out, prior to the commencement of skimming or pouring, hold the copper converter in an idle position until fuming from the molten bath has been minimized.
(C) During skimming, raise the receiving ladle off the ground and position the ladle as close to the copper converter mouth as possible to minimize the drop distance between the converter mouth and the receiving ladle.
(D) Control the rate of flow into the receiving ladle to the extent practicable to minimize fuming.
(E) Upon the completion of each charge, withdraw the charging ladle or vessel used from the confines of the secondary hood in a slow, deliberate manner.
(F) During charging, skimming, or pouring, ensure that the crane block does not disturb the air flow between the horizontal-slotted plenum and the exhaust hood.
(ii)
(B) Within 30 days after the effective date of this subpart, or within 30 days after the initial operation of each secondary hood system, whichever comes later, provide to the Administrator a list of operating conditions for the secondary hood system that will result in the maximum capture of inorganic arsenic emissions. This list shall specify the operating parameters for the following:
(
(
(
(
(C) Operate the secondary hood system under the conditions listed in paragraph (b)(2)(ii)(B) of this section, unless otherwise specified by the Administrator.
(D) Notify the Administrator in writing within 30 days if there is any change in the operating conditions submitted pursuant to the requirements of paragraph (b)(2)(ii)(B) that will result
(3) Comply with the following inspection and maintenance requirements after installing the secondary hood system required in paragraph (b)(1) of this section:
(i) At least once every month, visually inspect the components of the secondary hood system that are exposed to potential damage from crane and ladle operation, including the hood enclosure, side- and back-wall hood seals, and the horizontal slot.
(ii) Replace or repair any defective or damaged components of the secondary hood system within 30 days after discovering the defective or damaged components.
(c) No owner or operator of a copper converter subject to the provisions of this subpart shall cause or allow to be discharged into the atmosphere any copper converter secondary emissions that exit from a control device and contain particulate matter in excess of 11.6 milligrams per dry standard cubic meter.
(d) The owner or operator of a copper converter subject to the provisions of this subpart shall submit a description of a plan for control of inorganic arsenic emissions from the copper converter and associated air pollution control equipment. This plan shall be submitted within 90 days after the effective date of this subpart, unless a waiver of compliance is granted under § 61.11. If a waiver of compliance is granted, the plan shall be submitted on a date set by the Administrator. Approval of the plan will be granted by the Administrator provided he finds that:
(1) It includes a systematic procedure for identifying malfunctions and for reporting them immediately to smelter supervisory personnel.
(2) It specifies the procedures that will be followed to ensure that equipment or process breakdowns due entirely or in part to poor maintenance or other preventable conditions do not occur.
(3) It specifies the measures that will be taken to ensure compliance with paragraph (b)(2) of this section.
(e) The owner or operator shall implement the plan required under paragraph (d) of this section unless otherwise specified by the Administrator.
(f) At all times, including periods of startup, shutdown, and malfunction, the owner or operator of a copper converter subject to the provisions of this subpart shall operate and maintain the converter and associated air pollution control equipment in a manner consistent with good air pollution control practice for minimizing emissions of inorganic arsenic to the atmosphere to the maximum extent practicable. Determination of whether acceptable operating and maintenance procedures are being used will be based on information available to the Administrator, which may include, but is not limited to, monitoring results, review of operating and maintenance procedures, inspection of the source, and review of other records.
(a) The owner or operator of each copper converter to which § 61.172(b)—(f) applies shall demonstrate compliance with the requirements of § 61.172(b)(1) as follows:
(1) The owner or operator of each existing copper converter shall install a secondary hood system to meet the requirements of § 61.172(b)(1) no later than 90 days after the effective date, unless a waiver of compliance has been approved by the Administrator in accordance with § 61.11.
(2) The owner or operator of each new copper converter shall install a secondary hood system to meet the requirements of § 61.172(b)(1) prior to the initial startup of the converter, except that if startup occurs prior to the effective date, the owner or operator shall meet the requirements of § 61.172(b)(1) on the effective date.
(a) To determine compliance with § 61.172(c), the owner or operator shall conduct emission tests and reduce the test data in accordance with the test methods and procedures contained in this section unless the Administrator:
(1) Specifies or approves, in specific cases, the use of a reference method with minor changes in methodology,
(2) Approves the use of an equivalent method,
(3) Approves the use of an alternative method, the results of which he has determined to be adequate for indicating whether a specific source is in compliance, or
(4) Waives the requirement for emission tests as provided in § 61.13.
(b) The owner or operator shall conduct the emission tests required in paragraph (a) of this section:
(1) After achieving the optimum operating conditions submitted under § 60.172(b)(2)(ii)(B) for the equipment required in § 61.172(b)(1), but no later than 90 days after the effective date of this subpart in the case of an existing copper converter or a copper converter that has an initial startup date preceding the effective date, or
(2) After achieving the optimum operating conditions submitted under § 60.172(b)(2)(ii)(B) for the equipment required in § 61.172(b)(1), but no later than 90 days after startup in the case of a new copper converter, initial startup of which occurs after the effective date, or
(3) At such other times as may be required by the Administrator under section 114 of the Act.
(c) The owner or operator shall conduct each emission test under representative operating conditions and at sample locations subject to the Administrator's approval, and shall make available to the Administrator such records as may be necessary to determine the conditions of the emission test.
(d) For the purpose of determining compliance with § 61.172(c), the owner or operator shall use reference methods in 40 CFR part 60, appendix A, as follows:
(1) Method 5 for the measurement of particulate matter,
(2) Method 1 for sample and velocity traverses,
(3) Method 2 for velocity and volumetric flow rate,
(4) Method 3 for gas analysis, and
(5) Method 4 for stack gas moisture.
(e) For Method 5, the sampling time for each run shall be at least 60 minutes and the minimum sampling volume shall be 0.85 dscm (30 dscf) except that smaller times or volumes when necessitated by process variables or other factors may be approved by the Administrator.
(f) For the purpose of determining applicability under § 61.172(a), the owner or operator shall determine the converter arsenic charging rate as follows:
(1) Collect daily grab samples of copper matte and any lead matte charged to the copper converters.
(2) Each calendar month, from the daily grab samples collected under paragraph (f)(1) of this section, put together a composite copper matte sample and a composite lead matte sample. Analyze the composite samples individually using Method 108A, 108B, or 108C to determine the weight percent of inorganic arsenic contained in each sample.
(3) Calculate the converter arsenic charging rate once per month using the following equation:
(4) Determine an annual arsenic charging rate for the copper converter department once per month by computing the arithmetic average of the 12 monthly converter arsenic charging rate values (R
(g) An owner or operator may petition the Administrator for a modified sampling and analysis schedule if analyses performed for the first 12-month period after the effective date show the
(a) Each owner or operator of a source that is subject to the emission limit specified in § 61.172(c) shall install, calibrate, maintain, and operate a continuous monitoring system for the measurement of the opacity of emissions discharged from the control device according to the following procedures:
(1) Ensure that each system is installed and operational no later than 90 days after the effective date of this subpart for a source that has an initial startup date preceding the effective date; and no later than 90 days after startup for other sources. Verification of the operational status shall, as a minimum, consist of an evaluation of the monitoring system in accordance with the requirements and procedures contained in Performance Specification 1 of appendix B of 40 CFR part 60.
(2) Comply with the provisions of § 60.13(d) of 40 CFR part 60.
(3) Except for system breakdowns, repairs, calibration checks, and zero span adjustments, ensure that each continuous monitoring system is in continuous operation and meets frequency of operation requirements by completing a minimum of one cycle of sampling and analysis for each successive 10-second period and one cycle of data recording for each successive 6-minute period. Each data point shall represent the opacity measured for one cycle of sampling and analysis and shall be expressed as percent opacity.
(b) Except as required in paragraph (c) of this section, calculate 1-hour opacity averages from 360 or more consecutive data points equally spaced over each 1-hour period. Data recorded during periods of monitoring system breakdowns, repairs, calibration checks, and zero and span adjustments shall not be included in the data averages computed under this paragraph.
(c) No later than 60 days after each continuous opacity monitoring system required in paragraph (a) of this section becomes operational, the owner or operator shall establish a reference opacity level for each monitored emission stream according to the following procedures:
(1) Conduct continuous opacity monitoring over a preplanned period of not less than 36 hours during which the processes and emission control equipment upstream of the monitoring system are operating under representative operating conditions subject to the Administrator's approval. This period shall include the time during which the emission test required by § 61.13 is conducted.
(2) Calculate 6-minute averages of the opacity readings using 36 or more consecutive data points equally spaced over each 6-minute period.
(3) Calculate 1-hour average opacity values using 10 successive 6-minute average opacity values (i.e., calculate a new 1-hour average opacity value every 6 minutes). Determine the highest 1-hour average opacity value observed during the 36-hour preplanned test period.
(4) Calculate the reference opacity level by adding 5 percent opacity to the highest 1-hour average opacity calculated in paragraph (c)(3) of this section.
(d) The owner or operator may redetermine the reference opacity level for the copper converter secondary emission stream at the time of each emission test that demonstrates compliance with the emission limit required in § 61.172(c) according to the provisions of paragraphs (c)(1) through (c)(4) of this section.
(e) With a minimum of 30 days prior notice, the Administrator may require the owner or operator to redetermine the reference opacity level for any monitored emission stream.
(f) Each owner or operator who is required to install the equipment specified in § 61.172(b)(1) for the capture of secondary copper converter emissions shall install, calibrate, maintain, and operate a continuous monitoring device on each secondary hood system for the measurement of the air flow through the horizontal-slotted plenum and through the exhaust hood. Each device shall be installed and operational no later than 90 days after the effective date of this subpart for a
(g) Each owner or operator subject to the requirements in paragraph (f) of this section shall establish for each secondary hood system reference air flow rates for the horizontal-slotted plenum and exhaust hood for each mode of converter operation. The reference flow rates shall be established when the equipment is operating under the optimum operating conditions required in § 61.172(b)(2)(ii).
(h) Each owner or operator shall install the continuous monitoring systems and monitoring devices required in paragraphs (a) and (f) of this section in such a manner that representative measurements of emissions and process parameters are obtained.
(a) Each owner or operator subject to the requirements of § 61.172(b)(1) shall maintain at the source for a period of at least 2 years records of the visual inspections, maintenance, and repairs performed on each secondary hood system as required in § 61.172(b)(3).
(b) Each owner or operator subject to the provisions of § 61.172(c) shall maintain at the source for a period of at least 2 years and make available to the Administrator upon request a file of the following records:
(1) All measurements, including continuous monitoring for measurement of opacity;
(2) Records of emission test data and all calculations used to produce the required reports of emission estimates to demonstrate complaince with § 61.172(c);
(3) All continuous monitoring system performance evaluations, including calibration checks and adjustments;
(4) The occurrence and duration of all startups, shutdowns, and malfunctions of the copper converters;
(5) All malfunctions of the air pollution control system;
(6) All periods during which any continuous monitoring system or device is inoperative;
(7) All maintenance and repairs performed on each air pollution control system, continuous monitoring system, or monitoring device;
(8) All records of 1-hour average opacity levels for each separate control device; and
(9) For each secondary hood system:
(i) The reference flow rates for the horizontal-slotted plenum and exhaust hood for each converter operating mode estabilshed under § 61.175(g);
(ii) The actual flow rates; and
(iii) A daily log of the start time and duration of each converter operating mode.
(c) Each owner or operator subject to the provisions of this subpart shall maintain at the source for a period of at least 2 years and make available to the Administrator upon request the following records:
(1) For each copper converter, a daily record of the amount of copper matte and lead matte charged to the copper converter and the total hours of operation.
(2) For each copper converter department, a monthly record of the weight percent of arsenic contained in the copper matte and lead matte as determined under § 61.174(f).
(3) For each copper converter department, the monthly calculations of the average annual arsenic charging rate for the preceding 12-month period as determined under § 61.174(f).
(a) Each owner or operator subject to the provisions of § 61.172(c) shall:
(1) Provide the Administrator 30 days prior notice of the emission test required in § 61.174(a) to afford the Administrator the opportunity to have an observer present; and
(2) Submit to the Administrator a written report of the results of the emission test required in § 61.174(a) within 60 days after conducting the test.
(b) Each owner or operator subject to the provisions of § 61.175(a) shall provide the Administrator at least 30 days prior notice of each reference opacity level determination required in § 61.175(c) to afford the Administrator the opportunity to have an observer present.
(c) Each owner or opertor subject to the provisions of § 61.175(a) shall submit to the Administrator:
(1) Within 60 days after conducting the evaluation required in § 61.175(a)(1), a written report of the continuous monitoring system evaluation;
(2) Within 30 days after establishing the reference opacity level required in § 61.175(c), a written report of the reference opacity level. The report shall also include the opacity data used and the calculations performed to determine the reference opacity level, and sufficient documentation to show that process and emission control equipment were operating normally during the reference opacity level determination; and
(3) A written report each quarter of each occurrence of excess opacity during the quarter. For purposes of this paragraph, an occurrence of excess opacity is any 1-hour period during which the average opacity, as measured by the continuous monitoring system, exceeds the reference opacity level established under § 61.175(c).
(d) The owner or operator subject to the provisions of § 61.175(g) shall submit to the Administrator:
(1) A written report of the reference air flow rate within 30 days after establishing the reference air flow rates required in § 61.175(g);
(2) A written report each quarter of all air flow rates monitored during the preceding 3-month period that are less than 80 percent of the corresponding reference flow rate established for each converter operating mode; and
(3) A written report each quarter of any changes in the operating conditions of the emission capture system, emission control device, or the building housing the converters that might increase fugitive emissions.
(e) All quarterly reports shall be postmarked by the 30th day following the end of each 3-month period and shall include the following information:
(1) The magnitude of each occurrence of excess opacity, any conversion factor(s) used, and the dates and times of commencement and completion of each occurrence of excess opacity, the cause of each exceedance of the reference opacity level, and the measures taken to minimize emissions.
(2) The magnitude of each occurrence of reduced flow rate and the date and time of commencement and completion of each occurrence of reduced flow rate, the cause of the reduced flow rate, and the associated converter operating mode.
(3) Specific identification of each occurrence of excess opacity or reduced flow rate that occurs during startups, shutdowns, and malfunctions of the source.
(4) The date and time identifying each period during which the continuous monitoring system or monitoring device was inoperative, except for zero and span checks, and the nature of the system repairs or adjustments.
(5) Specific identification of each change in operating conditions of the emission capture system or control device, or in the condition of the building housing the converters.
(f) Each owner or operator of a source subject to the provisions of this subpart shall submit annually a written report to the Administrator that includes the monthly computations of the average annual converter arsenic charging rate as calculated under § 61.174(f)(4). The annual report shall be postmarked by the 30th day following the end of each calendar year.
The provisions of this subpart are applicable to each metallic arsenic production plant and to each arsenic trioxide plant that processes low-grade arsenic bearing materials by a roasting condensation process.
All terms used in this subpart shall have the meanings given them in the
(a) Within 30 days after the effective date of this subpart, the owner or operator of each source to which this subpart applies shall identify and submit to the Administrator a list of potential sources (equipment and operations) of inorganic arsenic emissions.
(b) The owner or operator shall submit a description of an inspection, maintenance, and housekeeping plan for control of inorganic arsenic emissions from the potential sources identified under paragraph (a) of this section. This plan shall be submitted within 90 days after the effective date of this subpart, unless a waiver of compliance is granted under § 61.11. If a waiver of compliance is granted, the plan shall be submitted on a date set by the Administrator. Approval of the plan will be granted by the Administrator provided he finds that:
(1) It achieves the following objectives in a manner that does not cause adverse impacts in other environmental media:
(i) Clean-up and proper disposal, wet-down, or chemical stabilization to the extent practicable (considering access and safety) of any dry, dusty material having an inorganic arsenic content greater than 2 percent that accumulates on any surface within the plant boundaries outside of a dust-tight enclosure.
(ii) Immediate clean-up and proper disposal, wet-down, or chemical stabilization of spills of all dry, dusty material having an inorganic arsenic content greater than 2 percent.
(iii) Minimization of emissions of inorganic arsenic to the atmosphere during removal of inorganic arsenic from the arsenic kitchen and from flue pulling operations by properly handling, wetting down, or chemically stabilizing all dusts and materials handled in these operations.
(2) It includes an inspection program that requires all process, conveying, and air pollution control equipment to be inspected at least once per shift to ensure that the equipment is being properly operated and maintained. The program will specify the evaluation criteria and will use a standardized checklist, which will be included as part of the plan required in paragraph (b) of this section, to document the inspection, maintenance, and housekeeping status of the equipment and that the objectives of paragraph (b)(1) of this section are being achieved.
(3) It includes a systematic procedure for identifying malfunctions and for reporting them immediately to supervisory personnel.
(4) It specifies the procedures that will be followed to ensure that equipment or process malfunctions due entirely or in part to poor maintenance or other preventable conditions do not occur.
(5) It includes a program for curtailing all operations necessary to minimize any increase in emissions of inorganic arsenic to the atmosphere resulting from a malfunction. The program will describe:
(i) The specific steps that will be taken to curtail each operation as soon as technically feasible after the malfunction is discovered.
(ii) The minimum time required to curtail each operation.
(iii) The procedures that will be used to ensure that the curtailment continues until after the malfunction is corrected.
(c) The owner or operator shall implement the plan required in paragraph (b) of this section until otherwise specified by the Administrator.
(d) At all times, including periods of startup, shutdown, and malfunction, the owner or operator of each source to which this subpart applies shall operate and maintain the source including associated air pollution control equipment in a manner consistent with good air pollution control practice for minimizing emissions of inorganic arsenic to the atmosphere to the maximum extent practicable. Determination of whether acceptable operating and maintenance procedures are being used will be based on information available to the Administrator, which may include, but is not limited to, monitoring results, review of operating and maintenance procedures, inspection of the source, and review of other records.
(a) The owner or operator of each source subject to the provisions of this subpart shall install, calibrate, maintain, and operate a continuous monitoring system for the measurement of the opacity of each arsenic trioxide and metallic arsenic process emission stream that exits from a control device.
(b) The owner or operator shall install, operate, and maintain each continuous monitoring system for the measurement of opacity required in paragraph (a) of this section according to the following procedures:
(1) Ensure that each system is installed and operational no later than 90 days after the effective date of this subpart for an existing source or a new source that has an initial startup date preceding the effective date. For a new source whose initial startup occurs after the effective date of this subpart, ensure that the system is installed and operational no later than 90 days after startup. Verification of the operational status shall, as a minimum, consist of an evaluation of the monitoring system in accordance with the requirements and procedures contained in Performance Specification 1 of appendix B of 40 CFR part 60.
(2) Comply with the provisions of § 60.13(d) of 40 CFR part 60.
(3) Except for system breakdowns, repairs, calibration checks, and zero and span adjustments required under § 60.13(d), ensure that each continuous monitoring system is in continuous operation and meets frequency of operation requirements by completing a minimum of one cycle of sampling and analysis for each successive 10-second period and one cycle of data recording for each successive 6-minute period. Each data point shall represent the opacity measured for one cycle of sampling and analysis and shall be expressed as percent opacity.
(c) The owner or operator shall calculate 6-minute opacity averages from 36 or more consecutive data points equally spaced over each 6-minute period. Data recorded during periods of monitoring system breakdowns, repairs, calibration checks, and zero and span adjustments shall not be included in the data averages computed under this paragraph.
(d) No later than 60 days after each continuous opacity monitoring system required in paragraph (a) of this section becomes operational, the owner or operator shall establish a reference
(1) Conduct continuous opacity monitoring over a preplanned period of not less than 36 hours during which the processes and emission control equipment upstream of the monitoring system are operating in a manner that will minimize opacity under representative operating conditions subject to the Administrator's approval.
(2) Calculate 6-minute averages of the opacity readings using 36 or more consecutive data points equally spaced over each 6-minute period.
(3) Establish the reference opacity level by determining the highest 6-minute average opacity calculated under paragraph (d)(2) of this section.
(e) With a minimum of 30 days prior notice, the Administrator may require an owner or operator to redetermine the reference opacity level for any monitored emission stream.
(f) Each owner or operator shall install all continuous monitoring systems or monitoring devices required in paragraph (a) of this section in such a manner that representative measurements of emissions or process parameters are obtained.
(a) The owner or operator of each source to which this subpart applies shall operate a continuous monitoring system for the measurement of inorganic arsenic concentrations in the ambient air.
(b) The ambient air monitors shall be located at sites to detect maximum concentrations of inorganic arsenic in the ambient air in accordance with a plan approved by the Administrator that shall include the sampling and analytical method used.
(c) The owner or operator shall submit a written plan describing, and explaining the basis for, the design and adequacy of the monitoring network, sampling and analytical procedures, and quality assurance within 45 days after the effective date of this subpart.
(d) Each monitor shall be operated continuously except for a reasonable time allowance for instrument maintenance and calibration, for changing filters, or for replacement of equipment needing major repair.
(e) Filters shall be changed daily and shall be analyzed and concentrations calculated within 30 days after filters are collected.
(f) The Administrator at any time may require changes in, or expansion of, the sampling program, including sampling and analytical protocols and network design.
(a) Each owner or operator of a source subject to the provisions of this subpart shall maintain at the source for a period of at least 2 years the following records: All measurements, including continuous monitoring for measurement of opacity; all continuous monitoring system performance evaluations, including calibration checks and adjustments; all periods during which the continuous monitoring system or monitoring device is inoperative; and all maintenance and repairs made to the continuous monitoring system or monitoring device.
(b) Each owner or operator shall maintain at the source for a period of at least 2 years a log for each plant department in which the operating status of process, conveying, and emission control equipment is described for each shift. For malfunctions and upsets, the following information shall be recorded in the log:
(1) The time of discovery.
(2) A description of the malfunction or upset.
(3) The time corrective action was initiated.
(4) A description of corrective action taken.
(5) The time corrective action was completed.
(6) A description of steps taken to reduce emissions of inorganic arsenic to the atmosphere between the time of discovery and the time corrective action was taken.
(c) Each owner or operator subject to the provisions of this subpart shall maintain for a period of a least 2 years records of 6-minute average opacity levels for each separate control device.
(d) Each owner or operator subject to the provisions of § 61.186 shall maintain for a period of at least 2 years records
(a) Each owner or operator subject to the provisions of § 61.183(a) shall provide the Administrator at least 30 days prior notice of each reference opacity level determination required in § 61.183(a) to afford the Administrator the opportunity to have an observer present.
(b) Each owner or operator subject to the provisions of § 61.183(a) shall submit to the Administrator:
(1) Within 60 days of conducting the evaluation required in § 61.183(b)(1), a written report of the continuous monitoring system evaluation;
(2) Within 30 days of establishing the reference opacity level required in § 61.183(d), a written report of the reference opacity level. The report shall also include the opacity data used and the calculations performed to determine the reference opacity level, and sufficient documentation to show that process and emission control equipment were operating normally during the reference opacity level determination; and
(3) A written report each quarter of each occurrence of excess opacity during the quarter. For the purposes of this paragraph, an occurrence of excess opacity is any 6-minute period during which the average opacity, as measured by the continuous monitoring system, exceeds the reference opacity level established under § 61.183(d).
(c) All quarterly reports of excess opacity shall be postmarked by the 30th day following the end of each quarter and shall include the following information:
(1) The magnitude of excess opacity, any conversion factor(s) used, and the dates and times of commencement and completion of each occurrence of excess opacity, the cause of each exceedance of the reference opacity level, and the measures taken to minimize emissions.
(2) Specific identification of each period of excess opacity that occurred during startups, shutdowns, and malfunctions of the source.
(3) The date and time identifying each period during which the continuous monitoring system or monitoring device was inoperative, except for zero and span checks, and the nature of the system repairs or adjustments.
(d) Each owner or operator subject to this subpart shall submit a written report semiannually to the Administrator that describes the status and results, for the reporting period, of any pilot plant studies on alternative arsenic trioxide production processes. Conclusions and recommendations of the studies shall also be reported.
(e) All semiannual progress reports required in paragraph (d) of this section shall be postmarked by the 30th day following the end of each 6-month period.
(f) Each owner or operator of a source to which this subpart applies shall submit a written report each quarter to the Administrator that includes the following information:
(1) All ambient inorganic arsenic concentrations measured at all monitoring sites in accordance with § 61.184.
(2) A description of any modifications to the sampling network, during the reporting period, including any major maintenance, site changes, calibrations, and quality assurance information including sampling and analytical precision and accuracy estimates.
(g) All quarterly reports required in paragraph (f) of this section shall be postmarked by the 30th day following the end of each quarter.
The provisions of this subpart apply to the design and operation of all storage and disposal facilities for radium-containing material (i.e., byproduct material as defined under section 11.e(2) of the Atomic Energy Act of 1954 (as amended)) that are owned or operated by the Department of Energy that emit radon-222 into air, including these
As used in this subpart, all terms not defined here have the meaning given them in the Clean Air Act or subpart A of part 61. The following terms shall have the following specific meanings:
(a)
(b)
No source at a Department of Energy facility shall emit more than 20 pCi/- m
All facilities designated under this subpart are exempt from the reporting requirements of 40 CFR 61.10.
The provisions of this subpart apply to each owner or operator of a phos-pho-gyp-sum stack, and to each person who owns, sells, distributes, or otherwise uses any quantity of phos-pho-gyp-sum which is produced as a result of wet acid phosphorus production or is removed from any existing phos-pho-gyp-sum stack.
As used in this subpart, all terms not defined here have the meaning given them in the Clean Air Act or subpart A of part 61. The following terms shall have the following specific meanings:
(a)
(b)
(c)
Each person who generates phos-pho-gyp-sum shall place all phos-pho-gyp-sum in stacks. Phos-pho-gyp-sum may be removed from a phos-pho-gyp-sum stack only as expressly provided by this subpart. After a phos-pho-gyp-sum stack has become an inactive stack, the owner or operator shall assure that the stack does not emit more than 20 pCi/m
(a) Within sixty days following the date on which a stack becomes an inactive stack, or within ninety days after the date on which this subpart first took effect if a stack was already inactive on that date, each owner or operator of an inactive phos-pho-gyp-sum stack shall test the stack for radon-222 flux in accordance with the procedures described in 40 CFR part 61, appendix B, Method 115. EPA shall be notified at
(b)(1) Within ninety days after the testing is required, the owner or operator shall provide EPA with a report detailing the actions taken and the results of the radon-222 flux testing. Each report shall also include the following information:
(i) The name and location of the facility;
(ii) A list of the stacks at the facility including the size and dimensions of each stack;
(iii) The name of the person responsible for the operation of the facility and the name of the person preparing the report (if different);
(iv) A description of the control measures taken to decrease the radon flux from the source and any actions taken to insure the long term effectiveness of the control measures; and
(v) The results of the testing conducted, including the results of each measurement.
(2) Each report shall be signed and dated by a corporate officer in charge of the facility and contain the following declaration immediately above the signature line: “I certify under penalty of law that I have personally examined and am familiar with the information submitted herein and based on may inquiry of those individuals immediately responsible for obtaining the information, I believe that the submitted information is true, accurate and complete. I am aware that there are significant penalties for submitting false information including the possibility of fine and imprisonment. See, 18 U.S.C. 1001.”
(c) If the owner or operator of an inactive stack chooses to conduct measurements over a one year period as permitted by Method 115 in appendix B to part 61, within ninety days after the testing commences the owner or operator shall provide EPA with an initial report, including the results of the first measurement period and a schedule for all subsequent measurements. An additional report containing all the information in § 61.203(b) shall be submitted within ninety days after completion of the final measurements.
(d) If at any point an owner or operator of a stack once again uses an inactive stack for the disposal of phos-pho-gyp-sum or for water management, the stack ceases to be in inactive status and the owner or operator must notify EPA in writing within 45 days. When the owner or operator ceases to use the stack for disposal of phos-pho-gyp-sum or water management, the stack will once again become inactive and the owner or operator must satisfy again all testing and reporting requirements for inactive stacks.
(e) If an owner or operator removes phos-pho-gyp-sum from an inactive stack, the owner shall test the stack in accordance with the procedures described in 40 CFR part 61, appendix B, Method 115. The stack shall be tested within ninety days of the date that the owner or operator first removes phos-pho-gyp-sum from the stack, and the test shall be repeated at least once during each calendar year that the owner or operator removes additional phos-pho-gyp-sum from the stack. EPA shall be notified at least 30 days prior to an emissions test so that EPA may, at its option, observe the test. If meteorological conditions are such that a test cannot be properly conducted, then the owner shall notify EPA and test as soon as conditions permit. Within ninety days after completion of a test, the owner or operator shall provide EPA with a report detailing the actions taken and the results of the radon-222 flux testing. Each such report shall include all of the information specified by §61.203(b).
Phos-pho-gyp-sum may be lawfully removed from a stack and distributed in commerce for use in agriculture if each of the following requirements is satisfied:
(a) The owner or operator of the stack from which the phos-pho-gyp-sum is removed shall determine annually the average radium-226 concentration at the location in the stack from which the phos-pho-gyp-sum will be removed, as provided by § 61.207.
(b) The average radium-226 concentration at the location in the stack from which the phos-pho-gyp-sum will be removed, as determined pursuant to § 61.207, shall not exceed 10 picocuries per gram (pCi/g).
(c) All phos-pho-gyp-sum distributed in commerce for use in agriculture by the owner or operator of a phos-pho-gyp-sum stack shall be accompanied by a certification document which conforms to the requirements of § 61.208(a).
(d) Each distributor, retailer, or reseller who distributes phos-pho-gyp-sum for use in agriculture shall prepare certification documents which conform to the requirements of § 61.208(b).
(a) Phos-pho-gyp-sum may be lawfully removed from a stack and distributed in commerce for use in research and development activities if each of the following requirements is satisfied:
(1) The owner or operator of the stack from which the phos-pho-gyp-sum is removed shall determine annually the average radium-226 concentration at the location in the stack from which the phos-pho-gyp-sum will be removed, as provided by § 61.207.
(2) All phos-pho-gyp-sum distributed in commerce for use in research or development by the owner or operator of a phos-pho-gyp-sum stack or by a distributor, retailer, or reseller shall be accompanied at all times by certification documents which conform to the requirements of § 61.208.
(b) Phos-pho-gyp-sum may be purchased and used for research and development purposes if the following requirements are satisfied:
(1) Each quantity of phos-pho-gyp-sum purchased by a facility for a particular research and development activity shall be accompanied by certification documents which conform to the requirements of § 61.208.
(2) No facility shall purchase or possess more than 700 pounds of phos-pho-gyp-sum for a particular research and development activity.
(3) Containers of phos-pho-gyp-sum used in research and development activities shall be labeled with the following warning:
(4) For each research and development activity in which phos-pho-gyp-sum is used, the facility shall maintain records which conform to the requirements of § 61.209(c).
(c) Phos-pho-gyp-sum not intended for distribution in commerce may be lawfully removed from a stack by an owner or operator to perform laboratory analyses required by this subpart or any other quality control or quality assurance analyses associated with wet acid phosphorus production.
(a) Phos-pho-gyp-sum may not be lawfully removed from a stack and distributed or used for any purpose not expressly specified in § 61.204 or § 61.205 without prior EPA approval.
(b) A request that EPA approve distribution and/or use of phos-pho-gyp-sum for any other purpose must be submitted in writing and must contain the following information:
(1) The name and address of the person(s) making the request.
(2) A description of the proposed use, including any handling and processing that the phos-pho-gyp-sum will undergo.
(3) The location of each facility, including suite and/or building number, street, city, county, state, and zip code, where any use, handling, or processing of the phos-pho-gyp-sum will take place.
(4) The mailing address of each facility where any use, handling, or processing of the phos-pho-gyp-sum will take place, if different from paragraph (b)(3) of this section.
(5) The quantity of phos-pho-gyp-sum to be used by each facility.
(6) The average concentration of radium-226 in the phos-pho-gyp-sum to be used.
(7) A description of any measures which will be taken to prevent the uncontrolled release of phos-pho-gyp-sum into the environment.
(8) An estimate of the maximum individual risk, risk distribution, and incidence associated with the proposed use, including the ultimate disposition of the phos-pho-gyp-sum or any product in
(9) A description of the intended disposition of any unused phos-pho-gyp-sum.
(10) Each request shall be signed and dated by a corporate officer or public official in charge of the facility.
(c) The Assistant Administrator for Air and Radiation may decide to grant a request that EPA approve distribution and/or use of phos-pho-gyp-sum if he determines that the proposed distribution and/or use is at lease as protective of public health, in both the short term and the long term, as disposal of phos-pho-gyp-sum in a stack or a mine.
(d) If the Assistant Administrator for Air and Radiation decides to grant a request that EPA approve distribution and/or use of phos-pho-gyp-sum for a speci-fied purpose, each of the following requirements shall be satisfied:
(1) The owner or operator of the stack from which the phos-pho-gyp-sum is removed shall determine annually the average radium-226 concentration at the location in the stack from which the phos-pho-gyp-sum will be removed, as provided by § 61.207.
(2) All phos-pho-gyp-sum distributed in commerce by the owner or operator of a phos-pho-gyp-sum stack, or by a distributor, retailer, or reseller, or purchased by the end-user, shall be accompanied at all times by certification documents which conform to the requirements § 61.208.
(3) The end-user of the phos-pho-gyp-sum shall maintain records which conform to the requirements of § 61.209(c).
(e) If the Assistant Administrator for Air and Radiation decides to grant a request that EPA approve distribution and/or use of phos-pho-gyp-sum for a specified purpose, the Assistant Administrator may decide to impose additional terms or conditions governing such distribution or use. In appropriate circumstances, the Assistant Administrator may also decide to waive or modify the recordkeeping requirements established by § 61.209(c).
(a) Before removing phos-pho-gyp-sum from a stack for distribution to commerce pursuant to § 61.204, § 61.205, or § 61.206, the owner or operator of a phos-pho-gyp-sum stack shall measure the average radium-226 concentration at the location in the stack from which phos-pho-gyp-sum will be removed. Measurements shall be performed for each such location prior to the intitial distribution in commerce of phos-pho-gyp-sum removed from that location and at least once during each calendar year while distribution of phos-pho-gyp-sum removed from the location continues.
(b) The radium-226 concentration shall be determined in accordance with the analytical procedures described in 40 CFR part 61, appendix B, Method 114.
(c) Phosphogysum samples shall be taken at regularly spaced intervals across the surface of the location in the phos-pho-gyp-sum stack from which phos-pho-gyp-sum will be removed.
(d) The minimum number of samples considered necessary to determine a representative average radium-226 concentration for the location on the stack to be analyzed shall be calculated as follows:
(1) Obtain the measured mean and standard deviation of 30 regularly spaced phos-pho-gyp-sum samples.
(2) Solve the following equation for the number of samples required to achieve a 95% confidence interval:
(3) If the number of samples required is greater than 30, then obtain and analyze the necessary number of additional samples and recalculate the average radium-226 concentration using the combination of the results of the original 30 samples and additional samples. The additional samples shall also be regularly spaced across the surface of the location in the phos-pho-gyp-sum
(a)(1) The owner or operator of a stack from which phos-pho-gyp-sum will be removed and distributed in commerce pursuant to § 61.204, § 61.205, or § 61.206 shall prepare a certification document for each quantity of phos-pho-gyp-sum which is distributed in commerce which includes:
(i) The name and address of the owner or operator;
(ii) The name and address of the purchaser or recipient of the phos-pho-gyp-sum;
(iii) The quantity (in pounds) of phos-pho-gyp-sum sold or transferred;
(iv) The date of sale or transfer;
(v) A description of the intended end-use for the phos-pho-gyp-sum;
(vi) The average radium-226 concentration, in pCi/g, of the phos-pho-gyp-sum, as determined pursuant to § 61.207; and
(vii) The signature of the person who prepared the certification.
(2) The owner or operator shall retain the certification document for five years from the date of sale or transfer, and shall produce the document for inspection upon request by the Administrator, or his authorized representative. The owner or operator shall also provide a copy of the certification document to the purchaser or recipient.
(b)(1) Each distributor, retailer, or reseller who purchases or receives phos-pho-gyp-sum for subsequent resale or transfer shall prepare a certification document for each quantity of phos-pho-gyp-sum which is resold or transferred which includes:
(i) The name and address of the distributor, retailer, or reseller;
(ii) The name and address of the purchaser or recipient of the phos-pho-gyp-sum;
(iii) The quantity (in pounds) of phos-pho-gyp-sum resold or transferred;
(iv) The date of resale or transfer;
(v) A description of the intended end-use for the phos-pho-gyp-sum;
(vi) A copy of each certification document which accompanied the phos-pho-gyp-sum at the time it was purchased or received by the distributor, retailer, or reseller; and
(vii) The signature of the person who prepared the certification.
(2) The distributor, retailer, or reseller shall retain the certification document for five years from the date of resale or transfer, and shall produce the document for inspection upon request by the Administrator, or his authorized representative. For every resale or transfer of phos-pho-gyp-sum to a person other than an agricultural end-user, the distributor, retailer, or reseller shall also provide a copy of the certification document to the purchaser or transferee.
(a) Each owner or operator of a phos-pho-gyp-sum stack must maintain records for each stack documenting the procedure used to verify compliance with the flux standard in § 61.202, including all measurements, calculations, and analytical methods on which input parameters were based. The required documentation shall be sufficient to allow an independent auditor to verify the correctness of the determination made concerning compliance of the stack with flux standard.
(b) Each owner or operator of a phos-pho-gyp-sum stack must maintain records documenting the procedure used to determine average radium-226 concentration pursuant to § 61.207, including all measurements, calculations, and analytical methods on which input parameters were based. The required documentation shall be sufficient to allow an independent auditor to verify the accuracy of the radium-226 concentration.
(c) Each facility which uses phos-pho-gyp-sum pursuant to § 61.205 or § 61.206 shall prepare records which include the following information:
(1) The name and address of the person in charge of the activity involving use of phos-pho-gyp-sum.
(2) A description of each use of phos-pho-gyp-sum, including the handling and processing that the phos-pho-gyp-sum underwent.
(3) The location of each site where each use of phos-pho-gyp-sum occurred, including the suite and/or building number, street, city, county, state, and zip code.
(4) The mailing address of each facility using phos-pho-gyp-sum, if different from paragraph (c)(3) of this section.
(5) The date of each use of phos-pho-gyp-sum.
(6) The quantity of phos-pho-gyp-sum used.
(7) The certified average concentration of radium-226 for the phos-pho-gyp-sum which was used.
(8) A description of all measures taken to prevent the uncontrolled release of phos-pho-gyp-sum into the environment.
(9) A description of the disposition of any unused phos-pho-gyp-sum.
(d) These records shall be retained by the facility for at least five years from the date of use of the phos-pho-gyp-sum and shall be produced for inspection upon request by the Administrator, or his authorized representative.
All facilities designated under this subpart are exempt from the reporting requirements of 40 CFR 61.10.
(a) The provisions of this subpart apply to owners and operators of all sites that are used for the disposal of tailings, and that managed residual radioactive material during and following the processing of uranium ores, commonly referred to as uranium mills and their associated tailings, that are listed in, or designated by the Secretary of Energy under title I of the Uranium Mill Tailings Radiation Control Act of 1978, except § 61.226 of this subpart which applies to owners and operators of all sites that are regulated under title II of the Uranium Mill Tailings Radiation Control Act of 1978.
(b) [Reserved]
As used in this subpart, all terms not defined here have the meanings given them in the Clean Air Act or subpart A of part 61. The following terms shall have the following specific meanings:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(a) Radon-222 emissions to the ambient air from uranium mill tailings pile that are no longer operational shall not exceed 20 pCi/m
(b) Once a uranium mill tailings pile or impoundment ceases to be operational it must be disposed of and brought into compliance with this
(a) Sixty days following the completion of covering the pile to limit radon emissions but prior to the long term stabilization of the pile, the owners or operators of uranium mill tailings shall conduct testing for all piles within the facility in accordance with the procedures described in 40 CFR part 61, appendix B, Method 115, or other procedures for which EPA has granted prior approval.
(b) Ninety days after the testing is required, each facility shall provide EPA with a report detailing the actions taken and the results of the radon-222 flux testing. EPA shall be notified at least 30 days prior to an emission test so that EPA may, at its option, observe the test. If meteorological conditions are such that a test cannot be properly conducted, then the owner or operator shall notify EPA and test as soon as conditions permit. Each report shall also include the following information:
(1) The name and location of the facility.
(2) A list of the piles at the facility.
(3) A description of the control measures taken to decrease the radon flux from the source and any actions taken to insure the long term effectiveness of the control measures.
(4) The results of the testing conducted, including the results of each measurement.
(5) Each report shall be signed and dated by a public official in charge of the facility and contain the following declaration immediately above the signature line:
I certify under penalty of law that I have personally examined and am familiar with the information submitted herein and based on my inquiry of those individuals immediately responsible for obtaining the information. I believe that the submitted information is true, accurate and complete. I am aware that there are significant penalties for submitting false information including the possibility of fine and imprisonment. See 18 U.S.C. 1001.
(c) If year long measurements are made in accordance with Method 115 of appendix B of part 61, this report shall include the results of the first measurement period and provide a schedule for the measurement frequency to be used. An additional report shall be submitted ninety days after completion of the final measurements.
(d) If long term stabilization has begun before the effective date of the rule then testing may be conducted at any time, up to 60 days after the long term stabilization is completed.
(e) If the testing demonstrates that the pile meets the requirement of § 61.222(a) and long term stabilization has been completed then the pile is considered disposed for purposes of this rule.
The owner or operator must maintain records documenting the source of input parameters including the results of all measurements upon which they are based, the calculations and/or analytical methods used to derive values for input parameters, and the procedure used to determine compliance. This documentation should be sufficient to allow an independent auditor to verify the accuracy of the determination made concerning the facility's compliance with the standard. The Administrator shall be kept apprised of the location of these records and the records must be kept for at least five years and upon request be made available for inspection by the Administrator, or his authorized representative.
All facilities designated under this subpart are exempt from the reporting requirements of 40 CFR 61.10.
(a)
(i) Failed on a programmatic basis to implement and enforce, in significant part, the regulations governing the disposal of uranium mill tailings promulgated by EPA and NRC or the tailings closure plan (radon) (i.e., contained in the license) requirements establishing milestones for the purpose of emplacing a permanent radon barrier that will achieve compliance with the 20 pCi/m
(ii) Those failures may reasonably be anticipated to significantly interfere (i.e., more than de minimis) with the timely emplacement of a permanent radon barrier constructed to achieve compliance with the 20 pCi/m
(2) The Administrator shall reinstate 40 CFR part 61, subpart T on a site-specific basis as applied to owners and operators of non-operational uranium mill tailings disposal sites that are licensed by the NRC or an affected Agreement State if the Administrator determines by rulemaking, based on the record:
(i) That NRC or an affected Agreement State has failed in significant part on a site-specific basis to achieve compliance by the operator of the site or sites with applicable license requirements, regulations, or standards implemented by NRC and the affected Agreement States; and
(ii) Those failures may reasonably be anticipated to significantly interfere (i.e., more than de minimis) with the timely emplacement of a permanent radon barrier constructed to achieve compliance with the 20 pCi/m
(3) Upon completion of the reconsideration of rescission pursuant to § 61.226(c) the Administrator may issue a finding that reinstatement of this subpart is not appropriate if the Administrator finds:
(i) NRC and the affected Agreement States are on a programmatic basis implementing and enforcing, in significant part, the regulations governing the disposal of uranium mill tailings promulgated by EPA and NRC or the tailings closure plan (radon) (i.e., contained in the license) requirements establishing milestones for the purpose of emplacing a permanent radon barrier that will achieve compliance with the 20 pCi/m
(ii) NRC or an affected Agreement State are on a site-specific basis, in significant part, achieving compliance by the operator of the site or sites with applicable license requirements, regulations, or standards implemented by NRC and the affected Agreement States.
(b)
(2) EPA shall summarily dismiss a petition to reconsider rescission and seek reinstatement of this subpart under § 61.226(a)(1) (programmatic basis), without prejudice, unless the petitioner demonstrates that written notice of the alleged failure(s) was provided to NRC at least 60 days before filing the petition with EPA. This notification shall include a statement of the grounds for such a petition and this notice requirement may be satisfied by, but is not limited to, submissions or pleadings submitted to NRC during a proceeding conducted by NRC.
(3) EPA shall summarily dismiss a petition to reconsider rescission and seek reinstatement of this subpart under § 61.226(a)(2) (site-specific basis), without prejudice, unless the petitioner demonstrates that a written request was made to NRC or an affected Agreement State for enforcement or other relief at least 60 days before filing its petition with EPA, and unless the petitioner alleges that NRC or the affected Agreement State failed to respond to such request by taking action,
(4) Upon receipt of a petition under § 61.226(b)(1) that is not dismissed under § 61.226(b)(2) or (b)(3), EPA will propose to grant or deny an authorized petition to reconsider, take comments on the Agency's proposed action, and take final action granting or denying such petition to reconsider within 300 days of receipt.
(c)
(2) Before the Administrator initiates reconsideration of the rescission and reinstatement of this subpart under § 61.226(c)(1), EPA shall consult with NRC to address EPA's concerns and if the consultation does not resolve the concerns, EPA shall provide NRC with 60 days notice of the Agency's intent to initiate rulemaking to reinstate this subpart.
(a) The provisions of this subpart apply to each of the following sources that are intended to operate in volatile hazardous air pollutant (VHAP) service: pumps, compressors, pressure relief devices, sampling connection systems, open-ended valves or lines, valves, flanges and other connectors, product accumulator vessels, and control devices or systems required by this subpart.
(b) The provisions of this subpart apply to the sources listed in paragraph (a) after the date of promulgation of a specific subpart in part 61.
(c) While the provisions of this subpart are effective, a source to which this subpart applies that is also subject to the provisions of 40 CFR part 60 only will be required to comply with the provisions of this subpart.
As used in this subpart, all terms not defined herein shall have the meaning given them in the Act, in subpart A of part 61, or in specific subparts of part 61; and the following terms shall have specific meaning given them:
(a) Each owner or operator subject to the provisions of this subpart shall demonstrate compliance with the requirements of §§ 61.242-1 to 61.242-11 for each new and existing source as required in 40 CFR 61.05, except as provided in §§ 61.243 and 61.244.
(b) Compliance with this subpart will be detemined by review of records, review of performance test results, and in-spec-tion using the methods and procedures specified in § 61.245.
(c)(1) An owner or operator may request a determination of alternative means of emission limitation to the requirements of §§ 61.242-2, 61.242-3, 61.242-5, 61.242-6, 61.242-7, 61.242-8, 61.242-9 and 61.242-11 as provided in § 61.244.
(2) If the Administrator makes a determination that a means of emission limitation is at least a permissible alternative to the requirements of § 61.242-2, 61.242-3, 61.242-5, 61.242-6, 61.242-7, 61.242-8, 61.242-9 or 61.242-11, an owner or operator shall comply with the requirements of that determination.
(d) Each piece of equipment to which this subpart applies shall be marked in such a manner that it can be dis-tin-quished readily from other pieces of equipment.
(e) Equipment that is in vacuum service is excluded from the requirements of § 61.242-2, to § 61.242-11 if it is identified as required in § 61.246(e)(5).
(a)(1) Each pump shall be monitored monthly to detect leaks by the methods specified in § 61.245(b), except as provided in § 61.242-1(c) and paragraphs (d), (e), and (f) of this section.
(2) Each pump shall be checked by visual inspection each calendar week for indications of liquids dripping from the pump seal.
(b)(1) If an instrument reading of 10,000 ppm or greater is measured, a leak is detected.
(2) If there are indications of liquids dripping from the pump seal, a leak is detected.
(c)(1) When a leak is detected, it shall be repaired as soon as practicable, but not later than 15 calendar days after it is detected, except as provided in § 61.242-10.
(2) A first attempt at repair shall be made no later than 5 calendar days after each leak is detected.
(d) Each pump equipped with a dual mechanical seal system that includes a barrier fluid system is exempt from the requirements of paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section, provided the following requirements are met:
(1) Each dual mechanical seal system is:
(i) Operated with the barrier fluid at a pressure that is at all times greater than the pump stuffing box pressure; or
(ii) Equipped with a barrier fluid degassing reservior that is connected by a closed-vent system to a control device that complies with the requirements of § 61.242-11; or
(iii) Equipped with a system that purges the barrier fluid into a process stream with zero VHAP emissions to atmosphere.
(2) The barrier fluid is not in VHAP service and, if the pump is covered by standards under 40 CFR part 60, is not in VOC service.
(3) Each barrier fluid system is equipped with a sensor that will detect failure of the seal system, the barrier fluid system, or both.
(4) Each pump is checked by visual inspection each calendar week for indications of liquids dripping from the pump seal.
(i) If there are indications of liquid dripping from the pump seal at the time of the weekly inspection, the pump shall be monitored as specified in § 61.245 to determine the presence of VOC and VHAP in the barrier fluid.
(ii) If the monitor reading (taking into account any background readings) indicates the presence of VHAP, a leak is detected. For the purpose of this paragraph, the monitor may be calibrated with VHAP, or may employ a gas chromatography column to limit the response of the monitor to VHAP, at the option of the owner or operator.
(iii) If an instrument reading of 10,000 ppm or greater (total VOC) is measured, a leak is detected.
(5) Each sensor as described in paragraph (d)(3) of this section is checked daily or is equipped with an audible alarm.
(6)(i) The owner or operator determines, based on design considerations and operating experience, criteria applicable to the presence and frequency of drips and to the sensor that indicates failure of the seal system, the barrier fluid system, or both.
(ii) If indications of liquids dripping from the pump seal exceed the criteria established in paragraph (d)(6)(i) of this section, or if, based on the criteria established in paragraph (d)(6)(i) of this section, the sensor indicates failure of the seal system, the barrier fluid system, or both, a leak is detected.
(iii) When a leak is detected, it shall be repaired as soon as practicable, but no later than 15 calendar days after it is detected, except as provided in § 61.242-10.
(iv) A first attempt at repair shall be made no later than five calendar days after each leak is detected.
(e) Any pump that is designated, as described in § 61.246(e)(2), for no detectable emissions, as indicated by an instrument reading of less than 500 ppm above background, is exempt from the requirements of paragraphs (a), (c), and (d) if the pump:
(1) Has no externally actuated shaft penetrating the pump housing,
(2) Is demonstrated to be operating with no detectable emissions, as indicated by an instrument reading of less than 500 ppm above background, as measured by the method specified in § 61.245(c), and
(3) Is tested for compliance with paragraph (e)(2) initially upon designation, annually, and at other times requested by the Administrator.
(f) If any pump is equipped with a closed-vent system capable of capturing and transporting any leakage from the seal or seals to a control device that complies with the requirements of § 61.242-11, it is exempt from the requirements of paragraphs (a)-(e).
(g) Any pump that is located within the boundary of an unmanned plant site is exempt from the weekly visual inspection requirement of paragraphs (a)(2) and (d)(4) of this section, and the daily requirements of paragraph (d)(5)(i) of this section, provided that each pump is visually inspected as often as practicable and at least monthly.
(a) Each compressor shall be equipped with a seal system that includes a barrier fluid system and that prevents leakage of process fluid to atmosphere, except as provided in § 61.242-1(c) and paragraphs (h) and (i) of this section.
(b) Each compressor seal system as required in paragraph (a) shall be:
(1) Operated with the barrier fluid at a pressure that is greater than the compressor stuffing box pressure; or
(2) Equipped with a barrier fluid system that is connected by a closed-vent system to a control device that complies with the requirements of § 61.242-11; or
(3) Equipped with a system that purges the barrier fluid into a process stream with zero VHAP emissions to atmosphere.
(c) The barrier fluid shall not be in VHAP service and, if the compressor is covered by standards under 40 CFR part 60, shall not be in VOC service.
(d) Each barrier fluid system as described in paragraphs (a)-(c) of this section shall be equipped with a sensor that will detect failure of the seal system, barrier fluid system, or both.
(e)(1) Each sensor as required in paragraph (d) of this section shall be checked daily or shall be equipped with an audible alarm unless the compressor is located within the boundary of an unmanned plant site.
(2) The owner or operator shall determine, based on design considerations and operating experience, a criterion that indicates failure of the seal system, the barrier fluid system, or both.
(f) If the sensor indicates failure of the seal system, the barrier fluid system, or both based on the criterion determined under paragraph (e)(2) of this section, a leak is detected.
(g)(1) When a leak is detected, it shall be repaired as soon as practicable, but not later than 15 calendar days after it is detected, except as provided in § 61.242-10.
(2) A first attempt at repair shall be made no later than 5 calendar days after eack leak is detected.
(h) A compressor is exempt from the requirements of paragraphs (a) and (b) if it is equipped with a closed-vent system capable of capturing and transporting any leakage from the seal to a control device that complies with the
(i) Any Compressor that is designated, as described in § 61.246(e)(2), for no detectable emission as indicated by an instrument reading of less than 500 ppm above background is exempt from the requirements of paragraphs (a)-(h) if the compressor:
(1) Is demonstrated to be operating with no detectable emissions, as indicated by an instrument reading of less than 500 ppm above background, as measured by the method specified in § 61.245(c); and
(2) Is tested for compliance with paragraph (i)(1) initially upon designation, annually, and at other times requested by the Administrator.
(a) Except during pressure releases, each pressure relief device in gas/vapor service shall be operated with no detectable emissions, as indicated by an instrument reading of less than 500 ppm above background, as measured by the method specified in § 61.245(c).
(b)(1) After each pressure release, the pressure relief device shall be returned to a condition of no detectable emissions, as indicated by an instrument reading of less than 500 ppm above background, as soon as practicable, but no later than 5 calendar days after each pressure release, except as provided in § 61.242-10.
(2) No later than 5 calendar days after the pressure release, the pressure relief device shall be monitored to confirm the condition of no detectable emissions, as indicated by an instrument reading of less than 500 ppm above background, as measured by the method specified in § 61.245(c).
(c) Any pressure relief device that is equipped with a closed-vent system capable of capturing and transporting leakage from the pressure relief device to a control device as described in § 61.242-11 is exempt from the requirements of paragraphs (a) and (b).
(a) Each sampling connection system shall be equipped with a closed-purge system or closed vent system, except as provided in § 61.242-1(c).
(b) Each closed-purge system or closed-vent system as required in paragraph (a) shall:
(1) Return the purged process fluid directly to the process line with zero VHAP emissions to atmosphere; or
(2) Collect and recycle the purged process fluid with zero VHAP emissions to atmosphere; or
(3) Be designed and operated to capture and transport all the purged process fluid to a control device that complies with the requirements of § 61.242-11.
(c)
(a)(1) Each open-ended valve or line shall be equipped with a cap, blind flange, plug, or a second valve, except as provided in § 61.242-1(c).
(2) The cap, blind flange, plug, or second valve shall seal the open end at all times except during operations requiring process fluid flow through the open-ended valve or line.
(b) Each open-ended valve or line equipped with a second valve shall be operated in a manner such that the valve on the process fluid end is closed before the second valve is closed.
(c) When a double block and bleed system is being used, the bleed valve or line may remain open during operations that require venting the line between the block valves but shall comply with paragraph (a) at all other times.
(a) Each valve shall be monitored monthly to detect leaks by the method specified in § 61.245(b) and shall comply with paragraphs (b)-(e), except as provided in paragraphs (f), (g), and (h) of this section, § 61.243-1 or § 61.243-2, and § 61.242-1(c).
(b) If an instrument reading of 10,000 ppm or greater is measured, a leak is detected.
(c)(1) Any valve for which a leak is not detected for 2 successive months may be monitored the first month of every quarter, beginning with the next quarter, until a leak is detected.
(2) If a leak is detected, the valve shall be monitored monthly until a leak is not detected for 2 successive months.
(d)(1) When a leak is detected, it shall be repaired as soon as practicable, but no later than 15 calendar days after the leak is detected, except as provided in § 61.242-10.
(2) A first attempt at repair shall be made no later than 5 calendar days after each leak is detected.
(e) First attempts at repair include, but are not limited to, the following best practices where practicable:
(1) Tightening of bonnet bolts;
(2) Replacement of bonnet bolts;
(3) Tightening of packing gland nuts; and
(4) Injection of lubricant into lubricated packing.
(f) Any valve that is designated, as described in § 61.246(e)(2), for no detectable emissions, as indicated by an instrument reading of less than 500 ppm above background, is exempt from the requirements of paragraph (a) if the valve:
(1) Has no external actuating mechanism in contact with the process fluid;
(2) Is operated with emissions less than 500 ppm above background, as measured by the method specified in § 61.245(c); and
(3) Is tested for compliance with paragraph (f)(2) initially upon designation, annually, and at other times requested by the Administrator.
(g) Any valve that is designated, as described in § 61.246(f)(1), as an unsafe-to-monitor valve is exempt from the requirements of paragraph (a) if:
(1) The owner or operator of the valve demonstrates that the valve is unsafe to monitor because monitoring personnel would be exposed to an immediate danger as a consequence of complying with paragraph (a); and
(2) The owner or operator of the valve has a written plan that requires monitoring of the valve as frequent as practicable during safe-to-monitor times.
(h) Any valve that is designated, as described in § 61.246(f)(2), as a difficult-to-monitor valve is exempt from the requirements of paragraph (a) if:
(1) The owner or operator of the valve demonstrates that the valve cannot be monitored without elevating the monitoring personnel more than 2 meters above a support surface;
(2) The process unit within which the valve is located is an existing process unit; and
(3) The owner or operator of the valve follows a written plan that requires monitoring of the valve at least once per calendar year.
(a) Pressure relief devices in liquid service and flanges and other connectors shall be monitored within 5 days by the method specified in § 61.245(b) if evidence of a potential leak is found by visual, audible, olfactory, or any other detection method, except at provided in § 61.242-1(c).
(b) If an instrument reading of 10,000 ppm or greater is measured, a leak is detected.
(c)(1) When a leak is detected, it shall be repaired as soon as practicable, but not later than 15 calendar days after it is detected, except as provided in § 61.242-10.
(2) The first attempt at repair shall be made no later than 5 calendar days after each leak is detected.
(d) First attempts at repair include, but are not limited to, the best practices described under § 61.242-7(e).
Each product accumulator vessel shall be equipped with a closed-vent system capable of capturing and transporting any leakage from the vessel to a control device as described in § 61.242-11, except as provided in § 61.242-1(c).
(a) Delay of repair of equipment for which leaks have been detected will be
(b) Delay of repair of equipment for which leaks have been detected will be allowed for equipment that is isolated from the process and that does not remain in VHAP service.
(c) Delay of repair for valves will be allowed if:
(1) The owner or operator demonstrates that emissions of purged material resulting from immediate repair are greater than the fugitive emissions likely to result from delay of repair, and
(2) When repair procedures are effected, the purged material is collected and destroyed or recovered in a control device complying with § 61.242-11.
(d) Delay of repair for pumps will be allowed if:
(1) Repair requires the use of a dual mechanical seal system that includes a barrier fluid system, and
(2) Repair is completed as soon as practicable, but not later than 6 months after the leak was detected.
(e) Delay of repair beyond a process unit shutdown will be allowed for a valve if valve assembly replacement is necessary during the process unit shutdown, valve assembly supplies have been depleted, and valve assembly supplies had been sufficiently stocked before the supplies were depleted. Delay of repair beyond the next process unit shutdown will not be allowed unless the next process unit shutdown occurs sooner than 6 months after the first process unit shutdown.
(a) Owners or operators of closed-vent systems and control devices used to comply with provisions of this subpart shall comply with the provisions of this section, except as provided in § 61.242-1(c).
(b) Vapor recovery systems (for example, condensers and adsorbers) shall be designed and operated to recover the organic vapors vented to them with an efficiency of 95 percent or greater.
(c) Enclosed combustion devices shall be designed and operated to reduce the VHAP emissions vented to them with an efficiency of 95 percent or greater or to provide a minimum residence time of 0.50 seconds at a minimum temperature of 760
(d) Flares shall used to comply with this subpart shall comply with the requirements of § 60.18.
(e) Owners or operators of control devices that are used to comply with the provisions of this supbart shall monitor these control devices to ensure that they are operated and maintained in conformance with their design.
(f)(1) Closed-vent systems shall be designed for and operated with no detectable emissions, as indicated by an instrument reading of less than 500 ppm above background and by visual inspections, as determined by the methods specified as § 61.245(c).
(2) Closed-event systems shall be monitored to determine compliance with this section initially in accordance with § 61.05, annually, and at other times requested by the administrator.
(3) Leaks, as indicated by an instrument reading greater than 500 ppm and visual inspections, shall be repaired as soon as practicable, but not later than 15 calendar days after the leak is detected.
(4) A first attempt at repair shall be made no later than 5 calendar days after the leak is detected.
(g) Closed-vent systems and control devices use to comply with provisions of this subpart shall be operated at all times when emissions may be vented to them.
(a) An owner or operator may elect to have all valves within a process unit to comply with an allowable percentage of valves leaking of equal to or less than 2.0 percent.
(b) The following requirements shall be met if an owner or operator decides to comply with an allowable percentage of valves leaking:
(1) An owner or operator must notify the Administrator that the owner or operator has elected to have all valves within a process unit to comply with
(2) A performance test as specified in paragraph (c) of this section shall be conducted initially upon designation, annually, and at other times requested by the Administrator.
(3) If a valve leak is detected, it shall be repaired in accordance with § 61.242-7(d) and (e).
(c) Performance tests shall be conducted in the following manner:
(1) All valves in VHAP service within the process unit shall be monitored within 1 week by the methods specified in § 61.245(b).
(2) If an instrument reading of 10,000 ppm or greater is measured, a leak is detected.
(3) The leak percentage shall be determined by dividing the number of valves in VHAP service for which leaks are detected by the number of valves in VHAP service within the process unit.
(d) Owner or operators who elect to have all valves comply with this alternative standard shall not have a process unit with a leak percentage greater than 2.0 percent.
(e) If an owner or operator decides no longer to comply with § 61.243-1, the owner or operator must notify the Administrator in writing that the work practice standard described in § 61.242-7(a)-(e) will be followed.
(a)(1) An owner or operator may elect for all valves within a process unit to comply with one of the alternative work practices specified in paragraphs (b)(2) and (3) of this section.
(2) An owner or operator must notify the Administrator before implementing one of the alternative work practices, as specified in § 61.247(d).
(b)(1) An owner or operator shall comply initially with the requirements for valves, as described in § 61.242-7.
(2) After 2 consecutive quarterly leak detection periods with the percentage of valves leaking equal to or less than 2.0, an owner or operator may begin to skip 1 of the quarterly leak detection periods for the valves in VHAP service.
(3) After 5 consecutive quarterly leak detection periods with the percentage of valves leaking equal to or less than 2.0, an owner or operator may begin to skip 3 of the quartely leak detection periods for the valves in VHAP service.
(4) If the percentage of valves leaking is greater than 2.0, the owner or operator shall comply with the requirements as described in § 61.242-7 but may again elect to use this section.
(a) Permission to use an alternative means of emission limitation under section 112(e)(3) of the Clean Air Act shall be governed by the following procedures:
(b) Where the standard is an equipment, design, or operational requirement:
(1) Each owner or operator applying for permission shall be responsible for collecting and verifying test data for an alternative means of emission limitation.limitation to test data for the equipment, design, and operational requirements.
(3) The Administrator may condition the permission on requirements that may be necessary to assure operation and maintenance to achieve the same emission reduction as the equipment, design, and operational requirements.
(c) Where the standard is a work practice:
(1) Each owner or operator applying for permission shall be responsible for collecting and verifying test data for an alternative means of emission limitation.
(2) For each source for which permission is requested, the emission reduction achieved by the required work practices shall be demonstrated for a minimum period of 12 months.
(3) For each source for which permission is requested, the emission reduction achieved by the alternative means of emission limitation shall be demonstrated.
(4) Each owner or operator applying for permission shall commit in writing each source to work practices that provide for emission reductions equal to or greater than the emission reductions achieved by the required work practices.
(5) The Administrator will compare the demonstrated emission reduction for the alternative means of emission limitation to the demonstrated emission reduction for the required work practices and will consider the commitment in paragraph (c)(4).
(6) The Administrator may condition the permission on requirements that may be necessary to assure operation and maintenance to achieve the same emission reduction as the required work practices of this subpart.
(d) An owner or operator may offer a unique approach to demonstrate the alternative means of emission limitation.
(e)(1) Manufacturers of equipment used to control equipment leaks of a VHAP may apply to the Administrator for permission for an alternative means of emission limitation that achieves a reduction in emissions of the VHAP achieved by the equipment, design, and operational requirements of this subpart.
(2) The Administrator will grant permission according to the provisions of paragraphs (b), (c), and (d).
(a) Each owner or operator subject to the provisions of this subpart shall comply with the test methods and procedures requirements provided in this section.
(b) Monitoring, as required in §§ 61.242, 61.243, 61.244, and 61.135, shall comply with the following requirements:
(1) Monitoring shall comply with Method 21 of appendix A of 40 CFR part 60.
(2) The detection instrument shall meet the performance criteria of Reference Method 21.
(3) The instrument shall be calibrated before use on each day of its use by the procedures specified in Reference Method 21.
(4) Calibration gases shall be:
(i) Zero air (less than 10 ppm of hydrocarbon in air); and
(ii) A mixture of methane or n-hexane and air at a concentration of approximately, but less than, 10,000 ppm methane or n-hexane.
(5) The instrument probe shall be traversed around all potential leak interfaces as close to the interface as possible as described in Reference Method 21.
(c) When equipment is tested for compliance with or monitored for no detectable emissions, the owner or operator shall comply with the following requirements:
(1) The requirements of paragraphs (b) (1) through (4) shall apply.
(2) The background level shall be determined, as set forth in Reference Method 21.
(3) The instrument probe shall be traversed around all potential leak interfaces as close to the interface as possible as described in Reference Method 21.
(4) The arithmetic difference between the maximum concentration indicated by the instrument and the background level is compared with 500 ppm for determining compliance.
(d)(1) Each piece of equipment within a process unit that can conceivably contain equipment in VHAP service is presumed to be in VHAP service unless an owner or operator demonstrates that the piece of equipment is not in VHAP service. For a piece of equipment to be considered not in VHAP service, it must be determined that the percent VHAP content can be reasonably expected never to exceed 10 percent by weight. For purposes of determining the percent VHAP content of the process fluid that is contained in or contacts equipment, procedures that conform to the methods described in ASTM Method D-2267 (incorporated by the reference as specified in § 61.18) shall be used.
(2)(i) An owner or operator may use engineering judgment rather than the procedures in paragraph (d)(1) of this section to demonstrate that the percent VHAP content does not exceed 10 percent by weight, provided that the engineering judgment demonstrates that the VHAP content clearly does not exceed 10 percent by weight. When an owner or operator and the Administrator do not agree on whether a piece of equipment is not in VHAP service, however, the procedures in paragraph (d)(1) of this section shall be used to resolve the disagreement.
(ii) If an owner or operator determines that a piece of equipment is in
(3) Samples used in determining the percent VHAP content shall be representative of the process fluid that is contained in or contacts the equipment or the gas being combusted in the flare.
(e)(1) Method 22 of appendix A of 40 CFR part 60 shall be used to determine compliance of flares with the visible emission provisions of this subpart.
(2) The presence of a flare pilot flame shall be monitored using a thermocouple or any other equivalent device to detect the presence of a flame.
(3) The net heating value of the gas being combusted in a flare shall be calculated using the following equation:
(4) The actual exit velocity of a flare shall be determined by dividing the volumetric flowrate (in units of standard temperature and pressure), as determined by Reference Method 2, 2A, 2C, or 2D, as appropriate, by the unobstructed (free) cross section area of the flare tip.
(5) The maximum permitted velocity, V
(a)(1) Each owner or operator subject to the provisions of this subpart shall comply with the recordkeeping requirements of this section.
(2) An owner or operator of more than one process unit subject to the provisions of this subpart may comply with the recordkeeping requirements for these process units in one recordkeeping system if the system identifies each record by each process unit.
(b) When each leak is detected as specified in §§ 61.242-2, 61.242-3, 61.242-7, 61.242-8, and 61.135, the following requirements apply:
(1) A weatherproof and readily visible identification, marked with the equipment identification number, shall be attached to the leaking equipment.
(2) The identification on a valve may be removed after it has been monitored for 2 successive months as specified in § 61.242-7(c) and no leak has been detected during those 2 months.
(3) The identification on equipment, except on a valve, may be removed after it has been repaired.
(c) When each leak is detected as specified in §§ 61.242-2, 61.242-3. 61.242-7, 61.242-8, and 61.135, the following information shall be recorded in a log and shall be kept for 2 years in a readily accessible location:
(1) The instrument and operator identification numbers and the equipment identification number.
(2) The date the leak was detected and the dates of each attempt to repair the leak.
(3) Repair methods applied in each attempt to repair the leak.
(4) “Above 10,000” if the maximum instrument reading measured by the methods specified in § 61.245(a) after each repair attempt is equal to or greater than 10,000 ppm.
(5) “Repair delayed” and the reason for the delay if a leak is not repaired within 15 calendar days after discovery of the leak.
(6) The signature of the owner or operator (or designate) whose decision it was that repair could not be effected without a process shutdown.
(7) The expected date of successful repair of the leak if a leak is not repaired within 15 calendar days.
(8) Dates of process unit shutdowns that occur while the equipment is unrepaired.
(9) The date of successful repair of the leak.
(d) The following information pertaining to the design requirements for closed-vent systems and control devices described in § 61.242-11 shall be recorded and kept in a readily accessible location:
(1) Detailed schematics, design specifications, and piping and instrumentation diagrams.
(2) The dates and descriptions of any changes in the design specifications.
(3) A description of the parameter or parameters monitored, as required in § 61.242-11(e), to ensure that control devices are operated and maintained in conformance with their design and an explanation of why that parameter (or parameters) was selected for the monitoring.
(4) Periods when the closed-vent systems and control devices required in §§ 61.242-2, 61.242-3, 61.242-4, 61.242-5 and 61.242-9 are not operated as designed, including periods when a flare pilot light does not have a flame.
(5) Dates of startups and shutdowns of the closed-vent systems and control devices required in §§ 61.242-2, 61.242-3, 61.242-4, 61.242-5 and 61.242-9.
(e) The following information pertaining to all equipment to which a standard applies shall be recorded in a log that is kept in a readily accessible location:
(1) A list of identification numbers for equipment (except welded fittings) subject to the requirements of this subpart.
(2)(i) A list of identification numbers for equipment that the owner or operator elects to designate for no detectable emissions as indicated by an instrument reading of less than 500 ppm above background.
(ii) The designation of this equipment for no detectable emissions shall be signed by the owner or operator.
(3) A list of equipment identification numbers for pressure relief devices required to comply with § 61.242-4(a).
(4)(i) The dates of each compliance test required in §§ 61.242-2(e), 61.242-3(i), 61.242-4, 61.242-7(f), and 61.135(g).
(ii) The background level measured during each compliance test.
(iii) The maximum instrument reading measured at the equipment during each compliance test.
(5) A list of identification numbers for equipment in vacuum service.
(f) The following information pertaining to all valves subject to the requirements of § 61.242-7(g) and (h) shall be recorded in a log that is kept in a readily accessible location:
(1) A list of identification numbers for valves that are designated as unsafe to monitor, an explanation for each valve stating why the valve is unsafe to monitor, and the plan for monitoring each valve.
(2) A list of identification numbers for valves that are designated as difficult to monitor, an explanation for each valve stating why the valve is difficult to monitor, and the planned schedule for monitoring each valve.
(g) The following information shall be recorded for valves complying with § 61.243-2:
(1) A schedule of monitoring.
(2) The percent of valves found leaking during each monitoring period.
(h) The following information shall be recorded in a log that is kept in a readily accessible location:
(1) Design criterion required in §§ 61.242-2(d)(5), 61.242-3(e)(2), and 61.135(e)(4) and an explanation of the design criterion; and
(2) Any changes to this criterion and the reasons for the changes.
(i) The following information shall be recorded in a log that is kept in a readily accessible location for use in determining exemptions as provided in the applicability section of this subpart and other specific subparts:
(1) An analysis demonstrating the design capacity of the process unit, and
(2) An analysis demonstrating that equipment is not in VHAP service.
(j) Information and data used to demonstrate that a piece of equipment is not in VHAP service shall be recorded
(a)(1) An owner or operator of any piece of equipment to which this subpart applies shall submit a statement in writing notifying the Administrator that the requirements of §§ 61.242, 61.245, 61.246, and 61.247 are being implemented.
(2) In the case of an existing source or a new source which has an initial startup date preceding the effective date, the statement is to be submitted within 90 days of the effective date, unless a waiver of compliance is granted under § 61.11, along with the information required under § 61.10. If a waiver of compliance is granted, the statement is to be submitted on a date scheduled by the Administrator.
(3) In the case of new sources which did not have an initial startup date preceding the effective date, the statement shall be submitted with the application for approval of construction, as described in § 61.07.
(4) The statement is to contain the following information for each source:
(i) Equipment identification number and process unit identification.
(ii) Type of equipment (for example, a pump or pipeline valve).
(iii) Percent by weight VHAP in the fluid at the equipment.
(iv) Process fluid state at the equipment (gas/vapor or liquid).
(v) Method of compliance with the standard (for example, “monthly leak detection and repair” or “equipped with dual mechanical seals”).
(b) A report shall be submitted to the Administrator semiannually starting 6 months after the initial report required in paragraph (a) of this section, that includes the following information:
(1) Process unit identification.
(2) For each month during the semiannual reporting period,
(i) Number of valves for which leaks were detected as described in § 61.242-7(b) of § 61.243-2.
(ii) Number of valves for which leaks were not repaired as required in § 61.242-7(d).
(iii) Number of pumps for which leaks were detected as described in § 61.242-2 (b) and (d)(6).
(iv) Number of pumps for which leaks were not repaired as required in § 61.242-2 (c) and (d)(6).
(v) Number of compressors for which leaks were detected as described in § 61.242-3(f).
(vi) Number of compressors for which leaks were not repaired as required in § 61.242-3(g).
(vii) The facts that explain any delay of repairs and, where appropriate, why a process unit shutdown was technically infeasible.
(3) Dates of process unit shutdowns which occurred within the semiannual reporting period.
(4) Revisions to items reported according to paragraph (a) if changes have occurred since the initial report or subsequent revisions to the initial report.
Compliance with the requirements of § 61.10(c) is not required for revisions documented under this paragraph.
(5) The results of all performance tests and monitoring to determine compliance with no detectable emissions and with §§61.243—1 and 61.243—2 conducted within the semiannual reporting period.
(c) In the first report submitted as required in paragraph (a) of this section, the report shall include a reporting schedule stating the months that semiannual reports shall be submitted. Subsequent reports shall be submitted according to that schedule, unless a revised schedule has been submitted in a previous semiannual report.
(d) An owner or operator electing to comply with the provisions of §§ 61.243-1 and 61.243-2 shall notify the Administrator of the alternative standard selected 90 days before implementing either of the provisions.
(e) An application for approval of construction or modification, §§ 61.05(a) and 61.07, will not be required if—
(1) The new source complies with the standard, § 61.242;
(2) The new source is not part of the construction of a process unit; and
(3) In the next semiannual report required by paragraph (b) of this section,
The provisions of this subpart apply to owners or operators of facilities licensed to manage uranium byproduct materials during and following the processing of uranium ores, commonly referred to as uranium mills and their associated tailings. This subpart does not apply to the disposal of tailings.
As used in this subpart, all terms not defined here have the meaning given them in the Clean Air Act or 40 CFR part 61, subpart A. The following terms shall have the following specific meanings:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(a) Radon-222 emissions to the ambient air from an existing uranium mill tailings pile shall not exceed 20 pCi/m
(b) After December 15, 1989, no new tailings impoundment can be built unless it is designed, constructed and operated to meet one of the two following work practices:
(1) Phased disposal in lined tailings impoundments that are no more than 40 acres in area and meet the requirements of 40 CFR 192.32(a) as determined by the Nuclear Regulatory Commission. The owner or operator shall have no more than two impoundments, including existing impoundments, in operation at any one time.
(2) Continuous disposal of tailings such that tailings are dewatered and immediately disposed with no more than 10 acres uncovered at any time and operated in accordance with § 192.32(a) as determined by the Nuclear Regulatory Commission.
(c) All mill owners or operators shall comply with the provisions of 40 CFR 192.32(a) in the operation of tailings piles, the exemption for existing piles in 40 CFR 192.32(a) notwithstanding.
Compliance with the emission standard in this subpart shall be determined annually through the use of Method 115 of appendix B. When measurements are to be made over a one year period, EPA shall be provided with a schedule of the
(a) The owners or operators of operating existing mill impoundments shall report the results of the compliance calculations required in § 61.253 and the input parameters used in making the calculation for each calendar year shall be sent to EPA by March 31 of the following year. Each report shall also include the following information:
(1) The name and location of the mill.
(2) The name of the person responsible for the operation of the facility and the name of the person preparing the report (if different).
(3) The results of the testing conducted, including the results of each measurement.
(4) Each report shall be signed and dated by a corporate officer in charge of the facility and contain the following declaration immediately above the signature line: “I certify under penalty of law that I have personally examined and am familiar with the information submitted herein and based on my inquiry of those individuals immediately responsible for obtaining the information, I believe that the submitted information is true, accurate and complete. I am aware that there are significant penalties for submitting false information including the possibility of fine and imprisonment. See, 18 U.S.C. 1001.”
(b) If the facility is not in compliance with the emission limits of § 61.252 in the calendar year covered by the report, then the facility must commence reporting to the Administrator on a monthly basis the information listed in paragraph (a) of this section, for the preceding month. These reports will start the month immediately following the submittal of the annual report for the year in noncompliance and will be due 30 days following the end of each month. This increased level of reporting will continue until the Administrator has determined that the monthly reports are no longer necessary. In addition to all the information required in paragraph (a) of this section, monthly reports shall also include the following information:
(1) All controls or other changes in operation of the facility that will be or are being installed to bring the facility into compliance.
(2) If the facility is under a judicial or administrative enforcement decree, the report will describe the facilities performance under the terms of the decree.
(c) The first report will cover the emissions of calendar year 1990.
The owner or operator of the mill must maintain records documenting the source of input parameters including the results of all measurements upon which they are based, the calculations and/or analytical methods used to derive values for input parameters, and the procedure used to determine compliance. In addition, the documentation should be sufficient to allow an independent auditor to verify the accuracy of the determination made concerning the facility's compliance with the standard. These records must be kept at the mill for at least five years and upon request be made available for inspection by the Administrator, or his authorized representative.
All facilities designated under this subpart are exempt from the reporting requirements of 40 CFR 61.10.
(a) The source to which this subpart applies is each storage vessel that is storing benzene having a specific gravity within the range of specific
(b) Except for paragraph (b) in § 61.276, storage vessels with a design storage capacity less than 38 cubic meters (10,000 gallons) are exempt from the provisions of this subpart.
(c) This subpart does not apply to storage vessels used for storing benzene at coke by-product facilities.
(d) This subpart does not apply to vessels permanently attached to motor vehicles such as trucks, rail cars, barges, or ships.
(e) This subpart does not apply to pressure vessels designed to operate in excess of 204.9 kPa and without emissions to the atmosphere.
(f) A designated source subject to the provisions of this subpart that is also subject to applicable provisions of 40 CFR part 60 subparts K, Ka, and Kb shall be required to comply only with the subpart that contains the most stringent requirements for that source.
The owner or operator of each storage vessel with a design storage capacity greater than or equal to 38 cubic meters (10,000 gallons) to which this subpart applies shall comply with the requirements in paragraph (d) of this section and with the requirements either in paragraph (a), (b), or (c) of this section, or equivalent as provided in § 61.273.
(a) The storage vessel shall be equipped with a fixed roof and an internal floating roof.
(1) An internal floating roof means a cover that rests on the liquid surface (but not necessarily in complete contact with it) inside a storage vessel that has a permanently affixed roof. The internal floating roof shall be floating on the liquid surface at all times, except during initial fill and during those intervals when the storage vessel is completely emptied or subsequently emptied and refilled. When the roof is resting on the leg supports, the process of filling, emptying, or refilling shall be continuous and shall be accomplished as rapidly as possible.
(2) Each internal floating roof shall be equipped with one of the closure devices listed in paragraphs (a)(2) (i), (ii), or (iii) of this section between the wall of the storage vessel and the edge of the internal floating roof. This requirement does not apply to each existing storage vessel for which construction of an internal floating roof equipped with a continuous seal commenced on or before July 28, 1988. A continuous seal means a seal that forms a continuous closure that completely covers the space between the wall of the storage vessel and the edge of the internal floating roof.
(i) A foam- or liquid-filled seal mounted in contact with the liquid (liquid-mounted seal). A liquid-mounted seal means a foam- or liquid-filled seal mounted in contact with the liquid between the wall of the storage vessel and the floating roof continuously around the circumference of the vessel.
(ii) Two seals mounted one above the other so that each forms a continuous closure that completely covers the space between the wall of the storage vessel and the edge of the internal floating roof. The lower seal may be vapor-mounted, but both must be continuous.
(iii) A metallic shoe seal. A metallic shoe seal (also referred to as a mechanical shoe seal) is, but is not limited to, a metal sheet held vertically against the wall of the storage vessel by springs or weighted levers and is connected by braces to the floating roof. A flexible coated fabric (envelope) spans the annular space between the metal sheet and the floating roof.
(3) Automatic bleeder vents are to be closed at all times when the roof is floating, except when the roof is being floated off or is being landed on the roof leg supports.
(4) Each opening in a noncontact internal floating roof except for automatic bleeder vents (vacuum breaker vents) and the rim space vents is to provide a projection below the liquid surface.
(5) Each internal floating roof shall meet the specifications listed below. If
(i) Each opening in the internal floating roof except for leg sleeves, automatic bleeder vents, rim space vents, column wells, ladder wells, sample wells, and stub drains is to be equipped with a cover or lid. The cover or lid shall be equipped with a gasket. Covers on each access hatch and automatic gauge float well shall be bolted.
(ii) Each penetration of the internal floating roof for the purposes of sampling shall be a sample well. Each sample well shall have a slit fabric cover that covers at least 90 percent of the opening.
(iii) Each automatic bleeder vent shall be gasketed.
(iv) Rim space vents shall be equipped with a gasket.
(v) Each penetration of the internal floating roof that allows for passage of a ladder shall have a gasketed sliding cover.
(vi) Each penetration of the internal floating roof that allows for passage of a column supporting the fixed roof shall have a flexible fabric sleeve seal or a gasketed sliding cover.
(6) Each cover or lid on any opening in the internal floating roof shall be closed (i.e., no visible gaps), except when a device is in actual use Covers on each access hatch and each automatic gauge float well which are equipped with bolts shall be bolted when they are not in use. Rim space vents are to be set to open only when the internal floating roof is not floating or at the manufacturer's recommended setting.
(b) The storage vessel shall have an external floating roof.
(1) An external floating roof means a pontoon-type or double-deck-type cover that rests on the liquid surface in a vessel with no fixed roof.
(2) Each external floating roof shall be equipped with a closure device between the wall of the storage vessel and the roof edge. Except as provided in paragraph (b)(5) of this section, the closure device is to consist of two seals, one above the other. The lower seal is referred to as the primary seal and the upper seal is referred to as the secondary seal.
(i) The primary seal shall be either a metallic shoe seal or a liquid-mounted seal. A liquid-mounted seal means a foam- or liquid-filled seal mounted in contact with the liquid between the wall of the storage vessel and the floating roof continuously around the circumference of the vessel. A metallic shoe seal (which can also be referred to as a mechanical shoe seal) is, but is not limited to, a metal sheet held vertically against the wall of the storage vessel by springs or weighted levers and is connected by braces to the floating roof. A flexible coated fabric (envelope) spans the annular space between the metal sheet and the floating roof. Except as provided in § 61.272(b)(4), the primary seal shall completely cover the annular space between the edge of the floating roof and the vessel wall.
(ii) The secondary seal shall completely cover the annular space between the external floating roof and the wall of the storage vessel in a continuous fashion except as allowed in § 61.272(b)(4).
(3) Except for automatic bleeder vents and rim space vents, each opening in the noncontact external floating roof shall provide a projection below the liquid surface. Except for automatic bleeder vents, rim space vents, roof drains, and leg sleeves, each opening in the roof is to be equipped with a gasketed cover, seal or lid which is to be maintained in a closed position at all times (i.e., no visible gap) except when the device is in actual use. Automatic bleeder vents are to be closed at all times when the roof is floating, except when the roof is being floated off or is being landed on the roof leg supports. Rim vents are to be set to open when the roof is being floated off the roof leg supports or at the manufacturer's recommended setting. Automatic bleeder vents and rim space vents are to be gasketed. Each emergency roof drain is to be provided with a slotted membrane fabric cover that covers at least 90 percent of the area of the opening.
(4) The roof shall be floating on the liquid at all times (i.e., off the roof leg supports) except during initial fill until the roof is lifted off leg supports and when the vessel is completely emptied and subsequently refilled. The process of emptying and refilling when the roof is resting on the leg supports shall be continuous and shall be accomplished as rapidly as possible.
(5) The requirement for a secondary seal does not apply to each existing storage vessel that was equipped with a liquid-mounted primary seal as of July 28, 1988, until after the first time after September 14, 1989, when the vessel is emptied and degassed or 10 years from September 14, 1989, whichever occurs first.
(c) The storage vessel shall be equipped with a closed vent system and a control device.
(1) The closed vent system shall be designed to collect all benzene vapors and gases discharged from the storage vessel and operated with no detectable emissions, as indicated by an instrument reading of less than 500 ppm above background and visual inspections, as determined in § 61.242-11 (subpart V).
(2) The control device shall be designed and operated to reduce inlet benzene emissions by 95 percent or greater. If a flare is used as the control device, it shall meet the specifications described in the general control device requirements of 40 CFR 60.18.
(3) The specifications and requirements listed in paragraphs (c)(1) and (c)(2) of this section for closed vent systems and control devices do not apply during periods of routine maintenance. During periods of routine maintenance, the benzene level in the storage vessel(s) serviced by the control device subject to the provisions of § 61.271(c) may be lowered but not raised. Periods of routine maintenance shall not exceed 72 hours as outlined in the maintenance plan required by § 61.272(c)(1)(iii).
(4) The specifications and requirements listed in paragraphs (c)(1) and (c)(2) of this section for closed vents and control devices do not apply during a control system malfunction. A control system malfunction means any sudden and unavoidable failure of air pollution control equipment. A failure caused entirely or in part by design deficiencies, poor maintenance, careless operation, or other preventable upset condition or equipment breakdown is not considered a malfunction.
(d) The owner or operator of each affected storage vessel shall meet the requirements of paragraph (a), (b), or (c) of this section as follows:
(1) The owner or operator of each existing benzene storage vessel shall meet the requirements of paragraph (a), (b), or (c) of this section no later than 90 days after September 14, 1989, with the exceptions noted in paragraphs (a)(5) and (b)(5), unless a waiver of compliance has been approved by the Administrator in accordance with § 61.11.
(2) The owner or operator of each benzene storage vessel upon which construction commenced after September 14, 1989, shall meet the requirements of paragraph (a), (b), or (c) of this section prior to filling (i.e., roof is lifted off leg supports) the storage vessel with benzene.
(3) The owner or operator of each benzene storage vessel upon which construction commenced on or after July 28, 1988, and before September 14, 1989, shall meet the requirements of paragraph (a), (b), or (c) of this section on September 14, 1989.
(a) For each vessel complying with § 61.271(a) (fixed roof and internal floating roof) each owner or operator shall:
(1) After installing the control equipment required to comply with § 61.271(a), visually inspect the internal floating roof, the primary seal, and the secondary seal (if one is in service), prior to filling the storage vessel with benzene. If there are holes, tears or other openings in the primary seal, the secondary seal, or the seal fabric, or defects in the internal floating roof, the owner or operator shall repair the items before filling the storage vessel.
(2) Visually inspect the internal floating roof and the primary seal or the secondary seal (if one is in service) through manholes and roof hatches on the fixed roof at least once every 12
(3) Visually inspect the internal floating roof, the primary seal, the secondary seal (if one is in service), gaskets, slotted membranes and sleeve seals (if any) each time the storage vessel is emptied and degassed. In no event shall inspections conducted in accordance with this provision occur at intervals greater than 10 years in the case of vessels conducting the annual visual inspections as specified in paragraph (a)(2) of this section and at intervals greater than 5 years in the case of vessels specified in paragraph (a)(4)(i) of this section.
(i) For all the inspections required by paragraphs (a)(1) and (a)(3) of this section, the owner or operator shall notify the Administrator in writing at least 30 days prior to the refilling of each storage vessel to afford the Administrator the opportunity to have an observer present. If the inspection required by paragraph (a)(3) of this section is not planned and the owner or operator could not have known about the inspection 30 days in advance of refilling the vessel, the owner or operator shall notify the Administrator at least 7 days prior to the refilling of the storage vessel. Notification shall be made by telephone immediately followed by written documentation demonstrating why the inspection was unplanned. Alternatively, the notification including the written documentation may be made in writing and sent by express mail so that it is received by the Administrator at least 7 days prior to refilling.
(ii) If the internal floating roof has defects, the primary seal has holes, tears, or other openings in the seal or the seal fabric, or the secondary seal has holes, tears, or other openings in the seal or the seal fabric, or the gaskets no longer close off the liquid surfaces from the atmosphere, or the slotted membrane has more than 10 percent open area, the owner or operator shall repair the items as necessary so that none of the conditions specified in this paragraph exist before refilling the storage vessel with benzene.
(4) For vessels equipped with a double-seal system as specified in § 61.271(a)(2)(ii):
(i) Visually inspect the vessel as specified in paragraph (a)(3) of this section at least every 5 years; or
(ii) Visually inspect the vessel annually as specified in paragraph (a)(2) of this section, and at least every 10 years as specified in paragraph (a)(3) of this section.
(b) For each vessel complying with § 61.271(b) (external floating roof) the owner or operator shall:
(1) Determine the gap areas and maximum gap widths between the primary seal and the wall of the storage vessel, and the secondary seal and the wall of the storage vessel according to the following frequency.
(i) For an external floating roof vessel equipped with primary and secondary seals, measurements of gaps between the vessel wall and the primary seal (seal gaps) shall be performed during the hydrostatic testing of the vessel or within 90 days of the initial fill with benzene or within 90 days of September 14, 1989, whichever occurs last, and at least once every 5 years thereafter, except as provided in paragraph (b)(1)(ii) of this section.
(ii) For an external floating roof vessel equipped with a liquid-mounted primary seal and without a secondary seal as provided for in § 61.271(b)(5), measurement of gaps between the vessel
(iii) For an external floating roof vessel equipped with primary and secondary seals, measurements of gaps between the vessel wall and the secondary seal shall be performed within 90 days of the initial fill with benzene, within 90 days of installation of the secondary seal, or within 90 days after September 14, 1989, whichever occurs last, and at least once per year thereafter.
(iv) If any source ceases to store benzene for a period of 1 year or more, subsequent introduction of benzene into the vessel shall be considered an initial fill for the purposes of paragraphs (b)(1)(i), (b)(1)(ii), and (b)(1)(iii) of this section.
(2) Determine gap widths and areas in the primary and secondary seals individually by the following procedures:
(i) Measure seal gaps, if any, at one or more floating roof levels when the roof is floating off the roof leg supports.
(ii) Measure seal gaps around the entire circumference of the vessel in each place where a 0.32 centimeter (cm) (1/8 in) diameter uniform probe passes freely (without forcing or binding against the seal) between the seal and the wall of the storage vessel and measure the circumferential distance of each such location.
(iii) The total surface area of each gap described in paragraph (b)(2)(ii) of this section shall be determined by using probes of various widths to measure accurately the actual distance from the vessel wall to the seal and multiplying each such width by its respective circumferential distance.
(3) Add the gap surface area of each gap location for the primary seal and the secondary seal individually. Divide the sum for each seal by the nominal diameter of the vessel and compare each ratio to the respective standards in § 61.272(b)(4) and § 61.272(b)(5).
(4) Repair conditions that do not meet requirements listed in paragraph (b)(4) (i) and (ii) within 45 days of identification in any inspection or empty and remove the storage vessel from service within 45 days.
(i) The accumulated area of gaps between the vessel wall and the metallic shoe seal or the liquid-mounted primary seal shall not exceed 212 cm
(A) One end of the metallic shoe is to extend into the stored liquid and the other end is to extend a minimum vertical distance of 61 cm (24 in) above the stored liquid surface.
(B) There are to be no holes, tears, or other openings in the shoe, seal fabric, or seal envelope.
(ii) The secondary seal is to meet the following requirements:
(A) The secondary seal is to be installed above the primary seal so that it completely covers the space between the roof edge and the vessel wall except as provided in paragraph (b)(4)(ii)(B) of this section.
(B) The accumulated area of gaps between the vessel wall and the secondary seal shall not exceed 21.2 cm
(C) There are to be no holes, tears, or other openings in the seal or seal fabric.
(iii) If a failure that is detected during inspections required in this paragraph cannot be repaired within 45 days and if the vessel cannot be emptied within 45 days, an extension of up to 30 additional days may be requested from the Administrator in the inspection report required in § 61.275(d). Such extension request must include a demonstration of unavailability of alternate storage capacity and a specification of a schedule that will assure that the control equipment will be repaired or the vessel will be emptied as soon as possible.
(5) The owner or operator shall notify the Administrator 30 days in advance of any gap measurements required by paragraph (b)(1) of this section to afford the Administrator the opportunity to have an observer present.
(6) Visually inspect the external floating roof, the primary seal, secondary seal, and fittings each time the vessel is emptied and degassed.
(i) If the external floating roof has defects, the primary seal has holes, tears, or other openings in the seal or the seal fabric, or the secondary seal has holes, tears, or other openings in the seal or the seal fabric, the owner or operator shall repair the items as necessary so that none of the conditions specified in this paragraph exist before filling or refilling the storage vessel with benzene.
(ii) For all the inspections required by paragraph (b)(6) of this section, the owner or operator shall notify the Administrator in writing at least 30 days prior to filling or refilling of each storage vessel to afford the Administrator the opportunity to inspect the storage vessel prior to refilling. If the inspection required by paragraph (b)(6) of this section is not planned and the owner or operator could not have known about the inspection 30 days in advance of refilling the vessel, the owner or operator shall notify the Administrator at least 7 days prior to refilling of the storage vessel. Notification shall be made by telephone immediately followed by written documentation demonstrating why the inspection was unplanned. Alternatively, this notification including the written documentation may be made in writing and sent by express mail so that it is received by the Administrator at least 7 days prior to the refilling.
(c) The owner or operator of each source that is equipped with a closed vent system and control device as required in § 60.271(c), other than a flare, shall meet the following requirements.
(1) Within 90 days after initial fill or after September 14, 1989, whichever comes last, submit for approval by the Administrator, an operating plan containing the information listed below.
(i) Documentation demonstrating that the control device being used achieves the required control efficiency during reasonably expected maximum loading conditions. This documentation is to include a description of the gas stream which enters the control device, including flow and benzene content under varying liquid level conditions (dynamic and static) and manufacturer's design specifications for the control device. If the control device or the closed vent capture system receives vapors, gases or liquids, other than fuels, from sources that are not designated sources under this subpart, the efficiency demonstration is to include consideration of all vapors, gases and liquids received by the closed vent capture system and control device. If an enclosed combustion device with a minimum residence time of 0.75 seconds and a minimum temperature of 816 °C is used to meet the 95 percent requirement, documentation that those conditions exist is sufficient to meet the requirements of this paragraph.
(ii) A description of the parameter or parameters to be monitored to ensure that the control device is operated and maintained in conformance with its design and an explanation of the criteria used for selection of that parameter (or parameters).
(iii) A maintenance plan for the system including the type of maintenance necessary, planned frequency of maintenance, and lengths of maintenance periods for those operations that would require the closed vent system or the control device to be out of compliance with § 61.271(c). The maintenance plan shall require that the system be out of compliance with § 61.271(c) for no more than 72 hours per year.
(2) Operate, monitor the parameters, and maintain the closed vent system and control device in accordance with the operating plan submitted to the Administrator in accordance with paragraph (c)(1) of this section, unless the plan was modified by the Administrator during the approval process. In this case, the modified plan applies.
(d) The owner or operator of each source that is equipped with a closed vent system and a flare to meet the requirements in § 61.271(c) shall meet the requirements as specified in the general control device requirements in 40 CFR 6O.18 (e) and (f).
(a) Upon written application from any person, the Administrator may approve the use of alternative means of emission limitation which have been demonstrated to his satisfaction to achieve a reduction in benzene emissions at least equivalent to the reduction in emissions achieved by any requirement in § 61.271 (a), (b), or (c) of this subpart.
(b) Determination of equivalence to the reduction in emissions achieved by the requirements of § 61.271 (a), (b), or (c) will be evaluated using the following information to be included in the written application to the Administrator:
(1) Actual emissions tests that use full-size or scale-model storage vessels that accurately collect and measure all benzene emissions from a given control device, and that accurately simulate wind and account for other emission variables such as temperature and barometric pressure.
(2) An engineering evaluation that the Administrator determines is an accurate method of determining equivalence.
(c) The Administrator may condition approval of equivalency on requirements that may be necessary to ensure operation and maintenance to achieve the same emission reduction as the requirements of § 61.271 (a), (b), or (c).
(d) If, in the Administrator's judgment, an application for equivalence may be approvable, the Administrator will publish a notice of preliminary determination in the
(a) The owner or operator of each storage vessel to which this subpart applies and which has a design capacity greater than or equal to 38 cubic meters (10,000 gallons) shall submit an initial report describing the controls which will be applied to meet the equipment requirements in § 61.271. For an existing storage vessel or a new storage vessel for which construction and operation commenced prior to September 14, 1989, this report shall be submitted within 90 days of September 14, 1989, and can be combined with the report required by § 61.10. For a new storage vessel for which construction or operation commenced on or after September 14, 1989, the report shall be combined with the report required by § 61.07. In the case where the owner or operator seeks to comply with § 61.271(c) with a control device other than a flare, this information may consist of the information required by 61.272(c)(1).
(b) The owner or operator of each storage vessel seeking to comply with § 61.271(c) with a flare, shall submit a report containing the measurements required by 40 CFR 60.18(f) (1), (2), (3), (4), (5), and (6). For the owner or operator of an existing storage vessel not seeking to obtain a waiver or a new storage vessel for which construction and operation commenced prior to September 14, 1989, this report shall be combined with the report required by paragraph (a) of this section. For the owner or operator of an existing storage vessel seeking to obtain a waiver, the reporting date will be established in the response to the waiver request. For the owner or operator of a new storage vessel for which construction or operation commenced after September 14, 1989, the report shall be submitted within 9O days of the date the vessel is initially filled (or partially filled) with benzene.
(a) The owner or operator of each storage vessel to which this subpart applies after installing control equipment in accordance with § 61.271(a) (fixed roof and internal floating roof) shall submit a report describing the results of each inspection conducted in accordance with § 61.272(a). For vessels for which annual inspections are required under § 61.272(a)(2), the first report is to be submitted no more than 12 months after the initial report submitted in accordance with § 61.274, and each report is to be submitted within 60 days of each annual inspection.
(1) Each report shall include the date of the inspection of each storage vessel and identify each storage vessel in which:
(i) The internal floating roof is not resting on the surface of the benzene liquid inside the storage vessel, or there is liquid on the roof, or the seal is detached from the internal floating roof, or there are holes, tears or other openings in the seal or seal fabric; or
(ii) There are visible gaps between the seal and the wall of the storage vessel.
(2) Where an annual report identifies any condition in paragraph (a)(1) of this section the annual report shall describe the nature of the defect, the date the storage vessel was emptied, and the nature of an date the repair was made, except as provided in paragraph (a)(3) of this section.
(3) If an extension is requested in an annual periodic report in accordance with § 61.272(a)(2), a supplemental periodic report shall be submitted within 15 days of repair. The supplemental periodic report shall identify the vessel and describe the date the storage vessel was emptied and the nature of and date the repair was made.
(b) The owner or operator of each storage vessel to which this subpart applies after installing control equipment in accordance with § 61.271(a) (fixed roof and internal floating roof) shall submit a report describing the results of each inspection conducted in accordance with § 61.272(a) (3) or (4).
(1) The report is to be submitted within 60 days of conducting each inspection required by § 61.272(a) (3) or (4).
(2) Each report shall identify each storage vessel in which the owner or operator finds that the internal floating roof has defects, the primary seal has holes, tears, or other openings in the seal or the seal fabric, or the secondary seal (if one has been installed) has holes, tears, or other openings in the seal or the seal fabric, or the gaskets no longer close off the liquid surfaces from the atmosphere, or the slotted membrane has more than 10 percent open area. The report shall also describe the nature of the defect, the date the storage vessel was emptied, and the nature of and date the repair was made.
(c) Any owner or operator of an existing storage vessel which had an internal floating roof with a continuous seal as of July 28, 1988, and which seeks to comply with the requirements of § 61.271(a)(5) during the first time after September 14, 1989, when the vessel is emptied and degassed but no later than 10 years from September 14, 1989, shall notify the Administrator 30 days prior to the completion of the installation of such controls and the date of refilling of the vessel so the Administrator has an opportunity to have an observer present to inspect the storage vessel before it is refilled. This report can be combined with the one required by § 61.275(b).
(d) The owner or operator of each storage vessel to which this subpart applies after installing control equipment in accordance with § 61.271(b) (external floating roof) shall submit a report describing the results of each seal gap measurement made in accordance with § 61.272(b). The first report is to be submitted no more than 12 months after the initial report submitted in accordance with § 61.274(a), and each annual periodic report is to be submitted within 60 days of each annual inspection.
(1) Each report shall include the date of the measurement, the raw data obtained in the measurement, and the calculations described in § 61.272(b) (2) and (3), and shall identify each storage vessel which does not meet the gap specifications of § 61.272(b). Where an annual report identifies any vessel not meeting the seal gap specifications of § 61.272(b) the report shall describe the date the storage vessel was emptied, the measures used to correct the condition and the date the storage vessel was brought into compliance.
(2) If an extension is requested in an annual periodic report in accordance with § 61.272(b)(4)(iii), a supplemental periodic report shall be submitted within 15 days of repair. The supplemental periodic report shall identify the vessel and describe the date the vessel was emptied and the nature of and date the repair was made.
(e) Excess emission report.
(1) The owner or operator of each source seeking to comply with § 61.271(c) (vessels equipped with closed vent systems with control devices)
(2) The owner or operator shall submit the following information as a minimum in the report required by (e)(1) of this section:
(i) Identify the stack and other emission points where the excess emissions occurred;
(ii) A statement of whether or not the owner or operator believes a control system malfunction has occurred.
(3) If the owner or operator states that a control system malfunction has occurred, the following information as a minimum is also to be included in the report required under paragraph (e)(1) of this section:
(i) Time and duration of the control system malfunction as determined by continuous monitoring data (if any), or the inspections or monitoring done in accordance with the operating plan required by § 61.272(c).
(ii) Cause of excess emissions.
(a) Each owner or operator with a storage vessel subject to this subpart shall keep copies of all the reports and records required by this subpart for at least 2 years, except as specified in paragraphs (b) and (c)(1) of this section.
(b) Each owner or operator with a storage vessel, including any vessel which has a design storage capacity less than 38 cubic meters (10,000 gallons), shall keep readily accessible records showing the dimensions of the storage vessel and an analysis showing the capacity of the storage vessel. This record shall be kept as long as the storage vessel is in operation. Each storage vessel with a design capacity of less than 38 cubic meters (10,000 gallons) is subject to no provisions of this subpart other than those required by this paragraph.
(c) The following information pertaining to closed vent system and control devices shall be kept in a readily accessible location.
(1) A copy of the operating plan. This record shall be kept as long as the closed vent system and control device is in use.
(2) A record of the measured values of the parameters monitored in accordance with § 61.272(c)(1)(ii) and § 61.272(c)(2).
(3) A record of the maintenance performed in accordance with § 61.272(c)(1)(iii) of the operating plan, including the following:
(i) The duration of each time the closed vent system and control device does not meet the specifications of § 61.271(c) due to maintenance, including the following:
(A) The first time of day and date the requirements of 61.271(c) were not met at the beginning of maintenance.
(B) The first time of day and date the requirements of § 61.271(c) were met at the conclusion of maintenance.
(C) A continuous record of the liquid level in each storage vessel that the closed vent system and control device receive vapors from during the interval between the times specified by (c)(3)(i)(A) and (c)(3)(i)(B). Pumping records (simultaneous input and output) may be substituted for records of the liquid level.
(a) In delegating implementation and enforcement authority to a State under section 112(d) of the Act, the authorities contained in paragraph (b) of this section shall be retained by the Administrator and not transferred to a State.
(b) Authorities which will not be delegated to States: § 61.273.
(a) The affected facility to which this subpart applies is the total of all loading racks at which benzene is loaded into tank trucks, railcars, or marine vessels at each benzene production facility and each bulk terminal. However, specifically exempted from this regulation are loading racks at which only the following are loaded: Benzene-laden waste (covered under subpart FF of this part), gasoline, crude oil, natural gas liquids, petroleum distillates (e.g., fuel oil, diesel, or kerosene), or benzene-laden liquid from coke by-product recovery plants.
(b) Any affected facility under paragraph (a) of this section which loads only liquid containing less than 70 weight-percent benzene is exempt from the requirements of this subpart, except for the recordkeeping and reporting requirements in § 61.305(i).
(c) Any affected facility under paragraph (a) of this section shall comply with the standards in § 61.302 at each loading rack that is handling a liquid containing 70 weight-percent or more benzene.
(d) Any affected facility under paragraph (a) of this section whose annual benzene loading is less than 1.3 million liters of 70 weight-percent or more benzene is exempt from the requirements of this subpart, except for the recordkeeping and reporting requirements in § 61.305(i).
(e) The owner or operator of an affected facility, as defined in § 61.300(a) that loads a marine vessel shall be in compliance with the provisions of this subpart on and after July 23, 1991. If an affected facility that loads a marine vessel also loads a tank truck or railcar, the marine vessel loading racks shall be in compliance with the provisions of this subpart on and after July 23, 1991, while the tank truck loading racks and the railcar loading racks shall be in compliance as required by § 61.12.
As used in this subpart, all terms not defined herein shall have the meaning given them in the Act, or in subpart A or subpart V of part 61.
(a) The owner or operator of an affected facility shall equip each loading rack with a vapor collection system that is:
(1) Designed to collect all benzene vapors displaced from tank trucks, railcars, or marine vessels during loading, and
(2) Designed to prevent any benzene vapors collected at one loading rack from passing through another loading rack to the atmosphere.
(b) The owner or operator of an affected facility shall install a control device and reduce benzene emissions routed to the atmosphere through the control device by 98 weight percent. If a boiler or process heater is used to comply with the percent reduction requirement, then the vent stream shall be introduced into the flame zone of such a device.
(c) The owner or operator of an affected facility shall operate any flare used to comply with paragraph (b) of this section in accordance with the requirements of § 60.18 (b) through (f).
(d) The owner or operator of an affected facility shall limit loading of benzene into vapor-tight tank trucks and vapor-tight railcars using the following procedures:
(1) The owner or operator shall obtain the vapor-tightness documentation described in § 61.305(h) for each tank truck or railcar loaded at the affected facility. The test date in the documentation must be within the preceding 12 months. The vapor-tightness test to be used for tank trucks and railcars is method 27 of part 60, appendix A.
(2) The owner or operator shall cross-check the identification number for each tank truck or railcar to be loaded with the file of vapor-tightness documentation before the corresponding tank truck or railcar is loaded. If no documentation is on file, the owner or operator shall obtain a copy of the information from the tank truck or railcar operator before the tank truck or railcar is loaded.
(3) Alternate procedures to those described in paragraphs (d)(1) and (d)(2) of this section may be used upon application to, and approval by, the Administrator.
(e) The owner or operator of an affected facility shall limit the loading of marine vessels to those vessels that
(1) The owner or operator of an affected facility shall ensure that each marine vessel is loaded with the benzene product tank below atmospheric pressure (i.e., at negative pressure). If the pressure is measured at the interface between the shoreside vapor collection pipe and the marine vessel vapor line, the pressure measured according to the procedures in § 61.303(f) must be below atmospheric pressure.
(2) The owner or operator of an affected facility shall use the following procedure to obtain the vapor-tightness documentation described in § 61.305(h). The vapor-tightness test for marine vessels is method 21 of part 60, appendix A, and shall be applied to any potential sources of vapor leaks. A reading of 10,000 ppmv or greater as methane shall constitute a leak.
(i) The owner or operator of an affected facility shall obtain the leak test documentation described in § 61.305(h) for each marine vessel prior to loading, if available. The date of the test listed in the documentation must be within the 12 preceding months.
(ii) If there is no documentation of a successful leak test conducted on the marine vessel in the preceding 12 months, the owner or operator of an affected facility shall require that a leak test of the marine vessel be conducted during the final 20 percent of loading of the marine vessel or shall not load the vessel. The test shall be conducted when the marine vessel is being loaded at the maximum allowable loading rate.
(A) If no leak is detected, the owner or operator of an affected facility shall require that the documentation described in § 61.305(h) is completed prior to departure of the vessel. The owner or operator of the affected facility shall retain a copy of the vapor-tightness documentation on file.
(B) If any leak is detected, the owner or operator of an affected facility shall require that the vapor-tightness failure be documented for the marine vessel owner or operator prior to departure of the vessel. The owner or operator of the affected facility shall retain a copy of the vapor-tightness documentation on file. Delay of repair of equipment for which leaks have been detected will be allowed if the repair is technically infeasible without dry-docking the vessel. This equipment will be excluded from future method 21 tests until repairs are effected. Repair of this equipment shall occur the next time the vessel is dry-docked.
(iii) If the marine vessel has failed its most recent vapor-tightness test as described in § 61.302(e)(2)(ii), the owner or operator of the affected facility shall require that the owner or operator of the nonvapor-tight marine vessel provide documentation that the leaks detected during the previous vapor-tightness test have been repaired, or proof that repair is technically infeasible without dry-docking the vessel. Once the repair documentation has been provided, the owner or operator may load the marine vessel. The owner or operator shall require that the vapor-tightness test described in § 61.302(e)(2)(ii) be conducted during loading, and shall retain a copy of the vapor-tightness documentation on file.
(3) The owner or operator of an affected facility shall obtain a copy of the marine vessel's vapor-tightness documentation described in § 61.305(h) for a test conducted within the preceding 12 months in accordance with § 61.304(f).
(4) Alternate procedures to those described in paragraphs (e)(1), (e)(2) and (e)(3) of this section may be used upon application to, and approval by, the Administrator.
(f) The owner or operator of an affected facility shall limit loading of benzene to tank trucks, railcars, and marine vessels equipped with vapor collection equipment that is compatible with the affected facility's vapor collection system.
(g) The owner or operator of an affected facility shall limit loading of tank trucks, railcars, and marine vessels to tank trucks, railcars, and marine vessels whose collection systems are connected to the affected facility's vapor collection systems.
(h) The owner or operator of an affected facility shall ensure that the vapor collection and benzene loading equipment of tank trucks and railcars
(i) The owner or operator of an affected facility shall ensure that no pressure-vacuum vent in the affected facility's vapor collection system for tank trucks and railcars shall begin to open at a system pressure less than the maximum pressure at which the tank truck or railcar is operated.
(j) The owner or operator of an affected facility shall ensure that the maximum normal operating pressure of the marine vessel's vapor collection equipment shall not exceed 0.8 times the relief set pressure of the pressure-vacuum vents. This level is not to be exceeded when measured by the procedures specified in § 61.304(d).
(k) The owner or operator of an affected facility shall inspect the vapor collection system and the control device for detectable emissions, and shall repair any leaks detected, in accordance with § 61.242-11 (e) and (f). This inspection of the vapor collection system and control device shall be done during the loading of tank trucks, railcars, or marine vessels.
(l) Vent systems that contain valves that could divert a vent stream from a control device shall have car-sealed opened all valves in the vent system from the emission source to the control device, and car-sealed closed all valves in the vent system that would lead the vent stream to the atmosphere, either directly or indirectly, bypassing the control device.
(a) Each owner or operator of an affected facility that uses an incinerator to comply with the percent reduction requirement specified under § 61.302(b) shall install, calibrate, maintain, and operate according to manufacturer's specifications a temperature monitoring device equipped with a continuous recorder and having an accuracy of
(1) Where an incinerator other than a catalytic incinerator is used, the owner or operator of the affected facility shall install a temperature monitoring device in the firebox.
(2) Where a catalytic incinerator is used, the owner or operator shall install temperature monitoring devices in the gas stream immediately before and after the catalyst bed.
(b) Each owner or operator of an affected facility that uses a flare to comply with § 61.302(b) shall install, calibrate, maintain, and operate according to manufacturer's specifications a heat sensing device, such as an ultraviolet beam sensor or thermocouple, at the pilot light to indicate the presence of a flame during the entire loading cycle.
(c) Each owner or operator of an affected facility that uses a steam generating unit or process heater to comply with § 61.302(b) shall comply with the following requirements. Where a steam generating unit with a design heat input capacity of less than 44 MW is used to comply with § 61.302(b), the owner or operator of an affected facility shall comply with paragraph (c)(1) of this section. Where a steam generating unit or process heater with a design heat input capacity of 44 MW or greater is used to comply with § 61.302(b), the owner or operator of an affected facility shall comply with paragraph (c)(2) of this section.
(1) Install in the firebox, calibrate, maintain, and operate according to manufacturer's specifications a temperature monitoring device equipped with a continuous recorder and having an accuracy of
(2) Monitor and record the periods of operation of the steam generating units or process heater if the design heat input capacity of the steam generating unit or process heater is 44 MW or greater. The records must be readily available for inspection.
(d) Each owner or operator of an affected facility that uses a carbon adsorption system to comply with the percent reduction requirement specified under § 61.302(b) shall install, calibrate, maintain, and operate according to manufacturer's specifications a device that continuously indicates and records the concentration or reading of organic compounds in the outlet gas stream of each carbon adsorber bed.
(e) The owner or operator of an affected facility who wishes to demonstrate compliance with the standards specified under § 61.302(b) using control devices other than an incinerator, steam generating unit, process heater, carbon adsorber, or flare shall provide the Administrator with information describing the operation of the control device and the process parameter(s) that would indicate proper operation and maintenance of the device. The Administrator may request further information and will specify appropriate monitoring procedures or requirements.
(f) Each owner or operator of an affected facility complying with § 61.302(e)(1) shall install, calibrate, maintain, and operate a recording pressure measurement device (magnehelic gauge or equivalent device) and an audible and visible alarm system that is activated when the pressure vacuum specified in § 61.302(e)(1) is not attained. The owner or operator shall place the alarm system so that it can be seen and heard where cargo transfer is controlled and on the open deck.
(g) Owners or operators using a vent system that contains valves that could divert a vent stream from a control device used to comply with the provisions of this subpart shall do one or a combination of the following:
(1) Install a flow indicator immediately downstream of each valve that if opened would allow a vent stream to bypass the control device and be emitted, either directly or indirectly, to the atmosphere. The flow indicator shall be capable of recording flow at least once every 15 minutes.
(2) Monitor the valves once a month, checking the position of the valves and the condition of the car seal, and identify all times when the car seals have been broken and the valve position has been changed (
(a) The procedures for determining compliance with § 61.302(b) for all control devices other than flares is as follows:
(1) All testing equipment shall be prepared and installed as specified in the appropriate test methods.
(2) The time period for a performance test shall be not less than 6 hours, during which at least 300,000 liters of benzene are loaded. If the throughput criterion is not met during the initial 6 hours, the test may be either continued until the throughput criterion is met, or resumed the next day with at least another 6 complete hours of testing.
(3) For intermittent control devices:
(i) The vapor holder level of the intermittent control device shall be recorded at the start of the performance test. The end of the performance test shall coincide with the time when the vapor holder is at its original level.
(ii) At least two startups and shutdowns of the control device shall occur during the performance test. If this does not occur under an automatically controlled operation, the system shall be manually controlled.
(4) An emission testing interval shall consist of each 5-minute period during the performance test. For each interval:
(i) The reading from each measurement instrument shall be recorded.
(ii) Method 1 or 1A of part 60, appendix A, as appropriate, shall be used for selection of the sampling site,
(iii) The volume exhausted shall be determined using method 2, 2A, 2C, or 2D of part 60, appendix A, as appropriate.
(iv) The average benzene concentration upstream and downstream of the control device in the vent shall be determined using method 25A or method 25B of appendix A of this part, using benzene as the calibration gas. The average benzene concentration shall correspond to the volume measurement by
(5) The mass emitted during each testing interval shall be calculated as follows:
(6) The benzene mass emission rates before and after the control device shall be calculated as follows:
(7) The percent reduction across the control device shall be calculated as follows:
(b) When a flare is used to comply with § 61.302(b), a performance test according to method 22 of appendix A of this part, shall be performed to determine visible emissions. The observation period shall be at least 2 hours and shall be conducted according to method 22. Performance testing shall be conducted during at least three complete loading cycles with a separate test run for each loading cycle. The observation period for detecting visible emissions shall encompass each loading cycle. Integrated sampling to measure process vent stream flow rate shall be performed continuously during each loading cycle.
(c) For the purpose of determining compliance with § 61.302(h), the following procedures shall be used:
(1) Calibrate and install a pressure measurement device (liquid manometer, magnehelic gauge, or equivalent instrument), which has a precision of
(2) Connect the pressure measurement device to a pressure tap in the affected facility's vapor collection system, located as close as possible to the connection with the tank truck or railcar.
(3) During the performance test, record the pressure every 5 minutes while a tank truck or railcar is being loaded, and record the highest instantaneous pressure that occurs during each loading cycle. Every loading rack shall be tested at least once during the performance test.
(4) If more than one loading rack is used simultaneously, then the performance test shall be conducted simultaneously to represent the maximum capacity.
(d) For the purpose of determining compliance with § 61.302(j), the following procedures shall be used:
(1) Calibrate and install a pressure measurement device (liquid manometer, magnehelic gauge, or equivalent instrument), capable of measuring up to the relief set pressure of the pressure-vacuum vents.
(2) Connect the pressure measurement device to a pressure tap in the affected facility's vapor collection system, located as close as possible to the connection with the marine vessel.
(3) During the performance test, record the pressure every 5 minutes while a marine vessel is being loaded, and record the highest instantaneous pressure that occurs during each loading cycle.
(e) Immediately prior to a performance test required for determination of
(f) The following test method shall be used to comply with the marine vessel vapor-tightness requirements of § 61.302(e)(3):
(1) Each benzene product tank shall be pressurized with dry air or inert gas to not less than 1.0 psig and not more than the pressure of the lowest relief valve setting.
(2) Once the pressure is obtained, the dry air or inert gas source shall be shut off.
(3) At the end of one-half hour, the pressure in the benzene product tank and piping shall be measured. The change in pressure shall be calculated using the following formula:
(4) The change in pressure,
(5) If
(6) If
(a) Each owner or operator of an affected facility subject to the provisions of this subpart shall keep an up-to-date, readily accessible record of the following data measured during each performance test, and also include the following data in the report of the initial performance test required under § 61.13. Where a steam generating unit or process heater with a design heat input capacity of 44 MW or greater is used to comply with § 61.302(b), a report containing performance test data need not be submitted, but a report containing the information in § 61.305(a)(3)(i) is required.
(1) Where an owner or operator subject to the provisions of this subpart is complying with § 61.302(b) through use of an incinerator:
(i) The average firebox temperature of the incinerator (or the average temperature upstream and downstream of the catalyst bed), measured at least every 2 minutes during a loading cycle if the total time period of the loading cycle is less than 3 hours and every 15 minutes if the total time period of the loading cycle is equal to or greater than 3 hours. The measured temperature shall be averaged over the loading cycle.
(ii) The percent reduction of benzene determined as specified in § 61.304(a) achieved by the incinerator.
(iii) The duration of the loading cycle.
(2) Where an owner or operator subject to the provisions of this subpart is complying with § 61.302 (b) and (c) through use of a smokeless flare or other flare design (i.e., steam-assisted, air-assisted or nonassisted), all visible emission readings, heat content determination, flow rate measurements, maximum permitted velocity calculations, and exit velocity determinations made during the performance test, continuous records of the flare pilot flame monitoring measured continuously during the loading cycle, duration of all loading cycles and records of all loading cycles during which the pilot flame is absent for each vent stream.
(3) Where an owner or operator subject to the provisions of this subpart is complying with § 61.302(b) through the
(i) A description of the location at which the vent stream is introduced into the steam generating unit or process heater.
(ii) The average combustion temperature of the steam generating unit or process heater with a design heat input capacity of less than 44 MW measured at least every 2 minutes during a loading cycle if the total time period of the loading cycle is less than 3 hours and every 15 minutes if the total time period of the loading cycle is equal to or greater than 3 hours. The measured temperature shall be averaged over the loading cycle.
(iii) The duration of the loading cycle.
(4) Where an owner or operator subject to the provisions of this subpart is complying with § 61.302(b) through the use of a carbon adsorption system, the control efficiency, R, of the carbon adsorption system, and all supporting performance test data and calculations used to determine that value.
(5) Each owner or operator subject to the provisions of this subpart shall submit with the initial performance test an engineering report describing in detail the vent system used to vent each affected vent stream to a control device. This report shall include all valves and vent pipes that could vent the stream to the atmosphere, thereby bypassing the control device, and identify which valves are car-sealed opened and which valves are car-sealed closed.
(b) Each owner or operator subject to the provisions of this subpart shall keep up-to-date, readily accessible continuous records of the equipment operating parameters specified to be monitored under § 61.303 (a), (c), and (d) as well as up-to-date, readily accessible records of periods of operation during which the parameter boundaries established during the most recent performance test are exceeded. The Administrator may at any time require a report of these data. Periods of operation during which the parameter boundaries established during the most recent performance tests are exceeded are defined as follows:
(1) For thermal incinerators, all loading cycles during which the average combustion temperature was more than 28°C below the average loading cycle combustion temperature during the most recent performance test at which compliance with § 61.302(b) was determined.
(2) For catalytic incinerators, all loading cycles during which the average temperature of the vent stream immediately before the catalyst bed is more than 28°C below the average temperature of the process vent stream during loading cycles during the most recent performance test at which compliance with § 61.302(b) was determined.
(3) All loading cycles during which the average combustion temperature was more than 28°C below the average combustion temperature during the most recent performance test at which compliance with § 61.302(b) was determined for steam generating units or process heaters with a design heat input capacity of less than 44 MW.
(4) For steam generating units or process heaters, whenever there is a change in the location at which the vent stream is introduced into the flame zone as required under § 61.302(b).
(5) For carbon adsorbers, all 3-hour periods of operation during which the average VOC concentration or reading of organics in the exhaust gases is more than 20 percent greater than the average exhaust gas concentration or reading measured by the organics monitoring device during the most recent determination of the recovery efficiency of the carbon adsorber that demonstrated that the facility was in compliance.
(c) If a vent system containing valves that could divert the emission stream away from the control device is used, each owner or operator subject to the provisions of this subpart shall keep for at least 2 years up-to-date, readily accessible continuous records of:
(1) All periods when flow is indicated if flow indicators are installed under § 61.303(g)(1).
(2) All times when maintenance is performed on car-sealed valves, when the car seal is broken, and when the valve position is changed (i.e., from open to closed for valves in the vent piping to the control device and from closed to open for valves that vent the
(d) Each owner or operator of an affected facility subject to the provisions of this subpart who uses a steam generating unit or process heater with a design heat input capacity of 44 MW or greater to comply with § 61.302(b) shall keep an up-to-date, readily accessible record of all periods of operation of the steam generating unit or process heater. Examples of such records could include records of steam use, fuel use, or monitoring data collected pursuant to other State or Federal regulatory requirements.
(e) Each owner or operator of an affected facility subject to the provisions of this subpart shall keep up-to-date, readily accessible records of the flare pilot flame monitoring specified under § 61.303(b), as well as up-to-date, readily accessible records of any absence of the pilot flame during a loading cycle.
(f) Each owner or operator of an affected facility subject to the requirements of § 61.302 shall submit to the Administrator quarterly reports of the following information. The owner or operator shall submit the initial report within 90 days after the effective date of this subpart or 90 days after startup for a source that has an initial startup date after the effective date.
(1) Periods of operation where there were exceedances of monitored parameters recorded under § 61.305(b).
(2) All periods recorded under § 61.305(c)(1) when the vent stream is diverted from the control device.
(3) All periods recorded under § 61.305(d) when the steam generating unit or process heater was not operating.
(4) All periods recorded under § 61.305(e) in which the pilot flame of the flare was absent.
(5) All times recorded under § 61.305(c)(2) when maintenance is performed on car-sealed valves, when the car seal is broken, and when the valve position is changed.
(g) The owner or operator of an affected facility shall keep the vapor-tightness documentation required under § 61.302 (d) and (e) on file at the affected facility in a permanent form available for inspection.
(h) The owner or operator of an affected facility shall update the documentation file required under § 61.302 (d) and (e) for each tank truck, railcar, or marine vessel at least once per year to reflect current test results as determined by the appropriate method. The owner or operator shall include, as a minimum, the following information in this documentation:
(1) Test title;
(2) Tank truck, railcar, or marine vessel owner and address;
(3) Tank truck, railcar, or marine vessel identification number;
(4) Testing location;
(5) Date of test;
(6) Tester name and signature;
(7) Witnessing inspector: name, signature, and affiliation; and
(8) Test results, including, for railcars and tank trucks, the initial pressure up to which the tank was pressured at the start of the test.
(i) Each owner or operator of an affected facility complying with § 61.300(b) or § 61.300(d) shall record the following information. The first year after promulgation the owner or operator shall submit a report containing the requested information to the Director of the Emission Standards Division, (MD-13), U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, North Carolina 27711. After the first year, the owner or operator shall continue to record; however, no reporting is required. The information shall be made available if requested. The information shall include, as a minimum:
(1) The affected facility's name and address;
(2) The weight percent of the benzene loaded;
(3) The type of vessel loaded (i.e., tank truck, railcar, or marine vessel); and
(4) The annual amount of benzene loaded into each type of vessel.
(a) In delegating implementation and enforcement authority to a State under section 112(d) of the Act, the authorities contained in paragraph (b) of this section shall be retained by the
(b) Authorities which will not be delegated to States: No restrictions.
(a) The provisions of this subpart apply to owners and operators of chemical manufacturing plants, coke by-product recovery plants, and petroleum refineries.
(b) The provisions of this subpart apply to owners and operators of hazardous waste treatment, storage, and disposal facilities that treat, store, or dispose of hazardous waste generated by any facility listed in paragraph (a) of this section. The waste streams at hazardous waste treatment, storage, and disposal facilities subject to the provisions of this subpart are the benzene-containing hazardous waste from any facility listed in paragraph (a) of this section. A hazardous waste treatment, storage, and disposal facility is a facility that must obtain a hazardous waste management permit under subtitle C of the Solid Waste Disposal Act.
(c) At each facility identified in paragraph (a) or (b) of this section, the following waste is exempt from the requirements of this subpart:
(1) Waste in the form of gases or vapors that is emitted from process fluids:
(2) Waste that is contained in a segregated stormwater sewer system.
(1) In accordance with § 60.17(c); or
(2) As obtained from standard reference texts; or
(3) In accordance with § 60.17(a)(37); or
(4) Any other method approved by the Administrator.
(1) Contains ammonia or sulfur compounds (usually hydrogen sulfide) at concentrations of 10 ppm by weight or more;
(2) Is generated from separation of water from a feed stock, intermediate, or product that contained ammonia or sulfur compounds; and
(3) Requires treatment to remove the ammonia or sulfur compounds.
(1) Is designed and operated to remove ammonia or sulfur compounds (usually hydrogen sulfide) from sour water streams;
(2) Has the sour water streams transferred to the stripper through hard piping or other enclosed system; and
(3) Is operated in such a manner that the offgases are sent to a sulfur recovery unit, processing unit, incinerator, flare, or other combustion device.
(a) An owner or operator of a facility at which the total annual benzene quantity from facility waste is less than 10 megagrams per year (Mg/yr) shall be exempt from the requirements of paragraphs (b) and (c) of this section. The total annual benzene quantity from facility waste is the sum of the annual benzene quantity for each waste stream at the facility that has a flow-weighted annual average water content greater than 10 percent or that is mixed with water, or other wastes, at any time and the mixture has an annual average water content greater than 10 percent. The benzene quantity in a waste stream is to be counted only once without multiple counting if other waste streams are mixed with or generated from the original waste stream. Other specific requirements for calculating the total annual benzene waste quantity are as follows:
(1) Wastes that are exempted from control under §§ 61.342(c)(2) and 61.342(c)(3) are included in the calculation of the total annual benzene quantity if they have an annual average water content greater than 10 percent, or if they are mixed with water or other wastes at any time and the mixture has an annual average water content greater than 10 percent.
(2) The benzene in a material subject to this subpart that is sold is included in the calculation of the total annual benzene quantity if the material has an annual average water content greater than 10 percent.
(3) Benzene in wastes generated by remediation activities conducted at the facility, such as the excavation of contaminated soil, pumping and treatment of groundwater, and the recovery of product from soil or groundwater, are not included in the calculation of total annual benzene quantity for that facility. If the facility's total annual benzene quantity is 10 Mg/yr or more, wastes generated by remediation activities are subject to the requirements of paragraphs (c) through (h) of this section. If the facility is managing remediation waste generated offsite, the benzene in this waste shall be included in the calculation of total annual benzene quantity in facility waste, if the waste streams have an annual average water content greater than 10 percent, or if they are mixed with water or other wastes at any time and the mixture has an annual average water content greater than 10 percent.
(4) The total annual benzene quantity is determined based upon the quantity
(b) Each owner or operator of a facility at which the total annual benzene quantity from facility waste is equal to or greater than 10 Mg/yr as determined in paragraph (a) of this section shall be in compliance with the requirements of paragraphs (c) through (h) of this section no later than 90 days following the effective date, unless a waiver of compliance has been obtained under § 61.11, or by the initial startup for a new source with an initial startup after the effective date.
(1) The owner or operator of an existing source unable to comply with the rule within the required time may request a waiver of compliance under § 61.10.
(2) As part of the waiver application, the owner or operator shall submit to the Administrator a plan under § 61.10(b)(3) that is an enforceable commitment to obtain environmental benefits to mitigate the benzene emissions that result from extending the compliance date. The plan shall include the following information:
(i) A description of the method of compliance, including the control approach, schedule for installing controls, and quantity of the benzene emissions that result from extending the compliance date;
(ii) If the control approach involves a compliance strategy designed to obtain integrated compliance with multiple regulatory requirements, a description of the other regulations involved and their effective dates; and
(iii) A description of the actions to be taken at the facility to obtain mitigating environmental benefits, including how the benefits will be obtained, the schedule for these actions, and an estimate of the quantifiable benefits that directly result from these actions.
(c) Each owner or operator of a facility at which the total annual benzene quantity from facility waste is equal to or greater than 10 Mg/yr as determined in paragraph (a) of this section shall manage and treat the facility waste as follows:
(1) For each waste stream that contains benzene, including (but not limited to) organic waste streams that contain less than 10 percent water and aqueous waste streams, even if the wastes are not discharged to an individual drain system, the owner or operator shall:
(i) Remove or destroy the benzene contained in the waste using a treatment process or wastewater treatment system that complies with the standards specified in § 61.348 of this subpart.
(ii) Comply with the standards specified in §§ 61.343 through 61.347 of this subpart for each waste management unit that receives or manages the waste stream prior to and during treatment of the waste stream in accordance with paragraph (c)(1)(i) of this section.
(iii) Each waste management unit used to manage or treat waste streams that will be recycled to a process shall comply with the standards specified in §§ 61.343 through 61.347. Once the waste stream is recycled to a process, including to a tank used for the storage of production process feed, product, or product intermediates, unless this tank is used primarily for the storage of wastes, the material is no longer subject to paragraph (c) of this section.
(2) A waste stream is exempt from paragraph (c)(1) of this section provided that the owner or operator demonstrates initially and, thereafter, at least once per year that the flow-weighted annual average benzene concentration for the waste stream is less than 10 ppmw as determined by the procedures specified in § 61.355(c)(2) or § 61.355(c)(3).
(3) A waste stream is exempt from paragraph (c)(1) of this section provided that the owner or operator demonstrates initially and, thereafter, at least once per year that the conditions specified in either paragraph (c)(3)(i) or (c)(3)(ii) of this section are met.
(i) The waste stream is process wastewater that has a flow rate less than 0.02 liters per minute or an annual wastewater quantity of less than 10 Mg/yr; or
(ii) All of the following conditions are met:
(A) The owner or operator does not choose to exempt process wastewater under paragraph (c)(3)(i) of this section,
(B) The total annual benzene quantity in all waste streams chosen for exemption in paragraph (c)(3)(ii) of this section does not exceed 2.0 Mg/yr as determined in the procedures in § 61.355(j), and
(C) The total annual benzene quantity in a waste stream chosen for exemption, including process unit turnaround waste, is determined for the year in which the waste is generated.
(d) As an alternative to the requirements specified in paragraphs (c) and (e) of this section, an owner or operator of a facility at which the total annual benzene quantity from facility waste is equal to or greater than 10 Mg/yr as determined in paragraph (a) of this section may elect to manage and treat the facility waste as follows:
(1) The owner or operator shall manage and treat facility waste other than process wastewater in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (c)(1) of this section.
(2) The owner or operator shall manage and treat process wastewater in accordance with the following requirements:
(i) Process wastewater shall be treated to achieve a total annual benzene quantity from facility process waste-water less than 1 Mg/yr. Total annual benzene from facility process waste-water shall be determined by adding together the annual benzene quantity at the point of waste generation for each untreated process waste-water stream plus the annual benzene quantity exiting the treatment process for each process waste-water stream treated in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (c)(1)(i) of this section.
(ii) Each treated process wastewater stream identified in paragraph (d)(2)(i) of this section shall be managed and treated in accordance with paragraph (c)(1) of this section.
(iii) Each untreated process waste-water stream identified in paragraph (d)(2)(i) of this section is exempt from the requirements of paragraph (c)(1) of this section.
(e) As an alternative to the requirements specified in paragraphs (c) and (d) of this section, an owner or operator of a facility at which the total annual benzene quantity from facility waste is equal to or greater than 10 Mg/yr as determined in paragraph (a) of this section may elect to manage and treat the facility waste as follows:
(1) The owner or operator shall manage and treat facility waste with a flow-weighted annual average water content of less than 10 percent in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (c)(1) of this section; and
(2) The owner or operator shall manage and treat facility waste (including remediation and process unit turnaround waste) with a flow-weighted annual average water content of 10 percent or greater, on a volume basis as total water, and each waste stream that is mixed with water or wastes at any time such that the resulting mixture has an annual water content greater than 10 percent, in accordance with the following:
(i) The benzene quantity for the wastes described in paragraph (e)(2) of this section must be equal to or less than 6.0 Mg/yr, as determined in § 61.355(k). Wastes as described in paragraph (e)(2) of this section that are transferred offsite shall be included in the determination of benzene quantity as provided in § 61.355(k). The provisions of paragraph (f) of this section shall not apply to any owner or operator who elects to comply with the provisions of paragraph (e) of this section.
(ii) The determination of benzene quantity for each waste stream defined in paragraph (e)(2) of this section shall be made in accordance with § 61.355(k).
(f) Rather than treating the waste onsite, an owner or operator may elect to comply with paragraph (c)(1)(i) of this section by transferring the waste offsite to another facility where the waste is treated in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (c)(1)(i) of this section. The owner or operator transferring the waste shall:
(1) Comply with the standards specified in §§ 61.343 through 61.347 of this subpart for each waste management unit that receives or manages the waste prior to shipment of the waste offsite.
(2) Include with each offsite waste shipment a notice stating that the waste contains benzene which is required to be managed and treated in accordance with the provisions of this subpart.
(g) Compliance with this subpart will be determined by review of facility records and results from tests and inspections using methods and procedures specified in § 61.355 of this subpart.
(h) Permission to use an alternative means of compliance to meet the requirements of §§ 61.342 through 61.352 of this subpart may be granted by the Administrator as provided in § 61.353 of this subpart.
(a) Except as provided in paragraph (b) of this section and in § 61.351, the owner or operator shall meet the following standards for each tank in which the waste stream is placed in accordance with § 61.342 (c)(1)(ii). The standards in this section apply to the treatment of the waste stream in a tank, including dewatering.
(1) The owner or operator shall install, operate, and maintain a fixed-roof and closed-vent system that routes all organic vapors vented from the tank to a control device.
(i) The fixed-roof shall meet the following requirements:
(A) The cover and all openings (e.g., access hatches, sampling ports, and gauge wells) shall be designed to operate with no detectable emissions as indicated by an instrument reading of less than 500 ppmv above background, as determined initially and thereafter at least once per year by the methods specified in § 61.355(h) of this subpart.
(B) Each opening shall be maintained in a closed, sealed position (e.g., covered by a lid that is gasketed and latched) at all times that waste is in the tank except when it is necessary to use the opening for waste sampling or removal, or for equipment inspection, maintenance, or repair.
(C) If the cover and closed-vent system operate such that the tank is maintained at a pressure less than atmospheric pressure, then paragraph (a)(1)(i)(B) of this section does not apply to any opening that meets all of thefollowing conditions:
(
(
(
(ii) The closed-vent system and control device shall be designed and operated in accordance with the requirements of § 61.349 of this subpart.
(b) For a tank that meets all the conditions specified in paragraph (b)(1) of this section, the owner or operator may elect to comply with paragraph (b)(2) of this section as an alternative to the requirements specified in paragraph (a)(1) of this section.
(1) The waste managed in the tank complying with paragraph (b)(2) of this section shall meet all of the following conditions:
(i) Each waste stream managed in the tank must have a flow-weighted annual average water content less than or equal to 10 percent water, on a volume basis as total water.
(ii) The waste managed in the tank either:
(A) Has a maximum organic vapor pressure less than 5.2 kilopascals (kPa) (0.75 pounds per square inch (psi));
(B) Has a maximum organic vapor pressure less than 27.6 kPa (4.0 psi) and is managed in a tank having design capacity less than 151 m
(C) Has a maximum organic vapor pressure less than 76.6 kPa (11.1 psi) and is managed in a tank having a design capacity less than 75 m
(2) The owner or operator shall install, operate, and maintain a fixed roof as specified in paragraph (a)(1)(i).
(3) For each tank complying with paragraph (b) of this section, one or more devices which vent directly to the atmosphere may be used on the tank provided each device remains in a closed, sealed position during normal operations except when the device needs to open to prevent physical damage or permanent deformation of the tank or cover resulting from filling or
(c) Each fixed-roof, seal, access door, and all other openings shall be checked by visual inspection initially and quarterly thereafter to ensure that no cracks or gaps occur and that access doors and other openings are closed and gasketed properly.
(d) Except as provided in § 61.350 of this subpart, when a broken seal or gasket or other problem is identified, or when detectable emissions are measured, first efforts at repair shall be made as soon as practicable, but not later than 45 calendar days after identification.
(a) The owner or operator shall meet the following standards for each surface impoundment in which waste is placed in accordance with § 61.342(c)(1)(ii) of this subpart:
(1) The owner or operator shall install, operate, and maintain on each surface impoundment a cover (e.g., air-supported structure or rigid cover) and closed-vent system that routes all organic vapors vented from the surface impoundment to a control device.
(i) The cover shall meet the following requirements:
(A) The cover and all openings (e.g., access hatches, sampling ports, and gauge wells) shall be designed to operate with no detectable emissions as indicated by an instrument reading of less than 500 ppmv above background, initially and thereafter at least once per year by the methods specified in § 61.355(h) of this subpart.
(B) Each opening shall be maintained in a closed, sealed position (e.g., covered by a lid that is gasketed and latched) at all times that waste is in the surface impoundment except when it is necessary to use the opening for waste sampling or removal, or for equipment inspection, maintenance, or repair.
(C) If the cover and closed-vent system operate such that the enclosure of the surface impoundment is maintained at a pressure less than atmospheric pressure, then paragraph (a)(1)(i)(B) of this section does not apply to any opening that meets all of the following conditions:
(
(
(
(D) The cover shall be used at all times that waste is placed in the surface impoundment except during removal of treatment residuals in accordance with 40 CFR 268.4 or closure of the surface impoundment in accordance with 40 CFR 264.228. (Note: the treatment residuals generated by these activities may be subject to the requirements of this part.)
(ii) The closed-vent system and control device shall be designed and operated in accordance with § 61.349 of this subpart.
(b) Each cover seal, access hatch, and all other openings shall be checked by visual inspection initially and quarterly thereafter to ensure that no cracks or gaps occur and that access hatches and other openings are closed and gasketed properly.
(c) Except as provided in § 61.350 of this subpart, when a broken seal or gasket or other problem is identified, or when detectable emissions are measured, first efforts at repair shall be made as soon as practicable, but not later than 15 calendar days after identification.
(a) The owner or operator shall meet the following standards for each container in which waste is placed in accordance with § 61.342(c)(1)(ii) of this subpart:
(1) The owner or operator shall install, operate, and maintain a cover on each container used to handle, transfer, or store waste in accordance with the following requirements:
(i) The cover and all openings (e.g., bungs, hatches, and sampling ports) shall be designed to operate with no detectable emissions as indicated by an instrument reading of less than 500 ppmv above background, initially and thereafter at least once per year by the methods specified in § 61.355(h) of this subpart.
(ii) Except as provided in paragraph (a)(4) of this section, each opening shall be maintained in a closed, sealed position (e.g., covered by a lid that is gasketed and latched) at all times that waste is in the container except when it is necessary to use the opening for waste loading, removal, inspection, or sampling.
(2) When a waste is transferred into a container by pumping, the owner or operator shall perform the transfer using a submerged fill pipe. The submerged fill pipe outlet shall extend to within two fill pipe diameters of the bottom of the container while the container is being loaded. During loading of the waste, the cover shall remain in place and all openings shall be maintained in a closed, sealed position except for those openings required for the submerged fill pipe, those openings required for venting of the container to prevent physical damage or permanent deformation of the container or cover, and any openings complying with paragraph (a)(4) of this section.
(3) Treatment of a waste in a container, including aeration, thermal or other treatment, shall be performed by the owner or operator in a manner such that whenever it is necessary for the container to be open while the waste is being treated, the container is located under a cover (e.g. enclosure) with a closed-vent system that routes all organic vapors vented from the container to a control device, except for cover and closed-vent systems that meet the requirements in paragraph (a)(4) of this section.
(i) The cover and all openings (e.g., doors, hatches) shall be designed to operate with no detectable emissions as indicated by an instrument reading of less than 500 ppmv above background, initially and thereafter at least once per year by the methods specified in § 61.355(h) of this subpart.
(ii) The closed-vent system and control device shall be designed and operated in accordance with § 61.349 of this subpart.
(4) If the cover and closed-vent system operate such that the container is maintained at a pressure less than atmospheric pressure, the owner or operator may operate the system with an opening that is not sealed and kept closed at all times if the following conditions are met:
(i) The purpose of the opening is to provide dilution air to reduce the explosion hazard;
(ii) The opening is designed to operate with no detectable emissions as indicated by an instrument reading of less than 500 ppmv above background, as determined initially and thereafter at least once per year by methods specified in § 61.355(h); and
(iii) The pressure is monitored continuously to ensure that the pressure in the container remains below atmospheric pressure.
(b) Each cover and all openings shall be visually inspected initially and quarterly thereafter to ensure that they are closed and gasketed properly.
(c) Except as provided in § 61.350 of this subpart, when a broken seal or gasket or other problem is identified, first efforts at repair shall be made as soon as practicable, but not later than 15 calendar days after identification.
(a) Except as provided in paragraph (b) of this section, the owner or operator shall meet the following standards for each individual drain system in which waste is placed in accordance with § 61.342(c)(1)(ii) of this subpart:
(1) The owner or operator shall install, operate, and maintain on each
(i) The cover shall meet the following requirements:
(A) The cover and all openings (e.g., access hatches, sampling ports) shall be designed to operate with no detactable emissions as indicated by an instrument reading of less than 500 ppmv above background, initially and thereafter at least once per year by the methods specified in § 61.355(h) of this subpart.
(B) Each opening shall be maintained in a closed, sealed position (e.g., covered by a lid that is gasketed and latched) at all times that waste is in the drain system except when it is necessary to use the opening for waste sampling or removal, or for equipment inspection, maintenance, or repair.
(C) If the cover and closed-vent system operate such that the individual drain system is maintained at a pressure less than atmospheric pressure, then paragraph (a)(1)(i)(B) of this section does not apply to any opening that meets all of the following conditions:
(
(
(
(ii) The closed-vent system and control device shall be designed and operated in accordance with § 61.349 of this subpart.
(2) Each cover seal, access hatch, and all other openings shall be checked by visual inspection initially and quarterly thereafter to ensure that no cracks or gaps occur and that access hatches and other openings are closed and gasketed properly.
(3) Except as provided in § 61.350 of this subpart, when a broken seal or gasket or other problem is identified, or when detectable emissions are measured, first efforts at repair shall be made as soon as practicable, but not later than 15 calendar days after identification.
(b) As an alternative to complying with paragraph (a) of this section, an owner or operator may elect to comply with the following requirements:
(1) Each drain shall be equipped with water seal controls or a tightly sealed cap or plug.
(2) Each junction box shall be equipped with a cover and may have a vent pipe. The vent pipe shall be at least 90 cm (3 ft) in length and shall not exceed 10.2 cm (4 in) in diameter.
(i) Junction box covers shall have a tight seal around the edge and shall be kept in place at all times, except during inspection and maintenance.
(ii) One of the following methods shall be used to control emissions from the junction box vent pipe to the atmosphere:
(A) Equip the junction box with a system to prevent the flow of organic vapors from the junction box vent pipe to the atmosphere during normal operation. An example of such a system includes use of water seal controls on the junction box. A flow indicator shall be installed, operated, and maintained on each junction box vent pipe to ensure that organic vapors are not vented from the junction box to the atmosphere during normal operation.
(B) Connect the junction box vent pipe to a closed-vent system and control device in accordance with § 61.349 of this subpart.
(3) Each sewer line shall not be open to the atmosphere and shall be covered or enclosed in a manner so as to have no visual gaps or cracks in joints, seals, or other emission interfaces.
(4) Equipment installed in accordance with paragraphs (b)(1), (b)(2), or (b)(3) of this section shall be inspected as follows:
(i) Each drain using water seal controls shall be checked by visual or physical inspection initially and thereafter quarterly for indications of low water levels or other conditions that would reduce the effectiveness of water seal controls.
(ii) Each drain using a tightly sealed cap or plug shall be visually inspected initially and thereafter quarterly to
(iii) Each junction box shall be visually inspected initially and thereafter quarterly to ensure that the cover is in place and to ensure that the cover has a tight seal around the edge.
(iv) The unburied portion of each sewer line shall be visually inspected initially and thereafter quarterly for indication of cracks, gaps, or other problems that could result in benzene emissions.
(5) Except as provided in § 61.350 of this subpart, when a broken seal, gap, crack or other problem is identified, first efforts at repair shall be made as soon as practicable, but not later than 15 calendar days after identification.
(a) Except as provided in § 61.352 of this subpart, the owner or operator shall meet the following standards for each oil-water separator in which waste is placed in accordance with § 61.342(c)(1)(ii) of this subpart:
(1) The owner or operator shall install, operate, and maintain a fixed-roof and closed-vent system that routes all organic vapors vented from the oil-water separator to a control device.
(i) The fixed-roof shall meet the following requirements:
(A) The cover and all openings (e.g., access hatches, sampling ports, and gauge wells) shall be designed to operate with no detectable emissions as indicated by an instrument reading of less than 500 ppmv above background, as determined initially and thereafter at least once per year by the methods specified in § 61.355(h) of this subpart.
(B) Each opening shall be maintained in a closed, sealed position (e.g., covered by a lid that is gasketed and latched) at all times that waste is in the oil-water separator except when it is necessary to use the opening for waste sampling or removal, or for equipment inspection, maintenance, or repair.
(C) If the cover and closed-vent system operate such that the oil-water separator is maintained at a pressure less than atmospheric pressure, then paragraph (a)(1)(i)(B) of this section does not apply to any opening that meets all of the following conditions:
(
(
(
(ii) The closed-vent system and control device shall be designed and operated in accordance with the requirements of § 61.349 of this subpart.
(b) Each cover seal, access hatch, and all other openings shall be checked by visual inspection initially and quarterly thereafter to ensure that no cracks or gaps occur between the cover and oil-water separator wall and that access hatches and other openings are closed and gasketed properly.
(c) Except as provided in § 61.350 of this subpart, when a broken seal or gasket or other problem is identified, or when detectable emissions are measured, first efforts at repair shall be made as soon as practicable, but not later than 15 calendar days after identification.
(a) Except as provided in paragraph (a)(5) of this section, the owner or operator shall treat the waste stream in accordance with the following requirements:
(1) The owner or operator shall design, install, operate, and maintain a treatment process that either:
(i) Removes benzene from the waste stream to a level less than 10 parts per million by weight (ppmw) on a flow-weighted annual average basis,
(ii) Removes benzene from the waste stream by 99 percent or more on a mass basis, or
(iii) Destroys benzene in the waste stream by incinerating the waste in a combustion unit that achieves a destruction efficiency of 99 percent or greater for benzene.
(2) Each treatment process complying with paragraphs (a)(1)(i) or (a)(1)(ii) of this section shall be designed and operated in accordance with the appropriate waste management unit standards specified in §§ 61.343 through 61.347 of this subpart. For example, if a treatment process is a tank, then the owner or operator shall comply with § 61.343 of this subpart.
(3) For the purpose of complying with the requirements specified in paragraph (a)(1)(i) of this section, the intentional or unintentional reduction in the benzene concentration of a waste stream by dilution of the waste stream with other wastes or materials is not allowed.
(4) An owner or operator may aggregate or mix together individual waste streams to create a combined waste stream for the purpose of facilitating treatment of waste to comply with the requirements of paragraph (a)(1) of this section except as provided in paragraph (a)(5) of this section.
(5) If an owner or operator aggregates or mixes any combination of process waste-water, product tank drawdown, or landfill leachate subject to § 61.342(c)(1) of this subpart together with other waste streams to create a combined waste stream for the purpose of facilitating management or treatment of waste in a waste-water treatment system, then the waste-water treatment system shall be operated in accordance with paragraph (b) of this section. These provisions apply to above-ground waste-water treatment systems as well as those that are at or below ground level.
(b) Except for facilities complying with § 61.342(e), the owner or operator that aggregates or mixes individual waste streams as defined in paragraph (a)(5) of this section for management and treatment in a waste-water treatment system shall comply with the following requirements:
(1) The owner or operator shall design and operate each waste management unit that comprises the waste-water treatment system in accordance with the appropriate standards specified in §§ 61.343 through 61.347 of this subpart.
(2) The provisions of paragraph (b)(1) of this section do not apply to any waste management unit that the owner or operator demonstrates to meet the following conditions initially and, thereafter, at least once per year:
(i) The benzene content of each waste stream entering the waste management unit is less than 10 ppmw on a flow-weighted annual average basis as determined by the procedures specified in § 61.355(c) of this subpart; and
(ii) The total annual benzene quantity contained in all waste streams managed or treated in exempt waste management units comprising the facility waste-water treatment systems is less than 1 Mg/yr. For this determination, total annual benzene quantity shall be calculated as follows:
(A) The total annual benzene quantity shall be calculated as the sum of the individual benzene quantities determined at each location where a waste stream first enters an exempt waste management unit. The benzene quantity discharged from an exempt waste management unit shall not be included in this calculation.
(B) The annual benzene quantity in a waste stream managed or treated in an enhanced biodegradation unit shall not be included in the calculation of the total annual benzene quantity, if the enhanced biodegradation unit is the first exempt unit in which the waste is managed or treated. A unit shall be considered enhanced biodegradation if it is a suspended-growth process that generates biomass, uses recycled biomass, and periodically removes biomass from the process. An enhanced biodegradation unit typically operates at a food-to-microorganism ratio in the range of 0.05 to 1.0 kg of biological oxygen demand per kg of biomass per day, a mixed liquor suspended solids ratio in the range of 1 to 8 grams per liter, and a residence time in the range of 3 to 36 hours.
(c) The owner and operator shall demonstrate that each treatment process or waste-water treatment system unit, except as provided in paragraph
(1) Engineering calculations in accordance with requirements specified in § 61.356(e) of this subpart; or
(2) Performance tests conducted using the test methods and procedures that meet the requirements specified in § 61.355 of this subpart.
(d) A treatment process or waste stream is in compliance with the requirements of this subpart and exempt from the requirements of paragraph (c) of this section provided that the owner or operator documents that the treatment process or waste stream is in compliance with other regulatory requirements as follows:
(1) The treatment process is a hazardous waste incinerator for which the owner or operator has been issued a final permit under 40 CFR part 270 and complies with the requirements of 40 CFR part 264, subpart O;
(2) The treatment process is an industrial furnace or boiler burning hazardous waste for energy recovery for which the owner or operator has been issued a final permit under 40 CFR part 270 and complies with the requirements of 40 CFR part 266, subpart D;
(3) The waste stream is treated by a means or to a level that meets benzene-specific treatment standards in accordance with the Land Disposal Restrictions under 40 CFR part 268, and the treatment process is designed and operated with a closed-vent system and control device meeting the requirements of § 61.349 of this subpart;
(4) The waste stream is treated by a means or to a level that meets benzene-specific effluent limitations or performance standards in accordance with the Effluent Guidelines and Standards under 40 CFR parts 401-464, and the treatment process is designed and operated with a closed-vent system and control device meeting the requirements of § 61.349 of this subpart; or
(5) The waste stream is discharged to an underground injection well for which the owner or operator has been issued a final permit under 40 CFR part 270 and complies with the requirements of 40 CFR part 122.
(e) Except as specified in paragraph (e)(3) of this section, if the treatment process or waste-water treatment system unit has any openings (e.g., access doors, hatches, etc.), all such openings shall be sealed (e.g., gasketed, latched, etc.) and kept closed at all times when waste is being treated, except during inspection and maintenance.
(1) Each seal, access door, and all other openings shall be checked by visual inspections initially and quarterly thereafter to ensure that no cracks or gaps occur and that openings are closed and gasketed properly.
(2) Except as provided in § 61.350 of this subpart, when a broken seal or gasket or other problem is identified, first efforts at repair shall be made as soon as practicable, but not later than 15 calendar days after identification.
(3) If the cover and closed-vent system operate such that the treatment process and waste-water treatment system unit are maintained at a pressure less than atmospheric pressure, the owner or operator may operate the system with an opening that is not sealed and kept closed at all times if the following conditions are met:
(i) The purpose of the opening is to provide dilution air to reduce the explosion hazard;
(ii) The opening is designed to operate with no detectable emissions as indicated by an instrument reading of less than 500 ppmv above background, as determined initially and thereafter at least once per year by the methods specified in § 61.355(h); and
(iii) The pressure is monitored continuously to ensure that the pressure in the treatment process and waste-water treatment system unit remain below atmospheric pressure.
(f) Except for treatment processes complying with paragraph (d) of this section, the Administrator may request at any time an owner or operator demonstrate that a treatment process or waste-water treatment system unit meets the applicable requirements specified in paragraphs (a) or (b) of this section by conducting a performance test using the test methods and procedures as required in § 61.355 of this subpart.
(g) The owner or operator of a treatment process or waste-water treatment
(a) For each closed-vent system and control device used to comply with standards in accordance with §§ 61.343 through 61.348 of this subpart, the owner or operator shall properly design, install, operate, and maintain the closed-vent system and control device in accordance with the following requirements:
(1) The closed-vent system shall:
(i) Be designed to operate with no detectable emissions as indicated by an instrument reading of less than 500 ppmv above background, as determined initially and thereafter at least once per year by the methods specified in § 61.355(h) of this subpart.
(ii) Vent systems that contain any bypass line that could divert the vent stream away from a control device used to comply with the provisions of this subpart shall install, maintain, and operate according to the manufacturer's specifications a flow indicator that provides a record of vent stream flow away from the control device at least once every 15 minutes, except as provided in paragraph (a)(1)(ii)(B) of this section.
(A) The flow indicator shall be installed at the entrance to any bypass line that could divert the vent stream away from the control device to the atmosphere.
(B) Where the bypass line valve is secured in the closed position with a car-seal or a lock-and-key type configuration, a flow indicator is not required.
(iii) All gauging and sampling devices shall be gas-tight except when gauging or sampling is taking place.
(iv) For each closed-vent system complying with paragraph (a) of this section, one or more devices which vent directly to the atmosphere may be used on the closed-vent system provided each device remains in a closed, sealed position during normal operations except when the device needs to open to prevent physical damage or permanent deformation of the closed-vent system resulting from malfunction of the unit in accordance with good engineering and safety practices for handling flammable, explosive, or other hazardous materials.
(2) The control device shall be designed and operated in accordance with the following conditions:
(i) An enclosed combustion device (e.g., a vapor incinerator, boiler, or process heater) shall meet one of the following conditions:
(A) Reduce the organic emissions vented to it by 95 weight percent or greater;
(B) Achieve a total organic compound concentration of 20 ppmv (as the sum of the concentrations for individual compounds using Method 18) on a dry basis corrected to 3 percent oxygen; or
(C) Provide a minimum residence time of 0.5 seconds at a minimum temperature of 760°C. If a boiler or process heater issued as the control device, then the vent stream shall be introduced into the flame zone of the boiler or process heater.
(ii) A vapor recovery system (e.g., a carbon adsorption system or a condenser) shall recover or control the organic emissions vented to it with an efficiency of 95 weight percent or greater, or shall recover or control the benzene emissions vented to it with an efficiency of 98 weight percent or greater.
(iii) A flare shall comply with the requirements of 40 CFR 60.18.
(iv) A control device other than those described in paragraphs (a)(2) (i) through (iii) of this section may be used provided that the following conditions are met:
(A) The device shall recover or control the organic emissions vented to it with an efficiency of 95 weight percent or greater, or shall recover or control the benzene emissions vented to it with an efficiency of 98 weight percent or greater.
(B) The owner or operator shall develop test data and design information that documents the control device will achieve an emission control efficiency of either 95 percent or greater for organic compounds or 98 percent or greater for benzene.
(C) The owner or operator shall identify:
(
(
(
(D) The owner or operator shall submit the information and data specified in paragraphs (a)(2)(iv) (B) and (C) of this section to the Administrator prior to operation of the alternative control device.
(E) The Administrator will determine, based on the information submitted under paragraph (a)(2)(iv)(D) of this section, if the control device subiect to paragraph (a)(2)(iv) of this section meets the requirements of § 61.349. The control device subject to paragraph (a)(2)(iv) of this section may be operated prior to receiving approval from the Administrator. However, if the Administrator determines that the control device does not meet the requirements of § 61.349, the facility may be subject to enforcement action beginning from the time the control device began operation.
(b) Each closed-vent system and control device used to comply with this subpart shall be operated at all times when waste is placed in the waste management unit vented to the control device except when maintenance or repair of the waste management unit cannot be completed without a shutdown of the control device.
(c) An owner and operator shall demonstrate that each control device, except for a flare, achieves the appropriate conditions specified in paragraph (a)(2) of this section by using one of the following methods:
(1) Engineering calculations in accordance with requirements specified in § 61.356(f) of this subpart; or
(2) Performance tests conducted using the test methods and procedures that meet the requirements specified in § 61.355 of this subpart.
(d) An owner or operator shall demonstrate compliance of each flare in accordance with paragraph (a)(2)(iii) of this section.
(e) The Administrator may request at any time an owner or operator demonstrate that a control device meets the applicable conditions specified in paragraph (a)(2) of this section by conducting a performance test using the test methods and procedures as required in § 61.355, and for control devices subject to paragraph (a)(2)(iv) of this section, the Administrator may specify alternative test methods and procedures, as appropriate.
(f) Each closed-vent system and control device shall be visually inspected initially and quarterly thereafter. The visual inspection shall include inspection of ductwork and piping and connections to covers and control devices for evidence of visable defects such as holes in ductwork or piping and loose connections.
(g) Except as provided in § 61.350 of this subpart, if visible defects are observed during an inspection, or if other problems are identified, or if detectable emissions are measured, a first effort to repair the closed-vent system and control device shall be made as soon as practicable but no later than 5 calendar days after detection. Repair shall be completed no later than 15 calendar days after the emissions are detected or the visible defect is observed.
(h) The owner or operator of a control device that is used to comply with the provisions of this section shall monitor the control device in accordance with § 61.354(c) of this subpart.
(a) Delay of repair of facilities or units that are subject to the provisions of this subpart will be allowed if the repair is technically impossible without a complete or partial facility or unit shutdown.
(b) Repair of such equipment shall occur before the end of the next facility or unit shutdown.
(a) As an alternative to the standards for tanks specified in § 61.343 of this subpart, an owner or operator may elect to comply with one of the following:
(1) A fixed roof and internal floating roof meeting the requirements in 40 CFR 60.112b(a)(1);
(2) An external floating roof meeting the requirements of 40 CFR 60.112b (a)(2); or
(3) An alternative means of emission limitation as described in 40 CFR 60.114b.
(b) If an owner or operator elects to comply with the provisions of this section, then the owner or operator is exempt from the provisions of § 61.343 of this subpart applicable to the same facilities.
(a) As an alternative to the standards for oil-water separators specified in § 61.347 of this subpart, an owner or operator may elect to comply with one of the following:
(1) A floating roof meeting the requirements in 40 CFR 60.693-2(a); or
(2) An alternative means of emission limitation as described in 40 CFR 60.694.
(b) For portions of the oil-water separator where it is infeasible to construct and operate a floating roof, such as over the weir mechanism, a fixed roof vented to a vapor control device that meets the requirements in §§ 61.347 and 61.349 of this subpart shall be installed and operated.
(c) Except as provided in paragraph (b) of this section, if an owner or operator elects to comply with the provisions of this section, then the owner or operator is exempt from the provisions in § 61.347 of this subpart applicable to the same facilities.
(a) If, in the Administrator's judgment, an alternative means of emission limitation will achieve a reduction in benzene emissions at least equivalent to the reduction in benzene emissions from the source achieved by the applicable design, equipment, work practice, or operational requirements in §§ 61.342 through 61.349, the Administrator will publish in the
(b) Any notice under paragraph (a) of this section shall be published only after public notice and an opportunity for a hearing.
(c) Any person seeking permission under this section shall collect, verify, and submit to the Administrator information showing that the alternative means achieves equivalent emission reductions.
(a) Except for a treatment process or waste stream complying with § 61.348(d), the owner or operator shall monitor each treatment process or waste-water treatment system unit to ensure the unit is properly operated and maintained by one of the following monitoring procedures:
(1) Measure the benzene concentration of the waste stream exiting the treatment process complying with § 61.348(a)(1)(i) at least once per month by collecting and analyzing one or more samples using the procedures specified in § 61.355(c)(3).
(2) Install, calibrate, operate, and maintain according to manufacturer's specifications equipment to continuously monitor and record a process parameter (or parameters) for the treatment process or waste-water treatment system unit that indicates proper system operation. The owner or operator shall inspect at least once each operating day the data recorded by the monitoring equipment (e.g., temperature monitor or flow indicator) to ensure that the unit is operating properly.
(b) If an owner or operator complies with the requirements of § 61.348(b), then the owner or operator shall monitor each waste-water treatment system
(1) For the first exempt waste management unit in each waste treatment train, other than an enhanced bio-deg-ra-da-tion unit, measure the flow rate, using the procedures of § 61.355(b), and the benzene concentration of each waste stream entering the unit at least once per month by collecting and analyzing one or more samples using the procedures specified in § 61.355(c)(3).
(2) For each enhanced biodegradation unit that is the first exempt waste management unit in a treatment train, measure the benzene concentration of each waste stream entering the unit at least once per month by collecting and analyzing one or more samples using the procedures specified in § 61.355(c)(3).
(c) An owner or operator subject to the requirements in § 61.349 of this subpart shall install, calibrate, maintain, and operate according to the manufacturer's specifications a device to continuously monitor the control device operation as specified in the following paragraphs, unless alternative monitoring procedures or requirements are approved for that facility by the Administrator. The owner or operator shall inspect at least once each operating day the data recorded by the monitoring equipment (e.g., temperature monitor or flow indicator) to ensure that the control device is operating properly.
(1) For a thermal vapor incinerator, a temperature monitoring device equipped with a continuous recorder. The device shall have an accuracy of
(2) For a catalytic vapor incinerator, a temperature monitoring device equipped with a continuous recorder. The device shall be capable of monitoring temperature at two locations, and have an accuracy of
(3) For a flare, a monitoring device in accordance with 40 CFR 60.18(f)(2) equipped with a continuous recorder.
(4) For a boiler or process heater having a design heat input capacity less than 44 megawatts (MW), a temperature monitoring device equipped with a continuous recorder. The device shall have an accuracy of
(5) For a boiler or process heater having a design heat input capacity greater than or equal to 44 MW, a monitoring device equipped with a continuous recorder to measure a parameter(s) that indicates good combustion operating practices are being used.
(6) For a condenser, either:
(i) A monitoring device equipped with a continuous recorder to measure either the concentration level of the organic compounds or the concentration level of benzene in the exhaust vent stream from the condenser; or
(ii) A temperature monitoring device equipped with a continuous recorder. The device shall be capable of monitoring temperature at two locations, and have an accuracy of
(7) For a carbon adsorption system that regenerates the carbon bed directly in the control device such as a fixed-bed carbon adsorber, either:
(i) A monitoring device equipped with a continuous recorder to measure either the concentration level of the organic compounds or the benzene concentration level in the exhaust vent stream from the carbon bed; or
(ii) A monitoring device equipped with a continuous recorder to measure a parameter that indicates the carbon bed is regenerated on a regular, predetermined time cycle.
(8) For a vapor recovery system other than a condenser or carbon adsorption system, a monitoring device equipped with a continuous recorder to measure either the concentration level of the organic compounds or the benzene concentration level in the exhaust vent stream from the control device.
(9) For a control device subject to the requirements of § 61.349(a)(2)(iv), devices to monitor the parameters as specified in § 61.349(a)(2)(iv)(C).
(d) For a carbon adsorption system that does not regenerate the carbon bed directly on site in the control device (e.g., a carbon canister), either the concentration level of the organic compounds or the concentration level of benzene in the exhaust vent stream from the carbon adsorption system shall be monitored on a regular schedule, and the existing carbon shall be replaced with fresh carbon immediately when carbon breakthrough is indicated. The device shall be monitored on a daily basis or at intervals no greater than 20 percent of the design carbon replacement interval, whichever is greater. As an alternative to conducting this monitoring, an owner or operator may replace the carbon in the carbon adsorption system with fresh carbon at a regular predetermined time interval that is less than the carbon replacement interval that is determined by the maximum design flow rate and either the organic concentration or the benzene concentration in the gas stream vented to the carbon adsorption system.
(e) An alternative operation or process parameter may be monitored if it can be demonstrated that another parameter will ensure that the control device is operated in conformance with these standards and the control device's design specifications.
(f) Owners or operators using a closed-vent system that contains any bypass line that could divert a vent stream from a control device used to comply with the provisions of this subpart shall do the following:
(1) Visually inspect the bypass line valve at least once every month, checking the position of the valve and the condition of the car-seal or closure mechanism required under § 61.349(a)(1)(ii) to ensure that the valve is maintained in the closed position and the vent stream is not diverted through the bypass line.
(2) Visually inspect the readings from each flow monitoring device required by § 61.349(a)(1)(ii) at least once each operating day to check that vapors are being routed to the control device as required.
(g) Each owner or operator who uses a system for emission control that is maintained at a pressure less than atmospheric pressure with openings to provide dilution air shall install, calibrate, maintain, and operate according to the manufacturer's specifications a device equipped with a continuous recorder to monitor the pressure in the unit to ensure that it is less than atmospheric pressure.
(a) An owner or operator shall determine the total annual benzene quantity from facility waste by the following procedure:
(1) For each waste stream subject to this subpart having a flow-weighted annual average water content greater than 10 percent water, on a volume basis as total water, or is mixed with water or other wastes at any time and the resulting mixture has an annual average water content greater than 10 percent as specified in § 61.342(a), the owner or operator shall:
(i) Determine the annual waste quantity for each waste stream using the procedures specified in paragraph (b) of this section.
(ii) Determine the flow-weighted annual average benzene concentration for each waste stream using the procedures specified in paragraph (c) of this section.
(iii) Calculate the annual benzene quantity for each waste stream by multiplying the annual waste quantity of the waste stream times the flow-weighted annual average benzene concentration.
(2) Total annual benzene quantity from facility waste is calculated by adding together the annual benzene quantity for each waste stream generated during the year and the annual
(3) If the total annual benzene quantity from facility waste is equal to or greater than 10 mg/yr, then the owner or operator shall comply with the requirements of § 61.342 (c), (d), or (e).
(4) If the total annual benzene quantity from facility waste is less than 10 Mg/yr but is equal to or greater than 1 Mg/yr, then the owner or operator shall:
(i) Comply with the recordkeeping requirements of § 61.356 and reporting requirements of § 61.357 of this subpart; and
(ii) Repeat the determination of total annual benzene quantity from facility waste at least once per year and whenever there is a change in the process generating the waste that could cause the total annual benzene quantity from facility waste to increase to 10 Mg/yr or more.
(5) If the total annual benzene quantity from facility waste is less than 1 Mg/yr, then the owner or operator shall:
(i) Comply with the recordkeeping requirements of § 61.356 and reporting requirements of § 61.357 of this subpart; and
(ii) Repeat the determination of total annual benzene quantity from facility waste whenever there is a change in the process generating the waste that could cause the total annual benzene quantity from facility waste to increase to 1 Mg/yr or more.
(6) The benzene quantity in a waste stream that is generated less than one time per year, except as provided for process unit turnaround waste in paragraph (b)(4) of this section, shall be included in the determination of total annual benzene quantity from facility waste for the year in which the waste is generated unless the waste stream is otherwise excluded from the determination of total annual benzene quantity from facility waste in accordance with paragraphs (a) through (c) of this section. The benzene quantity in this waste stream shall not be annualized or averaged over the time interval between the activities that resulted in generation of the waste, for purposes of determining the total annual benzene quantity from facility waste.
(b) For purposes of the calculation required by paragraph (a) of this section, an owner or operator shall determine the annual waste quantity at the point of waste generation, unless otherwise provided in paragraphs (b) (1), (2), (3), and (4) of this section, by one of the methods given in paragraphs (b) (5) through (7) of this section.
(1) The determination of annual waste quantity for sour water streams that are processed in sour water strippers shall be made at the point that the water exits the sour water stripper.
(2) The determination of annual waste quantity for wastes at coke by-product plants subject to and complying with the control requirements of § 61.132, 61.133, 61.134, or 61.139 of subpart L of this part shall be made at the location that the waste stream exits the process unit component or waste management unit controlled by that subpart or at the exit of the ammonia still, provided that the following conditions are met:
(i) The transfer of wastes between units complying with the control requirements of subpart L of this part, process units, and the ammonia still is made through hard piping or other enclosed system.
(ii) The ammonia still meets the definition of a sour water stripper in § 61.341.
(3) The determination of annual waste quantity for wastes that are received at hazardous waste treatment, storage, or disposal facilities from offsite shall be made at the point where the waste enters the hazardous waste treatment, storage, or disposal facility.
(4) The determination of annual waste quantity for each process unit turnaround waste generated only at 2 year or greater intervals, may be made by dividing the total quantity of waste generated during the most recent process unit turnaround by the time period (in the nearest tenth of a year) between the turnaround resulting in generation of the waste and the most recent preceding process turnaround for the unit. The resulting annual waste quantity shall be included in the calculation of
(5) Select the highest annual quantity of waste managed from historical records representing the most recent 5 years of operation or, if the facility has been in service for less than 5 years but at least 1 year, from historical records representing the total operating life of the facility;
(6) Use the maximum design capacity of the waste management unit; or
(7) Use measurements that are representative of maximum waste generation rates.
(c) For the purposes of the calculation required by §§ 61.355(a) of this subpart, an owner or operator shall determine the flow-weighted annual average ben- zene concentration in a manner that meets the requirements given in paragraph (c)(1) of this section using either of the methods given in paragraphs (c)(2) and (c)(3) of this section.
(1) The determination of flow-weighted annual average benzene concentration shall meet all of the following criteria:
(i) The determination shall be made at the point of waste generation except for the specific cases given in paragraphs (c)(1)(i)(A) through (D) of this section.
(A) The determination for sour water streams that are processed in sour water strippers shall be made at the point that the water exits the sour water stripper.
(B) The determination for wastes at coke by-product plants subject to and complying with the control requirements of § 61.132, 61.133, 61.134, or 61.139 of subpart L of this part shall be made at the location that the waste stream exits the process unit component or waste management unit controlled by that subpart or at the exit of the ammonia still, provided that the following conditions are met:
(
(
(C) The determination for wastes that are received from offsite shall be made at the point where the waste enters the hazardous waste treatment, storage, or disposal facility.
(D) The determination of flow-weighted annual average benzene concentration for process unit turnaround waste shall be made using either of the methods given in paragraph (c)(2) or (c)(3) of this section. The resulting flow-weighted annual average benzene concentration shall be included in the calculation of annual benzene quantity as provided in paragraph (a)(1)(iii) of this section for the year in which the turnaround occurs and for each subsequent year until the unit undergoes the next process unit turnaround.
(ii) Volatilization of the benzene by exposure to air shall not be used in the determination to reduce the benzene concentration.
(iii) Mixing or diluting the waste stream with other wastes or other materials shall not be used in the determination—to reduce the benzene concentration.
(iv) The determination shall be made prior to any treatment of the waste that removes benzene, except as specified in paragraphs (c)(1)(i)(A) through (D) of this section.
(v) For wastes with multiple phases, the determination shall provide the weighted-average benzene concentration based on the benzene concentration in each phase of the waste and the relative proportion of the phases.
(2)
(3) Measurements of the benzene concentration in the waste stream in accordance with the following procedures:
(i) Collect a minimum of three representative samples from each waste stream. Where feasible, samples shall be taken from an enclosed pipe prior to the waste being exposed to the atmosphere.
(ii) For waste in enclosed pipes, the following procedures shall be used:
(A) Samples shall be collected prior to the waste being exposed to the atmosphere in order to minimize the loss of benzene prior to sampling.
(B) A static mixer shall be installed in the process line or in a by-pass line unless the owner or operator demonstrates that installation of a static mixer in the line is not necessary to accurately determine the benzene concentration of the waste stream.
(C) The sampling tap shall be located within two pipe diameters of the static mixer outlet.
(D) Prior to the initiation of sampling, sample lines and cooling coil shall be purged with at least four volumes of waste.
(E) After purging, the sample flow shall be directed to a sample container and the tip of the sampling tube shall be kept below the surface of the waste during sampling to minimize contact with the atmosphere.
(F) Samples shall be collected at a flow rate such that the cooling coil is able to maintain a waste temperature less than 10°C.
(G) After filling, the sample container shall be capped immediately (within 5 seconds) to leave a minimum headspace in the container.
(H) The sample containers shall immediately be cooled and maintained at a temperature below 10°C for transfer to the laboratory.
(iii) When sampling from an enclosed pipe is not feasible, a minimum of three representative samples shall be collected in a manner to minimize exposure of the sample to the atmosphere and loss of benzene prior to sampling.
(iv) Each waste sample shall be analyzed using one of the following test methods for determining the benzene concentration in a waste stream:
(A) Method 8020, Aromatic Volatile Organics, in “Test Methods for Evaluating Solid Waste, Physical/Chemical Methods,” EPA Publication No. SW-846 (incorporation by reference as specified in § 61.18 of this part);
(B) Method 8021, Volatile Organic Compounds in Water by Purge and Trap Capillary Column Gas Chromatography with Photoionization and Electrolytic Conductivity Detectors in Series in “Test Methods for Evaluating Solid Waste, Physical/Chemical Methods,” EPA Publication No. SW-846 (incorporation by reference as specified in § 61.18 of this part);
(C) Method 8240, Gas Chromatography/Mass Spectrometry for Volatile Organics in “Test Methods for Evaluating Solid Waste, Physical/Chemical Methods,” EPA Publication No. SW-846 (incorporation by reference as specified in § 61.18 of this part);
(D) Method 8260, Gas Chromatography/Mass Spectrometry for Volatile Organics: Capillary Column Technique in “Test Methods for Evaluating Solid Waste, Physical/Chemical Methods,” EPA Publication No. SW-846 (incorporation by reference as specified in § 61.18 of this part);
(E) Method 602, Purgeable Aromatics, as described in 40 CFR part 136, appendix A, Test Procedures for Analysis of Organic Pollutants, for waste-waters for which this is an approved EPA methods; or
(F) Method 624, Purgeables, as described in 40 CFR part 136, appendix A, Test Procedures for Analysis of Organic Pollutants, for waste-waters for which this is an approved EPA method.
(v) The flow-weighted annual average benzene concentration shall be calculated by averaging the results of the sample analyses as follows:
(d) An owner or operator using performance tests to demonstrate compliance of a treatment process with § 61.348 (a)(1)(i) shall measure the flow-weighted annual average benzene concentration of the waste stream exiting the treatment process by collecting and analyzing a minimum of three representative samples of the waste stream using the procedures in paragraph (c)(3) of this section. The test shall be conducted under conditions that exist when the treatment process is operating at the highest inlet waste stream flow rate and benzene content expected to occur. Operations during periods of startup, shutdown, and malfunction shall not constitute representative conditions for the purpose of a test. The owner or operator shall record all process information as is necessary to document the operating conditions during the test.
(e) An owner or operator using performance tests to demonstrate compliance of a treatment process with § 61.348(a)(1)(ii) of this subpart shall determine the percent reduction of benzene in the waste stream on a mass basis by the following procedure:
(1) The test shall be conducted under conditions that exist when the treatment process is operating at the highest inlet waste stream flow rate and benzene content expected to occur. Operations during periods of startup, shutdown, and malfunction shall not constitute representative conditions for the purpose of a test. The owner or operator shall record all process information as is necessary to document the operating conditions during the test.
(2) All testing equipment shall be prepared and installed as specified in the appropriate test methods.
(3) The mass flow rate of benzene entering the treatment process (E
(4) The mass flow rate of benzene exiting the treatment process (E
(f) An owner or operator using performance tests to demonstrate compliance of a treatment process with § 61.348(a)(1)(iii) of this subpart shall determine the benzene destruction efficiency for the combustion unit by the following procedure:
(1) The test shall be conducted under conditions that exist when the combustion unit is operating at the highest inlet waste stream flow rate and benzene content expected to occur. Operations during periods of startup, shutdown, and malfunction shall not constitute representative conditions for the purpose of a test. The owner or operator shall record all process information necessary to document the operating conditions during the test.
(2) All testing equipment shall be prepared and installed as specified in the appropriate test methods.
(3) The mass flow rate of benzene entering the combustion unit shall be determined by computing the product of the flow rate of the waste stream entering the combustion unit, as determined by the inlet flow meter, and the benzene concentration of the waste stream, as determined using the sampling procedures in paragraph (c)(2) or (c)(3) of this section. Three grab samples of the waste shall be taken at equally spaced time intervals over a 1-hour period. Each 1-hour period constitutes a run, and the performance test shall consist of a minimum of 3 runs conducted over a 3-hour period. The mass flow rate of benzene into the combustion unit is calculated as follows:
(4) The mass flow rate of benzene exiting the combustion unit exhaust stack shall be determined as follows:
(i) The time period for the test shall not be less than 3 hours during which at least 3 stack gas samples are collected and be the same time period at which the mass flow rate of benzene entering the treatment process is determined. Each sample shall be collected over a 1-hour period (e.g., in a tedlar bag) to represent a time-integrated composite sample and each 1-hour period shall correspond to the periods when the waste feed is sampled.
(ii) A run shall consist of a 1-hour period during the test. For each run:
(A) The reading from each measurement shall be recorded;
(B) The volume exhausted shall be determined using method 2, 2A, 2C, or 2D from appendix A of 40 CFR part 60, as appropriate.
(C) The average benzene concentration in the exhaust downstream of the combustion unit shall be determined using method 18 from appendix A of 40 CFR part 60.
(iii) The mass of benzene emitted during each run shall be calculated as follows:
(iv) The benzene mass emission rate in the exhaust shall be calculated as follows:
(5) The benzene destruction efficiency for the combustion unit shall be calculated as follows:
(g) An owner or operator using performance tests to demonstrate compliance of a waste-water treatment system unit with § 61.348(b) shall measure the flow-weighted annual average benzene concentration of the waste-water stream where the waste stream enters an exempt waste management unit by collecting and analyzing a minimum of three representative samples of the waste stream using the procedures in paragraph (c)(3) of this section. The test shall be conducted under conditions that exist when the waste-water treatment system is operating at the highest inlet waste-water stream flow rate and benzene content expected to occur. Operations during periods of startup, shutdown, and malfunction shall not constitute representative conditions for the purpose of a test. The owner or operator shall record all process information as is necessary to document the operating conditions during the test.
(h) An owner or operator shall test equipment for compliance with no detectable emissions as required in §§ 61.343 through 61.347, and § 61.349 of this subpart in accordance with the following requirements:
(1) Monitoring shall comply with method 21 from appendix A of 40 CFR part 60.
(2) The detection instrument shall meet the performance criteria of method 21.
(3) The instrument shall be calibrated before use on each day of its use by the procedures specified in method 21.
(4) Calibration gases shall be:
(i) Zero air (less than 10 ppm of hydrocarbon in air); and
(ii) A mixture of methane or n-hexane and air at a concentration of approximately, but less than, 10,000 ppm methane or n-hexane.
(5) The background level shall be determined as set forth in method 21.
(6) The instrument probe shall be traversed around all potential leak interfaces as close as possible to the interface as described in method 21.
(7) The arithmetic difference between the maximum concentration indicated by the instrument and the background level is compared to 500 ppm for determining compliance.
(i) An owner or operator using a performance test to demonstrate compliance of a control device with either the organic reduction efficiency requirement or the benzene reduction efficiency requirement specified under § 61.349(a)(2) shall use the following procedures:
(1) The test shall be conducted under conditions that exist when the waste management unit vented to the control device is operating at the highest load or capacity level expected to occur. Operations during periods of startup, shutdown, and malfunction shall not constitute representative conditions for the purpose of a test. The owner or operator shall record all process information necessary to document the operating conditions during the test.
(2) Sampling sites shall be selected using method 1 or 1A from appendix A of 40 CFR part 60, as appropriate.
(3) The mass flow rate of either the organics or benzene entering and exiting the control device shall be determined as follows:
(i) The time period for the test shall not be less than 3 hours during which at least 3 stack gas samples are collected. Samples of the vent stream entering and exiting the control device shall be collected during the same time period. Each sample shall be collected over a 1-hour period (e.g., in a tedlar bag) to represent a time-integrated composite sample.
(ii) A run shall consist of a 1-hour period during the test. For each run:
(A) The reading from each measurement shall be recorded;
(B) The volume exhausted shall be determined using method 2, 2A, 2C, or 2D from appendix A of 40 CFR part 60, as appropriate;
(C) The organic concentration or the benzene concentration, as appropriate, in the vent stream entering and exiting the control shall be determined using Method 18 from Appendix A of 40 CFR part 60.
(iii) The mass of organics or benzene entering and exiting the control device during each run shall be calculated as follows:
(iv) The mass flow rate of organics or benzene entering and exiting the control device shall be calculated as follows:
(4) The organic reduction efficiency or the benzene reduction efficiency for the control device shall be calculated as follows:
(j) An owner or operator shall determine the benzene quantity for the purposes of the calculation required by § 61.342 (c)(3)(ii)(B) according to the provisions of paragraph (a) of this section, except that the procedures in paragraph (a) of this section shall also apply to wastes with a water content of 10 percent or less.
(k) An owner or operator shall determine the benzene quantity for the purposes of the calculation required by § 61.342(e)(2) by the following procedure:
(1) For each waste stream that is not controlled for air emissions in accordance with § 61.343. 61.344, 61.345, 61.346, 61.347, or 61.348(a), as applicable to the waste management unit that manages the waste, the benzene quantity shall be determined as specified in paragraph (a) of this section, except that paragraph (b)(4) of this section shall not apply, i.e., the waste quantity for process unit turnaround waste is not annualized but shall be included in the determination of benzene quantity for the year in which the waste is generated for the purposes of the calculation required by § 61.342(e)(2).
(2) For each waste stream that is controlled for air emissions in accordance with § 61.343. 61.344, 61.345, 61.346, 61.347, or 61.348(a), as applicable to the waste management unit that manages the waste, the determination of annual waste quantity and flow-weighted annual average benzene concentration shall be made at the first applicable location as described in paragraphs (k)(2)(i), (k)(2)(ii), and (k)(2)(iii) of this section and prior to any reduction of benzene concentration through volatilization of the benzene, using the methods given in (k)(2)(iv) and (k)(2)(v) of this section.
(i) Where the waste stream enters the first waste management unit not complying with §§ 61.343, 61.344, 61.345, 61.346, 61.347, and 61.348(a) that are applicable to the waste management unit,
(ii) For each waste stream that is managed or treated only in compliance with §§ 61.343 through 61.348(a) up to the point of final direct discharge from the facility, the determination of benzene quantity shall be prior to any reduction of benzene concentration through volatilization of the benzene, or
(iii) For wastes managed in units controlled for air emissions in accordance with §§ 61.343, 61.344, 61.345, 61.346, 61.347, and 61.348(a), and then transferred offsite, facilities shall use the first applicable offsite location as described in paragraphs (k)(2)(i) and (k)(2)(ii) of this section if they have documentation from the offsite facility of the benzene quantity at this location. Facilities without this documentation for offsite wastes shall use the benzene quantity determined at the point where the transferred waste leaves the facility.
(iv) Annual waste quantity shall be determined using the procedures in paragraphs (b)(5), (6), or (7) of this section, and
(v) The flow-weighted annual average benzene concentration shall be determined using the procedures in paragraphs (c)(2) or (3) of this section.
(3) The benzene quantity in a waste stream that is generated less than one time per year, including process unit turnaround waste, shall be included in the determination of benzene quantity as determined in paragraph (k)(6) of this section for the year in which the waste is generated. The benzene quantity in this waste stream shall not be annualized or averaged over the time interval between the activities that resulted in generation of the waste for purposes of determining benzene quantity as determined in paragraph (k)(6) of this section.
(4) The benzene in waste entering an enhanced biodegradation unit, as defined in § 61.348(b)(2)(ii)(B), shall not be included in the determination of benzene quantity, determined in paragraph
(i) The benzene concentration for each waste stream entering the enhanced biodegradation unit is less than 10 ppmw on a flow-weighted annual average basis, and
(ii) All prior waste management units managing the waste comply with §§ 61.343, 61.344, 61.345, 61.346, 61.347 and 61.348(a).
(5) The benzene quantity for each waste stream in paragraph (k)(2) of this section shall be determined by multiplying the annual waste quantity of each waste stream times its flow-weighted annual average benzene concentration.
(6) The total benzene quantity for the purposes of the calculation required by § 61.342(e)(2) shall be determined by adding together the benzene quantities determined in paragraphs (k)(1) and (k)(5) of this section for each applicable waste stream.
(7) If the benzene quantity determined in paragraph (6) of this section exceeds 6.0 Mg/yr only because of multiple counting of the benzene quantity for a waste stream, the owner or operator may use the following procedures for the purposes of the calculation required by § 61.342(e)(2):
(i) Determine which waste management units are involved in the multiple counting of benzene;
(ii) Determine the quantity of benzene that is emitted, recovered, or removed from the affected units identified in paragraph (k)(7)(i) of this section, or destroyed in the units if applicable, using either direct measurements or the best available estimation techniques developed or approved by the Administrator.
(iii) Adjust the benzene quantity to eliminate the multiple counting of benzene based on the results from paragraph (k)(7)(ii) of this section and determine the total benzene quantity for the purposes of the calculation required by § 61.342(e)(2).
(iv) Submit in the annual report required under § 61.357(a) a description of the methods used and the resulting calculations for the alternative procedure under paragraph (k)(7) of this section, the benzene quantity determination from paragraph (k)(6) of this section, and the adjusted benzene quantity determination from paragraph (k)(7)(iii) of this section.
(a) Each owner or operator of a facility subject to the provisions of this subpart shall comply with the recordkeeping requirements of this section. Each record shall be maintained in a readily accessible location at the facility site for a period not less than two years from the date the information is recorded unless otherwise specified.
(b) Each owner or operator shall maintain records that identify each waste stream at the facility subject to this subpart, and indicate whether or not the waste stream is controlled for benzene emissions in accordance with this subpart. In addition the owner or operator shall maintain the following records:
(1) For each waste stream not controlled for benzene emissions in accordance with this subpart, the records shall include all test results, measurements, calculations, and other documentation used to determine the following information for the waste stream: waste stream identification, water content, whether or not the waste stream is a process waste-water stream, annual waste quantity, range of benzene concentrations, annual average flow-weighted benzene concentration, and annual benzene quantity.
(2) For each waste stream exempt from § 61.342(c)(1) in accordance with § 61.342(c)(3), the records shall include:
(i) All measurements, calculations, and other documentation used to determine that the continuous flow of process waste-water is less than 0.02 liters per minute or the annual waste quantity of process waste-water is less than 10 Mg/yr in accordance with § 61.342(c)(3)(i), or
(ii) All measurements, calculations, and other documentation used to determine that the sum of the total annual benzene quantity in all exempt waste streams does not exceed 2.0 Mg/yr in accordance with § 61.342(c)(3)(ii).
(3) For each facility where process waste-water streams are controlled for benzene emissions in accordance with § 61.342(d) of this subpart, the records shall include for each treated process waste-water stream all measurements, calculations, and other documentation used to determine the annual benzene quantity in the process waste-water stream exiting the treatment process.
(4) For each facility where waste streams are controlled for benzene emissions in accordance with § 61.342(e), the records shall include for each waste stream all measurements, including the locations of the measurements, calculations, and other documentation used to determine that the total benzene quantity does not exceed 6.0 Mg/yr.
(5) For each facility where the annual waste quantity for process unit turnaround waste is determined in accordance with § 61.355(b)(5), the records shall include all test results, measurements, calculations, and other documentation used to determine the following information: identification of each process unit at the facility that undergoes turnarounds, the date of the most recent turnaround for each process unit, identification of each process unit turnaround waste, the water content of each process unit turnaround waste, the annual waste quantity determined in accordance with § 61.355(b)(5), the range of benzene concentrations in the waste, the annual average flow-weighted benzene concentration of the waste, and the annual benzene quantity calculated in accordance with § 61.355(a)(1)(iii) of this section.
(6) For each facility where waste-water streams are controlled for benzene emissions in accordance with § 61.348(b)(2), the records shall include all measurements, calculations, and other documentation used to determine the annual benzene content of the waste streams and the total annual benzene quantity contained in all waste streams managed or treated in exempt waste management units.
(c) An owner or operator transferring waste off-site to another facility for treatment in accordance with § 61.342(f) shall maintain documentation for each offsite waste shipment that includes the following information: Date waste is shipped offsite, quantity of waste shipped offsite, name and address of the facility receiving the waste, and a copy of the notice sent with the waste shipment.
(d) An owner or operator using control equipment in accordance with §§ 61.343 through 61.347 shall maintain engineering design documentation for all control equipment that is installed on the waste management unit. The documentation shall be retained for the life of the control equipment. If a control device is used, then the owner or operator shall maintain the control device records required by paragraph (f) of this section.
(e) An owner or operator using a treatment process or waste-water treatment system unit in accordance with § 61.348 of this subpart shall maintain the following records. The documentation shall be retained for the life of the unit.
(1) A statement signed and dated by the owner or operator certifying that the unit is designed to operate at the documented performance level when the waste stream entering the unit is at the highest waste stream flow rate and benzene content expected to occur.
(2) If engineering calculations are used to determine treatment process or waste-water treatment system unit performance, then the owner or operator shall maintain the complete design analysis for the unit. The design analysis shall include for example the following information: Design specifications, drawings, schematics, piping and instrumentation diagrams, and other documentation necessary to demonstrate the unit performance.
(3) If performance tests are used to determine treatment process or waste-water treatment system unit performance, then the owner or operator shall maintain all test information necessary to demonstrate the unit performance.
(i) A description of the unit including the following information: type of treatment process; manufacturer name and model number; and for each waste stream entering and exiting the unit, the waste stream type (e.g., process waste-water, sludge, slurry, etc.), and
(ii) Documentation describing the test protocol and the means by which sampling variability and analytical variability were accounted for in the determination of the unit performance. The description of the test protocol shall include the following information: sampling locations, sampling method, sampling frequency, and analytical procedures used for sample analysis.
(iii) Records of unit operating conditions during each test run including all key process parameters.
(iv) All test results.
(4) If a control device is used, then the owner or operator shall maintain the control device records required by paragraph (f) of this section.
(f) An owner or operator using a closed-vent system and control device in accordance with § 61.349 of this subpart shall maintain the following records. The documentation shall be retained for the life of the control device.
(1) A statement signed and dated by the owner or operator certifying that the closed-vent system and control device is designed to operate at the documented performance level when the waste management unit vented to the control device is or would be operating at the highest load or capacity expected to occur.
(2) If engineering calculations are used to determine control device performance in accordance with § 61.349(c), then a design analysis for the control device that includes for example:
(i) Specifications, drawings, schematics, and piping and instrumentation diagrams prepared by the owner or operator, or the control device manufacturer or vendor that describe the control device design based on acceptable engineering texts. The design analysis shall address the following vent stream characteristics and control device operating parameters:
(A) For a thermal vapor incinerator, the design analysis shall consider the vent stream composition, constituent concentrations, and flow rate. The design analysis shall also establish the design minimum and average temperature in the combustion zone and the combustion zone residence time.
(B) For a catalytic vapor incinerator, the design analysis shall consider the vent stream composition, constituent concentrations, and flow rate. The design analysis shall also establish the design minimum and average temperatures across the catalyst bed inlet and outlet.
(C) For a boiler or process heater, the design analysis shall consider the vent stream composition, constituent concentrations, and flow rate. The design analysis shall also establish the design minimum and average flame zone temperatures, combustion zone residence time, and description of method and location where the vent stream is introduced into the flame zone.
(D) For a flare, the design analysis shall consider the vent stream composition, constituent concentrations, and flow rate. The design analysis shall also consider the requirements specified in 40 CFR 60.18.
(E) For a condenser, the design analysis shall consider the vent stream composition, constituent concentration, flow rate, relative humidity, and temperature. The design analysis shall also establish the design outlet organic compound concentration level or the design outlet benzene concentration level, design average temperature of the condenser exhaust vent stream, and the design average temperatures of the coolant fluid at the condenser inlet and outlet.
(F) For a carbon adsorption system that regenerates the carbon bed directly on-site in the control device such as a fixed-bed adsorber, the design analysis shall consider the vent stream composition, constituent concentration, flow rate, relative humidity, and temperature. The design analysis shall also establish the design exhaust vent stream organic compound concentration level or the design exhaust vent stream benzene concentration level, number and capacity of carbon beds, type and working capacity of activated carbon used for carbon beds, design total steam flow over the period of each complete carbon bed regeneration cycle, duration of the carbon bed
(G) For a carbon adsorption system that does not regenerate the carbon bed directly on-site in the control device, such as a carbon canister, the design analysis shall consider the vent stream composition, constituent concentration, flow rate, relative humidity, and temperature. The design analysis shall also establish the design exhaust vent stream organic compound concentration level or the design exhaust vent stream benzene concentration level, capacity of carbon bed, type and working capacity of activated carbon used for carbon bed, and design carbon replacement interval based on the total carbon working capacity of the control device and source operating schedule.
(H) For a control device subject to the requirements of § 61.349(a)(2)(iv), the design analysis shall consider the vent stream composition, constituent concentration, and flow rate. The design analysis shall also include all of the information submitted under § 61.349 (a)(2)(iv).
(ii) [Reserved]
(3) If performance tests are used to determine control device performance in accordance with § 61.349(c) of this subpart:
(i) A description of how it is determined that the test is conducted when the waste management unit or treatment process is operating at the highest load or capacity level. This description shall include the estimated or design flow rate and organic content of each vent stream and definition of the acceptable operating ranges of key process and control parameters during the test program.
(ii) A description of the control device including the type of control device, control device manufacturer's name and model number, control device dimensions, capacity, and construction materials.
(iii) A detailed description of sampling and monitoring procedures, including sampling and monitoring locations in the system, the equipment to be used, sampling and monitoring frequency, and planned analytical procedures for sample analysis.
(iv) All test results.
(g) An owner or operator shall maintain a record for each visual inspection required by §§ 61.343 through 61.347 of this subpart that identifies a problem (such as a broken seal, gap or other problem) which could result in benzene emissions. The record shall include the date of the inspection, waste management unit and control equipment location where the problem is identified, a description of the problem, a description of the corrective action taken, and the date the corrective action was completed.
(h) An owner or operator shall maintain a record for each test of no detectable emissions required by §§ 61.343 through 61.347 and § 61.349 of this subpart. The record shall include the following information: date the test is performed, background level measured during test, and maximum concentration indicated by the instrument reading measured for each potential leak interface. If detectable emissions are measured at a leak interface, then the record shall also include the waste management unit, control equipment, and leak interface location where detectable emissions were measured, a description of the problem, a description of the corrective action taken, and the date the corrective action was completed.
(i) For each treatment process and waste-water treatment system unit operated to comply with § 61.348, the owner or operator shall maintain documentation that includes the following information regarding the unit operation:
(1) Dates of startup and shutdown of the unit.
(2) If measurements of waste stream benzene concentration are performed in accordance with § 61.354(a)(1) of this subpart, the owner or operator shall maintain records that include date each test is performed and all test results.
(3) If a process parameter is continuously monitored in accordance with § 61.354(a)(2) of this subpart, the owner or operator shall maintain records that include a description of the operating
(4) If measurements of waste stream benzene concentration are performed in accordance with § 61.354(b), the owner or operator shall maintain records that include the date each test is performed and all test results.
(5) Periods when the unit is not operated as designed.
(j) For each control device, the owner or operator shall maintain documentation that includes the following information regarding the control device operation:
(1) Dates of startup and shutdown of the closed-vent system and control device.
(2) A description of the operating parameter (or parameters ) to be monitored to ensure that the control device will be operated in conformance with these standards and the control device's design specifications and an explanation of the criteria used for selection of that parameter (or parameters). This documentation shall be kept for the life of the control device.
(3) Periods when the closed-vent system and control device are not operated as designed including all periods and the duration when:
(i) Any valve car-seal or closure mechanism required under § 61.349(a)(1)(ii) is broken or the by-pass line valve position has changed.
(ii) The flow monitoring devices required under § 61.349(a)(1)(ii) indicate that vapors are not routed to the control device as required.
(4) If a thermal vapor incinerator is used, then the owner or operator shall maintain continuous records of the temperature of the gas stream in the combustion zone of the incinerator and records of all 3-hour periods of operation during which the average temperature of the gas stream in the combustion zone is more than 28 °C below the design combustion zone temperature.
(5) If a catalytic vapor incinerator is used, then the owner or operator shall maintain continuous records of the temperature of the gas stream both upstream and downstream of the catalyst bed of the incinerator, records of all 3-hour periods of operation during which the average temperature measured before the catalyst bed is more than 28 °C below the design gas stream temperature, and records of all 3-hour periods of operation during which the average temperature difference across the catalyst bed is less than 80 percent of the design temperature difference.
(6) If a boiler or process heater is used, then the owner or operator shall maintain records of each occurrence when there is a change in the location at which the vent stream is introduced into the flame zone as required by § 61.349(a)(2)(i)(C). For a boiler or process heater having a design heat input capacity less than 44 MW, the owner or operator shall maintain continuous records of the temperature of the gas stream in the combustion zone of the boiler or process heater and records of all 3-hour periods of operation during which the average temperature of the gas stream in the combustion zone is more than 28°C below the design combustion zone temperature. For a boiler or process heater having a design heat input capacity greater than or equal to 44 MW, the owner or operator shall maintain continuous records of the parameter(s) monitored in accordance with the requirements of § 61.354(c)(5).
(7) If a flare is used, then the owner or operator shall maintain continuous records of the flare pilot flame monitoring and records of all periods during which the pilot flame is absent.
(8) If a condenser is used, then the owner or operator shall maintain records from the monitoring device of the parameters selected to be monitored in accordance with § 61.354(c)(6). If concentration of organics or concentration of benzene in the control device outlet gas stream is monitored, then the owner or operator shall record all 3-hour periods of operation during which the concentration of organics or the concentration of benzene in the exhaust stream is more than 20 percent greater than the design value. If the temperature of the condenser exhaust
(9) If a carbon adsorber is used, then the owner or operator shall maintain records from the monitoring device of the concentration of organics or the concentration of benzene in the control device outlet gas stream. If the concentration of organics or the concentration of benzene in the control device outlet gas stream is monitored, then the owner or operator shall record all 3-hour periods of operation during which the concentration of organics or the concentration of benzene in the exhaust stream is more than 20 percent greater than the design value. If the carbon bed regeneration interval is monitored, then the owner or operator shall record each occurrence when the vent stream continues to flow through the control device beyond the predetermined carbon bed regeneration time.
(10) If a carbon adsorber that is not regenerated directly on site in the control device is used, then the owner or operator shall maintain records of dates and times when the control device is monitored, when breakthrough is measured, and shall record the date and time then the existing carbon in the control device is replaced with fresh carbon.
(11) If an alternative operational or process parameter is monitored for a control device, as allowed in § 61.354(e) of this subpart, then the owner or operator shall maintain records of the continuously monitored parameter, including periods when the device is not operated as designed.
(12) If a control device subject to the requirements of § 61.349(a)(2)(iv) is used, then the owner or operator shall maintain records of the parameters that are monitored and each occurrence when the parameters monitored are outside the range of values specified in § 61.349(a)(2)(iv)(C), or other records as specified by the Administrator.
(k) An owner or operator who elects to install and operate the control equipment in § 61.351 of this subpart shall comply with the recordkeeping requirements in 40 CFR 60.115b.
(l) An owner or operator who elects to install and operate the control equipment in § 61.352 of this subpart shall maintain records of the following:
(1) The date, location, and corrective action for each visual inspection required by 40 CFR 60.693-2(a)(5), during which a broken seal, gap, or other problem is identified that could result in benzene emissions.
(2) Results of the seal gap measurements required by 40 CFR 60.693-2(a).
(m) If a system is used for emission control that is maintained at a pressure less than atmospheric pressure with openings to provide dilution air, then the owner or operator shall maintain records of the monitoring device and records of all periods during which the pressure in the unit is operated at a pressure that is equal to or greater than atmospheric pressure.
(a) Each owner or operator of a chemical plant, petroleum refinery, coke by-product recovery plant, and any facility managing wastes from these industries shall submit to the Administrator within 90 days after January 7, 1993, or by the initial startup for a new source with an initial startup after the effective date, a report that summarizes the regulatory status of each waste stream subject to § 61.342 and is determined by the procedures specified in § 61.355(c) to contain benzene. Each owner or operator subject to this subpart who has no benzene onsite in wastes, products, by-products, or intermediates shall submit an initial report that is a statement to this effect. For all other owners or operators subject to this subpart, the report shall include the following information:
(1) Total annual benzene quantity from facility waste determined in accordance with § 61.355(a) of this subpart.
(2) A table identifying each waste stream and whether or not the waste stream will be controlled for benzene emissions in accordance with the requirements of this subpart.
(3) For each waste stream identified as not being controlled for benzene emissions in accordance with the requirements of this subpart the following information shall be added to the table:
(i) Whether or not the water content of the waste stream is greater than 10 percent;
(ii) Whether or not the waste stream is a process waste-water stream, product tank drawdown, or landfill leachate;
(iii) Annual waste quantity for the waste stream;
(iv) Range of benzene concentrations for the waste stream;
(v) Annual average flow-weighted benzene concentration for the waste stream; and
(vi) Annual benzene quantity for the waste stream.
(4) The information required in paragraphs (a) (1), (2), and (3) of this section should represent the waste stream characteristics based on current configuration and operating conditions. An owner or operator only needs to list in the report those waste streams that contact materials containing benzene. The report does not need to include a description of the controls to be installed to comply with the standard or other information required in § 61.10(a).
(b) If the total annual benzene quantity from facility waste is less than 1 Mg/yr, then the owner or operator shall submit to the Administrator a report that updates the information listed in paragraphs (a)(1) through (a)(3) of this section whenever there is a change in the process generating the waste stream that could cause the total annual benzene quantity from facility waste to increase to 1 Mg/yr or more.
(c) If the total annual benzene quantity from facility waste is less than 10 Mg/yr but is equal to or greater than 1 Mg/yr, then the owner or operator shall submit to the Administrator a report that updates the information listed in paragraphs (a)(1) through (a)(3) of this section. The report shall be submitted annually and whenever there is a change in the process generating the waste stream that could cause the total annual benzene quantity from facility waste to increase to 10 Mg/yr or more. If the information in the annual report required by paragraphs (a)(1) through (a)(3) of this section is not changed in the following year, the owner or operator may submit a statement to that effect.
(d) If the total annual benzene quantity from facility waste is equal to or greater than 10 Mg/yr, then the owner or operator shall submit to the Administrator the following reports:
(1) Within 90 days after January 7, 1993, unless a waiver of compliance under § 61.11 of this part is granted, or by the date of initial startup for a new source with an initial startup after the effective date, a certification that the equipment necessary to comply with these standards has been installed and that the required initial inspections or tests have been carried out in accordance with this subpart. If a waiver of compliance is granted under § 61.11, the certification of equipment necessary to comply with these standards shall be submitted by the date the waiver of compliance expires.
(2) Beginning on the date that the equipment necessary to comply with these standards has been certified in accordance with paragraph (d)(1) of this section, the owner or operator shall submit annually to the Administrator a report that updates the information listed in paragraphs (a)(1) through (a)(3) of this section. If the information in the annual report required by paragraphs (a)(1) through (a)(3) of this section is not changed in the following year, the owner or operator may submit a statement to that effect.
(3) If an owner or operator elects to comply with the requirements of § 61.342(c)(3)(ii), then the report required by paragraph (d)(2) of this section shall include a table identifying each waste stream chosen for exemption and the total annual benzene quantity in these exempted streams.
(4) If an owner or operator elects to comply with the alternative requirements of § 61.342(d) of this subpart, then he shall include in the report required by paragraph (d)(2) of this section a
(i) Whether or not the process waste-water stream is being controlled for benzene emissions in accordance with the requirements of this subpart;
(ii) For each process waste-water stream identified as not being controlled for benzene emissions in accordance with the requirements of this subpart, the table shall report the following information for the process waste-water stream as determined at the point of waste generation: annual waste quantity, range of benzene concentrations, annual average flow-weighted benzene concentration, and annual benzene quantity;
(iii) For each process waste-water stream identified as being controlled for benzene emissions in accordance with the requirements of this subpart, the table shall report the following information for the process waste-water stream as determined at the exit to the treatment process: Annual waste quantity, range of benzene concentrations, annual average flow-weighted benzene concentration, and annual benzene quantity.
(5) If an owner or operator elects to comply with the alternative requirements of § 61.342(e), then the report required by paragraph (d)(2) of this section shall include a table presenting the following information for each waste stream:
(i) For each waste stream identified as not being controlled for benzene emissions in accordance with the requirements of this subpart; the table shall report the following information for the waste stream as determined at the point of waste generation: annual waste quantity, range of benzene concentrations, annual average flow-weighted benzene concentration, and annual benzene quantity;
(ii) For each waste stream identified as being controlled for benzene emissions in accordance with the requirements of this subpart; the table shall report the following information for the waste stream as determined at the applicable location described in § 61.355(k)(2): Annual waste quantity, range of benzene concentrations, annual average flow-weighted benzene concentration, and annual benzene quantity.
(6) Beginning 3 months after the date that the equipment necessary to comply with these standards has been certified in accordance with paragraph (d)(1) of this section, the owner or operator shall submit quarterly to the Administrator a certification that all of the required inspections have been carried out in accordance with the requirements of this subpart.
(7) Beginning 3 months after the date that the equipment necessary to comply with these standards has been certified in accordance with paragraph (d)(1) of this section, the owner or operator shall submit a report quarterly to the Administrator that includes:
(i) If a treatment process or waste-water treatment system unit is monitored in accordance with § 61.354(a)(1) of this subpart, then each period of operation during which the concentration of benzene in the monitored waste stream exiting the unit is equal to or greater than 10 ppmw.
(ii) If a treatment process or waste-water treatment system unit is monitored in accordance with § 61.354(a)(2) of this subpart, then each 3-hour period of operation during which the average value of the monitored parameter is outside the range of acceptable values or during which the unit is not operating as designed.
(iii) If a treatment process or waste-water treatment system unit is monitored in accordance with § 61.354(b), then each period of operation during which the flow-weighted annual average concentration of benzene in the monitored waste stream entering the unit is equal to or greater than 10 ppmw and/or the total annual benzene quantity is equal to or greater than 1.0 mg/yr.
(iv) For a control device monitored in accordance with § 61.354(c) of this subpart, each period of operation monitored during which any of the following conditions occur, as applicable to the control device:
(A) Each 3-hour period of operation during which the average temperature of the gas stream in the combustion zone of a thermal vapor incinerator, as
(B) Each 3-hour period of operation during which the average temperature of the gas stream immediately before the catalyst bed of a catalytic vapor incinerator, as measured by the temperature monitoring device, is more than 28°C below the design gas stream temperature, and any 3-hour period during which the average temperature difference across the catalyst bed (i.e., the difference between the temperatures of the gas stream immediately before and after the catalyst bed), as measured by the temperature monitoring device, is less than 80 percent of the design temperature difference.
(C) Each 3-hour period of operation during which the average temperature of the gas stream in the combustion zone of a boiler or process heater having a design heat input capacity less than 44 MW, as mesured by the temperature monitoring device, is more than 28°C below the design combustion zone temperature.
(D) Each 3-hour period of operation during which the average concentration of organics or the average concentration of benzene in the exhaust gases from a carbon adsorber, condenser, or other vapor recovery system is more than 20 percent greater than the design concentration level of organics or benzene in the exhaust gas.
(E) Each 3-hour period of operation during which the temperature of the condenser exhaust vent stream is more than 6°C above the design average exhaust vent stream temperature, or the temperature of the coolant fluid exiting the condenser is more than 6°C above the design average coolant fluid temperature at the condenser outlet.
(F) Each period in which the pilot flame of a flare is absent.
(G) Each occurrence when there is a change in the location at which the vent stream is introduced into the flame zone of a boiler or process heater as required by § 61.349(a)(2)(i)(C) of this subpart.
(H) Each occurrence when the carbon in a carbon adsorber system that is regenerated directly on site in the control device is not regenerated at the predetermined carbon bed regeneration time.
(I) Each occurrence when the carbon in a carbon adsorber system that is not regenerated directly on site in the control device is not replaced at the predetermined interval specified in § 61.354(c) of this subpart.
(J) Each 3-hour period of operation during which the parameters monitored are outside the range of values specified in § 61.349(a)(2)(iv)(C), or any other periods specified by the Administrator for a control device subject to the requirements of § 61.349(a)(2)(iv).
(v) For a cover and closed-vent system monitored in accordance with § 61.354(g), the owner or operator shall submit a report quarterly to the Administrator that identifies any period in which the pressure in the waste management unit is equal to or greater than atmospheric pressure.
(8) Beginning one year after the date that the equipment necessary to comply with these standards has been certified in accordance with paragraph (d)(1) of this section, the owner or operator shall submit annually to the Administrator a report that summarizes all inspections required by §§ 61.342 through 61.354 during which detectable emissions are measured or a problem (such as a broken seal, gap or other problem) that could result in benzone emissions is identified, including information about the repairs or corrective action taken.
(e) An owner or operator electing to comply with the provisions of §§ 61.351 or 61.352 of this subpart shall notify the Administrator of the alternative standard selected in the report required under § 61.07 or § 61.10 of this part.
(f) An owner or operator who elects to install and operate the control equipment in § 61.351 of this subpart shall comply with the reporting requirements in 40 CFR 60.115b.
(g) An owner or operator who elects to install and operate the control equipment in § 61.352 of this subpart shall submit initial and quarterly reports that identify all seal gap measurements, as required in 40 CFR 60.693-
(a) In delegating implementation and enforcement authority to a State under section 112(d) of the Clean Air Act, the authorities contained in paragraph (b) of this section shall be retained by the Administrator and not transferred to a State.
(b) Alternative means of emission limitation under § 61.353 of this subpart will not be delegated to States.
A.
1.
2.
a. Describe the proposed type of control device to be added or modification to be made to the process to reduce the emission of hazardous pollutants to an acceptable level. (Use additional sheets if necessary.)
b. Describe the measures that will be taken during the waiver period to assure that the health of persons will be protected from imminent endangerment. (Use additional sheets if necessary.)
3.
B.
1.
Date
Signature of the owner or operator
1.1Applicability. This method applies to the determination of particulate and gaseous mercury (Hg) emissions from chlor-alkali plants and other sources (as specified in the regulations), where the carrier-gas stream in the duct or stack is principally air.
1.2Principle. Particulate and gaseous Hg emissions are withdrawn isokinetically from the source and collected in acidic iodine monochloride (ICl) solution. The Hg collected (in the mercuric form) is reduced to elemental Hg, which is then aerated from the solution into an optical cell and measured by atomic absorption spectrophotometry.
2.1Range. After initial dilution, the range of this method is 0.5 to 120 μg Hg/ml. The upper limit can be extended by further dilution of the sample.
2.2Sensitivity. The sensitivity of this method depends on the recorder/spec-tro-pho-to-meter combination selected.
3.1Sampling. SO
3.2Analysis. ICl concentrations greater than 10
The following estimates are based on collaborative tests, wherein 13 laboratories performed duplicate analyses on two Hg-containing samples from a chlor-alkali plant and on one laboratory-prepared sample of known Hg concentration. The concentration ranged from 2 to 65 μg Hg/ml.
4.1Precision. The estimated within-laboratory and between-laboratory standard deviations are 1.6 and 1.8 μg Hg/ml, respectively.
4.2Accuracy. The participating laboratories that analyzed a 64.3-μg Hg/ml (in 0.1 M ICl) standard obtained a mean of 63.7 μg Hg/ml.
5.1Sampling Train. A schematic of the sampling train is shown in Figure 101-1; it is similar to the Method 5 train (mention of Method 5 refers to part 60 of 40 CFR). The sampling train consists of the following components:
5.1.1Probe Nozzle, Pitot Tube, Differential Pressure Gauge, Metering System, Barometer, and Gas Density Determination Equipment. Same as Method 5, Sections 2.1.1, 2.1.3, 2.1.4, 2.1.8, 2.1.9, and 2.1.10, respectively.
5.1.2Probe Liner. Borosilicate or quartz glass tubing. The tester may use a heating system capable of maintaining a gas temperature of 120
Do not use metal probe liners.
5.1.3Impingers. Four Greenburg-Smith impingers connected in series with leak-free ground glass fittings or any similar leak-free noncontaminating fittings. For the first, third, and fourth impingers, the tester may use impingers that are modified by replacing the tip with a 13-mm-ID (0.5-in.) glass tube extending to 13 mm (0.5 in.) from the bottom of the flask.
5.1.4Acid Trap. Mine Safety Appliances air line filter, Catalog number 81857, with acid absorbing cartridge and suitable connections, or equivalent.
5.2Sample Recovery. The following items are needed:
5.2.1Glass Sample Bottles. Leakless, with Teflon-lined caps, 1000- and 100-ml.
5.2.2Graduated Cylinder. 250-ml.
5.2.3Funnel and Rubber Policeman. To aid in transfer of silica gel to container; not necessary if silica gel is weighed in the field.
5.2.4Funnel. Glass, to aid in sample recovery.
5.3Sample Preparation and Analysis. The following equipment is needed:
5.3.1Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometer. Perkin-Elmer 303, or equivalent, containing a hollow-cathode mercury lamp and the optical cell described in Section 5.3.2.
5.3.2Optical Cell. Cylindrical shape with quartz end windows and having the dimensions shown in Figure 101-2. Wind the cell with approximately 2 meters of 24-gauge nichrome heating wire, and wrap with fiberglass insulation tape or equivalent; do not let the wires touch each other.
5.3.3Aeration Cell. Constructed according to the specifications in Figure 101-3. Do not use a glass frit as a substitute for the blown glass bubbler tip shown in Figure 101-3.
5.3.4Recorder. Matched to output of the spectrophotometer described in Section 5.3.1.
5.3.5Variable Transformer. To vary the voltage on the optical cell from 0 to 40 volts.
5.3.6Hood. For venting optical cell exhaust.
5.3.7Flowmetering Valve.
5.3.8Flowmeter. Rotameter or equivalent, capable of measuring a gas flow of 1.5 liters/min.
5.3.9Aeration Gas Cylinder. Nitrogen or dry, Hg-free air, equipped with a single-stage regulator.
5.3.10Connecting Tubing. Use glass tubing (ungreased ball- and socket-connections are recommended) for all tubing connections between the solution cell and the optical cell; do not use Tygon tubing, other types of flexible tubing, or metal tubing as substitutes. The tester may use Teflon, steel, or copper tubing between the nitrogen tank and flowmetering valve (5.3.7), and Tygon, gum, or rubber tubing between the flowmetering valve and the aeration cell.
5.3.11Flow Rate Calibration Equipment. Bubble flowmeter or wet test meter for measuring a gas flow rate of 1.5
5.3.12Volumetric Flasks. Class A with penny head standard taper stoppers; 100-, 250-, 500- and 1000-ml.
5.3.13Volumetric Pipets. Class A; 1-, 2-, -3-, 4-, and 5-ml.
5.3.14Graduated Cylinder. 50-ml.
5.3.15Magnetic Stirrer. General-purpose laboratory type.
5.3.16Magnetic Stirring Bar. Teflon-coated.
5.3.17Balance. Capable of weighing to
5.4Alternative Analytical Apparatus. Alternative systems are allowable as long as they meet the following criteria:
5.4.1A linear calibration curve is generated and two consecutive samples of the same aliquot size and concentration agree within 3 percent of their average.
5.4.2A minimum of 95 percent of the spike is recovered when an aliquot of a source sample is spiked with a known concentration of mercury (II) compound.
5.4.3The reducing agent should be added after the aeration cell is closed.
5.4.4The aeration bottle bubbler should not contain a frit.
5.4.5Any Tygon used should be as short as possible and conditioned prior to use until blanks and standards yield linear and reproducible results.
5.4.6If manual stirring is done before aeration, it should be done with the aeration cell closed.
5.4.7A drying tube should not be used unless it is conditioned as the Tygon above.
Use ACS reagent-grade chemicals or equivalent, unless otherwise specified.
6.1Sampling and Recovery. The reagents used in sampling and recovery are as follows:
6.1.1Water. Deionized distilled, meeting ASTM Specifications for Type I Reagent Water—ASTM Test Method D1193-77 (incorporated by reference—see § 61.18). If high concentrations of organic matter are not expected to be present, the analyst may eliminate the KMnO
6.1.2Nitric Acid (HNO
6.1.3Silica Gel. Indicating type, 6- to 16-mesh. If previously used, dry at 175° C (350° F) for 2 hours. The tester may use new silica gel as received.
6.1.4Potassium Iodide (KI) Solution, 25 Percent. Dissolve 250 g of KI in deionized distilled water and dilute to 1 liter.
6.1.5Iodine Monochloride (ICl) Stock Solution, 1.0 M. To 800 ml of 25 percent KI solution, add 800 ml of concentrated hydrochloric acid (HCl). Cool to room temperature. With vigorous stirring, slowly add 135 g of potassium iodate (KIO
6.1.6Absorbing Solution, 0.1 M ICl. Dilute 100 ml of the 1.0 M ICl stock solution to 1 liter with deionized distilled water. Keep the solution in amber glass bottles and in darkness to prevent degradation. This reagent is stable for at least 2 months.
6.2Sample Preparation and Analysis. The reagents needed are listed below:
6.2.1Tin (II) Solution. Prepare fresh daily and keep sealed when not being used. Completely dissolve 20 g of tin (II) chloride [or 25 g of tin (II) sulfate] crystals (Baker Analyzed reagent grade or any other brand that will
6.2.2Mercury Stock Solution, 1 mg Hg/ml. Prepare and store all mercury standard solutions in borosilicate glass containers. Completely dissolve 0.1354 g of mercury (II) chloride in 75 ml of deionized distilled water in a 100 ml glass volumetric flask. Add 10 ml of concentrated HNO
6.2.3Sulfuric Acid, 5 Percent (V/V). Dilute 25 ml of concentrated H
6.2.4Intermediate Mercury Standard Solution, 10 μg Hg/ml. Prepare fresh weekly. Pipet 5.0 ml of the mercury stock solution (6.2.2) into a 500-ml glass volumetric flask and add 20 ml of the 5 percent H
6.2.5Working Mercury Standard Solution, 200 ng Hg/ml. Prepare fresh daily. Pipet 5.0 ml from the “Intermediate Mercury Standard Solution” (6.2.4) into a 250-ml volumetric glass flask. Add 10 ml of the 5 percent H
7.1Sampling. Because of the complexity of this method, testers should be trained and experienced with the test procedures to assure reliable results. Since the amount of Hg that is collected generally is small, the method must be carefully applied to prevent contamination or loss of sample.
7.1.1Pretest Preparation. Follow the general procedure given in Method 5, Section 4.1.1, except omit the directions on the filter.
7.1.2Preliminary Determinations. Follow the general procedure given in Method 5, Section 4.1.2, except as follows: Select a nozzle size based on the range of velocity heads to assure that it is not necessary to change the nozzle size in order to maintain isokinetic sampling rates below 28 liters/min (1.0 cfm).
Obtain samples over a period or periods that accurately determine the maximum emissions that occur in a 24-hour period. In the case of cyclic operations, run sufficient tests for the accurate determination of the emissions that occur over the duration of the cycle. A minimum sample time of 2 hours is recommended. In some instances, high Hg or high SO
7.1.3Preparation of Sampling Train. Clean all glassware [probe, impingers, and connectors] by rinsing with 50 percent HNO
Install the selected nozzle using a Viton A O-ring when stack temperatures are less than 260° C (500° F). Use a fiberglass string gasket if temperatures are higher. See APTD-0576 (Citation 9 in Section 10) for details. Other connecting systems using either 316 stainless steel or Teflon ferrules may be used. Mark the probe with heat-resistant tape or by some other method to denote the proper distance into the stack or duct for each sampling point. Assemble the train as shown in Figure 101-1, using (if necessary) a very light coat of silicone grease on all ground glass joints. Grease only the outer portion (see APTD-0576) to avoid possibility of contamination by the silicone grease.
An empty impinger may be inserted between the third impinger and the silica gel to remove excess moisture from the sample stream.
After the sampling train has been assembled, turn on and set the probe, if applicable, at the desired operating temperature. Allow time for the temperatures to stabilize. Place crushed ice around the impingers.
7.1.4Leak-Check Procedures. Follow the leak-check procedures outlined in Method 5, Sections 4.1.4.1 (Pretest Leak Check), 4.1.4.2 (Leak Checks During Sample Run), and 4.1.4.3 (Post-Test Leak Check).
7.1.5Mercury Train Operation. Follow the general procedure given in Method 5, Section 4.1.5. For each run, record the data required on a data sheet such as the one shown in Figure 101-4.
7.1.6Calculation of Percent Isokinetic. Same as Method 5, Section 4.1.6.
7.2Sample Recovery. Begin proper cleanup procedure as soon as the probe is removed from the stack at the end of the sampling period.
Allow the probe to cool. When it can be safely handled, wipe off any external particulate matter near the tip of the probe nozzle and place a cap over it. Do not cap off the probe tip tightly while the sampling train is
Before moving the sampling train to the cleanup site, remove the probe from the train, wipe off the silicone grease, and cap the open outlet of the probe. Be careful not to lose any condensate that might be present. Wipe off the silicone grease from the impinger. Use either ground-glass stoppers, plastic caps, or serum caps to close these openings.
Transfer the probe and impinger assembly to a cleanup area that is clean, protected from the wind, and free of Hg contamination. The ambient air in laboratories located in the immediate vicinity of Hg-using facilities is not normally free of Hg contamination.
Inspect the train before and during assembly, and note any abnormal conditions. Treat the sample as follows:
7.2.1Container No. 1 (Impinger and Probe). Using a graduated cylinder, measure the liquid in the first three impingers to within
Taking care that dust on the outside of the probe or other exterior surfaces does not get into the sample, quantitatively recover the Hg (and any condensate) from the probe nozzle, probe fitting, and probe liner as follows: Rinse these components with two 50-ml portions of 0.1 M IC1. Next, rinse the probe nozzle, fitting and liner, and each piece of connecting glassware between the probe liner and the back half of the third impinger with a maximum of 400 ml of deionized distilled water. Add all washings to the 1000-ml glass sample bottle containing the liquid from the first three impingers.
After all washings have been collected in the sample container, tighten the lid on the container to prevent leakage during shipment to the laboratory. Mark the height of the liquid to determine later whether leakage occurred during transport. Label the container to clearly identify its contents.
7.2.2Container No. 2 (Silica Gel). Note the color of the indicating silica gel to determine whether it has been completely spent and make a notation of its condition. Transfer the silica gel from its impinger to its original container and seal. The tester may use as aids a funnel to pour the silica gel and a rubber policeman to remove the silica gel from the impinger. The small amount of particles that may adhere to the impinger wall need not be removed. Since the gain in weight is to be used for moisture calculations, do not use any water or other liquids to transfer the silica gel. If a balance is available in the field, weigh the spent silica gel (or silica gel plus impinger) to the nearest 0.5 g; record this weight.
7.2.3Container No. 3 (Absorbing Solution Blank). For a blank, place 50 ml of the 0.1 M IC1 absorbing solution in a 100-ml sample bottle. Seal the container. Use this blank to prepare the working mercury standard solution (6.2.5).
7.3Sample Preparation. Check the liquid level in each container to see whether liquid was lost during transport. If a noticeable amount of leakage occurred, either void the sample or use methods subject to the approval of the Administrator to account for the losses. Then follow the procedures below:
7.3.1Container No. 1 (Impinger and Probe). Carefully transfer the contents of Container No. 1 into a 1000-ml volumetric flask and adjust the volume to exactly 1000 ml with deionized distilled water.
7.3.2Dilutions. Pipet a 2-ml aliquot from the diluted sample from 7.3.1 into a 250-ml volumetric flask. Add 10 ml of 5 percent H
The dilution factor will be 250/2 for this solution.
7.4Analysis. Calibrate the spec-tro-pho-to-met-er and recorder and prepare the calibration curve as described in Sections 8.1 to 8.2.
7.4.1Mercury Samples. Repeat the procedure used to establish the calibration curve with appropriately sized aliquots (1 to 5 ml) of each of the diluted samples (from Section 7.3.2) until two consecutive peak heights agree within
Run a blank and standard at least after every five samples to check the spec-tro-photometer calibration; recalibrate as necessary.
It is also recommended that at least one sample from each stack test be checked by the Method of Standard Additions to confirm that matrix effects have not interfered in the analysis.
7.4.2Container No. 2 (Silica Gel). Weigh the spent silica gel (or silica gel plus impinger) to the nearest 0.5 g using a balance. (This step may be conducted in the field.)
Before use, clean all glassware, both new and used, as follows: brush with soap and water, liberally rinse with tap water, soak for 1 hour in 50 percent HNO
8.1Flow Calibration. Assemble the aeration system as shown in Figure 101-5. Set the outlet pressure on the aeration gas cylinder regulator to a minimum pressure of 500 mm Hg (10 psi), and use the flowmetering valve and a bubble flowmeter or wet test meter to obtain a flow rate of 1.5
8.2Optical Cell Heating System Calibration. Using a 50-ml graduated cylinder, add 50 ml of deionized distilled water to the bottle section of the aeration cell and attach the bottle section to the bubbler section of the cell. Attach the aeration cell to the optical cell; and while aerating at 1.5 liters/min, determine the minimum variable transformer setting necessary to prevent condensation of moisture in the optical cell and in the connecting tubing. (This setting should not exceed 20 volts.)
8.3Spectrophotometer and Recorder Calibration. The mercury response may be measured by either peak height or peak area.
The temperature of the solution affects the rate at which elemental Hg is released from a solution and, consequently, it affects the shape of the absorption curve (area) and the point of maximum absorbance (peak height). Therefore, to obtain reproducible results, bring all solutions to room temperature before use.
Set the spec-tro-photometer wavelength at 253.7 nm, and make certain the optical cell is at the minimum temperature that will prevent water condensation. Then set the recorder scale as follows: Using a 50-ml graduated cylinder, add 50 ml of deionized distilled water to the aeration cell bottle and pipet 5.0 ml of the working mercury standard solution into the aeration cell.
Always add the Hg-containing solution to the aeration cell after the 50 ml of deionized distilled water.
Place a Teflon-coated stirring bar in the bottle. Before attaching the bottle section to the bubbler section of the aeration cell, make certain that (1) the aeration cell exit arm stopcock (Figure 101-3) is closed (so that Hg will not prematurely enter the optical cell when the reducing agent is being added) and (2) there is no flow through the bubbler. If conditions (1) and (2) are met, attach the bottle section to the bubbler section of the aeration cell. Pipet 5 ml of stannous chloride solution into the aeration cell through the side arm, and immediately stopper the side arm. Stir the solution for 15 sec, turn on the recorder, open the aeration cell exit arm stopcock, and then immediately initiate aeration with continued stirring. Determine the maximum absorbance of the standard and set this value to read 90 percent of the recorder full scale.
8.4Calibration Curve. After setting the recorder scale, repeat the procedure in Section 8.3 using 0.0-, 1.0-, 2.0-, 3.0-, 4.0-, and 5.0-ml aliquots of the working standard solution (final amount of Hg in the aeration cell is 0, 200, 400, 600, 800, and 1000 ng, respectively). Repeat this procedure on each aliquot size until two consecutive peaks agree within 3 percent of their average value. (Note: To prevent Hg carryover from one sample to another, do not close the aeration gas tank valve and do not disconnect the aeration cell from the optical cell until the recorder pen has returned to the baseline.) It should not be necessary to disconnect the aeration gas inlet line from the aeration cell when changing samples. After separating the bottle and bubbler sections of the aeration cell, place the bubbler section into a 600-ml beaker containing approximately 400 ml of deionized distilled water. Rinse the bottle section of the aeration cell with a stream of deionized distilled water to remove all traces of the tin (II) reducing agent. Also, to prevent the loss of Hg before aeration, remove all traces of the reducing agent between samples by washing with deionized distilled water. It will be necessary, however, to wash the aeration cell parts with concentrated HCl if any of the following conditions occur: (1) A white film appears on any inside surface of the aeration cell, (2) the calibration curve changes suddenly, or (3) the replicate samples do not yield reproducible results.
Subtract the average peak height (or peak area) of the blank (0.0-ml aliquot)—which should be less than 2 percent of recorder full scale—from the averaged peak heights of the 1.0-, 2.0-, 3.0-, 4.0-, and 5.0-ml aliquot standards. If the blank absorbance is greater than 2 percent of full-scale, the probable cause is Hg contamination of a reagent or carry-over of Hg from a previous sample. Plot the corrected peak height of each standard solution versus the corresponding final total Hg weight in the aeration cell (in ng) and draw the best-fit straight line. This line should either pass through the origin or pass through a point no further from the origin than
8.5Sampling Train Calibration. Calibrate the sampling train components according to the procedures outlined in the following sections of Method 5: Section 5.1 (Probe Nozzle), Section 5.2 (Pitot Tube), Section 5.3 (Metering System), Section 5.4 (Probe Heater), Section 5.5 (Temperature Gauges), Section 5.7 (Barometer). Note that the leak-check described in Section 5.6 of Method 5 applies to this method.
9.1Dry Gas Volume. Using the data from this test, calculate V
9.2Volume of Water Vapor and Moisture Content. Using the data obtained from this test, calculate the volume of water vapor V
9.3Stack Gas Velocity. Using the data from this test and Equation 2-9 of Method 2, calculate the average stack gas velocity v
9.4Total Mercury. For each source sample, correct the average maximum absorbance of the two consecutive samples whose peak heights agree within
9.5Mercury Emission Rate. Calculate the Hg emission rate R in g/day for continuous operations using Equation 101-2. For cyclic operations, use only the time per day each stack is in operation. The total Hg emission rate from a source will be the summation of results from all stacks.
9.6Isokinetic Variation and Acceptable Results. Same as Method 5, Sections 6.11 and 6.12, respectively.
9.7Determination of Compliance. Each performance test consists of three repetitions of the applicable test method. For the purpose of determining compliance with an applicable national emission standard, use the average of the results of all repetitions.
1. Addendum to Specifications for Incinerator Testing at Federal Facilities. PHS, NCAPC. December 6, 1967.
2. Determining Dust Concentration in a Gas Stream. ASME Performance Test Code No. 27. New York, NY. 1957.
3. Devorkin, Howard, et al. Air Pollution Source Testing Manual. Air Pollution Control District. Los Angeles, CA. November 1963.
4. Hatch, W.R., and W.I. Ott. Determination of Sub-Microgram Quantities of Mercury by Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry. Anal. Chem.
5. Mark, L.S. Mechanical Engineers’ Handbook. McGraw-Hill Book Co., Inc. New York, NY. 1951.
6. Martin, Robert M. Construction Details of Isokinetic Source Sampling Equipment. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Research Triangle Park, NC. Publication No. APTD-0581. April 1971.
7. Western Precipitation Division of Joy Manufacturing Co. Methods for Determination of Velocity, Volume, Dust and Mist Content of Gases. Bulletin WP-50. Los Angeles, CA. 1968.
8. Perry, J.H. Chemical Engineers’ Handbook. McGraw-Hill Book Co., Inc. New York, NY. 1960.
9. Rom, Jerome J. Maintenance, Calibration, and Operation of Isokinetic Source Sampling Equipment. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Research Triangle Park, NC. Publication No. APTD-0576. April 1972.
10. Shigehara, R.T., W.F. Todd, and W.S. Smith. Significance of Errors in Stack Sampling Measurements. Stack Sampling News.
11. Smith, W.S., et al. Stack Gas Sampling Improved and Simplified with New Equipment. APCA Paper No. 67-119. 1967.
12. Smith, W.S., R.T. Shigehara, and W.F. Todd. A Method of Interpreting Stack Sampling Data. Stack Sampling News.
13. Specifications for Incinerator Testing at Federal Facilities. PHS, NCAPA. 1967.
14. Standard Method for Sampling Stacks for Particulate Matter. In: 1971 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, part 23. ASTM Designation D-2928-71. Philadelphia, PA. 1971.
15. Vennard, J.K. Elementary Fluid Mechanics. John Wiley and Sons, Inc. New York. 1947.
16. Mitchell, W.J., and M.R. Midgett. Improved Procedure for Determining Mercury Emissions from Mercury Cell Chlor-Alkali Plants. J. APCA.
17. Shigehara, R.T. Adjustments in the EPA Nomograph for Different Pitot Tube Coefficients and Dry Molecular Weights. Stack Sampling News.
18. Vollaro, R.F. Recommended Procedure for Sample Traverses in Ducts Smaller than 12 Inches in Diameter. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Emission Measurement Branch. Research Triangle Park, NC. November 1976.
19. Klein, R., and C. Hach. Standard Additions: Uses and Limitation in Spectrophotometric Measurements. Amer. Lab.
20. Water, Atmospheric Analysis. In: Annual Book of ASTM Standards, part 31. ASTM Designation D-1193-74. Philadelphia, PA. 1974.
This method is similar to Method 101, except acidic potassium permanganate solution is used instead of acidic iodine monochloride for collection.
1.1Applicability. This method applies to the determination of particulate and gaseous mercury (Hg) emissions from sewage sludge incinerators and other sources as specified in the regulations.
1.2Principle. Particulate and gaseous Hg emissions are withdrawn isokinetically from the source and collected in acidic potassium permanganate (KMn0
2.
2.1Range. After initial dilution, the range of this method is 20 to 800 ng Hg/ml. The upper limit can be extended by further dilution of the sample.
2.2Sensitivity. The sensitivity of the method depends on the recorder/spectrophotometer combination selected.
3.1Sampling. Excessive oxidizable organic matter in the stack gas prematurely depletes the KMn0
3.2Analysis. Condensation of water vapor on the optical cell windows causes a positive interference.
Based on eight paired-train tests, the within-laboratory standard deviation was estimated to be 4.8 μg Hg/ml in the concentration range of 50 to 130 μg Hg/m
5.1Sampling Train and Sample Recovery. Same as Method 101, Sections 5.1 and 5.2, respectively, except for the following variations:
5.1.1Probe Liner. Same as Method 101, Section 5.1.2, except that if a filter is used ahead of the impingers, the tester must use the probe heating system to minimize the condensation of gaseous Hg.
5.1.2Filter Holder (Optional). Borosilicate glass with a rigid stainless-steel wire-screen filter support (do not use glass frit supports) and a silicone rubber or Teflon gasket, designed to provide a positive seal against leakage from outside or around the filter. The filter holder must be equipped with a filter heating system capable of maintaining a temperature around the filter holder of 120
5.2Analysis. The apparatus needed for analysis is the same as Method 101, Sections 5.3 and 5.4, except as follows:
5.2.1Volumetric Pipets. Class A; 1-, 2-, -3-, 4-, 5-, 10-, and 20-ml.
5.2.2Graduated Cylinder. 25-ml.
5.2.3Steam Bath.
5.2.4Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometer or Equivalent. Any atomic absorption unit with an open sample presentation area in which to mount the optical cell is suitable. Use those instrument settings recommended by the particular manufacturer. Instruments designed specifically for the measurement of mercury using the cold-vapor technique are commercially available and may be substituted for the atomic absorption spectrophotometer.
5.2.5Optical Cell. Alternatively, a heat lamp mounted above the cell or a moisture trap installed upstream of the cell may be used.
5.2.6 Aeration Cell. Alternatively, aeration cells available with commercial cold vapor instrumentation may be used.
5.2.7Aeration Gas Cylinder. Nitrogen, argon, or dry, Hg-free air, equipped with a single-stage regulator. Alternatively, aeration may be provided by a peristaltic metering pump. If a commercial cold vapor instrument is used, follow the manufacturer's recommendations.
Use ACS reagent-grade chemicals or equivalent, unless otherwise specified.
6.1Sampling and Recovery. The reagents used in sampling and recovery are as follows:
6.1.1Water. Deionized distilled, meeting ASTM Specifications for Type I Reagent Water—ASTM Test Method D1193-77 (incorporated by reference—see § 61.18). If high concentrations of organic matter are not expected to be present, the analyst may eliminate the KMnO
6.1.2Nitric Acid (HNO
6.1.3Silica Gel. Indicating type, 6- to 16-mesh. If previously used, dry at 175° C (350° F) for 2 hr. The tester may use new silica gel as received.
6.1.4Filter (Optional). Glass fiber filter, without organic binder, exhibiting at least 99.95 percent efficiency on 0.3 μm dioctyl phthalate smoke particles. The tester may use the filter in cases where the gas stream contains large quantities of particulate matter, but he should analyze blank filters for Hg content.
6.1.5Sulfuric Acid (H
6.1.6Absorbing Solution, 4 Percent KMnO
6.1.7Hydrochloric Acid (HCL). Concentrated. Trace-metals grade is recommended. The Hg level shall be less than 3 ng/ml.
6.1.8HCL, 8 N. Dilute 67 ml of concentrated HCl to 100 ml with water (slowly add the HCl to the water).
6.2Analysis. The reagents needed for analysis are listed below:
6.2.1Tin (II) Solution. Prepare fresh daily and keep sealed when not being used. Competely dissolve 20 g of tin (II) chloride [or 25 g of tin (II) sulfate] crystals (Baker Analyzed reagent grade or any other brand that will give a clear solution) in 25 ml of concentrated HCl. Dilute to 250 ml with deionized distilled water. Do not substitute HNO
6.2.2Sodium Chloride—Hydroxylamine Solution. Dissolve 12 g of sodium chloride and 12 g of hydroxylamine sulfate (or 12 g of hydroxylamine hydrochloride) in deionized distilled water and dilute to 100 ml.
6.2.3Hydrochloric Acid (HCl), 8 N. Dilute 67 ml of concentrated HCl to 100 ml with deionzed distilled water (slowly add the HCl to the water).
6.2.4Nitric Acid, 15 Percent (V/V). Dilute 15 ml of concentrated HNO
6.2.5Mercury Stock Solution, 1 mg Hg/ml. Prepare and store all mercury standard solutions in borosilicate glass containers. Completely dissolve 0.1354 g of mercury (II) chloride in 75 ml of deionized distilled water. Add 100 ml of concentrated HNO
6.2.6Intermediate Mercury Standard Solution, 10 μg Hg/ml. Prepare fresh weekly. Pipet 5.0 ml of the mercury stock solution (Section 6.2.5) into a 500-ml volumetric flask and add 20 ml of 15 percent HNO
6.2.7Working Mercury Standard Solution, 200 ng Hg/ml. Prepare fresh daily. Pipet 5.0 ml from the “Intermediate Mercury Standard Solution” (Section 6.2.6) into a 250-ml volumetric flask. Add 5 ml of 4 percent KMnO
6.2.8Potassium Permanganate, 5 Percent (W/V). Dissolve 5 g of KMnO
6.2.9Filter. Whatman No. 40 or equivalent.
7.1Sampling. The sampling procedure is the same as Method 101, except for changes due to the use of KMnO
7.1.1Preliminary Determinations. The preliminary determinations are the same as those given in Method 101, section 7.1.2, except for the absorbing solution depletion sign. In this method, highly oxidizable matter could make it impossible to sample for the required minimum time. This problem is indicated by the complete bleaching of the purple color of the KMnO
7.1.2Preparation of Sampling Train. The preparation of the sampling train is the same as that given in Method 101, section 7.1.3, except for the cleaning of the glassware [probe, filter holder (if used), impingers, and connectors] and the charging of the first three impingers. In this method, clean all the glass components (a hood is recommended) by rinsing with 50 percent HNO
If a filter is used, use a pair of tweezers to place the filter in the filter holder. Be sure to center the filter and place the gasket in proper position to prevent the sample gas stream from by-passing the filter. Check the filter for tears after assembly is completed. Be sure also to set the filter heating system at the desired operating temperature after the sampling train has been assembled.
7.1.3Sampling Train Operation. In addition to the procedure given in Method 101, section 7.1.5, maintain a temperature around the filter (if applicable) of 120°
7.2Sample Recovery. Begin proper cleanup procedure as soon as the probe is removed from the stack at the end of the sampling period. Allow the probe to cool. When it can be
Before moving the sample train to the cleanup site, remove the probe from the train, wipe off the silicone grease, and cap the open outlet of the probe. Be careful not to lose any condensate that might be present. Wipe off the silicone grease from the impinger. Use either ground-glass stoppers, plastic caps, or serum caps to close these openings.
Transfer the probe, impinger assembly, and (if applicable) filter assembly to a cleanup area that is clean, protected from the wind, and free of Hg contamination. The ambient air in laboratories located in the immediate vicinity of Hg-using facilities is not normally free of Hg contamination.
Inspect the train before and during assembly, and note any abnormal conditions. Treat the sample as follows:
7.2.1Container No. 1 (Impinger, Probe, and Filter Holder) and, if applicable, No. 1A (HCl rinse).
7.2.1.1Using a graduated cylinder, measure the liquid in the first three impingers to within 1 ml. Record the volume of liquid present (e.g., see Figure 5-3 of Method 5 in 40 CFR Part 60). This information is required to calculate the moisture content of the effluent gas. (Use only graduated cylinder and glass storage bottles that have been precleaned as in Section 7.1.2.) Place the contents of the first three impingers into a 1000-ml glass sample bottle labeled Container No. 1. See the
7.2.1.2Taking care that dust on the outside of the probe or other exterior surfaces does not get into the sample, quantitatively recover the Hg (and any condensate) from the probe nozzle, probe fitting, probe liner, front half of the filter holder (if applicable), and impingers as follows: Rinse these components with a total of 250 to 400 ml of fresh acidified 4 percent KMnO
7.2.1.3After all washings have been collected in the sample containers, prepare as described above to prevent leakage during shipment to the laboratory. Mark the height of the fluid level to determine whether leakage occurs during transport. Label the containers to identify their contents clearly.
7.2.2.Container No. 2 (Silica Gel). Note the color of the indicating silica gel to determine whether it has been completely spent and make a notation of its condition. Transfer the silica gel from its impinger to its original container and seal. The tester may use as aids a funnel to pour the silica gel and a rubber policeman to remove the silica gel from the impinger. It is not necessary to remove the small amount of particles that may adhere to the impinger wall and are difficult to remove. Since the gain in weight is to be used for moisture calculations, do not use any water or other liquids to transfer the silica gel. If a balance is available in the field, weigh the spent silica gel (or silica gel plus impinger) to the nearest 0.5 g; record this weight.
7.2.3Container No, 3 (Filter). If a filter was used, carefully remove it from the filter holder, place it into a 100 ml glass sample container, and add 20 to 40 ml of acidified KMnO
7.2.4Container No. 4 (Filter Blank). If a filter was used, treat an unused filter from the same filter lot used for sampling in the same manner as Container No. 3.
7.2.5Container No, 5 (Absorbing Solution Blank). For a blank, place 500 ml of acidified absorbing solution in a 1000 ml sample bottle. See the
7.2.6Container No. 6 (HCl rinse blank). For a blank, place 200 ml of water in a 1000-ml sample bottle, and add 25 ml of 8 N HCl carefully with stirring. Seal the container. Only one blank sample per 3 runs is required.
7.3Sample preparation. Check liquid level in each container to see if liquid was lost during transport. If a noticeable amount of leakage occurred, either void the sample or use methods subject to the approval of the Administrator to account for the losses. Then follow the procedures below.
7.3.1Containers No. 3 and No. 4 (Filter and Filter Blank). If a filter is used, place the contents, including the filter, of Containers No. 3 and 4 in separate 250-ml beakers, and heat the beakers on a steam bath until most of the liquid has evaporated. Do not take to dryness. Add 20 ml of concentrated HNO
7.3.2Container No. 1 (Impingers, Probe, and Filter Holder) and, if applicable, No. 1A (HCl rinse). Filter the contents of Container No. 1 through Whatman 40 filter paper into a 1-liter volumetric flask to remove the brown MnO
7.3.3Container No. 5 (Absorbing Solution Blank) and No. 6 (HCl Rinse Blank). Prepare the contents of Container No. 5 for analysis by the same procedure used for Container No. 1 as described in Section 7.3.2. Add the filter blank filtrate from Container No. 4 to the 1-liter volumetric flask, and dilute to volume. Mix thoroughly. Mark this as ANALYSIS SAMPLE No. A.1. BLANK, and analyze for Hg within 48 hours of the filtration step. Digest any brown precipitate remaining on the filter from the filtration of Container No. 5 by the same procedure as described in Section 7.3.2. Filter the contents of Container No. 6 by the same procedure as described in Section 7.3.2, and combine in the 500-ml volumetric flask with the filtrate from the digested blank MnO
7.4Analysis. Calibrate the spec-tro-pho-to-meter and recorder and prepare the calibration curve as described in sections 8.1 and 8.2. Then repeat the procedure used to establish the calibration curve with appropriately sized aliquots (1 to 10 ml) of the samples (from sections 7.3.2 and 7.3.3) until two consecutive peak heights agree within
Run a blank and standard at least after every five samples to check the spec-tro-pho-to-meter calibration; recalibrate as necessary.
It is also recommended that at least one sample from each stack test be checked by the Method of Standard Additions to confirm that matrix effects have not interfered in the analysis.
The calibration and standards are the same as Method 101, Section 8, except for the following variations:
8.1Optical Cell Heating System Calibration. Same as Method 101, Section 8.2, except use a 25-ml graduated cylinder to add 25 ml of deionized distilled water to the bottle section of the aeration cell.
8.2Spectrophotometer and Recorder Calibration. The mercury response may be measured by either peak height or peak area. (
Then set the recorder scale as follows: Using a 25-ml graduated cylinder, add 25 ml of deionized distilled water to the aeration cell bottle and pipet 5.0 ml of the working mercury standard solution into the aeration cell. (
9.1Dry Gas Volume, Volume of Water Vapor and Moisture Content, Stack Gas Velocity, Isokinetic Variation and Acceptable Results, and Determination of Compliance. Same as Method 101, sections 9.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.6, and 9.7, respectively, except use data obtained from this test.
9.2Total Mercury. For each source sample, correct the average maximum absorbance of the two consecutive samples whose peak heights agree within 3 percent of their average for the contribution of the blank. Then calculate the total Hg content in
9.2.1The maximum allowable blank subtraction for the Hg in the HCl washes is the lesser of the two following values: (1) the actual blank measured value (ANALYSIS SAMPLE NO. HCl A.2 blank), or (2) 5% of the Hg content in the combined HCl rinse and digested sample (ANALYSIS SAMPLE No. HCl A.2).
9.2.2The maximum allowable blank subtraction for the HCl is the lesser of the two following values: (1) the actual blank measured value (ANALYSIS SAMPLE No. “A.1 blank”), or (2) 5% of the Hg content in the filtrate (ANALYSIS SAMPLE No. “A.1”).
9.3Mercury Emission Rate. Calculate the Hg emission rate R in g/day for continuous operations using Equation 101A-1. For cyclic operations, use only the time per day each stack is in operation. The total Hg emission rate from a source will be the summation of results from all stacks.
1. Same as Method 101, Section 10.
2. Mitchell, W. J., M. R. Midgett, J. C. Suggs, and D. Albrinck. Test Methods to Determine the Mercury Emissions from Sludge Incineration Plants. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Research Triangle Park, North Carolina. Publication No. EPA-600/4-79-058. September 1979.
3. Wilshire, Frank W., J.E. Knoll, T.E. Ward, and M.R. Midgett. Reliability Study of the U.S. EPA's Method 101A—Determiantion of Particulate and Gaseous Mercury Emissions U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, NC. Report No. 600/D-31/219 AREAL 367, NTIS Acc No. PB91-23361.
Although similar to Method 101, Method 102 requires changes to accommodate the sample being extracted from a hydrogen stream. Conduct the test according to Method 101, except as shown below:
2.1Probe Heating System. Do not use, unless otherwise specified.
2.2Glass Fiber Filter. Do not use, unless otherwise specified.
2.3Safety Procedures. The sampler must conduct the source test under conditions of utmost safety, because hydrogen and air mixtures are explosive. Since the sampling train essentially is leakless, attention to safe operation can be concentrated at the inlet and outlet. If a leak does occur, however, remove the meter box cover to avoid a possible explosive mixture. The following specific precautions are recommended:
2.3.1Operate only the vacuum pump during the test. The other electrical equipment, e.g., heaters, fans, and timers, normally are not essential to the success of a hydogen stream test.
2.3.2Seal the sample port to minimize leakage of hydrogen from the stack.
2.3.3Vent sampled hydrogen at least 3 m (10 feet) away from the train. This can be accomplished by attaching a 13-mm-ID (0.50-in.) Tygon tube to the exhaust from the orifice meter. (
2.4Setting of Isokinetic Rates.
2.4.1If a nomograph is used, take special care in the calculation of the molecular weight of the stack gas and in the setting of the nomograph to maintain isokinetic conditions during sampling (sections 2.4.1.1 through 2.4.1.3 below).
2.4.1.1Calibrate the meter box orifice. Use the techniques described in APTD-0576 (see Citation 9 in section 10 of Method 101). Calibration of the orifice meter at flow conditions that simulate the conditions at the source is suggested. Calibration should either be done with hydrogen or with some other gas having a similar Reynolds Number so that there is similarity between the Reynolds Numbers during calibration and during sampling.
2.4.1.2The nomograph described in APTD-0576 cannot be used to calculate the C factor because the nomograph is designed for use when the stack gas dry molecular weight is 29
This calculation is left in English units, and is not converted to metric units because nomographs are based on English units.
2.4.1.3Set the calculated C factor on the operating nomograph and select the proper nozzle diameter and K factor as specified in APTD-0576. If the C factor obtained in Section 2.4.1.2 exceeds the values specified on the existing operating nomograph, expand the C scale logarithmically so that the values can be properly located.
2.4.2If a calculator is used to set isokinetic rates, it is suggested that the isokinetic equation presented in Citation 17 in the Bibliography of Method 101 be used.
2.5Sampling in Small (
1.1Applicability. This procedure details guidelines and requirements for methods acceptable for use in determining beryllium (Be) emissions in ducts or stacks at stationary sources.
1.2Principle. Be emissions are iso-ki-net-i-cal-ly sampled from three points in a duct or stack. The collected sample is analyzed for Be using an appropriate technique.
2.1Sampling Train. A schematic of the required sampling train configuration is shown in Figure 103-1. The essential components of the train are the following:
2.1.1Nozzle. Stainless steel, or equivalent, with sharp, tapered leading edge.
2.1.2Probe. Sheathed borosilicate or quartz glass tubing.
2.1.3Filter. Millipore AA (
2.1.4Meter-Pump System. Any system that will maintain isokinetic sampling rate, determine sample volume, and is capable of a sampling rate of greater than 14 1pm (0.5 cfm).
2.2Measurement of Stack Conditions. The following equipment is used to measure stack conditions:
2.2.1Pitot Tube. Type S, or equivalent, with a coefficient within 5 percent over the working range.
2.2.2Inclined Manometer, or Equivalent. To measure velocity head to within 10 percent of the minimum value.
2.2.3Temperature Measuring Device. To measure stack temperature to within 1.5 percent of the minimum absolute stack temperature.
2.2.4Pressure Measuring Device. To measure stack pressure to within 2.5 mm Hg (0.1 in. Hg).
2.2.5Barometer. To measure atmospheric pressure to within 2.5 mm Hg (0.1 in. Hg).
2.2.6Wet and Dry Bulb Thermometers, Drying Tubes, Condensers, or Equivalent. To determine stack gas moisture content to within 1 percent.
2.3Sample Recovery.
2.3.1Probe Cleaning Equipment. Probe brush or cleaning rod at least as long as probe, or equivalent. Clean cotton balls, or equivalent, should be used with the rod.
2.3.2Leakless Glass Sample Bottles. To contain sample.
2.4Analysis. Use equipment necessary to perform an atomic absorption, spectrographic, fluorometric, chroma-to-graph-ic, or equivalent analysis.
3.1Sample Recovery.
3.1.1Water. Distilled water.
3.1.2Acetone. Reagent grade.
3.1.3Wash Acid, 50 Percent (V/V) Hydrochloric Acid (HCl).
Mix equal volumes of concentrated HCl and water, being careful to add the acid slowly to the water.
3.2Analysis. Reagents as necessary for the selected analytical procedure.
Guidelines for source testing are detailed in the following sections. These guidelines are generally applicable; however, most sample sites differ to some degree and temporary alterations such as stack extensions or expansions often are required to insure the best possible sample site. Further, since Be is hazardous, care should be taken to minimize exposure. Finally, since the total quantity of Be to be collected is quite small, the test must be carefully conducted to prevent contamination or loss of sample.
4.1Selection of a Sampling Site and Number of Sample Runs. Select a suitable sample site that is as close as practicable to the point of atmospheric emission. If possible, stacks smaller than 1 foot in diameter should not be sampled.
4.1.1Ideal Sampling Site. The ideal sampling site is at least eight stack or duct diameters downstream and two diameters upstream from any flow disturbance such as a bend, expansion or contraction. For rectangular cross sections, use Equation 103-1 to determine an equivalent diameter, D
4.1.2Alternate Sampling Site. Some sampling situations may render the above sampling site criteria impractical. In such cases, select an alternate site no less than two diameters downstream and one-half diameter upstream from any point of flow disturbance. Additional sample runs are recommended at any sample site not meeting the criteria of section 4.1.1.
4.1.3Number of Sample Runs Per Test. Three sample runs constitute a test. Conduct each run at one of three different points. Select three points that proportionately divide the diameter, or are located at 25, 50, and 75 percent of the diameter from the inside wall. For horizontal ducts, sample on a vertical line through the centroid. For rectangular ducts, sample on a line through the centroid and parallel to a side. If additional sample runs are performed per section 4.1.2, proportionately divide the duct to accommodate the total number of runs.
4.2Measurement of Stack Conditions. Using the equipment described in section 2.2, measure the stack gas pressure, moisture, and temperature to determine the molecular weight of the stack gas. Sound engineering estimates may be made in lieu of direct measurements. Describe the basis for such estimates in the test report.
4.3Preparation of Sampling Train. Assemble the sampling train as shown in Figure 103-1. It is recommended that all glassware be precleaned by soaking in wash acid for 2 hours.
Leak check the sampling train at the sampling site. The leakage rate should not be in excess of 1 percent of the desired sample rate.
4.4Beryllium Train Operation. For each run, measure the velocity at the selected sampling point. Determine the isokinetic sampling rate. Record the velocity head and the required sampling rate. Place the nozzle at the sampling point with the tip pointing directly into the gas stream. Immediately start the pump and adjust the flow to isokinetic conditions. At the conclusion of the test, record the sampling rate. Again measure the velocity head at the sampling point. The required isokinetic rate at the end of the period should not have deviated more than 20 percent from that originally calculated. Describe the reason for any deviation beyond 20 percent in the test report.
Sample at a minimum rate of 14 1pm (0.5 cfm). Obtain samples over such a period or periods of time as are necessary to determine the maximum emissions which would occur in a 24-hour period. In the case of cyclic operations, perform sufficient sample runs so as to allow determination or calculation of the emissions that occur over the duration of the cycle. A minimum sampling time of 2 hours per run is recommended.
4.5Sample Recovery. It is recommended that all glassware be precleaned as in section 4.3. Sample recovery should also be performed in an area free of possible Be contamination. When the sampling train is moved, exercise care to prevent breakage and contamination. Set aside a portion of the acetone used in the sample recovery as a blank for analysis. The total amount of acetone used should be measured for accurate blank correction. Blanks can be eliminated if prior analysis shows negligible amounts.
Remove the filter (and backup filter, if used) and any loose particulate matter from filter holder, and place in a container.
Clean the probe with acetone and a brush or long rod and cotton balls. Wash into the container with the filter. Wash out the filter holder with acetone, and add to the same container.
4.6Analysis. Make the necessary preparation of samples and analyze for Be. Any currently acceptable method such as atomic absorption, spectrographic, fluorometric, chroma-to-graph-ic, or equivalent may be used.
5.1Sampling Train. As a procedural check, compare the sampling rate regulation with a dry gas meter, spirometer, rotameter (calibrated for prevailing atmospheric conditions), or equivalent, attached to the nozzle inlet of the complete sampling train.
5.2Analysis. Perform the analysis standardization as suggested by the manufacturer of the instrument, or the procedures for the analytical method in use.
Calculate the Be emission rate R in g/day for each stack using Equation 103-2. For cyclic operations, use only the time per day each stack is in operation. The total Be emission rate from a source is the summation of results from all stacks.
Prepare a test report that includes as a minimum: A detailed description of the sampling train used, results of the procedural check described in Section 5.1 with all data and calculations made, all pertinent data taken during the test, the basis for any estimates made, isokinetic sampling calculations, and emission results. Include a description of the test site, with a block diagram and brief description of the process, location of the sample points in the stack cross section, and stack dimensions and distances from any point of disturbance.
1.1Applicability. This method is applicable for the determination of beryllium (Be) emissions in ducts or stacks at stationary sources. Unless otherwise specified, this method is not intended to apply to gas streams other than those emitted directly to the atmosphere without further processing.
1.2Principle. Be emissions are isokinetically sampled from the source, and the collected sample is digested in an acid solution and analyzed by atomic absorption spectrophotometry.
2.
2.1Sampling Train. The sampling train is identical to the Method 5 train as shown in Figure 5-1 (mention of Method 5 refers to 40 CFR part 60). The sampling train consists of the following components:
2.1.1Probe Nozzle, Pitot Tube, Differential Pressure Gauge, Metering System, Barometer, and Gas Density Determination Equipment. Same as Method 5, Sections 2.1.1, 2.1.3, 2.1.4, 2.1.8, 2.1.9, and 2.1.10, respectively.
2.1.2Probe Liner. Borosilicate or quartz glass tubing. The tester may use a heating system capable of maintaining a gas temperature of 120
2.1.3Filter Holder. Borosilicate glass, with a glass frit filter support and a silicone rubber gasket. Other materials of construction (e.g., stainless steel, Teflon, Viton) may be used, subject to the approval of the Administrator. (
2.1.4Impingers. Four Greenburg-Smith impingers connnected in series with leak-free ground glass fittings or any similar leak-free noncontaminating fittings. For the first, third, and fourth impingers, the tester may use impingers that are modified by replacing the tip with a 13-mm-ID (0.5-in.) glass tube extending to 13 mm (0.5 in.) from the bottom of the flask.
2.2Sample Recovery. The following items are needed:
2.2.1Probe Cleaning Rod. At least as long as probe.
2.2.2Glass Sample Bottles. Leakless, with Teflon-lined caps, 500-ml.
2.2.3Graduated Cylinder. 250-ml.
2.2.4Funnel and Rubber Policeman. To aid in transfer of silica gel to container; not necessary if silica gel is weighed in the field.
2.2.5Funnel. Glass, to aid in sample recovery.
2.2.6Plastic Jar. Approximately 300-ml.
2.3Analysis. The following equipment is needed:
2.3.1Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometer. Perkin-Elmer 303, or equivalent, with nitrous oxide/acetylene burner.
2.3.2Hot Plate.
2.3.3Perchloric Acid Fume Hood.
Use ACS reagent-grade chemicals or equivalent, unless otherwise specified.
3.1Sampling and Recovery. The reagents used in sampling and recovery are as follows:
3.1.1Filter. Millipore AA, or equivalent. It is suggested that a Whatman 41 filter or equivalent be placed immediately against the back side of the Millipore filter as a guard against breaking the Millipore filter. To be equivalent, other filters shall exhibit at least 99.95 percent efficiency (0.05 percent penetration) on 0.3 micron dioctyl phthalate smoke particles. The filter efficiency tests shall be conducted in accordance with ASTM Standard Method D 2986-71 (reapproved 1978) (incorporated by reference—see § 61.18). Test data from the supplier's quality control program are sufficient for this purpose.
3.1.2Water. Deionized distilled, meeting ASTM Specifications for Type 3 Reagent Water—ASTM Test Method D 1193-77 (incorporated by reference—see § 61.18). If high concentrations of organic matter are not expected to be present, the analyst may eliminate the KMnO
3.1.3Silica Gel. Indicating type, 6- to 16-mesh. If previously used, dry at 175° C (350° F) for 2 hours. The tester may use new silica gel as received.
3.1.4Acetone.
3.1.5Wash Acid, 50 Percent (V/V) Hydrochloric Acid (HCl).
Mix equal volumes of concentrated HCl and water, being careful to add the acid slowly to the water.
3.2Sample Preparation and Analysis. The reagents needed are listed below:
3.2.1Water. Same as Section 3.1.2.
3.2.2.Perchloric Acid (HClO
3.2.3Nitric Acid (HNO
3.2.4Beryllium Powder. Minimum purity 98 percent.
3.2.5Sulfuric Acid (H
3.2.6Hydrochloric Acid Solution, 25 Percent HCl (V/V).
3.2.7Standard Beryllium Solution, 1
4.1Sampling. Because of the complexity of this method testers should be trained and experienced with the test procedures to assure reliable results. As Be is hazardous, testers should take precautions to minimize exposure. The amount of Be that is collected is generally small, therefore, it is necessary to exercise particular care to prevent contamination or loss of sample.
4.1.1Pretest Preparation. Follow the general procedure given in Method 5 ,section 4.1.1. Omit the directions for filters, except check them visually against light for irregularities and flaws such as pinholes.
4.1.2Preliminary Determinations. Follow the general procedure given in Method 5, section 4.1.2, except as follows: Select a nozzle size based on the range of velocity heads to assure that it is not necessary to change the nozzle size in order to maintain isokinetic sampling rates below 28 liters/min (1.0 cfm).
Obtain samples over a period or periods of time that accurately determine the maximum emissions that occur in a 24-hour period. In the case of cyclic operations, perform sufficient sample runs for the accurate determination of the emissions that occur over the duration of the cycle. A minimum sample time of 2 hours per run is recommended.
4.1.3Prior to assembly, clean all glassware (probe, impingers, and connectors) by first soaking in wash acid for 2 hours, followed by rinsing with water. Place 100 ml of water in each of the first two impingers, and leave the third impinger empty. Save a portion of the water for a blank analysis. Place approximately 200 g of preweighed silica gel in the fourth impinger. The tester may use more silica gel, but should be careful to ensure that it is not entrained and carried out from the impinger during sampling. Place the silica gel container in a clean place for later use in the sample recovery. As an alternative, determine and record the weight of the silica gel plus impinger to the nearest 0.5 g.
Install the selected nozzle using a Viton A O-ring when stack temperatures are less the 260
If condensation in the probe or filter is a problem, probe and filter heaters will be required. Adjust the heaters to provide a temperature at or above the stack temperature. However, membrane filters such as the Millipore AA are limited to about 225
After the sampling train has been assembled, turn on and set the probe, if applicable, at the desired operating temperature. Allow time for the temperatures to stabilize. Place crushed ice around the impingers.
4.1.4.Leak-Check Procedures. Follow the leak-check procedures outlined in Method 5, Sections 4.1.4.1 (Pretest Leak Check), 4.1.4.2 (Leak Checks During Sample Run), and 4.1.4.3 (Post-Test Leak Check).
4.1.5Beryllium Train Operation. Follow the general procedure given in Method 5, Section 4.1.5. For each run, record the data required on a data sheet such as the one shown in Figure 5-2 of Method 5.
4.1.6Calculation of Percent Isokinetic. Same as Method 5, Section 4.1.6.
4.2Sample Recovery. Begin proper cleanup procedure as soon as the probe is removed from the stack at the end of the sampling period.
Allow the probe to cool. When it can be safely handled, wipe off any external particulate matter near the tip of the probe nozzle, and place a cap over it. Do not cap off the probe tip tightly while the sampling train is cooling. Capping would create a vacuum and draw liquid out from the impingers.
Before moving the sampling train to the cleanup site, remove the probe from the train, wipe off the silicone grease, and cap the open outlet of the probe. Be careful not to lose any condensate that might be present. Wipe off the silicone grease from the impinger. Use either ground-glass stoppers, plastic caps, or serum caps to close these openings.
Transfer the probe and impinger assembly to a cleanup area that is clean, protected from the wind, and free of Be contamination.
Inspect the train before and during this assembly, and note any abnormal conditions. Treat the sample as follows:
Disconnect the probe from the impinger train. Remove the filter and any loose particulate matter from the filter holder, and place in a sample bottle. Place the contents (measured to
4.3Analysis.
4.3.1Apparatus Preparation. Before use, clean all glassware according to the procedure of section 4.1.3. Adjust the instrument settings according to the instrument manual, using an absorption wavelength of 234.8 nm.
4.3.2Sample Preparation. The digestion of Be samples is accomplished in part in concentrated HClO
4.3.2.1Filter Preparation. Transfer the filter and any loose particulate matter from the sample container to a 150-ml beaker. Add 35 ml concentrated HNO
4.3.2.2Water Preparation. Place a portion of the water and acetone sample into a 150-ml beaker, and put on a hotplate. Add portions of the remainder as evaporation proceeds and evaporate to dryness. Cool the residue, and add 35 ml concentrated HNO
4.3.2.3Silica Gel Preparation Analyses. Weigh the spent silica gel, and report to the nearest gram.
4.3.2.4Final Sample Preparation. Samples from 4.3.2.1 and 4.3.2.2 may be combined here for ease of analysis. Replace on a hotplate, and evaporate to dryness in a HClO
4.3.3Beryllium Determination. Analyze the samples prepared in 4.3.2 at 234.8 nm using a nitrous oxide/acetylene flame. Aluminum, silicon and other elements can interfere with this method if present in large quantities. Standard methods are available, however, that may be used to effectively eliminate these interferences (see Citation 2 in Section 8).
5.1Sampling Train. Calibrate the sampling train components according to the procedures outlined in the following sections of Method 5: Section 5.1 (Probe Nozzle), section 5.2 (Pitot Tube), section 5.3 (Metering System), section 5.4 (Probe Heater), section 5.5 (Temperature Gauges), section 5.7 (Barometer). Note that the leak check described in section 5.6 of Method 5 applies to this method.
6.1Dry Gas Volume. Using the data from each sample run, calculate the dry gas sample volume at standard conditions V
6.2Volume of Water Vapor in Sample and Moisture Content of Stack Gas. Using the data obtained from each sample run, calculate the volume of water vapor V
6.3 Stack Gas Velocity. Using the data from each sample run and Equation 2-9 of Method 2, calculate the average stack gas velocity v
6.4Beryllium Emission Rate. Calculate the Be emission rate R in g/day for each stack using Equation 104-1. For cyclic operations, use only the time per day each stack is in operation. The total Be emission rate from a source will be the summation of results from all stacks.
6.5Isokinetic Variation and Acceptable Results. Same as Method 5, Sections 6.11 and 6.12, respectively.
Each performance test consists of three sample runs of the applicable test method. For the purpose of determining compliance with an applicable national emission standard, use the average of the results of all sample runs.
In addition to Citations 1-3 and 5-15 of Section 10 of Method 101, the following citations may be helpful:
1. Amos, M.D., and J. B. Willis. Use of High-Temperature Pre-Mixed Flames in Atomic Absorption Spectroscopy. Spec-tro-chim. Acta.
2. Fleet, B., K. V. Liberty, and T. S. West. A Study of Some Matrix Effects in the Determination of Beryllium by Atomic Absorption Spectroscopy in the Nitrous Oxide-Acetylene Flame. Talanta
1.1Applicability. This method applies to the determination of total organic and inorganic mercury (Hg) content in sewage sludges. The range of this method is 0.2 to 5 μg/g; it may be extended by increasing or decreasing sample size.
1.2Principle. Time-composite sludge samples are withdrawn from the conveyor belt after dewatering and before incineration or drying. A weighed portion of the sludge is digested in aqua regia and oxidized by potassium permanganate (KMnO
2.1Sampling.
2.1.1Container. Plastic, 50-liter.
2.1.2Scoop. To remove 950-ml (1-qt.) sludge sample.
2.2Sludge Sample Preparation.
2.2.1Mixer. Mortar mixer, wheelbarrow-type, 57-liter (or equivalent) with electricity driven motor.
2.2.2Blender. Waring-type, 2-liter. (Note: Mention of specific trade names does not constitute endorsement by the Environmental Protection Agency.)
2.2.3Scoop. To remove 100-ml and 20-ml samples of blended sludge.
2.3Analysis. Same as Method 101, Sections 5.3 and 5.4, except for the following:
2.3.1Balance. The balance of Method 101, Section 5.3.17, is not needed.
2.3.2Filter Paper. S and S No. 588 (or equivalent).
3.1Water. Same as Method 101A, Section 6.1.1.
3.2Aqua Regia. Prepare immediately before use. Carefully add one volume of concentrated nitric acid (HNO
3.3Antifoam B Silicon Emulsion. J.T. Baker Company (or equivalent).
3.4Mercury (II) Stock Solution, 1 mg Hg/ml. Completely dissolve 135.4 mg of ACS reagent-grade HgCl
3.5Intermediate Mercury Standard Solution, 10 μg Hg/ml. Prepare fresh weekly. Pipet 5.0 ml of the Hg stock solution into a 500-ml volumetric flask, and add 20 ml of the 15-percent HNO
3.6Working Mercury Standard Solution, 200 ng Hg/ml. Prepare fresh daily. Pipet 5.0 ml of the “Intermediate Mercury Standard Solution” into a 250-ml volumetric flask. Add 20 ml of 15-percent HNO
3.7Tin (II) Solution, Sodium Chloride-Hydroxylamine Solution, 15-Percent Nitric Acid, and Potassium Permanganate Solution. Same as Method 101A, Section 6.2.
4.1Sludge Sampling. Withdraw equal-volume increments of sludge [for a total of at least 15 liters (16-qt.)] at intervals of 30 min over an 8-hr period, and place in a rigid plastic container.
4.2Sludge Mixing. Transfer the entire 15-liter sample to a 57-liter capacity (2-ft
4.3Solids Content of Blended Sludge. Dry one of the 20-ml blended samples from Section 4.2 in an oven at 105
4.4Aqua Regia Digestion of Blended Samples. To each of the three remaining 20-ml samples from Section 4.2, add 25 ml of aqua regia, and digest the samples on a hot plate at low heat (do not boil) for 30 min, or until samples are a pale yellow-brown color and are void of the dark brown color characteristic of organic matter. Remove from the hot plate, and allow to cool.
Filter each digested sample separately through an S and S No. 588 filter, or equivalent, and rinse the filter contents with 50 ml of water. Transfer the filtrate and filter washing to a 100-ml volumetric flask, and carefully dilute to volume with water.
4.5Solids Content of Sludge Before Blending. Using a 200-ml beaker, remove two 100-ml portions of mixed sludge from the mortar mixer, and place in separate, tared 400-ml beakers. Reweigh each beaker to determine the exact amount of sludge added. Dry in an oven at 105
4.6Analysis for Mercury. The same as Method 101A, Sections 7.4 and 8, except for the following variation.
4.6.1Spectrophotometer and Recorder Calibration. The mercury response may be measured by either peak height or peak area. Note: The temperature of the solution affects the rate at which elemental Hg is released from solution and, consequently, it affects the shape of the absorption curve (area) and the point of maximum absorbance (peak height). Therefore, to obtain reproducible results, bring all solutions to room temperature before use.
Set the spectrophotometer wavelength to 253.7 nm. Make certain the optical cell is at the minimum temperature that will prevent water condensation from occurring. Then set the recorder scale as follows: Using a 25-ml graduated cylinder, add 25 ml of water to the aeration-cell bottle. Add three drops of Antifoam B to the bottle, and then pipet 5.0 ml of the working Hg standard solution into the aeration cell.
Always add the Hg containing solution to the aeration cell after the 25 ml of water.
Place a Teflon-coated stirring bar in the bottle. Add 5 ml of 15-percent HNO
5.1Nomenclature.
5.2Mercury Content of Digested Sample (Wet Basis). For each sample, correct the average maximum absorbance of the two consecutive samples whose peak heights agree within
Calculate the total Hg content in each gram of digested sample correcting for any dilutions made to bring the sample into the working range of the spectrophotometer and for the weight of the sludge portion digested.
5.3Solids Content of Blended Sludge. Determine the solids content of the 20-ml aliquot dried in the oven at 105
5.4Solids Content of Bulk Sample (before blending but, after mixing in mortar mixer). Determine the solids content of each 100-ml aliquot (Section 4.5), and average the results.
5.5Mercury Content of Bulk Sample (Dry Basis). Average the results from the three samples from each 8-hr composite sample, and calculate the Hg concentration of the composite sample on a dry basis.
1. Bishop, J.N. Mercury in Sediments, Ontario Water Resources Commission. Toronto, Ontario, Canada. 1971.
2. Salma, M. Private Communication. EPA California/Nevada Basin Office. Alameda, California.
3. Hatch, W.R. and W.L. Ott. Determination of Sub-Microgram Quantities of Mercury by Atomic Absorption Spec-tro-pho-to-metry. Analytical Chemistry.
4. Bradenberger, H. and H. Bader. The Determination of Nanogram Levels of Mercury in Solution by a Flameless Atomic Absorption Technique. Atomic Absorption Newsletter.
5. Analytical Quality Control Laboratory (AQCL). Mercury in Sediment (Cold Vapor Technique) (Provisional Method). U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Cincinnati, Ohio. April 1972.
6. Kopp, J.F., M.C. Longbottom, and L.B. Lobring. “Cold Vapor” Method for Determining Mercury. Journal AWWA.
7. Manual of Methods for Chemical Analysis of Water and Wastes. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Cincinnati, Ohio. Publication No. EPA-624/2-74-003. December 1974. p. 118-138.
8. Mitchell, W.J., M.R. Midgett, J. Suggs, R.J. Velton, and D. Albrinck. Sampling and Homogenizing Sewage for Analysis. Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory, Office of Research and Development, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Research Triangle Park, N.C. March 1979. 7 p.
Performance of this method should not be attempted by persons unfamiliar with the operation of a gas chromatograph (GC) nor by those who are unfamiliar with source sampling, because knowledge beyond the scope of this presentation is required. Care must be exercised to prevent exposure of sampling personnel to vinyl chloride, a carcinogen.
1.1Applicability. The method is applicable to the measurement of vinyl chloride in stack gases from ethylene dichloride, vinyl chloride, and polyvinyl chloride manufacturing processes. The method does not measure vinyl chloride contained in particulate matter.
1.2Principle. An integrated bag sample of stack gas containing vinyl chloride (chloroethene) is subjected to GC analysis using a flame ionization detector (FID).
This method is designed for the 0.1 to 50 ppm range. However, common GC instruments are capable of detecting 0.02 ppm vinyl chloride. With proper calibration, the upper limit may be extended as needed.
The chromatographic columns and the corresponding operating parameters herein described normally provide an adequate resolution of vinyl chloride; however, resolution interferences may be encountered on some sources. Therefore, the chromatograph operator shall select the column and operating
4.1Sampling (see Figure 106-1). The sampling train consists of the following components:
4.1.1Probe. Stainless steel, Pyrex glass, or Teflon tubing (as stack temperature permits) equipped with a glass wool plug to remove particulate matter.
4.1.2Sample Lines. Teflon, 6.4-mm outside diameter, of sufficient length to connect probe to bag. Use a new unused piece for each series of bag samples that constitutes an emission test, and discard upon completion of the test.
4.1.3Quick Connects. Stainless steel, male (2) and female (2), with ball checks (one pair without), located as shown in Figure 106-1.
4.1.4Tedlar Bags. 50- to 100-liter capacity, to contain sample. Aluminized Mylar bags may be used if the samples are analyzed within 24 hours of collection.
4.1.5Bag Containers. Rigid leak-proof containers for sample bags, with covering to protect contents from sunlight.
4.1.6Needle Valve. To adjust sample flow rates.
4.1.7Pump. Leak-free, with minimum of 2-liter/min capacity.
4.1.8Charcoal Tube. To prevent admission of vinyl chloride and other organics to the atmosphere in the vicinity of samplers.
4.1.9Flowmeter. For observing sampling flow rate; capable of measuring a flow range from 0.10 to 1.00 liter/min.
4.1.10Connecting Tubing. Teflon, 6.4-mm outside diameter, to assemble sampling train (Figure 106-1).
4.1.11Tubing Fittings and Connectors. Teflon or stainless steel, to assemble sampling train.
4.2Sample Recovery. Teflon tubing, 6.4-mm outside diameter, to connect bag to GC sample loop for sample recovery. Use a new unused piece for each series of bag samples that constitutes an emission test, and discard upon conclusion of analysis of those bags.
4.3Analysis. The following equipment is required:
4.3.1Gas Chromatograph. With FID, potentiometric strip chart recorder and 1.0- to 5.0-ml heated sampling loop in automatic sample valve. The chromatographic system shall be capable of producing a response to 0.1-ppm vinyl chloride that is at least as great as the average noise level. (Response is measured from the average value of the base line to the maximum of the wave form, while standard operating conditions are in use.)
4.3.2Chromatographic Columns. Columns as listed below. The analyst may use other columns provided that the precision and accuracy of the analysis of vinyl chloride standards are not impaired and he has available for review information confirming that there is adequate resolution of the vinyl chloride peak. (Adequate resolution is defined as an area overlap of not more than 10 percent of the vinyl chloride peak by an interferent peak. Calculation of area overlap is explained in Appendix C, Procedure 1: “Determination of Adequate Chromatographic Peak Resolution.”)
4.3.2.1Column A. Stainless steel, 2.0 m by 3.2 mm, containing 80/100-mesh Chromasorb 102.
4.3.2.2Column B. Stainless steel, 2.0 m by 3.2 mm, containing 20 percent GE SF-96 on 60/80-mesh Chromasorb P AW; or stainless steel, 1.0 m by 3.2 mm containing 80/100-mesh Porapak T. Column B is required as a secondary column if acetaldehyde is present. If used, column B is placed after column A. The combined columns should be operated at 120° C.
4.3.3Flowmeters (2). Rotameter type, 100-ml/min capacity, with flow control valves.
4.3.4Gas Regulators. For required gas cylinders.
4.3.5Thermometer. Accurate to 1° C, to measure temperature of heated sample loop at time of sample injection.
4.3.6Barometer. Accurate to 5 mm Hg, to measure atmospheric pressure around GC during sample analysis.
4.3.7Pump. Leak-free, with minimum of 100-ml/min capacity.
4.3.8Recorder. Strip chart type, optionally equipped with either disc or electronic integrator.
4.3.9Planimeter. Optional, in place of disc or electronic integrator on recorder, to measure chromatograph peak areas.
4.4Calibration. Sections 4.4.2 through 4.4.4 are for the optional procedure in Section 7.1.
4.4.1Tubing. Teflon, 6.4-mm outside diameter, separate pieces marked for each calibration concentration.
4.4.2Tedlar Bags. Sixteen-inch-square size, with valve; separate bag marked for each calibration concentration.
4.4.3Syringes. 0.5-ml and 50-μl, gas tight, individually calibrated to dispense gaseous vinyl chloride.
4.4.4Dry Gas Meter, with Temperature and Pressure Gauges. Singer Model DTM-115 with 802 index, or equivalent, to meter nitrogen in preparation of standard gas mixtures, calibrated at the flow rate used to prepare standards.
Use only reagents that are of chromatograph grade.
5.1Analysis. The following are required for analysis.
5.1.1Helium or Nitrogen. Zero grade, for chromatographic carrier gas.
5.1.2Hydrogen. Zero grade.
5.1.3Oxygen or Air. Zero grade, as required by the detector.
5.2Calibration. Use one of the following options: either 5.2.1 and 5.2.2, or 5.2.3.
5.2.1Vinyl Chloride. Pure vinyl chloride gas certified by the manufacturer to contain a minimum of 99.9 percent vinyl chloride, for use in the preparation of standard gas mixtures in Section 7.1. If the gas manufacturer maintains a bulk cylinder supply of 99.9+ percent vinyl chloride, the certification analysis may have been performed on this supply rather than on each gas cylinder prepared from this bulk supply. The date of gas cylinder preparation and the certified analysis must have been affixed to the cylinder before shipment from the gas manufacturer to the buyer.
5.2.2Nitrogen. Zero grade, for preparation of standard gas mixtures as described in Section 7.1.
5.2.3Cylinder Standards (3). Gas mixture standards (50-, 10-, and 5-ppm vinyl chloride in nitrogen cylinders). The tester may use cylinder standards to directly prepare a chromatograph calibration curve as described in Section 7.2.2, if the following conditions are met: (a) The manufacturer certifies the gas composition with an accuracy of
5.2.3.1Cylinder Standards Certification. The manufacturer shall certify the concentration of vinyl chloride in nitrogen in each cylinder by (a) directly analyzing each cylinder and (b) calibrating his analytical procedure on the day of cylinder analysis. To calibrate his analytical procedure, the manufacturer shall use, as a minimum, a three-point calibration curve. It is recommended that the manufacturer maintain (1) a high-concentration calibration standard (between 50 and 100 ppm) to prepare his calibration curve by an appropriate dilution technique and (2) a low-concentration calibration standard (between 5 and 10 ppm) to verify the dilution technique used. If the difference between the apparent concentration read from the calibration curve and the true concentration assigned to the low-concentration calibration standard exceeds 5 percent of the true concentration, the manufacturer shall determine the source of error and correct it, then repeat the three-point calibration.
5.2.3.2Verification of Manufacturer's Calibration Standards. Before using a standard, the manufacturer shall verify each calibration standard (a) by comparing it to gas mixtures prepared (with 99 mole percent vinyl chloride) in accordance with the procedure described in Section 7.1 or (b) calibrating it against vinyl chloride cylinder Standard Reference Materials (SRM's) prepared by the National Bureau of Standards, if such SRM's are available. The agreement between the initially determined concentration value and the verification concentration value must be within
5.2.4Audit Cylinder Standards (2). Gas mixture standards with concentrations known only to the person supervising the analysis of samples. The audit cylinder standards shall be identically prepared as those in Section 5.2.3 (vinyl chloride in nitrogen cylinders). The concentrations of the audit cylinder should be: one low-concentration cylinder in the range of 5 to 20 ppm vinyl chloride and one high-concentration cylinder in the range of 20 to 50 ppm. When available, the tester may obtain audit cylinders by contacting: Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring Systems Laboratory, Quality Assurance Division (MD-77), Research Triangle Park, North Carolina 27711. Audit cylinders obtained from a commercial gas manufacturer may be used provided: (a) the gas manufacturer certifies the audit cylinder as described in Section 5.2.3.1, and (b) the gas manufacturer obtains an independent analysis of the audit cylinders to verify this analysis. Independent analysis is defined here to mean analysis performed by an individual different than the individual who performs the gas manufacturer's analysis, while using calibration standards and analysis equipment different from those used for the gas manufacturer's analysis. Verification is complete and acceptable when the independent analysis concentration is within
6.1Sampling. Assemble the sample train as shown in Figure 106-1. A bag leak check should have been performed previously according to Section 7.3.2. Join the quick connects as illustrated, and determine that all connection between the bag and the probe are tight. Place the end of the probe at the centroid of the stack and start the pump with the needle valve adjusted to yield a flow that will fill over 50 percent of bag volume in the specific sample period. After allowing sufficient time to purge the line several
6.2Sample Storage. Keep the sample bags out of direct sunlight. When at all possible, analysis is to be performed within 24 hours, but in no case in excess of 72 hours of sample collection. Aluminized Mylar bag samples must be analyzed within 24 hours.
6.3Sample Recovery. With a new piece of Teflon tubing identified for that bag, connect a bag inlet valve to the gas chromatograph sample valve. Switch the valve to receive gas from the bag through the sample loop. Arrange the equipment so the sample gas passes from the sample valve to 100-ml/min rotameter with flow control valve followed by a charcoal tube and a 1-in. H
6.4Analysis. Set the column temperature to 100° C and the detector temperature to 150° C. When optimum hydrogen and oxygen flow rates have been determined, verify and maintain these flow rates during all chromatography operations. Using zero helium or nitrogen as the carrier gas, establish a flow rate in the range consistent with the manufacturer's requirements for satisfactory detector operation. A flow rate of approximately 40 ml/min should produce adequate separations. Observe the base line periodically and determine that the noise level has stabilized and that base line drift has ceased. Purge the sample loop for 30 seconds at the rate of 100 ml/min, shut off flow, allow the sample loop pressure to reach atmospheric pressure as indicated by the H
Compare the ratio of H
6.5Determination of Bag Water Vapor Content. Measure the ambient temperature and barometric pressure near the bag. From a water saturation vapor pressure table, determine and record the water vapor content of the bag as a decimal figure. (Assume the relative humidity to be 100 percent unless a lesser value is known.)
7.1Preparation of Vinyl Chloride Standard Gas Mixtures. (Optional Procedure—delete if cylinder standards are used.) Evacuate a 16-inch square Tedlar bag that has passed a leak check (described in Section 7.3.2) and meter in 5.0 liters of nitrogen. While the bag is filling, use the 0.5-ml syringe to inject 250
7.2Calibration.
7.2.1Determination of Vinyl Chloride Retention Time. (This section can be performed simultaneously with Section 7.2.2.) Establish chromatograph conditions identical with those in Section 6.4 above. Determine proper attenuator position. Flush the sampling loop with zero helium or nitrogen and activate the sample valve. Record the injection time, sample loop temperature, column temperature, carrier gas flow rate, chart speed, and attenuator setting. Record peaks and detector responses that occur in the absence of vinyl chloride. Maintain conditions with the equipment plumbing arranged identically to Section 6.3, and flush the sample loop for 30 seconds at the rate of 100 ml/min with one of the vinyl chloride calibration mixtures. Then activate the sample valve. Record the
7.2.2Preparation of Chromatograph Calibration Curve. Make a GC measurement of each gas mixture standard (described in Section 5.2.3 or 7.1) using conditions identical with those listed in Sections 6.3 and 6.4. Flush the sampling loop for 30 seconds at the rate of 100 ml/min with one of the standard mixtures, and activate the sample valve. Record the concentration of vinyl chloride injected (C
7.3Quality Assurance.
7.3.1Analysis Audit. Immediately after the preparation of the calibration curve and prior to the sample analyses, perform the analysis audit described in Appendix C, Procedure 2: “Procedure for Field Auditing GC Analysis.”
7.3.2Bag Leak Checks. Checking of bags for leaks is required after bag use and strongly recommended before bag use. After each use, connect a water manometer and pressurize the bag to 5 to 10 cm H
8.1Sample Peak Area. Determine the sample peak area, A
8.2Vinyl Chloride Concentrations. From the calibration curves described in Section 7.2.2, determine the average concentration value of vinyl chloride, C
1. Brown D.W., E.W. Loy, and M.H. Stephenson, Vinyl Chloride Monitoring Near the B. F. Goodrich Chemical Company in Louisville, KY. Region IV, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Surveillance and Analysis Division, Athens, GA. June 24, 1974.
2. G.D. Clayton and Associates. Evaluation of a Collection and Analytical Procedure for Vinyl Chloride in Air. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, N.C. EPA Contract No. 68-02-1408, Task Order No. 2, EPA Report No. 75-VCL-1. December 13, 1974.
3. Midwest Research Institute. Standardization of Stationary Source Emission Method for Vinyl Chloride. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, N.C. Publication No. EPA-600/4-77-026. May 1977.
4. Scheil, G. and M.C. Sharp. Collaborative Testing of EPA Method 106 (Vinyl Chloride) that Will Provide for a Standardized Stationary Source Emission Measurement Method. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, N.C. Publication No. EPA 600/4-78-058. October 1978.
Performance of this method should not be attempted by persons unfamiliar with the operation of a gas chromatograph (GC), nor by those who are unfamiliar with source sampling, because knowledge beyond the scope of this presentation is required. Care must be exercised to prevent exposure of sampling personnel to vinyl chloride, a carcinogen.
1.1 Applicability. This method applies to the measurement of the vinyl chloride monomer (VCM) content of inprocess wastewater samples, and the residual vinyl chloride monomer (RVCM) content of polyvinyl chloride (PVC) resins, wet cake, slurry, and latex samples. It cannot be used for polymer in fused forms, such as sheet or cubes. This method is not acceptable where methods from Section 304(h) of the Clean Water Act, 33 U.S.C. 1251 et seq. (the Federal Water Pollution Control Amendments of 1972 as amended by the Clean Water Act of 1977) are required.
1.2 Principle. The basis for this method relates to the vapor equilibrium that is established at a constant known temperature in a closed system between RVCM, PVC resin, water, and air. The RVCM in a PVC resin will equilibrate rapidly in a closed vessel, provided that the temperature of the PVC resin is maintained above the glass transition temperature of that specific resin.
The lower limit of detection of vinyl chloride will vary according to the sampling and chromatographic system. The system should be capable of producing a measurement for a 50-ppm vinyl chloride standard that is at least 10 times the standard deviation of the system background noise level.
The chromatograph columns and the corresponding operating parameters herein described normally provide an adequate resolution of vinyl chloride; however, resolution interferences may be encountered on some sources. Therefore, the chromatograph operator shall select the column and operating parameters best suited to his particular analysis requirements, subject to the approval of the Administrator. Approval is automatic provided that the tester produces confirming data through an adequate supplemental analytical technique, such as analysis with a different column or GC/mass spectroscopy, and has the data available for review by the Administrator.
An interlaboratory comparison between seven laboratories of three resin samples, each split into three parts, yielded a standard deviation of 2.63 percent for a sample with a mean of 2.09 ppm, 4.16 percent for a sample with a mean of 1.66 ppm, and 5.29 percent for a sample with a mean of 62.66 ppm.
Do not release vinyl chloride to the laboratory atmosphere during preparation of standards. Venting or purging with VCM/air mixtures must be held to a minimum. When they are required, the vapor must be routed to outside air. Vinyl chloride, even at low ppm levels, must never be vented inside the laboratory. After vials have been analyzed, the gas must be vented prior to removal of the vial from the instrument turntable. Vials must be vented through a hypodermic needle connected to an activated charcoal tube to prevent release of vinyl chloride into the laboratory atmosphere. The charcoal must be replaced prior to vinyl chloride breakthrough.
6.1Sampling. The following equipment is required:
6.1.1Glass bottles. 60-ml (2-oz) capacity, with wax-lined screw-on tops, for PVC samples.
6.1.2Glass Vials. Headspace vials, with Teflon-faced butyl rubber sealing discs, for water samples.
6.1.3Adhesive Tape. To prevent loosening of bottle tops.
6.2Sample Recovery. The following equipment is required:
6.2.1Glass Vials. Headspace vials, with butyl rubber septa and aluminum caps. Silicone rubber is not acceptable.
6.2.2Analytical Balance. Capable of determining sample weight within an accuracy of
6.2.3Vial Sealer. To seal headspace vials.
6.2.4Syringe. 100-
6.3Analysis. The following equipment is required:
6.3.1Headspace Sampler and Chromatograph. Capable of sampling and analyzing a constant amount of headspace gas from a sealed vial, while maintaining that vial at a temperature of 90°C
6.3.2Chroma-to-graph-ic Columns. Stainless steel 1 m by 3.2 mm and 2 m by 3.2 mm, both containing 50/80-mesh Porapak Q. The analyst may use other columns provided that the precision and accuracy of the analysis of vinyl chloride standards are not impaired
6.3.3Thermometer. 0 to 100°C, accurate to
6.3.4Integrator-Recorder. To record chromatograms.
6.3.5 Barometer. Accurate to
6.3.6Regulators. For required gas cylinders.
6.3.7Headspace Vial Pre-Pressurizer. Nitrogen pressurized hypodermic needle inside protective shield. (Blueprint available from Test Support Section, Emission Measurement Branch, Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards, Environmental Protection Agency, Mail Drop 19, Research Triangle Park, N.C. 27711.)
Use only reagents that are of chromatographic grade.
7.1Analysis. The following items are required for analysis:
7.1.1Hydrogen. Zero grade.
7.1.2Nitrogen or Helium. Zero grade.
7.1.3Air. Zero grade.
7.1.4Water. Interference free.
7.2Calibration. The following items are required for calibration:
7.2.1Cylinder Standards (4). Gas mixture standards (50-, 500-, 2000- and 4000-ppm vinyl chloride in nitrogen cylinders). The tester may use cylinder standards to directly prepare a chromatograph calibration curve as described in Section 9.2, if the following conditions are met: (a) The manufacturer certifies the gas composition with an accuracy of
7.2.1.1Cylinder Standards Certification. The manufacturer shall certify the concentration of vinyl chloride in nitrogen in each cylinder by (a) directly analyzing each cylinder and (b) calibrating his analytical procedure on the day of cylinder analysis. To calibrate his analytical procedure, the manufacturer shall use, as a minimum, a 3-point calibration curve. It is recommended that the manufacturer maintain (1) a high-concentration calibration standard (between 4000 and 8000 ppm) to prepare his calibration curve by an appropriate dilution technique and (2) a low-concentration calibration standard (between 50 and 500 ppm) to verify the dilution technique used. If the difference between the apparent concentration read from the calibration curve and the true concentration assigned to the low-concentration calibration standard exceeds 5 percent of the true concentration, the manufacturer shall determine the source of error and correct it, then repeat the 3-point calibration.
7.2.1.2Verification of Manufacturer's Calibration Standards. Before using, the manufacturer shall verify each calibration standard by (a) comparing it to gas mixtures prepared (with 99 mole percent vinyl chloride) in accordance with the procedure described in Section 7.1 of Method 106 or by (b) calibrating it against vinyl chloride cylinder Standard Reference Materials (SRM's) prepared by the National Bureau of Standards, if such SRM's are available. The agreement between the initially determined concentration value and the verification concentration value must be within 5 percent. The manufacturer must reverify all calibration standards on a time interval consistent with the shelf life of the cylinder standards sold.
8.1Sampling.
8.1.1PVC Sampling. Allow the resin or slurry to flow from a tap on the tank or silo until the tap line has been well purged. Extend and fill a 60-ml sample bottle under the tap, and immediately tighten a cap on the bottle. Wrap adhesive tape around the cap and bottle to prevent the cap from loosening. Place an identifying label on each bottle, and record the date, time, and sample location both on the bottles and in a log book. All samples should be kept refrigerated.
8.1.2Water Sampling. At the sampling location fill the vials bubble-free to overflowing so that a convex meniscus forms at the top. The excess water is displaced as the sealing disc is carefully placed, with the Teflon side down, on the opening of the vial.
Place the aluminum seal over the disc and the neck of the vial, and crimp into place. Affix an identifying label on the bottle, and record the date, time, and sample location both on the vials and in a log book. All samples must be kept refrigerated until analyzed.
8.2Sample Recovery. Samples must be run within 24 hours.
8.2.1Resin Samples. The weight of the resin used must be between 0.1 and 4.5 grams. An exact weight must be obtained (
Prepressurization is not required if the sample weight, as analyzed, does not exceed 0.2 gram. It is also not required if solution of the prepressurization equation yields an absolute prepressurization value that is within 30 percent of the atmospheric pressure.
Some aluminum vial caps have a center section that must be removed prior to placing into sample tray. If the cap is not removed, the injection needle will be damaged.
8.2.2Suspension Resin Slurry and Wet Cake Samples. Decant the water from a wet cake sample, and turn the sample bottle upside down onto a paper towel. Wait for the water to drain, place approximately 0.2 to 4.0 grams of the wet cake sample in a tared vial (tared, including septum and aluminum cap) and seal immediately. Then determine the sample weight (
8.2.3Dispersion Resin Slurry and Geon Latex Samples. The materials should not be filtered. Sample must be thoroughly mixed. Using a tared vial (tared, including septum and aluminum cap) add approximately eight drops (0.25 to 0.35 g) of slurry or latex using a medicine dropper. This should be done immediately after mixing. Seal the vial as soon as possible. Determine sample weight (
8.2.4Inprocess Wastewater Samples. Using a tared vial (tared, including septum and aluminum cap) quickly add approximately 1 cc of water using a medicine dropper. Seal the vial as soon as possible. Determine sample weight (
8.3Analysis.
8.3.1Preparation of Equipment. Install the chromatographic column and condition overnight at 160° C. In the first operation, Porapak columns must be purged for 1 hour at 230° C.
Do not connect the exit end of the column to the detector while conditioning. Hydrogen and air to the detector must be turned off while the column is disconnected.
8.3.1.1Flow Rate Adjustments. Adjust flow rates as follows:
a. Nitrogen Carrier Gas. Set regulator on cylinder to read 50 psig. Set regulator on chromatograph to produce a flow rate of 30.0 cc/min. Accurately measure the flow rate at the exit end of the column using the soap film flowmeter and a stopwatch, with the oven and column at the analysis temperature. After the instrument program advances to the “B” (backflush) mode, adjust the nitrogen pressure regulator to exactly balance the nitrogen flow rate at the detector as was obtained in the “A” mode.
b. Vial Prepressurizer Nitrogen. After the nitrogen carrier is set, solve the following equation and adjust the pressure on the vial prepressurizer accordingly.
Because of gauge errors, the apparatus may over-pressurize the vial. If the vial pressure is at or higher than the dosing pressure, an audible double injection will occur. If the vial pressure is too low, errors will occur on resin samples because of inadequate time for head-space gas equilibrium. This condition can be avoided by running several standard gas samples at various pressures around the calculated pressure, and then selecting the highest pressure that does not produce a double injection. All samples and standards must be pressurized for 60 seconds using the vial prepressurizer. The vial is then placed into the 90° C conditioning bath and tested for leakage by placing a drop of water on the septum at the needle hole. A clean, burr-free needle is mandatory.
c. Burner Air Supply. Set regulator on cylinder to read 50 psig. Set regulator on chromatograph to supply air to burner at a rate between 250 and 300 cc/min. Check with bubble flowmeter.
d. Hydrogen Supply. Set regulator on cylinder to read 30 psig. Set regulator on chromatograph to supply approximately 35
8.3.1.2Temperature Adjustments. Set temperatures as follows:
a. Oven (chromatograph column), 140° C.
b. Dosing Line, 150° C.
c. Injection Block, 170° C.
d. Sample Chamber, Water Temperature, 90° C
8.3.1.3Ignition of Flame Ionization Detector. Ignite the detector according to the manufacturer's instructions.
8.3.1.4Amplifier Balance. Balance the amplifier according to the manufacturer's instructions.
8.3.2Programming the Chromatograph. Program the chromatograph as follows:
a. I—Dosing or Injection Time. The normal setting is 2 seconds.
b. A—“Analysis Time.” The normal setting is approximately 70 percent of the VCM retention time. When this timer terminates, the programmer initiates backflushing of the first column.
c. B—Backflushing Time. The normal setting is double the “analysis time.”
d. W—Stabilization Time. The normal setting is 0.5 min to 1.0 min.
e. X—Number of Analyses Per Sample. The normal setting is one.
8.3.3Preparation of Sample Turntable. Before placing any sample into turntable, be certain that the center section of the aluminum cap has been removed. The numbered sample vials should be placed in the corresponding numbered positions in the turntable. Insert samples in the following order:
Position 1 and 2—Old 2000-ppm standards for conditioning. These are necessary only after the analyzer has not been used for 24 hours or longer.
Position 3—50-ppm standard, freshly prepared.
Position 4—500-ppm standard, freshly prepared.
Position 5—2000-ppm standard, freshly prepared.
Position 6—4000-ppm standard, freshly prepared.
Position 7—Sample No. 7 (This is the first sample of the day, but is given as 7 to be consistent with the turntable and the integrator printout.)
After all samples have been positioned, insert the second set of 50-, 500-, 2000-, and 4000-ppm standards. Samples, including standards, must be conditioned in the bath of 90° C for 1 hour (not to exceed 5 hours).
8.3.4Start Chromatograph Program. When all samples, including standards, have been conditioned at 90° C for 1 hour, start the analysis program according to the manufacturer's instructions. These instructions must be carefully followed when starting and stopping a program to prevent damage to the dosing assembly.
8.3.5Determination of TS. For wet cake, slurry, resin solution, and PVC latex samples, determine TS for each sample by accurately weighing approximately 3 to 4 grams of sample in an aluminum pan before and after placing in a draft oven (105 to 110° C). Samples must be dried to constant weight. After first weighing, return the pan to the oven for a short period of time, and then reweigh to verify complete dryness. The TS are then calculated as the final sample weight divided by initial sample weight.
Calibration is to be performed each 8-hour period the chromatograph is used. Alternatively, calibration with duplicate 50-, 500-, 2,000-, and 4,000-ppm standards (hereafter described as a four-point calibration) may be performed on a monthly basis, provided that a calibration confirmation test consisting of duplicate analyses of an appropriate standard is performed once per plant shift, or once per chromatograph carrousel operation (if the chromatograph operation is less frequent than once per shift). The criterion for acceptance of each calibration confirmation test is that both analyses of 500-ppm standards [2,000-ppm standards if dispersion resin (excluding latex resin) samples are being analyzed] must be within 5 percent of the most recent four-point calibration curve. If this criterion is not met, then a complete four-point calibration must be performed before sample analyses can proceed.
9.1Preparation of Standards. Calibration standards are prepared as follows: Place 100μl or about two equal drops of distilled water in the sample vial, then fill the vial with the VCM/nitrogen standard, rapidly seat the septum, and seal with the aluminum cap. Use a
9.2Preparation of Chromatograph Calibration Curve.
Prepare two vials each of 50-, 500-, 2,000-, and 4,000-ppm standards. Run the calibration samples in exactly the same manner as regular samples. Plot A
10.1Response Factor. If the calibration curve described in Section 9.2 passes through zero, an average response factor, R
To compute R
Sum the individual response factors, and calculate R
10.2Residual Vinyl Chloride Monomer Concentration, (C
Results calculated using these equations represent concentration based on the total sample. To obtain results based on dry PVC content, divide by TS.
1. B.F. Goodrich, Residual Vinyl Chloride Monomer Content of Polyvinyl Chloride Resins, Latex, Wet Cake, Slurry and Water Samples. B.F. Goodrich Chemical Group Standard Test Procedure No. 1005-E. B.F. Goodrich Technical Center, Avon Lake, Ohio. October 8, 1979.
2. Berens, A.R. The Diffusion of Vinyl Chloride in Polyvinyl Chloride. ACS—Division of Polymer Chemistry, Polymer Pre-prints
3. Berens, A.R. The Diffusion of Vinyl Chloride in Polyvinyl Chloride. ACS—Division of Polymer Chemistry, Polymer Pre-prints
4. Berens, A.R., L.B. Crider, C.J. Tomanek, and J.M. Whitney. Analysis for Vinyl Chloride in PVC Powders by Head—Space Gas Chromatography. Journal of Applied Polymer Science.
5. Mansfield, R.A. The Evaluation of Henry's Law Constant (Kp) and Water Enhancement in the Perkin-Elmer Multifract F-40 Gas Chromatograph. B.F. Goodrich. Avon Lake, Ohio. February 10, 1978.
Performance of this method should not be attempted by persons unfamiliar with the operation of a gas chromatograph (GC) or by those who are unfamiliar with source sampling because knowledge beyond the scope of this presentation is required. Care must be
1.1Applicability. This is an alternative method and applies to the measurement of the vinyl chloride content of solvents, resin solvent solutions, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) resin, wet cake slurries, latex, and fabricated resin samples. This method is not acceptable where methods from Section 304(h) of the Clean Water Act, 33 U.S.C. 1251 et seq., (the Federal Water Pollution Control Act Amendments of 1972 as amended by the Clean Water Act of 1977) are required.
1.2Principle. The basis for this method lies in the direct injection of a liquid sample into a chromatograph and the subsequent evaporation of all volatile material into the carrier gas stream of the chromatograph, thus permitting analysis of all volatile material including vinyl chloride.
The lower limit of detection of vinyl chloride in dry PVC resin is 0.2 ppm. For resin solutions, latexes, and wet resin, this limit rises inversely as the nonvolatile (resin) content decreases.
With proper calibration, the upper limit may be extended as needed.
The chromatograph columns and the corresponding operating parameters herein described normally provide an adequate resolution of vinyl chloride. In cases where resolution interferences are encountered, the chromatograph operator shall select the column and operating parameters best suited to his particular analysis problem, subject to the approval of the Administrator. Approval is automatic, provided that the tester produces confirming data through an adequate supplemental analytical technique, such as analysis with a different column or GC/mass spectroscopy, and has the data available for review by the Administrator.
A standard sample of latex containing 181.8 ppm vinyl chloride analyzed 10 times by the alternative method showed a standard deviation of 7.5 percent and a mean error of 0.21 percent.
A sample of vinyl chloride copolymer resin solution was analyzed 10 times by the alternative method and showed a standard deviation of 6.6 percent at a level of 35 ppm.
Do not release vinyl chloride to the laboratory atmosphere during preparation of standards. Venting or purging with vinyl chloride monomer (VCM) air mixtures must be held to minimum. When purging is required, the vapor must be routed to outside air. Vinyl chloride, even at low-ppm levels, must never be vented inside the laboratory.
6.1Sampling. The following equipment is required:
6.1.1Glass Bottles. 16-oz wide mouth wide polyethylene-lined, screw-on tops.
6.1.2Adhesive Tape. To prevent loosening of bottle tops.
6.2Sample Recovery. The following equipment is required:
6.2.1Glass Vials. 20-ml capacity with polycone screw caps.
6.2.2Analytical Balance. Capable of weighing to
6.2.3Syringe. 50-microliter size, with removable needle.
6.2.4Fritted Glass Sparger. Fine porosity.
6.2.5Aluminum Weighing Dishes.
6.2.6Sample Roller or Shaker. To help dissolve sample.
6.3Analysis. The following equipment is required:
6.3.1Gas Chromatograph. Hewlett Packard Model 5720A or equivalent.
6.3.2Chromatograph Column. Stainless steel, 6.1 m by 3.2 mm, packed with 20 percent Tergitol E-35 on Chromosorb W AW 60/80 mesh. The analyst may use other columns provided that the precision and accuracy of the analysis of vinyl chloride standards are not impaired and that he has available for review information confirming that there is adequate resolution of the vinyl chloride peak. (Adequate resolution is defined as an area overlap of not more than 10 percent of the vinyl chloride peak by an interfering peak. Calculation of area overlap is explained in Apendix C, Procedure 1: “Determination of Adequate Chromatographic Peak Resolution.”)
6.3.3Valco Instrument Six-Port Rotary Valve. For column back flush.
6.3.4Septa. For chromatograph injection port.
6.3.5Injection Port Liners. For chromatograph used.
6.3.6Regulators. For required gas cylinders.
6.3.7Soap Film Flowmeter. Hewlett Packard No. 0101-0113 or equivalent.
6.4Calibration. The following equipment is required:
6.4.1Analytical Balance. Capable of weighing to
6.4.2Erlenmeyer Flask With Glass Stopper. 125 ml.
6.4.3Pipets. 0.1, 0.5, 1, 5, 10, and 50 ml.
6.4.4Volumetric Flasks. 10 and 100 ml.
Use only reagents that are of chromatograph grade.
7.1Analysis. The following items are required:
7.1.1Hydrogen Gas. Zero grade.
7.1.2Nitrogen Gas. Zero grade.
7.1.3Air. Zero grade.
7.1.4Tetrahydrofuran (THF). Reagent grade.
Analyze the THF by injecting 10 microliters into the prepared gas chromatograph. Compare the THF chromatogram with that shown in Figure 107A-1. If the chromatogram is comparable to A, the THF should be sparged with pure nitrogen for approximately 2 hours using the fritted glass sparger to attempt to remove the interfering peak. Reanalyze the sparged THF to determine whether the THF is acceptable for use. If the scan is comparable to B, the THF should be acceptable for use in the analysis.
7.1.5N, N-Dimethylacetamide (DMAC). Spectrographic grade. For use in place of THF.
7.2Calibration. The following item is required:
7.2.1Vinyl Chloride 99.9 Percent. Ideal Gas Products lecture bottle, or equivalent. For preparation of standard solutions.
8.1Sampling. Allow the liquid or dried resin to flow from a tap on the tank, silo, or pipeline until the tap has been purged. Fill a wide-mouth pint bottle, and immediately tightly cap the bottle. Place an identifying label on each bottle and record the date, time, sample location, and material.
8.2Sample Treatment. Sample must be run within 24 hours.
8.2.1Resin Samples. Weigh 9.00
8.2.2Suspension Resin Slurry and Wet Resin Sample. Slurry must be filtered using a small Buchner funnel with vacuum to yield a wet resin sample. The filtering process must be continued only as long as a steady stream of water is exiting from the funnel. Excessive filtration time could result in some loss of VCM. The wet resin sample is weighed into a tared 20-ml vial with THF or DMAC as described earlier for resin samples (8.2.1) and treated the same as the resin sample. A sample of the wet resin is used to determine total solids as required for calculating the residual VCM (Section 8.3.4).
8.2.3Latex and Resin Solvent Solutions. Samples must be thoroughly mixed. Weigh 1.00
8.2.4Solvents and Non-viscous Liquid Samples. No preparation of these samples is required. The neat samples are injected directly into the GC.
8.3Analysis.
8.3.1Preparation of GC. Install the chromatographic column, and condition overnight at 70° C. Do not connect the exit end of the column to the detector while conditioning.
8.3.1.1Flow Rate Adjustments. Adjust the flow rate as follows:
a. Nitrogen Carrier Gas. Set regulator on cylinder to read 60 psig. Set column flow controller on the chromatograph using the soap film flowmeter to yield a flow rate of 40 cc/min.
b. Burner Air Supply. Set regulator on the cylinder at 40 psig. Set regulator on the chromatograph to supply air to the burner to yield a flow rate of 250 to 300 cc/min using the flowmeter.
c. Hydrogen. Set regulator on cylinder to read 60 psig. Set regulator on the chromatograph to supply 30 to 40 cc/min using the flowmeter. Optimize hydrogen flow to yield the most sensitive detector response without extinguishing the flame. Check flow with flowmeter and record this flow.
d. Nitrogen Back Flush Gas. Set regulator on the chromatograph using the soap film flowmeter to yield a flow rate of 40 cc/min.
8.3.1.2Temperature Adjustments. Set temperature as follows:
a. Oven (chromatographic column) at 70° C.
b. Injection Port at 100° C.
c. Detector at 300° C.
8.3.1.3Ignition of Flame Ionization Detector. Ignite the detector according to the manufacturer's instructions. Allow system to stabilize approximately 1 hour.
8.3.1.4Recorder. Set pen at zero and start chart drive.
8.3.1.5Attenuation. Set attenuation to yield desired peak height depending on sample VCM content.
8.3.2Chromatographic Analyses.
a. Sample Injection. Remove needle from 50-microliter syringe. Open sample vial and draw 50-microliters of THF or DMAC sample recovery solution into the syringe. Recap sample vial. Attach needle to the syringe and while holding the syringe vertically (needle uppermost), eject 40 microliters into an absorbent tissue. Wipe needle with tissue. Now inject 10 microliters into chromatograph system. Repeat the injection until two consecutive values for the height of the vinyl chloride peak do not vary more than 5 percent. Use the average value for these two peak heights to compute the sample concentration.
b. Back Flush. After 4 minutes has elapsed after sample injection, actuate the back flush valve to purge the first 4 feet of the chromatographic column of solvent and other high boilers.
c. Sample Data. Record on the chromatograph strip chart the data from the sample label.
d. Elution Time. Vinyl chloride elutes at 2.8 minutes. Acetaldehyde elutes at 3.7 minutes. Analysis is considered complete when chart pen becomes stable. After 5 minutes, reset back flush valve and inject next sample.
8.3.3Chromatograph Servicing.
a. Septum. Replace after five sample injections.
b. Sample Port Liner. Replace the sample port liner with a clean spare after five sample injections.
c. Chromatograph Shutdown. If the chromatograph has been shut down overnight, rerun one or more samples from the preceding day to test stability and precision prior to starting on the current day's work.
8.3.4Determination of Total Solids (TS). For wet resin, resin solution, and PVC latex samples, determine the TS for each sample by accurately weighing approximately 3 to 5 grams of sample into a tared aluminum pan. The initial procedure is as follows:
a. Where water is the major volatile component: Tare the weighing dish, and add 3 to 5 grams of sample to the dish. Weigh to the nearest milligram.
b. Where volatile solvent is the major volatile component: Transfer a portion of the sample to a 20-ml screw cap vial and cap immediately. Weigh the vial to the nearest milligram. Uncap the vial and transfer a 3- to 5-gram portion of the sample to a tared aluminum weighing dish. Recap the vial and reweigh to the nearest milligram. The vial weight loss is the sample weight.
To continue, place the weighing pan in a 130° C oven for 1 hour. Remove the dish and allow to cool to room temperature in a desiccator. Weigh the pan to the nearest 0.1 mg. Total solids is the weight of material in the aluminum pan after heating divided by the net weight of sample added to the pan originally times 100.
9.1Preparation of Standards. Prepare a 1 percent by weight (approximate) solution of vinyl chloride in THF or DMAC by bubbling vinyl chloride gas from a cylinder into a tared 125-ml glass-stoppered flask containing THF or DMAC. The weight of vinyl chloride to be added should be calculated prior to this operation, i.e., 1 percent of the weight of THF or DMAC contained in the tared flask. This must be carried out in a laboratory hood. Adjust the vinyl chloride flow from the cylinder so that the vinyl chloride dissolves essentially completely in the THF or DMAC and is not blown to the atmosphere. Take particular care not to volatize any of the solution. Stopper the flask and swirl the solution to effect complete mixing. Weigh the stoppered flask to nearest 0.1 mg to determine the exact amount of vinyl chloride added.
Pipet 10 ml of the approximately 1 percent solution into a 100-ml glass-stoppered volumetric flask, and add THF or DMAC to fill to the mark. Cap the flask and invert 10 to 20 times. This solution contains approximately 1,000 ppm by weight of vinyl chloride (note the exact concentration).
Pipet 50-, 10-, 5-, 1-, 0.5-, and 0.1-ml aliquots of the approximately 1,000 ppm solution into
9.2Preparation of Chromatograph Calibration Curve.
Obtain the GC for each of the six final solutions prepared in Section 9.1 by using the procedure in Section 8.3.2. Prepare a chart plotting peak height obtained from the chromatogram of each solution versus the known concentration. Draw a straight line through the points derived by the least squares method.
10.1Response Factor. From the calibration curve described in Section 9.2, select the value of C
10.2Residual vinyl chloride monomer concentration (C
10.3 Samples containing volatile material, i.e., resin solutions, wet resin, and latexes:
10.4Samples of solvents and in process wastewater:
1. Communication from R. N. Wheeler, Jr.; Union Carbide Corporation. Part 61 National Emissions Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants appendix B, Method 107—Alternate Method, September 19, 1977.
1.1Applicability. This method applies to the determination of inorganic arsenic (As) emissions from stationary sources as specified in the applicable subpart.
1.2Principle. Particulate and gaseous arsenic emissions are withdrawn isokinetically from the source and collected on a glass mat filter and in water. The collected arsenic is then analyzed by means of atomic absorption spectrophotometry.
2.1Sampling Train. A schematic of the sampling train is shown in Figure 108-1; it is similar to the Method 5 train of 40 CFR part 60, appendix A. Note: This and all subsequent references to other methods refer to the methods in 40 CFR part 60, appendix A. The sampling train consists of the following components:
2.1.1Probe Nozzle, Probe Liner, Pitot Tube, Differential Pressure Gauge, Filter Holder, Filter Heating System, Metering System, Barometer, and Gas Density Determination Equipment. Same as Method 5, Sections 2.1.1 to 2.1.6 and 2.1.8 to 2.1.10, respectively.
2.1.2Filter Heating System. Any heating (or cooling) system capable of maintaining a sample gas temperature at the exit end of the filter holder during sampling at 121
2.1.3Impingers. Four impingers connected in series with leak-free ground-glass fittings or any similar leak-free noncontaminating fittings. For the first, third, and fourth impingers, use the Greenburg-Smith design, modified by replacing the tip with a 1.3-cm-ID (0.5 in.) glass tube extending to about 1.3 cm (0.5 in.) from the bottom of the flask. For the second impinger, use the Greenburg-Smith design with the standard tip. The tester may use modifications (e.g., flexible connections between the impingers, materials other than glass, or flexible vacuum lines to connect the filter holder to the condenser), subject to the approval of the Administrator.
Place a thermometer, capable of measuring temperature to within 1°C (2°F), at the outlet of the fourth impinger for monitoring purposes.
2.2Sample Recovery. The following items are needed:
2.2.1Probe-Liner and Probe-Nozzle Brushes, Petri Dishes, Graduated Cylinder or Balance, Plastic Storage Containers, Rubber Policeman, and Funnel. Same as Method 5, Sections 2.2.1 and 2.2.4 to 2.2.8, respectively.
2.2.2Wash Bottles. Polyethylene (2).
2.2.3Sample Storage Containers. Chemically resistant, polyethylene or polypropylene for glassware washes, 500- or 1000-ml.
2.3Analysis. The following equipment is needed:
2.3.1Spectrophotometer. Equipped with an electrodeless discharge lamp and a background corrector to measure absorbance at 193.7 nm. For measuring samples having less than 10
2.3.2Recorder. To match the output of the spectrophotometer.
2.3.3Beakers. 150-ml.
2.3.4Volumetric Flasks. Glass 50-, 100-, 200-, 500-, and 1000-ml; and polypropylene, 50-ml.
2.3.5Balance. To measure within 0.5 g.
2.3.6Volumetric Pipets. 1-, 2-, 3-, 5-, 8-, and 10-ml.
2.3.7Oven.
2.3.8Hot Plate.
Unless otherwise specified, use American Chemical Society reagent grade (or equivalent) chemicals throughout.
3.1Sampling. The reagents used in sampling are as follows:
3.1.1Filters. Same as Method 5 except that the filters need not be unreactive to SO
3.1.2Silica Gel, Crushed Ice, and Stopcock Grease. Same as Method 5, Sections 3.1.2, 3.1.4, and 3.1.5, respectively.
3.1.3Water. Deionized distilled to meet American Society for Testing and Materials Specification D 1133-74, Type 3 (incorporated by reference—see § 60.17). When high concentrations of organic matter are not expected to be present, the analyst may omit the KMnO
3.2Sample Recovery. 0.1 N sodium hydroxide (NaOH) is required. Dissolve 4.00 g of NaOH in about 500 ml of water in a 1-liter volumetric flask. Then, dilute to exactly 1.0 liter with water.
3.3Analysis. The reagents needed for analysis are as follows:
3.3.1Water. Same as 3.1.3.
3.3.2Sodium Hydroxide, 0.1 N. Same as 3.2.
3.3.3Sodium Borohydride (NaBH
3.3.4Hydrochloric Acid (HCl), Concentrated.
3.3.5Potassium Iodide (KI), 30 Percent (W/V). Dissolve 300 g of KI in 500 ml of water in a 1-liter volumetric flask. Then, dilute to exactly 1.0 liter with water.
3.3.6Nitric Acid (HNO
3.3.7Nitric Acid, 0.8 N. Dilute 52 ml of concentrated HNO
3.3.8Nitric Acid, 50 Percent (V/V). Add 50 ml concentrated HNO
3.3.9Stock Arsenic Standard, 1 mg As/ml. Dissolve 1.3203 g of primary standard grade As
3.3.10Arsenic Working Solution, 1.0
3.3.11Air. Suitable quality for atomic absorption analysis.
3.3.12Acetylene. Suitable quality for atomic absorption analysis.
3.3.13Nickel Nitrate, 5 Percent (W/V). Dissolve 24.780 g of nickel nitrate hexahydrate in water in a 100-ml volumetric flask and dilute to 100 ml with water.
3.3.14Nickel Nitrate, 1 Percent (W/V). Pipet 20 ml of 5 percent nickel nitrate solution into a 100-ml volumetric flask and dilute to exactly 100 ml with water.
3.3.15Hydrogen Peroxide, 3 Percent. Pipet 50 ml of 30 percent hydrogen peroxide into a 500 ml volumetric flask and dilute to exactly 500 ml with water.
3.3.16Quality Assurance Audit Samples. Arsenic samples prepared by the Environmental Protection Agency's (EPA) Environmental Systems Laboratory, Quality Assurance Division, Source Branch, Mail Drop 77A, Research Triangle Park, North Carolina 27711. Each set will consist of two vials of unknown concentrations. Only when making compliance determinations, obtain an audit sample set from the Quality Assurance Management Office at each EPA regional office or the responsible enforcement office. (Note: The tester should notify the Quality Assurance Office or the responsible enforcement agency at least 30 days prior to the test date to allow sufficient time for delivery.)
4.1Sampling. Because of the complexity of this method, testers must be trained and experienced with the test procedures in order to obtain reliable results.
4.1.1Pretest Preparation. Follow the general procedure given in Method 5, Section 4.1.1, except the filter need not be weighed.
4.1.2Preliminary Determinations. Follow the general procedure given in Method 5, Section 4.1.2, except select the nozzle size to maintain isokinetic sampling rates below 28 liters/min (1.0 cfm).
4.1.3Preparation of Collection Train. Follow the general procedure given in Method 5, Section 4.1.3.
4.1.4Leak-Check Procedures. Follow the leak-check procedures given in Method 5, Sections 4.1.4.1 (Pretest Leak-Check), 4.1.4.2 (Leak-Checks During Sample Run), and 4.1.4.3 (Post-Test Leak-Check).
4.1.5Arsenic Train Operation. Follow the general procedure given in Method 5, Section 4.1.5, except maintain a temperature of 107
4.1.6Calculation of Percent Isokinetic. Same as Method 5, Section 4.1.6.
4.2Sample Recovery. The same as Method 5, Section 4.2 except that 0.1 N NaOH is used as the cleanup solvent instead of acetone and that the impinger water is treated as follows:
Container Number 4 (Impinger Water). Clean each of the first two impingers and connecting glassware in the following manner:
a. Wipe the impinger ball joints free of silicone grease, and cap the joints.
b. Weigh the impinger and liquid to within
c. Rotate and agitate each impinger, using the impinger contents as a rinse solution.
d. Transfer the liquid to Container Number 4. Remove the outlet ball-joint cap, and drain the contents through this opening. Do not separate the impinger parts (inner and outer tubes) while transferring their contents to the cylinder.
e. (Note: In Steps e and f below, measure and record the total amount of 0.1 N NaOH used for rinsing.) Pour approximately 30 ml of 0.1 NaOH into each of the first two impingers, and agitate the impingers. Drain the 0.1 N NaOH through the outlet arm of each impinger into Container Number 4. Repeat this operation a second time; inspect the impingers for any abnormal conditions.
f. Wipe the ball joints of the glassware connecting the impingers and the back half of the filter holder free of silicone grease, and rinse each piece of glassware twice with 0.1 N NaOH; transfer this rinse into Container Number 4. (DO NOT RINSE or brush the glass-fritted filter support.) Mark the height of the fluid level to determine whether leakage occurs during transport. Label the container to identify clearly its contents.
4.2.1Blanks. Save a portion of the 0.1 N NaOH used for cleanup as a blank. Take 200 ml of this solution directly from the wash bottle being used and place it in a plastic sample container labeled “NaOH blank.” Also save a sample of the water, and place it in a container labeled “H
4.3Arsenic Sample Preparation.
4.3.1Container Number 1 (Filter). Place the filter and loose particulate matter in a 150-ml beaker. Also, add the filtered material from Container Number 2 (see Section 4.3.3). Add 50 ml of 0.1 N NaOH. Then stir and warm on a hot plate at low heat (do not boil) for about 15 minutes. Add 10 ml of concentrated HNO
4.3.2Container Number 4 (Arsenic Impinger Sample).
Note: Prior to analysis, check the liquid level in Containers Number 2 and Number 4; confirm as to whether leakage occurred during transport on the analysis sheet. If a noticeable amount of leakage occurred, either void the sample or take steps, subject to the approval of the Administrator, to adjust the final results.
Transfer the contents of Container Number 4 to a 500-ml volumetric flask, and dilute to exactly 500 ml with water. Pipet 50 ml of the solution into a 150-ml beaker. Add 10 ml of concentrated HNO
4.3.3Container Number 2 (Probe Wash). See note in 4.3.2 above. Filter (using a glass fiber filter) the contents of Container Number 2 into a 200-ml volumetric flask. Combine the filtered material with the contents of Container Number 1 (Filter).
Dilute the filtrate to exactly 200 ml with water. Then pipet 50 ml into a 150-ml beaker. Add 10 ml of concentrated HNO
4.3.4Filter Blank. Determine a filter blank using two filters from each lot of filters used in the sampling. Cut each filter into strips, and treat each filter individually as directed in Section 4.3.1, beginning with the sentence, “Add 50 ml of 0.1 N NaOH.”
4.3.50.1 N NaOH and Water Blanks. Treat separately 50 ml of 0.1 N NaOH and 50 ml water, as directed under Section 4.3.2, beginning with the sentence, “Pipet 50 ml of the solution into a 150-ml beaker.”
4.4Spectrophotometer Preparation. Turn on the power; set the wavelength, slit width, and lamp current; and adjust the background corrector as instructed by the manufacturer's manual for the particular atomic absorption spectrophotometer. Adjust the burner and flame characteristics as necessary.
4.5Analysis.
4.5.1Arsenic Determination. Prepare standard solutions as directed under Section 5.1, and measure their absorbances against 0.8 N HNO
4.5.1.1Arsenic Determination at Low Concentration. The lower limit of flame atomic absorption spectrophotometry is 10
4.5.1.1.1Vapor Generator Procedure. Place a sample containing between 0 and 5
4.5.1.1.2Graphite Furnace Procedure. Dilute the digested sample so that a 5-ml aliquot contains less than 1.5
Because instruments from different manufacturers are different, no detailed operating instructions will be given here. Instead, the analyst should follow the instructions provided with his particular instrument.
4.5.1.2Check for Matrix Effects on the Arsenic Results. Same as Method 12, Section 5.4.2.
4.5.2Container Number 3 (Silica Gel). The tester may conduct this step in the field. Weigh the spent silica gel (or silica gel plus impinger) to the nearest 0.5 g; record this weight.
4.6Audit Analysis. Concurrently, analyze the two unknown audit samples with each set of compliance samples to evaluate the techniques of the analyst and the standards preparation. (Note: It is recommended that known quality control samples be analyzed prior to the compliance and audit sample analysis to optimize the system's accuracy and precision. One source of these samples is the Source Branch listed in Section 3.3.16.) The same analyst, analytical reagents, and analytical system shall be used both for each set or sets of compliance samples and the EPA audit samples; if this condition is met, audit samples need not be included with any additional compliance analyses performed within the succeeding 30-day period for the same enforcement agency. An audit sample set may not be used to validate different sets of compliance samples under the jurisdiction of different enforcement agencies unless prior arrangements are made with both enforcement agencies.
Calculate the concentration in g/m
Maintain a laboratory log of all calibrations.
5.1Standard Solutions. For the high level procedure pipet 1, 3, 5, 8, and 10 ml of the 1.0-mg As/ml stock solution into separate 100-ml volumetic flasks, each containing 5 ml of concentrated HNO
Check these absorbances frequently against 0.8 N HNO
5.2 Sampling Train Calibration. Calibrate the sampling train components according to the indicated Sections of Method 5: Probe Nozzle (Section 5.1), Pitot Tube Assembly (Section 5.2), Metering System (Section 5.3), Probe Heater (Section 5.4), Temperature Gauges (Section 5.5), Leak Check of Metering System (Section 5.6), and Barometer (Section 5.7).
6.1Nomenclature—
6.2Average dry gas meter temperatures (T
6.3Dry Gas Volume. Using data from this test, calculate V
6.4Volume of Water Vapor.
6.5Moisture Content.
6.6Amount of arsenic collected.
6.6.1Calculate the amount of arsenic collected in each part of sampling train, as follows:
6.6.2Calculate the total amount of arsenic collected in the sampling train as follows:
6.7Calculate the arsenic concentration in the stack gas (dry basis, adjusted to standard conditions) as follows:
6.8Pollutant Mass Rate. Calculate the arsenic mass emission rate using the following equation.
The volumetric flow rate, Q
6.9Isokinetic Variation. Using data from this test, calculate I. Use Eq. 5-8 of Method 5.
6.10Acceptable Results. Same as Method 5, Section 6.12.
6.11Relative Error (RE) for QA Audits, Percent.
1. Same as Citations 1 through 9 of Section 7, of Method 5.
2. Perkin Elmer Corporation. Analytical Methods for Atomic Absorption Spec-tro-photo-metry. 303-0152. Norwalk, Connecticut. September 1976. pp. 5-6.
3. Standard Specification for Reagent Water. In: Annual Book of American Society for Testing and Materials Standards. Part 31: Water, Atmospheric Analysis. American Society for Testing and Materials. Philadelphia, PA. 1974. pp. 40-42.
1.1Applicability. This method applies to the determination of inorganic arsenic (As) content of process ore and reverberatory matte samples from nonferrous smelters and other sources as specified in the regulations.
1.2Principle. Arsenic bound in ore samples is liberated by acid digestion and analyzed by atomic absorption spec-tro-pho-to-metry.
2.1Sample Preparation
2.1.1Parr Acid Digestion Bomb. Stainless steel with vapor-tight Teflon cup and cover.
2.1.2Volumetric Pipets. 2- and 5-ml sizes.
2.1.3Volumetric Flask. 50-ml polypropylene with screw caps, (one needed per standard).
2.1.4Funnel. Polyethylene or polypropylene.
2.1.5Oven. Capable of maintaining a temperature of approximately 105
2.1.6Analytical Balance. To measure to within 0.1 mg.
2.2Analysis.
2.2.1Spectrophotometer and Recorder. Equipped with an electrodeless discharge lamp and a background corrector to measure
2.2.2Volumetric Flasks. Class A, 50-ml (one needed per sample and blank).
2.2.3Volumetric Pipets. Class A, 1-, 5-, 10-, and 25-ml sizes.
Unless otherwise specified, use ACS reagent grade (or equivalent) chemicals throughout.
3.1Sample Preparation.
3.1.1Water. Deionized distilled to meet American Society for Testing and Materials Specification D-1193-74, Type 3 (incorporated by reference—See § 60.7). When high concentrations of organic matter are not expected to be present, the analyst may omit the Kl1nO
3.1.2Nitric Acid (HNO
3.1.3Nitric Acid, 0.5 N. In a 1-liter volumetric flask containing water, add 32 ml of concentrated HNO
3.1.4Hydrofluoric Acid (HF), Concentrated. HANDLE WITH CAUTION.
3.1.5Potassium Chloride (KCl) Solution, 10 percent (w/v). Dissolve 10 g KCl in water, add 3 ml concentrated HNO
3.1.6Filter. Teflon filters, 3 micron porosity, 47mm size. (Available from Millipore Co., type FS, Catalog Number FSLW04700.)
3.1.7Sodium Borohydride (NaBH
3.1.8Nickel Nitrate, 5 Percent (W/V). Dissolve 24.780 g of nickel nitrate hexahydrate in water in a 100-ml volumetric flask and dilute to 100 ml with water.
3.1.9Nickel Nitrate, 1 percent (W/V). Pipet 20 ml of 5 percent nickel nitrate solution into a 100-ml volumetric flask and dilute to 100 ml with water.
3.2Analysis.
3.2.1Water. Same as in Section 3.1.1.
3.2.2Sodium Hydroxide (NaOH), 0.1 N. Dissolve 2.00 g of NaOH in water in a 500-ml volumetric flask. Dilute to volume with water.
3.2.3Nitric Acid, 0.5 N. Same as in Section 3.1.3.
3.2.4Potassium Chloride Solution, 10 percent. Same as in Section 3.1.5.
3.2.5Stock Arsenic Standard, 1 mg As/ml. Dissolve 1.320 g of primary grade As
3.2.6Nitrous Oxide. Suitable quality for atomic absorption analysis.
3.2.7Acetylene. Suitable quality for atomic absorption analysis.
3.2.8Quality Assurance Audit Samples. Arsenic samples prepared by the Environmental Protection Agency's (EPA) Environmental Systems Laboratory, Quality Assurance Division, Source Branch, Mail Drop 77A, Research Triangle Park, North Carolina 27711. Each set will consist of two vials of unknown concentrations. Only when making compliance determinations, obtain an audit sample set from the Quality Assurance Management Office at each EPA regional office or the responsible enforcement office. (NOTE: The tester should notify the Quality Assurance Office or the responsible enforcement agency at least 30 days prior to the test date to allow sufficient time for delivery.)
4.1Sample Collection. A sample that is representative of the ore lot to be tested must be taken prior to analysis. The sample must be ground into a finely pulverized state. (A portion of the samples routinely collected for metals analysis may be used provided the sample is representative of the ore being tested.)
4.2Sample Preparation. Weigh 50 to 500 mg of finely pulverized sample to the nearest 0.1 mg. Transfer the sample into the Teflon cup of the digestion bomb, and add 2 ml each of concentrated HNO
4.3Spectrophotometer Preparation. Turn on the power; set the wavelength, slit width, and lamp current; and adjust the background corrector as instructed by the manufacturer's manual for the particular atomic absorption spectrophotometer. Adjust the burner and flame characteristics as necessary.
4.4Preparation of Standard Solutions. Pipet 1, 5, 10, and 25 ml of the stock As solution into separate 100-ml volumetric flasks. Add 10 ml KCl solution and dilute to the mark with 0.5 N HNO
Dilute 10 ml of KCl solution to 100 ml with 0.5 N HNO
Prepare a standard curve of absorbance versus concentration. (Note: For instruments equipped with direct concentration readout devices, preparation of a standard curve will not be necessary.) In all cases follow calibration and operational procedures in the manufacturer's instruction manual. Maintain a laboratory log of all calibrations.
4.4.1Arsenic Determination at Low Concentration. The lower limit of flame atomic absorption spectrophotometry is 10 μg As/ml. If the arsenic concentration of any sample is at a lower level, use the vapor generator or graphite furnace which is available as an accessory component. Follow the manufacturer's instructions in the use of such equipment.
4.4.1.1Vapor Generator Procedure. Place a sample containing between 0 and 5 μg of arsenic in the reaction tube, and dilute to 15 ml with water. Since there is some trial and error involved in this procedure, it may be necessary to screen the samples by conventional atomic absorption until an approximate concentration is determined. After determining the approximate concentration, adjust the volume of the sample accordingly. Pipet 15 ml of concentrated HCl into each tube. Add 1 ml of 30 percent KI solution. Place the reaction tube into a 50° C water bath for 5 minutes. Cool to room temperature. Connect the reaction tube to the vapor generator assembly. When the instrument response has returned to baseline, inject 5.0 ml of 5 percent NaBH
4.4.1.2Graphite Furnace Procedure. Pipet 5 ml of this digested solution into a 10-ml volumetric flask. Add 1 ml of the 1 percent nickel nitrate solution, 0.5 ml of 50 percent HNO
Because instruments from different manufacturers are different, no detailed operating instructions are given here. Instead, the analyst should follow the instructions provided with the particular instrument.
4.5Analysis.
4.5.1Arsenic Determination. Determine the absorbance of each sample using the blank as a reference. If the sample concentration falls outside the range of the calibration curve, make an appropriate dilution with 0.5 N HNO
4.5.2Mandatory Check for Matrix Effects on the Arsenic Results. Same as in Method 12, Section 5.4.2.
4.5.3Audit analysis. With each set or sets of source compliance samples, analyze the two unknown audit samples in the same manner as the source samples to evaluate the techniques of the analyst and the standards preparation. The same analyst, analytical reagents, and analytical system shall be used both for each set or sets of compliance samples and the EPA audit samples; if this condition is met, it is not necessary to analyze additional audit samples for subsequent compliance analyses performed for the same enforcement agency within a 30-day period. An audit sample set may not be used to validate different sets of compliance samples under the jurisdiction of different enforcement agencies unless prior arrangements are made with both enforcement agencies.
Calculate the concentration in g/m
5.1 Calculate the percent arsenic in the ore sample as follows:
1. Same as Citations 1 through 9 of Section 7, of Method 5.
2. Perkin Elmer Corporation. Analytical methods of Atomic Absorption Spec-tro-pho-to-metry. 303-0152. Norwalk, Connecticut. September 1976. pp 5-6.
3. Ringwald, D. (TRW). Arsenic Determination on Process Materials from ASARCO's Copper Smelter in Tacoma, Washington. Unpublished Report. Prepared for Emission Measurement Branch, Emission Standards and Engineering Division, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, North Carolina 27711. August 1980. 35 p.
1.1 Applicability. This method applies to the determination of inorganic arsenic (As) content of process ore and reverberatory matte samples from nonferrous smelters and other sources as specified in the regulations. Samples resulting in an analytical concentration greater than 10 μg As/ml may be analyzed by this method.
1.2 Principle. Arsenic bound in ore samples is liberated by acid digestion and analyzed by flame atomic absorption spec-tro-pho-to-metry.
2.1Sample Preparation.
2.2.1Teflon Beakers. 150-ml.
2.1.2Graduated Pipets. 5-ml disposable.
2.1.3Graduated Cylinder. 50-ml.
2.1.4Volumetric Flask. 100-ml.
2.1.5Analytical Balance. To measure within 0.1 mg.
2.1.6Hot Plate.
2.1.7Perchloric Acid Fume Hood.
2.2Analysis.
2.2.1Spectrophotometer. Equipped with an electrodeless discharge lamp and a background corrector to measure absorbance at 193.7 mm.
2.2.2Beaker and Watch Glass. 400-ml.
2.2.3Volumetric Flask. 1-liter.
2.2.4Volumetric Pipets. 1-, 5-, 10-, and 25-ml.
Unless otherwise specified, use American Chemical Society (ACS) reagent grade (or equivalent) chemicals throughout.
3.1Sample Preparation.
3.1.1Water. Deionized distilled to meet American Society for Testing and Materials Specification D 1193-74, Type 3 (incorporated by reference—see § 61.18).
3.1.2Nitric Acid (HNO
3.1.3Hydrofluoric Acid (HF), Concen-trat-ed. HANDLE WITH CAUTION.
3.1.4Perchloric Acid (HClO
Because of its caustic, hygroscopic, and deflagrating nature, use extreme care in handling HClO
3.1.5Hydrochloric Acid (HCl), Concen-trated. HANDLE WITH CAUTION.
3.2Analysis.
3.2.1Water. Same as in Section 3.1.1.
3.2.2Stock Arsenic Standard, 1.0 mg As/ml. Dissolve 1.3203 g of primary grade As
3.2.3Acetylene. Suitable quality for atomic absorption analysis.
3.2.4Air. Suitable quality for atomic absorption analysis.
3.2.5Quality Assurance Audit Samples. Same as in Method 108A, Section 3.2.8.
4.1Sample Collection. Same as in Method 108A, Section 4.1.
4.2Sample Preparation. Weigh 100 to 1000 mg of finely pulverized sample to the nearest 0.1 mg. Transfer the sample to a 150-ml Teflon beaker. Dissolve the sample by adding 15 ml of HNO
4.3Spectrophotometer Preparation. Same as in Method 108A, Section 4.3.
4.4Preparation of Standard Solutions.
4.4.1Pipet 1, 5, 10, and 25 ml of the stock As solution into separate 100-ml flasks. Add 2 ml of HClO
4.4.2Measure the standard absorbances against the reagent blank. Check these absorbances frequently against the blank during the analysis to ensure that baseline drift has not occurred.
4.4.3Prepare a standard curve of ab-sorbance versus concentration.
—For instruments equipped with direct concentration readout devices, preparation of a standard curve will not be necessary. In all cases, follow calibration and operational procedures in the manufacturer's instruction manual. Maintain a laboratory log of all calibrations.
4.5Analysis.
4.5.1Arsenic Determination. Determine the absorbance of each sample using the blank as a reference. If the sample concentration falls outside the range of the calibration curve, make an appropriate dilution with 2 percent HClO
4.5.2Mandatory Check for Matrix Effects on the Arsenic Results. Same as in Method 12, Section 5.4.2, 40 CFR part 60.
4.5.3Audit Analysis. Same as in Method 108A, Section 4.5.3.
Same as in Method 108A, Section 5.
Same as in Method 108A, Section 6.
1.1Applicability. This method applies to the determination of inorganic arsenic (As) content of process ore and reverberatory matte samples from nonferrous smelters and other sources as specified in the regulations. This method is applicable to samples having an analytical concentration less than 10 μg As/ml.
1.2Principle. Arsenic bound in ore samples is liberated by acid digestion and analyzed by the molybdenum blue photometric procedure.
2.1Sample Preparation and Distillation.
2.1.1Analytical Balance. To measure to within 0.1 mg.
2.1.2Erlenmeyer Flask. 300-ml.
2.1.3Hot Plate.
2.1.4Distillation Apparatus. No. 6, American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) E50, reapproved 1986 (incorporated by reference—see § 60.18); detailed in Figure 108C-1.
2.1.5Graduated Cylinder. .50-ml.
2.1.6Perchloric Acid Fume Hood.
2.2Analysis.
2.2.1Photometer. Capable of measuring at 660 nm.
2.2.2Volumetric Flasks. 50- and 100-ml.
Unless otherwise specified, use ACS reagent grade (or equivalent chemicals) throughout.
3.1Sample Preparation.
3.1.1Water. Deionized distilled to meet ASTM Specification D 1193-74, Type 3 (incorporated by reference—see § 61.18). When high concentrations of organic matter are not expected to be present, the analyst may omit the KMnO
3.1.2Nitric Acid (HNO
3.1.3Hydrofluoric Acid (HF), Concentrated. HANDLE WITH CAUTION.
3.1.4Sulfuric Acid (H
3.1.5Perchloric Acid (HClO
—Because of its caustic, hygroscopic, and deflagrating nature, use extreme care in handling HClO
3.1.6Hydrochloric Acid (HCl), Concentrated. HANDLE WITH CAUTION.
3.1.7Dilute Hydrochloric Acid. Add one part concentration HCl to nine parts water.
3.1.8Hydrazine Sulfate [(NH
3.1.9Potassium Bromide (KBr).
3.1.10Bromine Water, Saturated.
3.2Analysis.
3.2.1Water. Same as in Section 3.1.1.
3.2.2Methyl Orange Solution, 1 g/liter.
3.2.3Ammonium Molybdate Solution, 5 g/liter. Dissolve 0.5 g (NH
3.2.4Standard Arsenic Solution, 10 μg As/ml. Dissolve 0.1320 g of As
3.2.5Hydrazine Sulfate Solution, 1 g/liter. Dissolve 0.1 g of (NH
3.2.6Potassium Bromate (KBrO
3.2.7Ammonium Hydroxide (NH
3.2.8Boiling Granules.
3.2.91/1 HCl/Water. Dilute equal parts concentrated HCl with water.
3.2.10Quality Assurance Audit Samples. Same as in Method 108A, Section 3.2.8.
4.1Sample Preparation and Distillation.
4.1.1Weigh 1.0 g of finely pulverized sample to the nearest 0.1 mg. Transfer the sample to a 300-ml Erlenmeyer flask and add 15 ml of HNO
4.1.2Add 1 g of KBr, 1 g hydrazine sulfate, and 50 ml HCl. Immediately attach the distillation head with thermometer and dip the side arm into a 50-ml graduated cylinder containing 25 ml of water and 2 ml of bromine water. Keep the graduated cylinder immersed in a beaker of cold water during distillation. Distill until the temperature of the vapor in the flask reaches 107°C. When distillation is complete, remove the flask from the hot plate, and simultaneously wash down the side arm with water as it is removed from the cylinder.
4.1.3If the expected arsenic content is in the range of 0.0020 to 0.10 percent, dilute the distillate to the 50-ml mark of the cylinder with water, stopper, and mix. Transfer a 5.0-ml aliquot to a 50-ml volumetric flask. Add 10 ml of water and a boiling granule. Place the flask on a hot plate, and heat gently until the bromine is expelled and the color of methyl orange indicator persists upon the addition of 1-2 drops. Cool the flask to room temperature. Neutralize just to the yellow color of the indicator with dropwise additions of NH
4.1.4If the expected arsenic content is in the range of 0.0002 to 0.0010 percent As, transfer either the entire initial distillate or the measured remaining distillate from above to a 250-ml beaker. Wash the cylinder with two successive portions of concentrated HNO
4.2Analysis.
4.2.1Add 1 ml of KBrO
4.2.2Transfer a suitable portion of the reference solution to an absorption cell, and adjust the photometer to the initial setting, using a light band centered at 660 nm. While
4.3Preparation of the Calibration Curve. Transfer 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, 8.0, 12.0, 16.0, and 20.0 ml of standard arsenic solution (10
4.4Audit Analysis. Same as in Method 108A, section 4.5.3.
Same as in Method 108A, section 5.
Ringwald, D. (TRW). Arsenic Determination on Process Materials from ASARCO's Copper Smelter in Tacoma, Washington. Unpublished Report. Prepared for the Emission Measurement Branch, Technical Support Division, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, North Carolina 27711. August 1980. 35 p.
Performance of this method should not be attempted by persons unfamiliar with the use of equipment for measuring radioactive disintegration rates.
1.1Applicability. This method is applicable to the determination of polonium-210 emissions in particulate samples collected in stack gases. Samples should be analyzed within 30 days of collection to minimize error due to growth of polonium-210 from any lead-210 present in the sample.
1.2Principle A particulate sample is collected from stack gases as described in Method 5 of appendix A to 40 CFR part 60. The polonium-210 in the sample is put in solution, deposited on a metal disc, and the radioactive disintegration rate measured. Polonium in acid solution spontaneously deposits on surfaces of metals that are more electropositive than polonium. This principle is routinely used in the radiochemical analysis of polonium-210.
2.1Alpha spectrometry system consisting of a multichannel analyzer, biasing electronics, silicon surface barrier detector, vacuum pump and chamber.
2.2Constant temperature bath at 85
2.3Polished silver discs, 3.8 cm diameter, 0.4 mm thick with a small hole near the edge.
2.4Glass beakers, 400 ml, 150 ml.
2.5Hot plate, electric.
2.6Fume hood.
2.7Telfon
2.8Magnetic stirrer.
2.9Stirring bar.
2.10Plastic or glass hooks to suspend plating discs.
2.11Internal proportional counter for measuring alpha particles.
2.12Nucleopore
2.13Planchets, stainless steel, 32 mm diameter with 1.5 mm lip.
2.14Transparent plastic tape, 2.5 cm wide with adhesive on both sides.
2.15Epoxy spray enamel.
2.16Suction filter apparatus for 25 mm diameter filter.
2.17Wash bottles, 250 ml capacity.
2.18Plastic graduated cylinder, 25 ml capacity.
3.1Ascorbic acid, Reagent grade.
3.2Ammonium hydroxide (NH
3.3Distilled water meeting ASTM specifications for Type 3 Reagent Water. ASTM Test Method D 1193-77 (incorporated by reference-Section 61.18).
3.4Ethanol (C
3.5Hydrochloric acid (HCl), 12 M, Reagent grade.
3.6Hydrochloric acid, 1 M, dilute 83 ml of the 12 M Reagent grade HCl to 1 liter with distilled water.
3.7Hydrofluoric acid (HF), 29 M, Reagent grade.
3.8Hydrofluoric acid, 3 M, dilute 52 ml of the 29 M Reagent grade HF to 500 ml with distilled water. Use a plastic graduated cylinder and storage bottle.
3.9Lanthanum carrier, 0.1 mg La
3.10Nitric acid (HNO
3.11Perchloric acid (HClO
3.12Polonium-209 solution.
3.13Commercial silver cleaner.
3.14Degreaser.
3.15Standard solution of plutonium or americium.
3.16Volumetric flask, 100 ml, 250 ml.
4.1Sample Preparation.
The glass fiber filter and acetone rinse from Method 5 of appendix A to 40 CFR part 60 are combined and dissolved as described below.
4.1.1Add polonium-209 tracer to the acetone rinse in the glass beaker from Method 5 in an amount approximately equal to the amount of polonium-210 expected in the total particulate sample. Add 16 M nitric acid to the beaker to digest and loosen the residue.
4.1.2Transfer the residue from the glass beaker to a teflon beaker containing the glass fiber filter. Rinse the glass beaker with 16 M nitric acid. If necessary reduce the volume in the beaker by evaporation until all of the nitric acid from the glass beaker has been transferred to the teflon beaker.
4.1.3Add 30 ml of 29 M hydrofluoric acid to the teflon beaker and evaporate to near dryness on a hot plate in a properly operating hood. Caution: Do not allow the residue to go to dryness and overheat; this will result in loss of polonium.
4.1.4Repeat step 4.1.3 until filter is dissolved.
4.1.5Add 100 ml of 16 M nitric acid to the residue in the teflon beaker and evaporate to near dryness. Caution: Do not allow the residue to go to dryness.
4.1.6Add 50 ml of 16 M nitric acid and 10 ml of 12 M perchloric acid to the teflon beaker and heat until dense fumes of perchloric acid are evolved.
4.1.7Repeat steps 4.1.3 to 4.1.6 as necessary until sample is completely dissolved.
4.1.8Add 10 ml of 12 M hydrochloric acid and evaporate to dryness. Repeat additions and evaporations several times.
4.1.9Transfer the sample to a 250 ml volumetric flask and dilute to volume with 3 M hydrochloric acid.
4.2Sample Screening.
The samples are checked for radioactivity levels to avoid contaminaton of the alpha spectrometry system. Use the following screening method:
4.2.1Twenty ml of 1 M HCl are added to a 150 ml beaker.
4.2.2One ml of the lanthanum carrier solution, 0.1 mg lanthanum per ml, is added to beaker.
4.2.3A 1 ml aliquot of solution from Section 4.1.7 is added to the beaker.
4.2.4Three ml of 15 M ammonium hydroxide are added to the beaker.
4.2.5The solution from Section 4.2.4 is allowed to stand for a minimum of 30 minutes.
4.2.6The solution is filtered through a filter membrane using suction.
4.2.7The membrane is washed with 10 ml of distilled water and 5 ml of ethanol.
4.2.8The membrane is allowed to air dry and then mounted, filtration side up, on a planchet lined with double-side plastic tape.
4.2.9The membrane is radioassayed using an internal proportional alpha counter.
4.2.10The activity of the original solution from Section 4.1.7 is calculated using Eq. 111-1.
4.2.11Determine the aliquot volume of solution from Section 4.1.7 to be analyzed for polonium-210 using results of the calculation described in Section 4.2.10. The aliquot used should contain an activity between 1 and 4 pi-co-cur-ies.
4.3Preparation of Silver Disc for Spontaneous Electrodeposition.
4.3.1Clean both sides of disc with a mild abrasive commercial silver cleaner.
4.3.2Clean both sides of disc with degreaser.
4.3.3Place disc on absorbent paper and spray one side with epoxy spray enamel. This should be carried out in a well-ventilated area, with the disc lying flat to keep paint on one side only.
4.3.4Allow paint to dry for 24 hours before using disc for deposition.
4.4Sample Analysis.
4.4.1Add the aliquot of solution from Section 4.1.7 to be analyzed as determined in Section 4.2.11 to a suitable 200 ml container to be placed in a constant temperature bath. Note, aliquot volume may require a larger container.
4.4.2If necessary, bring the volume to 100 ml with 1 M HCl. If the aliquot volume exceeds 100 ml, use total aliquot.
4.4.3Add 200 mg of ascorbic acid and heat solution to 85
4.4.4Stirring of the solution must be maintained while the solution is in the constant temperature bath for plating.
4.4.5Suspend a silver disc in the heated solution using a glass or plastic rod with a hook inserted through the hole in the disc. The disc should be totally immersed in the solution at all times.
4.4.6Maintain the disc in solution for 3 hours while stirring.
4.4.7Remove the silver disc, rinse with distilled water and allow to air dry at room temperature.
4.5Measurement of Polonium-210
4.5.1Place the silver disc, with deposition side (unpainted side) up, on a planchet and secure with double-side plastic tape.
4.5.2Place the planchet with disc in alpha spectrometry system and count for 1000 minutes.
4.6Determination of Procedure Background.
Background counts used in all equations are determined by performing the specific analysis required using the analytical reagents only. This should be repeated every 10 analyses.
4.7Determination of Instrument Background.
Instrument backgrounds of the internal proportional counter and alpha spectrometry system should be determined on a weekly basis. Instrument background should not exceed procedure background. If this occurs, it may be due to a malfunction or contamination.
5.1Calculate the activity of polonium-210 on a sample filter using Eq. 111-3
5.2Procedure for Calculating Emission Rate in Curies per Metric Ton of Phosphate Rock Processed. Calculate the polonium-210 emission per metric ton of rock processed from each run at each stack using Equation 111-4. The emission rate from each stack is determined by averaging the emission rates calculated for each of the three runs at each stack.
5.3Average Stack Emission Rate Calculation. Determine the average stack emission rate from the average of the three emission rates calculated in section 5.2. Perform these calculations for each stack of each calciner.
5.4Calciner Emission Rate Calculation. Determine each calciner's emission rate (X
5.5Annual Polonium-210 Emission Calculation. Determine the annual elemental phosphorus plant emissions of polonium-210 by taking the sum of emission rates at each calciner (X
6.1Obtain a standardized solution of an alpha-emitting actinide element such as plutonium-239 or americium-241. Add a quantity of the standardized solution to a 100 ml volumetric flask so that the final concentration when diluted to a volume of 100 ml will be approximately 1 pCi/ml. Add 10 ml of 16 M HNO
6.2Add 20 ml of 1 M HC1 to each of six 150 ml beakers.
6.3Add 1.0 ml of lanthanum carrier, 0.1 mg lanthanum per ml, to the acid solution in each beaker.
6.4Add 1.0 ml of actinide solution from section 6.1 to each beaker.
6.5Add 5.0 ml of 3 M HF to each beaker.
6.6Cover beakers and allow solutions to stand for a minimum of 30 minutes.
6.7Filter each solution through a filter membrane using this suction filter apparatus.
6.8After each filtration, wash the filter membrane with 10 ml of distilled water and 5 ml of ethanol.
6.9Allow the filter membrane to air dry on the filter apparatus.
6.10Carefully remove the filter membrane and mount with double-side tape on the inner surface of a planchet. Mount filter with filtration side up.
6.11Place planchet in an alpha spectrometry system and count each planchet for 1000 minutes.
6.12The counting efficiency of each detector can be calculated using Eq. 111-6.
6.13Determine the average counting efficiency for each detector by calculating the average of the six determinations.
7.1Obtain polonium-209 solution from an available supplier. Add a quantity of the Po-209 solution to a 100 ml volumetric flask so that the final concentration when diluted to a 100 ml volume will be approximately 1 pCi/ml. Add 10 ml of 16 M HNO
7.2Add 20 ml of 1 M HCl to each of six 150 ml beakers.
7.3Add 1.0 ml of lanthanum carrier, 0.1 mg lanthanum per ml, to the acid solution in each beaker.
7.4Add 1.0 ml of polonium-209 tracer from section 7.1 to each beaker.
7.5Add 3.0 ml of 15 M ammonium hydroxide to each beaker.
7.6Cover beakers and allow to stand for a minimum of 30 minutes.
7.7Filter the contents of each beaker through a separate filter membrane.
7.8After each filtration, wash membrane with 10 ml of distilled water and 5 ml of ethanol.
7.9Allow filter membrane to dry on filter apparatus.
7.10Carefully remove the filter membrane and mount with double-side tape on the inner surface of a planchet. Mount filter with filtration side up.
7.11Place planchet in alpha spectrometry system and count each planchet for 1000 minutes.
7.12The activity of the polonium solution can be calculated using Eq. 111-7.
7.13Determine the average activity of the polonium-209 solution from the six determinations.
7.14Aliquots of the solution from section 7.1 are to be used as tracer with each polonium-210 analysis.
8.1Obtain a standardized solution of an alpha-emitting actinide element such as plutonium-239 or americium-241. Add a quantity of the standardized solution to a 100 ml volumetric flask so that the final concentration when diluted to a 100 ml volume will be approximately 100 pCi/ml. Add 10 ml of 16 M HNO
8.2Add 20 ml of 1 M HCl to each of six 150 ml beakers.
8.3Add 1.0 ml of lanthanum carrier, 0.1 mg lanthanum per ml, to the acid solution in each beaker.
8.4Add 1.0 ml of the actinide solution from section 8.1 to each beaker.
8.5Add 5.0 ml of 3 M HF to each beaker.
8.6Cover beakers and allow solutions to stand for a minimum of 30 minutes.
8.7Filter each solution through a filter membrane using the suction filter apparatus.
8.8After each filtration, wash membrane with 10 ml of distilled water and 5 ml of ethanol.
8.9Allow filter membrane to dry on filter apparatus.
8.10Carefully remove filter membrane and mount with double-side tape on the inner surface of a planchet. Mount filter with filtration side up.
8.11Place planchet in internal proportional counter and count for 100 minutes.
8.12The counting efficiency of the internal proportional counter is determined as follows from the six samples:
8.13Determine the average counting efficiency of the six determinations.
9.1General Requirements.
9.1.1All analysts using this method are required to demonstrate their ability to use the method and to define their respective accuracy and precision criteria.
9.2Specific Requirements.
9.2.1Each sample will be analyzed in duplicate.
9.2.2Every tenth sample will be an externally prepared performance evaluation sample submitted by the Quality Assurance Officer.
9.2.3Duplicate measurements are considered acceptable when the difference between them is less than two standard deviations as described in EPA 600/4-77-001 or subsequent revisions.
This method provides the requirements for: (1) Stack monitoring and sample collection methods appropriate for radionuclides; (2) radiochemical methods which are used in determining the amounts of radionuclides collected by the stack sampling and; (3) quality assurance methods which are conducted in conjunction with these measurements. These methods are appropriate for emissions for stationary sources. A list of references is provided.
Many different types of facilities release radionuclides into air. These radionuclides differ in the chemical and physical forms, half-lives and type of radiation emitted. The appropriate combination of sample extraction, collection and analysis for an individual radionuclide is dependent upon many interrelated factors including the mixture of other radionuclides present. Because of this wide range of conditions, no single method for monitoring or sample collection and analysis of a radionuclide is applicable to all types of facilities. Therefore, a series of methods based on “principles of measurement” are described for monitoring and sample collection and analysis which are applicable to the measurement of radionuclides found in effluent streams at stationary sources. This approach provides the user with the flexibility to choose the most appropriate combination of monitoring and sample collection and analysis methods which are applicable to the effluent stream to be measured.
Monitoring and sample collection methods are described based on “principles of monitoring and sample collection” which are applicable to the measurement of radionuclides from effluent streams at stationary sources. Radionuclides of most elements will be in the particulate form in these effluent streams and can be readily collected using a suitable filter media. Radionuclides of hydrogen, oxygen, carbon, nitrogen, the noble gases and in some circumstances iodine will be in the gaseous form. Radionuclides of these elements will require either the use of an in-line or off-line monitor to directly measure the radionuclides, or suitable sorbers, condensers or bubblers to collect the radionuclides.
2.1Radionuclides as Particulates. The extracted effluent stream is passed through a filter media to remove the particulates. The filter must have a high efficiency for removal of sub-micron particles. The guidance in ANSI N13.1—1969 shall be followed in using filter media to collect particulates (incorporated by reference-see § 61.18).
2.2Radionuclides as Gases.
2.2.1The Radionuclide Tritium (H-3). Tritium in the form of water vapor is collected from the extracted effluent sample by sorption, condensation or dissolution techniques. Appropriate collectors may include silica gel, molecular sieves, and ethylene glycol or water bubblers.
Tritium in the gaseous form may be measured directly in the sample stream using Method B-1, collected as a gas sample or may be oxidized using a metal catalyst to tritiated water and collected as described above.
2.2.2Radionuclides of Iodine. Iodine is collected from an extracted sample by sorption or dissolution techniques. Appropriate collectors may include charcoal, impregnated charcoal, metal zeolite and caustic solutions.
2.2.3Radionuclides of Argon, Krypton and Xenon. Radionuclides of these elements are either measured directly by an in-line or off-line monitor, or are collected from the extracted sample by low temperature sorption techniques, Appropriate sorbers may include charcoal or metal zeolite.
2.2.4Radionuclides of Oxygen, Carbon, Nitrogen and Radon. Radionuclides of these elements are measured directly using an in-line or off-line monitor. Radionuclides of carbon in the form of carbon dioxide may be collected by dissolution in caustic solutions.
2.3Definition of Terms
A series of methods based on “principles of measurement” are described which are applicable to the analysis of radionuclides collected from airborne effluent streams at stationary sources. These methods are applicable only under the conditions stated and within the limitations described. Some methods specify that only a single radionuclide be present in the sample or the chemically separated sample. This condition should be interpreted to mean that no other radionuclides are present in quantities which would interfere with the measurement.
Also identified (Table 1) are methods for a selected list of radionuclides. The listed radionuclides are those which are most commonly used and which have the greatest potential for causing dose to members of the public. Use of methods based on principles of measurement other than those described in this section must be approved in advance of use by the Administrator. For radionuclides not listed in Table 1, any of the described methods may be used provided the user can demonstrate that the applicability conditions of the method have been met.
The type of method applicable to the analysis of a radionuclide is dependent upon the type of radiation emitted, i.e., alpha, beta or gamma. Therefore, the methods described below are grouped according to principles of measurements for the analysis of alpha, beta and gamma emitting radionuclides.
3.1Methods for Alpha Emitting Radionuclides
3.1.1Method A-1, Radiochemistry-Alpha Spectrometry.
3.1.2Method A-2, Radiochemistry-Alpha Counting.
3.1.3Method A-3, Direct Alpha Spectrometry.
3.1.4Method A-4, Direct Alpha Counting (Gross alpha determination).
3.1.5Method A-5, Chemical Determination of Uranium.
3.1.6Method A-6, Radon-222—Continuous Gas Monitor.
3.1.7Method A-7, Radon-222-Alpha Track Detectors
3.2Methods for Gaseous Beta Emitting Radionuclides.
3.2.1Method B-1, Direct Counting in Flow-Through Ionization Chambers.
3.2.2Method B-2, Direct Counting With In-line or Off-line Beta Detectors.
This method is applicable to unidentified mixtures of gaseous radionuclides only for the purposes and under the conditions described in section 3.7.
3.3Methods for Non-Gaseous Beta Emitting Radionuclides.
3.3.1Method B-3, Radiochemistry-Beta Counting.
3.3.2Method B-4, Direct Beta Counting (Gross beta determination).
3.3.3Method B-5, Liquid Scintillation Spectrometry.
3.4Gamma Emitting Radionuclides
3.4.1Method G-1, High Resolution Gamma Spectrometry.
3.4.2Method G-2, Low Resolution Gamma Spectrometry.
3.4.3Method G-3, Single Channel Gamma Spectrometry.
3.4.4Method G-4, Gross Gamma Counting.
3.5Counting Methods. All of the above methods with the exception of Method A-5 involve counting the radiation emitted by the radionuclide. Counting methods applicable to the measurement of alpha, beta and gamma radiations are listed below. The equipment needed and the counting principles involved are described in detail in ASTM-3648(8).
3.5.1Alpha Counting:
•
•
•
•
3.5.2Beta Counting:
•
•
•
•
3.5.3Gamma Counting:
•
•
•
3.5.4Calibration of Counters. Counters are calibrated for specific radionuclide measurements using a standard of the radionuclide under either identical or very similar conditions as the sample to be counted. For gamma spectrometers a series of standards covering the energy range of interest may be used to construct a calibration curve relating gamma energy to counting efficiency.
In those cases where a standard is not available for a radionuclide, counters may be calibrated using a standard with energy characteristics as similar as possible to the radionuclide to be measured. For gross alpha and beta measurements of the unidentified mixtures of radionuclides, alpha counters are calibrated with a natural uranium standard and beta counters with a cesium-137 standard. The standard must contain the same weight and distribution of solids as the samples, and be mounted in an identical manner. If the samples contain variable amounts of solids, calibration curves relating weight of solids present to counting efficiency are prepared. Standards other than those prescribed may be used provided it can be shown that such standards are more applicable to the radionuclide mixture measured.
3.6Radiochemical Methods for Selected Radionuclides. Methods for a selected list of radionuclides are listed in Table 1. The radionuclides listed are those which are most commonly used and which have the greatest potential for causing doses to members of the public. For radionuclides not listed in Table 1, methods based on any of the applicable “principles of measurement” described in section 3.1 through 3.4 may be used.
3.7Applicability of Gross Alpha and Beta Measurements to Unidentified Mixtures of Radionuclides. Gross alpha and beta measurements may be used as a screening measurement as a part of an emission measurement program to identify the need to do specific radionuclide analyses or to confirm or verify that unexpected radionuclides are not being released in significant quantities.
Gross alpha (Method A-4) or gross beta (Methods B-2 or B-4) measurements may also be used for the purpose of comparing the measured concentrations in the effluent stream with the limiting “Concentration Levels for Environmental Compliance” in
Each facility required to measure their radionuclide emissions shall conduct a quality assurance program in conjunction with the radionuclide emission measurements. This program shall assure that the emission measurements are representative, and are of known precision and accuracy and shall include administrative controls to assure prompt response when emission measurements indicate unexpectedly large emissions. The program shall consist of a system of policies, organizational responsibilities, written procedures, data quality specifications, audits, corrective actions and reports. This quality assurance program shall include the following program elements:
4.1The organizational structure, functional responsibilities, levels of authority and lines of communications for all activities related to the emissions measurement program shall be identified and documented.
4.2Administrative controls shall be prescribed to ensure prompt response in the event that emission levels increase due to unplanned operations.
4.3The sample collection and analysis procedures used in measuring the emissions shall be described including where applicable:
4.3.1Identification of sampling sites and number of sampling points, including the rationale for site selections.
4.3.2A description of sampling probes and representativeness of the samples.
4.3.3A description of any continuous monitoring system used to measure emissions, including the sensitivity of the system, calibration procedures and frequency of calibration.
4.3.4A description of the sample collection systems for each radionuclide measured, including frequency of collection, calibration procedures and frequency of calibration.
4.3.5A description of the laboratory analysis procedures used for each radionuclide measured, including frequency of analysis, calibration procedures and frequency of calibration.
4.3.6A description of the sample flow rate measurement systems or procedures, including calibration procedures and frequency of calibration.
4.3.7A description of the effluent flow rate measurement procedures, including frequency of measurements, calibration procedures and frequency of calibration.
4.4The objectives of the quality assurance program shall be documented and shall state the required precision, accuracy and completeness of the emission measurement data including a description of the procedures used to assess these parameters. Accuracy is the degree of agreement of a measurement with a true or known value. Precision is a measure of the agreement among individual measurements of the same parameters under similar conditions. Completeness is a measure of the amount of valid data obtained compared to the amount expected under normal conditions.
4.5A quality control program shall be established to evaluate and track the quality of the emissions measurement data against preset criteria. The program should include where applicable a system of replicates, spiked samples, split samples, blanks and control charts. The number and frequency of
4.6A sample tracking system shall be established to provide for positive identification of samples and data through all phases of the sample collection, analysis and reporting system. Sample handling and preservation procedures shall be established to maintain the integrity of samples during collection, storage and analysis.
4.7Periodic internal and external audits shall be performed to monitor compliance with the quality assurance program. These audits shall be performed in accordance with written procedures and conducted by personnel who do not have responsibility for performing any of the operations being audited.
4.8A corrective action program shall be established including criteria for when corrective action is needed, what corrective actions will be taken and who is responsible for taking the corrective action.
4.9Periodic reports to responsible management shall be prepared on the performance of the emissions measurements program. These reports should include assessment of the quality of the data, results of audits and description of corrective actions.
4.10The quality assurance program should be documented in a quality assurance project plan which should address each of the above requirements.
(1) American National Standards Institute , “Guide to Sampling Airborne Radioactive Materials in Nuclear Facilities”, ANSI-N13.1-1969, American National Standards Institute, New York, New York (1969).
(2) American Public Health Association, “Methods of Air Sampling”, 2nd Edition, Method 605, “Tentative Method of Analysis for Plutonium Content of Atmospheric Particulate Matter”. American Public Health Association, New York, NY (1977).
(3) Ibid, Method 601, “Tentative Method of Analysis for Gross Alpha Radioactivity Content of the Atmosphere”.
(4) Ibid, Method 602, “Tentative Method of the Analysis for Gross Beta Radioactivity Content of the Atmosphere”.
(5) Ibid, Method 608, “Tentative Method of Analysis for Strontium-90 Content of Atmospheric Particulate Matter”.
(6) Ibid, Method 609, “Tentative Method of Analysis for Tritium Content of the Atmosphere”.
(7) Ibid, Method 603, “Tentative Method of Analysis for Iodine-131 Content of the Atmosphere”.
(8) American Society for Testing and Materials, 1986 Annual Book ASTM Standards, Designation D-3648-78, “Standard Practices for the Measurement of Radioactivity”. American Society for Testing and Materials, Philadelphia, PA (1986).
(9) Ibid, Designation D-3649-85, “Standard Practice for High Resolution Gamma Spectrometry”.
(10) Ibid, Designation D-1943-81, “Standard Test Method for Alpha Particle Radioactivity of Water”.
(11) Ibid, Designation D-1890-81, “Standard Test Method for Beta Particle Radioactivity of Water”.
(12) Ibid, Designation D-2459-72, “Standard Test Method for Gamma Spectrometry of Water”.
(13) Ibid, Designation D-3972-82, “Standard Test Method for Isotopic Uranium in Water by Radiochemistry”.
(14) Ibid, Designation D-2907-83, “Standard Test Methods for Microquantities of Uranium in Water by Fluorometry”.
(15) Ibid, Designation E-318, “Standard Test Method for Uranium in Aqueous Solutions by Colorimetry”.
(16) Ibid, Designation D-3084-75, “Standard Practice for Alpha Spectrometry of Water”.
(17) Corley, J.P. and C.D. Corbit, “A Guide for Effluent Radiological Measurements at DOE Installations”, DOE/EP-0096, Pacific Northwest Laboratories, Richland, Washington (1983).
(18) Department of Energy, “RESL Analytical Chemistry Branch Procedures Manual”, IDO-12096, U.S. Department of Energy, Idaho Falls, Idaho (1982).
(19) Environmental Protection Agency, “Radiochemical Analytical Procedures for Analysis of Environmental Samples”, EMSL-LV-0539-17, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory, Las Vegas, Nevada (1979).
(20) Environmental Protection Agency, “Radiochemistry Procedures Manual”, EPA 520/5-84-006, Eastern Environmental Radiation Facility, Montgomery, Alabama (1984).
(21) National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurements, NCRP Report No. 50, “Environmental Radiation Measurements”, National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement, Bethesda, Maryland (1976).
(22) Ibid, Report No. 47, “Tritium Measurement Techniques”. (1976).
(23) Ibid, Report No. 58 “A Handbook of Radioactivity Measurement Procedures” (1985).
(24) Environmental Protection Agency, “Indoor Radon and Radon Decay Product Measurement Protocols”, EPA 520/1-89-009, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Washington, DC (1989).
This appendix describes the monitoring methods which must be used in determining the radon-222 emissions from underground uranium mines, uranium mill tailings piles, phosphogypsum stacks, and other piles of waste material emitting radon.
1.1Sampling Frequency and Calculation of Emissions. Radon-222 emissions from underground uranium mine vents shall be determined using one of the following methods:
1.1.1Continuous Measurement. These measurements shall be made and the emissions calculated as follows:
(a) The radon-222 concentration shall be continuously measured at each mine vent whenever the mine ventilation system is operational.
(b) Each mine vent exhaust flow rate shall be measured at least 4 times per year.
(c) A weekly radon-222 emission rate for the mine shall be calculated and recorded weekly as follows:
(d) The annual radon-222 emission rate is the sum of the weekly emission rates during a calendar year.
1.1.2Periodic Measurement. This method is applicable only to mines that continuously operate their ventilation system except for extended shutdowns. Mines which start up and shut down their ventilation system frequently must use the continuous measurement method describe in Section 1.1.1 above. Emission rates determined using periodic measurements shall be measured and calculated as follows:
(a) The radon-222 shall be continuously measured at each mine vent for at least one week every three months.
(b) Each mine vent exhaust flow rate shall be measured at least once during each of the radon-222 measurement periods.
(c) A weekly radon-222 emission rate shall be calculated for each weekly period according to the method described in Section 1.1.1. In this calculation T=168 hr.
(d) The annual radon-222 emission rate from the mine should be calculated as follows:
1.2Test Methods and Procedures
Each underground mine required to test its emissions, unless an equivalent or alternative method has been approved by the Administrator, shall use the following test methods:
1.2.1Test Method 1 of appendix A to part 60 shall be used to determine velocity traverses. The sampling point in the duct shall be either the centroid of the cross section or the point of average velocity.
1.2.2Test Method 2 of appendix A to part 60 shall be used to determine velocity and volumetric flow rates.
1.2.3Test Methods A-6 or A-7 of appendix B, Method 114 to part 61 shall be used for the analysis of radon-222. Use of Method A-7 requires prior approval of EPA based on conditions described in appendix B.
1.2.4A quality assurance program shall be conducted in conformance with the programs described for Continuous Radon Monitors and Alpha Track Detectors in EPA 520/1-89-009. (2)
2.1Measurement and Calculation of Radon Flux from Uranium Mill Tailings Piles.
2.1.1Frequency of Flux Measurement. A single set of radon flux measurements may be made, or if the owner or operator chooses, more frequent measurements may be made over a one year period. These measurements may involve quarterly, monthly or weekly intervals. All radon measurements shall be made as described in paragraphs 2.1.2 through 2.1.6 except that for measurements made over a one year period, the requirement of paragraph 2.1.4(c) shall not apply. The mean radon flux from the pile shall be the arithmetic mean of the mean radon flux for each measurement period. The weather conditions, moisture content of the tailings and area of the pile covered by water existing at the time of the measurement shall be chosen so as to provide measurements representative of the long term radon flux from the pile and shall be subject to EPA review and approval.
2.1.2Distribution of Flux Measurements. The distribution and number of radon flux measurements required on a pile will depend on clearly defined areas of the pile (called regions) that can have significantly different radon fluxes due to surface conditions. The mean radon flux shall be determined for each individual region of the pile. Regions that shall be considered for operating mill tailings piles are:
For mill tailings after disposal the pile shall be considered to consist of only one region.
2.1.3Number of Flux Measurements. Radon flux measurements shall be made within each region on the pile, except for those areas covered with water. Measurements shall be made at regularly spaced locations across the surface of the region, realizing that surface roughness will prohibit measurements in some areas of a region. The minimum number of flux measurements considered necessary to determine a representative mean radon flux value for each type of region on an operating pile is:
For a mill tailings pile after disposal which consists of only one region a minimum of 100 measurements are required.
2.1.4Restrictions to Radon Flux Measurements. The following restrictions are placed on making radon flux measurements:
2.1.5Areas of Pile Regions. The approximate area of each region of the pile shall be determined in units of square meters.
2.1.6Radon Flux Measurement. Measuring radon flux involves the adsorption of radon on activated charcoal in a large-area collector. The radon collector is placed on the surface of the pile area to be measured and allowed to collect radon for a time period of 24 hours. The radon collected on the charcoal is measured by gamma-ray spectroscopy. The detailed measurement procedure provided in appendix A of EPA 520/5-85-0029(1) shall be used to measure the radon flux on uranium mill tailings, except the surface of the tailings shall not be penetrated by the lip of the radon collector as directed in the procedure, rather the collector shall be carefully positioned on a flat surface with soil or tailings used to seal the edge.
2.1.7Calculations. The mean radon flux for each region of the pile and for the total pile shall be calculated and reported as follows:
2.1.8Reporting. The results of individual flux measurements, the approximate locations on the pile, and the mean radon flux for each region and the mean radon flux for the total stack shall be included in the emission test report. Any condition or unusual event that occurred during the measurements that could significantly affect the results should be reported.
3.0Radon-222 Emissions from Phos-pho-gyp-sum Stacks.
3.1Measurement and Calculation of the Mean Radon Flux. Radon flux measurements shall be made on phosphogypsum stacks as described below:
3.1.1Frequency of Measurements. A single set of radon flux measurements may be made after the phosphogypsum stack becomes inactive, or if the owner or operator chooses, more frequent measurements may be made over a one year period. These measurements may involve quarterly, monthly or weekly intervals. All radon measurements shall be made as described in paragraphs 3.1.2 through 3.1.6 except that for measurements made over a one year period, the requirement of paragraph 3.1.4(c) shall not apply. For measurements made over a one year period, the radon flux shall be the arithmetic mean of the mean radon flux for each measurement period.
3.1.2Distribution and Number of Flux Measurements. The distribution and number of radon flux measurements required on a stack will depend on clearly defined areas of the stack (called regions) that can have significantly different radon fluxes due to surface conditions. The mean radon flux shall be determined for each individual region of the stack. Regions that shall be considered are:
3.1.3Number of Flux Measurements. Radon flux measurements shall be made within each region on the phosphogypsum stack, except for those areas covered with water. Measurements shall be made at regularly spaced locations across the surface of the region, realizing that surface roughness will prohibit measurements in some areas of a region. The minimum number of flux measurements considered necessary to determine a representative mean radon flux value for each type of region is:
3.1.4Restrictions to Radon Flux Measurements. The following restrictions are placed on making radon flux measurements:
3.1.5Areas of Stack Regions. The approximate area of each region of the stack shall be determined in units of square meters.
3.1.6Radon Flux Measurements. Measuring radon flux involves the adsorption of radon on activated charcoal in a large-area collector. The radon collector is placed on the surface of the stack area to be measured and allowed to collect radon for a time period of 24 hours. The radon collected on the charcoal is measured by gamma-ray spectroscopy. The detailed measurement procedure provided in appendix A of EPA 520/5-85-0029(1) shall be used to measure the radon flux on phosphogypsum stacks, except the surface of the phosphogypsum shall not be penetrated by the lip of the radon collector as directed in the procedure, rather the collector shall be carefully positioned on a flat surface with soil or phosphogypsum used to seal the edge.
3.1.7Calculations. The mean radon flux for each region of the phosphogypsum stack and for the total stack shall be calculated and reported as follows:
3.1.8Reporting. The results of individual flux measurements, the approximate locations on the stack, and the mean radon flux for each region and the mean radon flux for the total stack shall be included in the emission test report. Any condition or unusual event that occurred during the measurements that could significantly affect the results should be reported.
4.0Quality Assurance Procedures for Measuring Rn-222 Flux
Records of field activities and laboratory measurements shall be maintained. The following information shall be recorded for each charcoal canister measurement:
Records shall include all applicable information associated with determining the sample measurement, calculations, observations, and comments.
B. Sample Custody
Custodial control of all charcoal samples exposed in the field shall be maintained in accordance with EPA chain-of-custody field procedures. A control record shall document all custody changes that occur between the field and laboratory personnel.
C. Calibration Procedures and Frequency
The radioactivity of two standard charcoal sources, each containing a
D. Internal Quality Control Checks and Frequency
The charcoal from every tenth exposed canister shall be recounted. Five percent of the samples analyzed shall be either blanks (charcoal having no radioactivity added) or samples spiked with known quantities of radium-226.
E. Data Precision, Accuracy, and Completeness
The precision, accuracy, and completeness of measurements and analyses shall be within the following limits for samples measuring greater than 1.0 pCi/m
(a) Precision: 10%
(b) Accuracy:
(c) Completeness: at least 85% of the measurements must yield useable results.
(1) Hartley, J.N. and Freeman, H.D., “Radon Flux Measurements on Gardinier and Royster phos-pho-gyp-sum Piles Near Tampa and Mulberry, Florida,” U.S. Environmental Protection Agency Report, EPA 520/5-85-029, January 1986.
(2) Environmental Protection Agency, “Indoor Radon and Radon Decay Product Measurement Protocols”, EPA 520/1-89-009, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Washington, DC. (1989).
For
In this method of dealing with resolution, the extent to which one chromatographic peak overlaps another is determined.
For convenience, consider the range of the elution curve of each compound as running from −2
This calculation can be simplified in several ways. Overlap can be determined for curves of unit area; then actual areas can be introduced. Desired integration can be resolved into two integrals of the normal distribution function for which there are convenient calculation programs and tables. An example would be Program 15 in Texas Instruments Program Manual ST1, 1975, Texas Instruments, Inc., Dallas, Texas 75222.
In judging the suitability of alternate GC columns or the effects of altering chromatographic conditions, one can employ the area overlap as the resolution parameter with a specific maximum permissible value.
The use of Gaussian functions to describe chromatographic elution curves is widespread. However, some elution curves are highly asymmetric. In cases where the sample peak is followed by a contaminant that has a leading edge that rises sharply but the curve then tails off, it may be possible to define an effective width for t
Responsibilities of audit supervisor and analyst at the source sampling site include the following:
A. The audit supervisor verifies that audit cylinders are stored in a safe location both before and after the audit to prevent vandalism.
B. At the beginning and conclusion of the audit, the analyst records each cylinder number and pressure. An audit cylinder is never analyzed when the pressure drops below 200 psi.
C. During the audit, the analyst performs a minimum of two consecutive analyses of each audit cylinder gas. The audit must be conducted to coincide with the analysis of source test samples, normally immediately after GC calibration and prior to sample analyses.
D. At the end of audit analyses, the audit supervisor requests the calculated concentrations from the analyst and compares the results with the actual audit concentrations. If each measured concentration agrees with the respective actual concentration within
1. Organization supplying audit sample(s) and shipping address
2. Audit supervisor, organization, and phone number
3. Shipping instructions: Name, Address, Attention
6. Details on audit cylinders from last analysis
5. Audit results:
Facility owners or operators may estimate radionuclide emissions to the atmosphere for dose calculations instead of measuring emissions. Particulate emissions from mill tailings piles should be estimated using the procedures listed in reference re num;2. All other emissions may be estimated by using
To estimate emissions to the atmosphere:
(a) Determine the amount (in curies) used at facilities for the period under consideration. Radioactive materials in sealed packages that remain unopened, and have not leaked during the assessment period should not be included in the calculation.
(b) Multiply the amount used by the following factors which depend on the physical state of the radionuclide. They are:
(i) 1 for gases;
(ii) 10
(iii) 10
If any nuclide is heated to a temperature of 100 degrees Celsius or more, boils at a temperature of 100 degrees Celsius or less, or is intentionally dispersed into the environment, it must be considered to be a gas.
(c) If a control device is installed between the place of use and the point of release, multiply emissions from (b) by an adjustment factor. These are presented in Table 1.
(1) Environmental Protection Agency, “A Guide for Determining Compliance with the Clean Air Act Standards for Radionuclides Emissions from NRC-Licensed and Non-DOE Federal Facilities”, EPA 520/1-89-002, January 1989.
(2) Nuclear Regulatory Commission, “Methods for Estimating Radioactive and Toxic Airborne Source Terms for Uranium Milling Operations”, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission Regulatory Guide 3.59, March 1987.
This Appendix provides simplified procedures to reduce the burden on Nuclear Regulatory Commission (NRC) licensees, and non-Department of Energy Federal facilities in determining compliance with 40 CFR part 61, subpart I. The procedures consist of a series of increasingly more stringent steps, depending on the facility's potential to exceed the standard.
First, a facility can be found in compliance if the quantity of radioactive material possessed during the year is less than that listed in a table of annual possession quantities. A facility will also be in compliance if the average annual radionuclide emission concentration is less than that listed in a table of air concentration levels. If the facility is not in compliance by these tables, it can establish compliance by estimating a dose using screening procedure developed by the National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurements with a radiological source term derived using EPA approved emission factors. These procedures are described in a “Guide for Determining Compliance with the Clean Air Act Standards for Radionuclide
A user-friendly computer program called COMPLY has been developed to reduce the burden on the regulated community. The Agency has also prepared a “User's Guide for the COMPLY Code” to assist the regulated community in using the code, and in handling more complex situations such as multiple release points. The basis for these compliance procedures are provided in “Background Information Document: Procedures Approved for Demonstrating Compliance with 40 CFR Part 61, Subpart I”. The compliance model is the highest level in the COMPLY computer code and provides for the most realistic assessment of dose by allowing the use of site-specific information.
(a) Table 1 may be used for determining if facilities are in compliance with the standard. The possession table can only be used if the following conditions are met:
(i) No person lives within 10 meters of any release point; and
(ii) No milk, meat, or vegetables are produced within 100 meters of any release point.
(b) Procedures described in Reference (1) shall be used to determine compliance or exemption from reporting by use of Table 2.
(a) Table 2 may be used for determining if facilities are in compliance with the standard.
1. The concentration table as applied to emission estimates can only be used if all releases are from point sources and concentrations have been measured at the stack or vent using EPA-approved methods, and the distance between each stack or vent and the nearest resident is greater than 3 times the diameter of the stack or vent. Procedures provided in Ref. (1) shall be used to determine compliance or exemption from reporting by use of Table 2.
2. The concentration table may be used to determine compliance with the standard based on environmental measurements provided these measurements are made in conformance with the requirements of § 61.107(b)(5).
The procedures described in Reference (4) may be used to determine doses to members of the general public from emissions of radionuclides to the atmosphere. Both the total dose from all radionuclides emitted, and the dose caused by radioactive iodine must be considered in accordance with the procedures in Ref. (1).
The COMPLY computer code may be used to determine compliance with subpart I. The compliance model in the COMPLY computer code may be used to determine the dose to members of the general public from emissions of radionuclides to the atmosphere. The EPA may add radionuclides to all or any part of COMPLY to cover radionuclides that may be used by the regulated community.
(1) Environmental Protection Agency, “A Guide for Determining Compliance with the Clean Air Act Standards for Radionuclides Emissions from NRC-Licensed and Non-DOE Federal Facilities”, EPA 520/1-89-002, October 1989.
(2) Environmental Protection Agency, “User's Guide for the COMPLY Code”, EPA 520/1-89-003, October 1989.
(3) Environmental Protection Agency, “Background Information Document: Procedures Approved for Demonstrating Compliance with 40 CFR Part 61, Subpart I”, EPA 520/1-89-001, January 1989.
(4) National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement, “Screening Techniques for Determining Compliance with Environmental Standards” NCRP Commentary No. 3, Revision of January 1989 with addendum of October, 1989.
42 U.S.C. 7401-7617q.
As used in this part, all terms not defined herein shall have the meaning given to them in the Clean Air Act and in part 60 of this chapter.
(a) This part sets forth the Administrator's approval and disapproval of State plans for control of designated pollutants and facilities, and the Administrator's promulgation of such plans or portions thereof. Approval of a plan or any portion of a plan is based on a determination by the Administrator that it meets the requirements of section 111(d) of the act and the provisions of part 60 of this chapter.
(b) If a State does not submit a complete, approvable plan, the Administrator may then promulgate a substitute plan or part of a plan. The promulgated provision, plus the approved parts of the State plan, constitute the applicable plan for purposes of the act.
(c) The Administrator will promulgate substitute provisions for the disapproved regulatory provisions only. If a nonregulatory provision is disapproved, however, it will be noted in this part and a detailed explanation will be sent to the State.
(d) All approved regulatory provisions of each plan are incorporated by reference in this part. Section 62.12 provides information on availability of applicable plans. The Administrator and State and local agencies shall enforce (1) regulatory provisions of a plan approved or promulgated by the Administrator, and (2) all permit conditions or denials issued in carrying out the approved or promulgated regulations for the review of designated facilities.
(e) Each State's plan is dealt with in a separate subpart, with separate headings for different pollutants and facilities. The plans shall include an introductory section identifying the plan by name and the date of its submittal. Additional sections are included as necessary to specifically identify disapproved provisions, to set forth reasons for disapproval, and to set forth provisions of the plan promulgated by the Administrator. Except as otherwise specified, all supplemental information submitted to the Administrator with respect to any plan has been submitted by the Governor of the State.
(f) Revisions to applicable plans will be included in this part when approved or promulgated by the Administrator.
The Administrator may, whenever he determines necessary, extend the period for submission of any plan or plan revision or portion thereof.
The approval status of each State's plan or portions thereof, are set forth in each subpart. All plans are approved unless specifically disapproved in the appropriate subpart.
(a) The Administrator's determination of the absence or inadequacy of legal authority required to be included in the plan is set forth in each subpart. This includes the legal authority of local agencies and State governmental agencies other than an air pollution control agency if such other agencies are assigned responsibility for carrying out a plan or portion thereof.
(b) No legal authority as such is promulgated by the Administrator. Where required regulatory provisions are not included in the plan by the State because of inadequate authority, substitute provisions are promulgated by the Administrator.
A State may submit to the Administrator a letter certifying that no designated facilities exist in the State if such is the case. The negative declaration will be in lieu of a plan.
(a) In each subpart, emission standards and compliance schedules which have been disapproved by the Administrator are identified, and those promulgated by the Administrator are set forth.
(b) The Administrator's approval or promulgation of any compliance schedule shall not affect the responsibility of the owner or operator to comply with any applicable emission limitation on or after the date for final compliance specified in the applicable schedule.
(a) Each subpart identifies the plan provisions for source surveillance which are disapproved, and sets forth the Administrator's promulgation of necessary provisions for requiring designated sources to maintain records, make reports, and submit information.
(b) The Administrator will not promulgate provisions for disapproved State or local agency procedures for testing, inspection, investigation, or detection. However, detailed critiques of such portions will be provided to the State.
After notice and opportunity for public hearing in each affected State, the Administrator may revise any provision of an applicable plan if:
(a) The provision was promulgated by the Administrator and
(b) The plan, as revised, will be consistent with the Act and with the requirements of part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
Except as otherwise provided in § 60.23 of this chapter, all requests, reports, applications, submittals, and other communications to the Administrator pursuant to this part shall be submitted in duplicate and addressed to the appropriate Regional Office of the Environmental Protection Agency, to the attention of the Director, Air and Hazardous Materials Division (Environmental Programs Division in Region II). The Regional Offices are as follows:
The provisions promulgated in this part and the various applications thereof are distinct and severable. If any provision of this part or the application thereof to any person or circumstances is held invalid, such invalidity shall not affect other provisions or application of such provision to other persons or circumstances which can be given effect without the invalid provision or application.
Copies of the applicable plans will be available for public inspection at the following locations:
(a) The offices of the Directors, Air and Hazardous Materials Divisions at EPA Regional Offices I, III-X, and the Director, Environmental Programs Division at EPA Regional Office II. The addresses and jurisdictions covered by these appear in § 62.10.
(b) Public Information Reference Unit, Library Systems Branch, EPA (PM 213), 401 M Street SW., Washington, D.C. 20460.
Sec. 110(a) and 111(d), Clean Air Act (42 U.S.C. 7410(a) and 7411(d)).
(a)
(b)
(2) Control of fluoride emissions from existing phosphate fertilizer plants, submitted on April 10, 1978.
(c)
(1) Sulfuric acid plants;
(2) Phosphate fertilizer plants.
The plan applies to existing facilities at the following sulfuric acid plants:
(a) Acid plants operated by
(1) Reichhold Chemical Company in Tuscaloosa,
(2) Stauffer Chemical Company in Mobile, and
(3) Estech Chemical in Dothan.
(b) There are no oleum plants.
(c) There are not sulfur-burning plants.
(d) There are no bound sulfur feedstock plants.
The plan currently does not identify any sources subject to its fluoride emission limits.
The Alaska Department of Environmental Conservation submitted on June 9, 1977, certification that there are no existing phosphate fertilizer plants in the State subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
The Alaska Department of Environmental Conservation submitted on June 9, 1977, certification that there are no existing sulfuric acid plants in the State subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
The Alaska Department of Environmental Conservation submitted on June 9, 1977, certification that there are no existing kraft pulp mills in the State subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
The Alaska Department of Environmental Conservation submitted on June 9, 1977, certification that there are no existing primary aluminum reduction plants in the State subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
(a) Identification of plan: Arkansas Plan for the Control of Designated Pollutants from Existing Plants (Section 111(d) Plan).
(b) The plan was officially submitted as follows:
(1) Control of sulfuric acid mist from sulfuric acid plants, and fluoride emissions from phosphate fertilizer plants, submitted on July 11, 1979, having been adopted by the State on May 25, 1979, and letter dated August 6, 1981.
(2) Control of total reduced sulfur (TRS) emissions from existing kraft pulp mills submitted by the Governor on February 28, 1983, and adopted by the State on January 28, 1983.
(3) Revisions to the Plan adopted by the Arkansas Commission on Pollution Control and Ecology on July 24, 1992, effective August 30, 1992, and a negative declaration for phosphate fertilizer plants dated September 2, 1992, submitted by the Governor on September 14, 1992.
(4) Revisions to the Plan adopted by the Arkansas Commission on Pollution Control and Ecology on May 30, 1997, effective July 1, 1997, and submitted by the Governor on August 18, 1997.
(c) Designated facilities: The plan applies to existing facilities in the following categories of sources:
(1) Sulfuric acid plants.
(2) Kraft pulp mills.
On September 24, 1992, the Arkansas Department of Pollution Control and Ecology submitted a negative declaration, signed by the Chief of the Air Division on September 2, 1992, certifying that there are no existing phosphate
(a) The plan applies to existing facilities at the following existing sulfuric acid plant:
(1) El Dorado Chemical Company in El Dorado, Arkansas.
(2) [Reserved]
(b) [Reserved]
(a) The plan applies to existing facilities at the following kraft pulp mill plants:
(1) International Paper Company in Camden, Arkansas.
(2) International Paper Company in Pine Bluff, Arkansas.
(3) Green Bay Packaging, Arkansas Kraft Division in Morrilton, Arkansas.
(4) Gaylord Container Corporation in Pine Bluff, Arkansas.
(5) Georgia-Pacific Corporation in Crossett, Arkansas.
(6) Georgia-Pacific Corporation in Ashdown, Arkansas.
(7) Potlatch Corporation of McGehee, Arkansas.
(b) [Reserved]
The Compliance Schedules were submitted on December 16, 1985, by the Governor to control total reduced Sulfur emissions from the seven kraft pulp mills identified in § 62.865(a). The schedules specify final compliance dates and enforceable increments to be as expeditiously as practicable but not more than six years from approval of the state regulations; i.e., October 12, 1990.
Sec. 111 of the Clean Air Act, as amended (42 U.S.C. 7411).
(a) State of California Designated Facility Plan (Section 111(d) Plan).
(b) The plan was officially submitted as follows:
(1) Control of fluoride emissions from existing facilities at phosphate fertilizer plants, submitted on February 26 and July 16, 1979 and April 7, 1980 having been adopted by the Districts on December 1 and 6, 1979 and January 9, 1979. A letter clarifying the plan was submitted on March 27, 1979. Revisions to the plan were submitted on September 23, 1980 and February 5 and July 6, 1981.
(2) Control of sulfuric acid mist from existing facilities at sulfuric acid production units, submitted on February 26, July 16, and September 7, 1979 and April 7, 1980, having been adopted by the Districts on December 1 and 6, 1978 and January 9, 1979. Revisions to the plan were submitted on October 31, 1980, February 18, and May 1, 1981.
(3) Control of total reduced sulfur (TRS) emissions from existing kraft pulping mills submitted as follows:
(i) 9-25-79; submittal of existing rules; (
(
(
(ii) 3-21-80; Clarification of Bay Area Rule 1, Regulation 12—Kraft Pulp Mills.
(iii) 4-7-80; Summary of district rules and State laws that meet the requirements of 40 CFR, parts 60.23-60.26 for Designated Facilities in general.
(iv) 5-29-80; revision of Bay Area AQMD Rule 1, Regulation 12—Kraft Pulp Mills.
(v) 9-5-80; Evidence of public hearing and annual report schedule defined for Bay Area Rule 1, Regulation 12—Kraft Pulp Mills.
(vi) 11-4-81; (
(
(
(
(c) Designated facilities: The plans apply to existing facilities in the following categories of sources:
(1) Existing phosphate fertilizer plants.
(2) Existing sulfuric acid production units.
(3) Existing kraft pulp mills.
The plan applies to existing facilities at the following phosphate fertilizer plants:
(a) Occidental Chemical Company in San Joaquin County.
(b) Simplot Company in Kings County.
(c) Valley Nitrogen Products, Inc., in Fresno County.
The plan applies to existing facilities at the following sulfuric acid production units:
(a) Allied Chemical Corporation in Alameda County.
(b) Monsanto Company in Alameda County.
(c) Occidental Chemical Company in Fresno County.
(d) Stauffer Chemical Company in Alameda County.
(e) Valley Nitrogen Products, Inc. in Kern County.
The plan applies to existing facilities at the following kraft pulp mills:
(a) Louisiana Pacific, Antioch, Contra Costa County Pulp Mill.
(b) Louisiana Pacific Corp., Samoa Complex.
(c) Crown Simpson Pulp Company, Fairhaven.
(d) Simpson Paper Company, Shasta County Pulp Mill.
The State Department of Environmental Protection submitted on November 30, 1977, a letter certifying that there are no existing phosphate fertilizer plants in the state subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
The State Department of Environmental Protection submitted on November 30, 1977, a letter certifying that there are no existing sulfuric acid plants in the state subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
The State Department of Environmental Protection submitted on December 28, 1988, a letter certifying that there are no existing kraft pulp mills in the State subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
The State Department of Environmental Protection submitted on December 28, 1988, a letter certifying that there are no existing primary aluminum reduction plants in the State subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
The Delaware Department of Natural Resources and Environmental Control submitted on November 7, 1977, a letter certifying that there are no existing phosphate fertilizer plants in the State subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
(a) Title of plan: State implementation plan for control of sulfuric acid mist from existing sulfuric acid plants.
(b) The plan was officially submitted on September 8, 1978 with amendments submitted on December 29, 1980.
(c) Identification of Sources: The plan includes the following sulfuric acid plants:
(1) Allied Chemical Company, Clay-mont (New Castle County).
The Delaware Department of Natural Resources and Environmental Control submitted on September 8, 1982, a letter certifying that there are no kraft pulp mills in the State subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
The Delaware Department of Natural Resources and Environmental Control submitted on September 8, 1982, a letter certifying that there are no primary aluminum reduction plants in the State subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
The Department of Environmental Services submitted on December 12, 1977 a letter certifying that there are no existing phosphate fertilizer plants in the District subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
The Director, Department of Environmental Services submitted on March 7, 1978 a letter certifying there are no existing sulfuric acid production units in the District subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
The Mayor of the District of Columbia submitted on July 16, 1980 a letter certifying there are no existing primary kraft pulp mills in the District subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
The Mayor of the District of Columbia submitted on May 29, 1980 a letter certifying there are no existing primary aluminum plants in the District subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
Secs. 110(a) and 111(d), Clean Air Act (42 U.S.C. 7410(a) and 7411(d)).
(a)
(b)
(2) Control of total reduced sulfur (TRS) emissions from existing kraft pulp mills and tall oil plants (both new and existing) submitted on May 24, 1985, and revision submitted on June 10, 1986, by the Florida Department of Environmental Regulation (FDER). No action is taken on sections 17-2.600(4)(c)7 and 8.
(3) The final compliance date to achieve the TRS emission limits for the black liquor evaporation system, the batch digester system and the continuous digester system for St. Joe Paper Company in Port St. Joe is September 14, 1989.
(4) The final compliance date to achieve TRS emission limits for the No. 5 Multiple Effect Evaporation System, batch digester system and Kamyr digester system for Container Corporation of America in Fernandina Beach, Florida is June 1, 1990.
(5) Control of metals, acid gases, organic compounds and nitrogen oxide emissions from existing municipal waste combustors was submitted by the Florida Department of Environmental Protection on November 18, 1996.
(c)
(1) Sulfuric acid plants.
(2) Kraft pulp mills.
(3) Existing municipal waste combusters.
The plan applies to existing facilities at the following sulfuric acid plants:
(a) Acid plants operated by:
(1) Occidental Petroleum Company in Hamilton County,
(2) AMAX Phosphate Inc. in Manatee County,
(3) Conserv Chemical in Nichols,
(4) Farmland Industry in Bartow County,
(5) W. R. Grace Company in Polk County,
(6) Royster Fertilizer in Polk County,
(7) USS Agrichemicals in Polk County,
(8) Central Farmers Co-Op in Polk County,
(9) Agrico Chemical Company in Polk County,
(10) Gardinier, Inc. in Hillsborough County, and
(11) ESTECH in Polk County.
(b) There are no oleum plants.
(c) There are no sulfur-burning plants.
(d) There are no bound sulfur feedstock plants.
The Florida Department of Environmental Regulation submitted on April 22, 1985, a letter certifying that there are no existing primary aluminum reduction plants in the State subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
The plan applies to existing facilities at the following existing kraft pulp plants and tall oil plants:
(a) Alton Packaging Corporation in Jacksonville
(b) Buckeye Cellulose Corporation in Perry
(c) Champion International Corporation (Formerly St. Regis Paper Company) in Cantonment
(d) Container Corporation of America in Fernandina Beach
(e) Georgia-Pacific Corporation in Palatka
(f) Jacksonville Kraft Paper Company in Jacksonville
(g) St. Joe Paper Company in Port St. Joe
(h) Southwest Forest Industries in Panama City
(i) Arizona Chemical Company (Tall Oil Plant) in Panama City
(j) Sylvachem Corporation (Tall Oil Plant) in Port St. Joe
The State of Florida has provided that the individual source compliance schedules would be developed and submitted by the affected sources to the State following plan adoption; and that the increments of progress pursuant to 40 CFR 60.21(h) would be specified at that time; this is an acceptable procedure pursuant to 40 CFR 60.24(e)(2). However, the State must submit these schedules to EPA for approval; and these schedules must meet the public hearing requirements of 40 CFR 60.23 or ones deemed equivalent by the Administrator pursuant to 40 CFR 60.23(g).
The plan applies to existing facilities with a municipal waste combustor (MWC) unit capacity greater than 250 tons per day of municipal solid waste (MSW).
Secs. 110(a) and 111(d), Clean Air Act (42 U.S.C. 7410(a) and 7411(d)).
(a)
(b)
(2) Control of total reduced sulfur emissions from existing facilities at kraft pulp mills, submitted on January 8, 1982.
(3) A compliance schedule for sources subject to the plan for the control of total reduced sulfur emissions from existing kraft pulp mills and a starting date for such rule, submitted on June 3, 1988.
(4) State of Georgia Plan for Implementation of 40 CFR Part 60, Subpart Cb, For Existing Municipal Waste Combustors, submitted on November 13,
(c)
(1) Sulfuric acid plants;
(2) Kraft pulp mills.
(3) Existing municipal waste combustors.
At 63 FR 27496, May 19, 1998, § 62.2600 was amended by adding paragraphs (b)(4) and (c)(3), effective July 20, 1998.
The plan applies to existing facilities at the following sulfuric acid plants:
(a) Sulfur-burning plants operated by:
(1) American Cyanamid Company in Savannah, and
(2) Cities Service Company in Augusta.
(b) Oleum plant of Cities Service Company in Augusta.
(c) There are no bound sulfur feedstock plants.
The Georgia Environmental Protection Division submitted on July 14, 1977, a letter certifying that there are no existing phosphate fertilizer plants in the State subject to part 60, subpart B, of this chapter.
The plan applies to existing facilities at the following kraft pulp mills:
(a) Continental Can in Augusta,
(b) Continental Can in Port Wentworth,
(c) Brunswick in Brunswick,
(d) Georgia Kraft in Rome,
(e) Georgia Kraft in Macon,
(f) Gilman in St. Marys,
(g) Great Southern in Cedar Springs,
(h) Interstate in Riceboro,
(i) ITT Rayonier in Jesup,
(j) Owens-Illinois in Valdosta, and
(k) Union Camp in Savannah.
The Georgia Environmental Protection Division submitted a letter on October 19, 1983, certifying that there are no existing primary aluminum reduction plants in the State of Georgia subject to 40 CFR part 60, subpart B, of this chapter.
The plan applies to existing facilities with a municipal waste combustor (MWC) unit capacity greater than 250 tons per day of municipal solid waste (MSW) at the following MWC sites:
(1) Savannah Energy Systems Company, Savannah, Georgia.
(2) [Reserved]
At 63 FR 27496, May 19, 1998, § 62.2606 and the undesignated center heading were added, effective July 20, 1998.
The State of Idaho Department of Health and Welfare submitted on February 23, 1981, certification that there are no existing primary aluminum
(a) Title of Plan: “Illinois Plan for the Control of Sulfuric Acid Mist from Existing Contract Process Sulfuric Acid Plants.”
(b) The plan was officially submitted on August 10, 1978.
(c) Identification of sources: The plan includes the following sulfuric acid production plants:
(1) Beker Industries in LaSalle County.
(2) U.S.I. Chemical Company in Douglas County.
(3) Mobil Chemical Company in Bureau County.
(4) Swift Chemical Company in Cook County.
(5) American Cyanamid Company in Will County.
(6) Amax Zinc Company in St. Clair County.
(7) Monsanto Company in St. Clair County.
(8) Smith Douglas—Division of Border Chemical in Livingston County.
The Illinois Environmental Protection Agency submitted on July 23, 1979, a letter certifying that there are no existing kraft pulp mills in the State subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
Illinois submitted “State Plan to Implement Emission Guidelines for Large Municipal Waste Combustors” on June 23, 1997. The plan applies specifically to Robbins Resource Recovery Center (RRRC), located in Robbins, Illinois. The enforceable mechanism for this source is special condition 18(c) of operating permit number 88120055, issued to RRRC by Illinois on June 2, 1997.
The State Board of Health submitted on April 18, 1977, a letter certifying that there are no existing phosphate fertilizer plants in the State subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
(a)
(b) The plan was officially submitted on January 7, 1981 by the Technical Secretary of the Indiana Air Pollution Control Board.
(c) The State on July 17, 1981, submitted Alcoa methods 4075A, 4076A, 913A, 914E and 914F as alternate test methods.
(a)
(b) The plan was officially submitted as follows:
(1) Control of sulfuric acid mist from existing facilities at sulfuric acid production plants, effective on June 16, 1971, having been submitted by the State on February 23, 1978. Additional information was provided in letters of February 7, 1983; May 13, 1985; and June 12, 1985.
(2) Control of fluoride emissions from existing facilities at phosphate fertilizer plants, effective on August 29, 1979, having been submitted by the State on October 19, 1979. Additional information was provided in letters of February 7, 1983; May 13, 1985; and June 12, 1985.
(3) Control of sulfur dioxide and sulfuric acid mist from sulfuric acid manufacturing plants in Polk County were adopted on October 26, 1993, and submitted on March 23, 1994.
(c)
(1) Sulfuric acid production plants.
(2) Phosphate fertilizer plants.
(a) The plan applies to existing facilities at the following sulfuric acid production plants:
(1) Agrico Chemical Company, Fort Madison, Iowa
(2) Koch Sulfur Products Company, Dubuque, Iowa
(a) The plan applies to existing facilities at the following phosphate fertilizer plants:
(1) Agrico Chemical Company, Fort Madison, Iowa.
(2) Chevron Chemical Company, Fort Madison, Iowa.
(3) Occidental Chemical Company, Buffalo, Iowa.
Letter from Executive Director of Iowa Department of Environmental Quality submitted on February 7, 1983, certifying that there are no kraft pulp mills in the State of Iowa subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
Letter from the Iowa Department of Water, Air and Waste Management submitted on May 13, 1985, certifying that there are no primary aluminum reduction plants in the State of Iowa subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
Letter from Executive Director of Iowa Department of Environmental Quality submitted on February 7, 1983, certifying that there are no kraft pulp mills in the State of Iowa, subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
Letter from the Administrator of the Environmental Protection Division of the Department of Natural Resources submitted June 4, 1991, certifying that there are no existing municipal waste combustors in the state of Iowa subject to this 111(d) requirement.
Letter from the Iowa Department of Natural Resources submitted December 27, 1996, certifying that there are no municipal waste combustors in the state of Iowa subject to part 60, subpart Cb of this chapter.
(a)
(b)
(c)
Letter from the Director of the Department of Health and Environment submitted on August 2, 1978, certifying that there are no phosphate fertilizer manufacturing facilities in the State of Kansas.
Letter from the Director of the Department of Health and Environment submitted on July 17, 1979, certifying that there are no kraft pulp mills in the State of Kansas.
Letter from the Director, Division of Environment, Kansas Department of Health and Environments submitted on May 23, 1984, certifying that there are no primary aluminum reduction plants on the State of Kansas, subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
(a)
(b) The Plan was officially submitted on February 6, 1986.
(c)
(1) Koch Sulfur Products, DeSoto, Kansas.
Letter from the Director of the Bureau of Air and Waste Management of the Department of Health and Environment submitted July 3, 1991, certifying that there are no existing municipal
Letter from the Kansas Department of Health submitted April 26, 1996, certifying that there are no municipal waste combustors in the state of Kansas subject to part 60, subpart Cb of this chapter.
(a)
(b)
(c)
(a)
(b) The plan was officially submitted as follows:
(1) Control of sulfuric acid mist emissions from existing facilities at sulfuric acid plants, total reduced sulfur emissions from existing facilities at kraft pulp mills, fluoride emissions from existing facilities at primary aluminum reduction plants, officially submitted on December 15, 1981.
(c)
(1) Sulfuric acid plants.
(2) Kraft pulp mills.
(3) Primary aluminum reduction plants.
The plan applies to existing facilities at the following sulfuric acid plant: E.I. du Pont sulfuric acid plant in Wurtland, Ky.
The plan applies to existing facilities at the following kraft pulp mills:
(a) Westvaco Corp., Fine Papers Division, Wickliffe, Ky.
(b) Willamette Industries, Corrugated Medium Mill and Bleached Pulp Mill, Hawesville, Kentucky.
The plan applies to existing facilities at the following primary aluminum reduction plants:
(a) National Southwire Aluminum, Hawesville, Ky.
(b) Anaconda Company, Aluminum Division, Henderson, Ky.
The Kentucky Department for Natural Resources and Environmental Protection certified in a letter dated August 25, 1978, that Kentucky has no designated facilities in this source category.
(a)
(b) The plan was officially submitted as follows:
(1) Control of sulfuric acid mist from sulfuric acid plants, and fluoride emissions from existing facilities at phosphate fertilizer plants, submitted on July 18, 1978, having been adopted by the State November 30, 1977, and letter dated February 16, 1982.
(2) Control of fluoride emissions from existing facilities at primary aluminum plants, submitted on January 12, 1981, having been adopted by the State on December 11, 1980.
(3) Control of total reduced sulfur from existing facilities at kraft pulp mill plants, submitted in December 1979, having been adopted November 27, 1979, and letter dated February 16, 1982.
(4) Control of landfill gas emissions from existing municipal solid waste landfills, submitted on December 9, 1996, and the associated rule adopted by the State on December 20, 1996 (LAC 33.III.3003B, Table 2).
(c)
(1) Sulfuric acid plants.
(2) Phosphate fertilizer plants.
(3) Primary aluminum plants.
(4) Kraft pulp mills.
(a) The requirements of § 60.24(b)(2) of this chapter are not met since the test methods and procedures for determining compliance with the sulfuric acid mist emission standards are not specified.
(b) Emissions from sulfuric acid plants must be measured by the methods in appendix A to part 60, or by equivalent or alternative methods as defined in § 60.2 (t) and (u) respectively.
(a) The requirements of § 60.25(a) of this chapter are not met since the emission inventories do not provide information as specified in appendix D to part 60.
(b) The requirements of § 60.25(c) of this chapter are not met since the plan does not provide for the disclosure of emission data, as correlated with applicable emission standards, to the general public.
(c)
(2) Commencing after the initial notification by the Regional Administrator pursuant to paragraph (c)(1) of this section, the owner or operator of
(3) Information recorded by the owner or operator and copies of this summarizing report submitted to the Regional Administrator shall be retained by the owner or operator for 2 years after the date on which the pertinent report is submitted.
(4) Emission data obtained from owners or operators of stationary sources will be correlated with applicable emission limitations and other control measures that are part of the applicable plan and will be available at the appropriate regional office and at other locations in the State designated by the Regional Administrator.
(a) The requirements of § 60.26(a) of this chapter are not met since the plan does not provide adequate legal authority for the State to make emission data, as correlated with applicable emissions standards, available to the general public.
Identification of sources: The plan includes the following sulfuric acid plants:
(1) Agrico Chemical Company in St. James Parish.
(2) Allied Chemical Corporation in Ascension and Iberville Parishes.
(3) Beker Industries in St. Charles Parish.
(4) Cities Services Oil Company in Calcasieu Parish.
(5) E. I. du Pont de Nemours & Company, Inc. in Ascension Parish.
(6) Freeport Chemical Company in St. James Parish.
(7) Freeport Chemical Company in Plaquemines Parish.
(8) Olin Corporation in Caddo Parish.
(9) Stauffer Chemical Company in East Baton Rouge Parish.
(a) The Plan applies to existing facilities at the following phosphate fertilizer plants:
(1) Agrico Chemical Company at Donaldsville, Louisiana.
(2) Allied Chemical Corporation at Geismar, Louisiana.
(3) Beker Industries at Taft, Louisiana.
(4) Freeport Chemical at Uncle Sam, Louisiana.
(5) Monsanto at Luling, Louisiana.
(a) The effective date of the portion of the plan applicable to phosphate fertilizer plants is July 12, 1982.
The plan applies to existing facilities at the following primary aluminum plants:
(1) The Kaiser Plant at Chalmette, Louisiana.
(2) The CONALCO Plant at Lake Charles, Louisiana.
The effective date of this portion of the State's plan is July 12, 1982.
The plan applies to existing facilities at the following kraft pulp mill plants:
(1) Boise at DeRidder, La.
(2) Boise at Elizabeth, La.
(3) Continental at Hodge, La.
(4) Crown-Zellerbach at Bogalusa, La.
(5) Crown-Zellerbach at St. Francisville, La.
(6) Georgia-Pacific at Port Hudson, La.
(7) International Paper at Bastrop, La.
(8) Olinkraft at West Monroe, La.
(9) Pineville Kraft at Pineville, La.
(10) Western Kraft at Compte, La.
The effective date of the portion of the plan applicable to kraft pulp mills is July 12, 1982.
The plan applies to all existing municipal solid waste landfills with design capacities greater than 2.5 million megagrams and non-methane organic emissions greater than 50 megagrams per year as described in 40 CFR part 60, subpart Cc.
The effective date of the portion of the plan applicable to existing municipal solid waste landfills is October 28, 1997.
(a)
(b) The plan was officially submitted as follows:
(1) Control of sulfuric acid mist emissions from existing sulfuric acid production units, submitted on November 10, 1988.
(2) Control of total reduced sulfur (TRS) emissions from existing kraft pulp mills, submitted on February 15, 1990.
(3) A revision to the plan to control TRS from existing kraft pulp mills, which extends the final compliance date for brown stock washers to January 1, 1997, was submitted on April 27, 1994.
(c)
(1) Sulfuric acid plants.
(2) Kraft pulp mills.
The State Department of Environmental Protection submitted on October 3, 1988, a letter certifying that there are no existing primary aluminum reduction plants in the State subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
The plan applies to the following existing sulfuric acid plants:
(a) Delta Chemical in Searsport, Maine.
(a) The plan applies to the following existing kraft pulp mills:
(1) International Paper Company in Jay.
(2) S.D. Warren Company in Westbrook.
(3) Boise Cascade in Rumford.
(4) James River Corporation in Old Town.
(5) Georgia-Pacific Corporation in Woodland.
(6) Lincoln Pulp and Paper Company in Lincoln.
The State Department of Environmental Protection submitted on April 19, 1978, a letter certifying that there are no existing phosphate fertilizer plants in the state subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
Clean Air Act, sec. 111(d).
(a)
(b) The plan was officially submitted as follows:
(1) Control of sulfuric acid mist from sulfuric acid plants, submitted by the Secretary of Health and Mental Hygiene, State of Maryland on August 30, 1978.
(2) Control of TRS emissions from kraft pulp mills, submitted by the Governor of Maryland on May 18, 1981, and approval of a compliance schedule, submitted by the State of Maryland on September 24, 1982.
(3) Control of fluoride emissions from primary aluminum reduction plants, submitted by the Secretary of Health and Mental Hygiene, State of Maryland on January 26, 1984.
(c)
(1) Sulfuric acid plants;
(2) Kraft pulp mills.
(3) Primary aluminum reduction plants.
(a) The plan applies to the following existing sulfuric acid plants:
(1) Olin Corporation, Baltimore City, Maryland.
(a) The plan applies to existing facilities at the following kraft pulp mills:
(1) Westvaco Fine Papers Divisions, Luke, Maryland.
(a) The plan applies to the following existing primary aluminum reduction plants:
(1) Eastalco Aluminum Plant, Frederick, Maryland.
The State Department of Environmental Quality Engineering submitted on April 12, 1978, a letter certifying that there are no existing phosphate fertilizer plants in the state subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
On February 18, 1986, the Commonwealth of Massachusetts submitted a letter certifying that there are no existing sulfuric acid plants in the Commonwealth of Massachusetts.
The State Department of Environmental Quality Engineering submitted on July 31, 1979, a letter certifying that there are no existing kraft pulp mills in the State subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
The State Department of Environmental Quality Engineering submitted on January 18, 1989, a letter certifying that there are no existing primary aluminum reduction plants in the State subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
The State Department of Resources submitted on April 18, 1977, a letter certifying that there are no existing phosphate fertilizer plants in the State subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
The State Pollution Control Agency submitted on April 7, 1977, a letter certifying that there are no existing phosphate fertilizer plants in the State subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
(a)
(b) The plan was officially submitted as follows:
(1) Control of sulfuric acid mist emissions from existing facilities at sulfuric acid plants, submitted on September 17, 1981.
(2) Control of total reduced sulfur emissions from existing kraft pulp mills, submitted on October 30, 1987.
(c)
(1) Sulfuric acid plants.
(2) Phosphate fertilizer plants.
(3) Kraft pulp mills.
The plan applies to existing plants at the following locations: Sulfur burning plant and oleum plant of Mississippi Chemical Corporation in Pascagoula.
The plan applies to existing facilities at the following phosphate fertilizer plants.
(1) Mississippi Chemical Corporation in Pascagoula.
The Mississippi Bureau of Pollution Control submitted on March 6, 1985, a letter certifying that there are no existing primary aluminum reduction plants in the State subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
The plan applies to existing facilities at the following kraft pulp mills:
(a) Georgia-Pacific Corporation, Monticello.
(b) International Paper Company, Moss Point.
(c) International Paper Company, Natchez.
(d) International Paper Company, Vicksburg.
The Mississippi Bureau of Pollution Control submitted on August 6, 1991, a letter certifying that there are no municipal waste combustors in the State subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
(a)
(b) The plan was officially submitted as follows:
(1) Control of fluoride emissions from existing facilities at phosphate fertilizer plants, and fluoride emissions from existing facilities at primary aluminum reduction plants, submitted on September 22, 1981, having been adopted by the State on June 17 and June 21, 1981. A letter conveying additional information regarding this plan was submitted on January 3, 1985.
(2) Control of sulfuric acid mist from existing facilities at sulfuric acid production plants, submitted on March 12, 1979, having been adopted by the State in 1967 and 1971. A letter providing additional information regarding this plan was submitted on January 3, 1985.
(c)
(1) Phosphate fertilizer plants.
(2) Primary aluminum reduction plants.
(3) Sulfuric acid production plants.
The plan applies to existing facilities at the following phosphate fertilizer plant:
Farmers Chemical Company, Joplin, Missouri
The plan applies to existing facilities at the following primary aluminum reduction plant:
Noranda Aluminum, Inc., New Madrid, Missouri
The plan applies to existing facilities at the following sulfuric acid production plant:
W.R. Grace and Company, Joplin, Missouri
Letter from the Director of the Missouri Department of Natural Resources submitted on May 14, 1982, certifying that there are no kraft pulp mills in the State subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
Letter from the Director of the Air Pollution Control Program of the Department of Natural Resources submitted May 23, 1991, certifying that there are no existing municipal waste combustors in the state of Missouri subject to this 111(d) requirement.
Letter from the Air Pollution Control Program of the Department of Natural Resources submitted June 3, 1996, certifying that there are no municipal waste combustors in the state of Missouri subject to part 60, subpart Cb of this chapter.
(a)
(b)
(c)
Letter from the Director of the Department of Environmental Control submitted on May 4, 1977, certifying that there are no phosphate fertilizer plants in the State of Nebraska.
Letter from the Chief of the Air Pollution Control Division of the Department of Environmental Control submitted on December 9, 1977, certifying that there are no existing sulfuric acid plants in the State of Nebraska.
Letter from the Chief of the Air Pollution Control Division of the Department of Environmental Control submitted on March 16, 1984, certifying that there are no existing kraft pulp mills in the State of Nebraska, subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
Letter from the Chief of the Air Pollution Control Division of the Department of Environmental Control submitted on March 16, 1984, certifying that there are no existing primary aluminum reduction plants in the State of Nebraska, subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
Letter from the Chief of the Air Quality Division of the Department of Environmental Control submitted April 1, 1991, certifying that there are no existing municipal waste combustors in the state of Nebraska subject to this 111(d) requirement.
Letter from the Air Quality Section of the Nebraska Department of Environmental Quality submitted May 13, 1996, certifying that there are no municipal waste combustors in the state of Nebraska subject to part 60, subpart Cb of this chapter.
(a)
(b)
(c)
(a)
(b) The plan was officially submitted as follows:
(1) Control of total reduced sulfur (TRS) emissions from existing kraft pulp mills, submitted on January 3, 1992.
(2) [Reserved]
(c)
(1) Kraft pulp mills.
(2) [Reserved]
The State Air Pollution Control Agency submitted on November 29, 1978, a letter certifying that there are no existing phosphate fertilizer plants in the state subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
The State Air Pollution Control Agency submitted on November 29, 1978, a letter certifying that there are no existing sulfuric acid plants in the state subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
The State Air Pollution Control Agency submitted on January 3, 1989, a letter certifying that there are no existing primary aluminum reduction plants in the State subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
(a) The plan applies to the following existing kraft pulp mill:
(1) James River Corporation in Berlin.
(2) [Reserved]
(b) [Reserved]
The New Jersey Department of Environmental Protection submitted, on May 20, 1977, a letter certifying that there are no existing phosphate fertilizer plants in the State subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
The New Jersey Department of Environmental Protection submitted, on October 18, 1979, a letter certifying that there are no existing kraft pulp mills in the State subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
The New Jersey Department of Environmental Protection submitted, on September 29, 1980, a letter certifying that there are no existing primary aluminum plants in the State subject to part 60 subpart B of this chapter.
(a)
(b) The plan was officially submitted as follows:
(1) Sulfuric acid plants on May 15, 1981.
(c) Affected facilities: The plan includes the following facilities:
(1) Sulfuric acid plants.
(a) The plan includes the following sources:
(1) Kerr-McGee Nuclear Corporation in McKinley County.
(2) Climax Chemical Corporation in Lea County.
The New Mexico Environmental Improvement Division and the Albuquerque Air Pollution Control Division submitted letters of July 8, 1980 and September 23, 1980, respectively, certifying that there are no existing primary aluminum plants in the State subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
The New Mexico Environmental Improvement Division and the Albuquerque Air Pollution Control Division submitted letters of November 5, 1979 and July 8, 1980, respectively, certifying that there are no existing kraft pulp mills in the State subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
The State Department of Health and Social Services submitted on October 31, 1977, a letter certifying that there are no existing phosphate fertilizer plants in the State subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
Control of landfill gas emissions from existing municipal solid waste landfills, submitted on January 7, 1997.
The plan applies to all existing municipal solid waste landfills with design capacities greater than or equal to 2.5 million megagrams and non-methane organic emissions greater than or equal to 50 megagrams per year as described in 40 CFR part 60, subpart Cc.
The New York State Department of Environmental Conservation submitted, on May 12, 1977, a letter certifying that there are no existing phosphate fertilizer plants in the State subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
(a) [Reserved]
(b) The plan was officially submitted and approved as follows:
(1) Part 224—“Sulfuric Acid and Nitric Acid Plants” of Title 6 of the New York Code of Rules and Regulations effective May 10, 1984.
(2) Supplemental information submitted on March 29, 1985.
(c) Identification of sources. The plan includes the following plants:
(1) PVS Chemicals, Inc., Buffalo.
(2) Eastman Kodak Company, Rochester.
(d) The plan is approved with the provision that for existing sources any variance or compliance date extension from the provisions of part 224, “Sulfuric Acid and Nitric Acid Plants,” or
Secs. 110(a) and 111(d), Clean Air Act (42 U.S.C. 7410(a) and 7411(d)).
(a)
(b) The plan was officially submitted as follows:
(1) Control of sulfuric acid mist emissions from existing sulfuric acid production units, submitted on October 27, 1978, and November 14, 1979.
(2) Control of fluoride emissions from existing primary aluminum plants, submitted on April 16, and August 24, 1981.
(3) Control of total reduced sulfur emissions from existing facilities at kraft pulp mills, submitted on May 2, 1980, and September 24, 1982.
(4) The following revisions to Title 15 of the North Carolina Administrative Code (15 NCAC) were submitted to EPA on July 18, 1986, following adoption by the North Carolina Environmental Management Commission on November 8, 1984: Revised regulations 2D.0517—Emissions From Plants Producing Sulfuric Acid, 2D.0528—Total Reduced Sulfur From Kraft Pulp Mills, and 2D.0529—Fluoride Emissions From Primary Aluminum Reduction Plants.
(5) A change to regulation 15 NCAC 2D.0528, Total Reduced Sulfur from Kraft Pulp Mills, was submitted to EPA April 14, 1987, following adoption by the North Carolina Environmental Management Commission on April 9, 1987.
(6) Revisions to regulations 15 NCAC 2D.0528(c), (f), (g), and (h)—Total Reduced Sulfur from Kraft Pulp Mills, and 2D.0529 (a) and (c)—Flouride Emissions from Primary Aluminum Reduction Plants, were submitted by the North Carolina Department of Natural Resources and Community Development on May 2, 1988, following adoption by the North Carolina Environmental Management Commission on April 14, 1988.
(7) Regulation 1-144, Particulate Matter and Reduced Sulfur Emissions from Pulp and Paper Mills, except 1-144(f) and (g) for the Western North Carolina portion of the North Carolina SIP submitted on June 14, 1990.
(c)
(1) Sulfuric acid plants.
(2) Primary aluminum plants.
(3) Kraft pulp mills.
The plan applies to existing facilities at the following sulfuric acid plants:
(a) Sulfur-burning plants operated by:
(1) Texasgulf Inc. in Beaufort County,
(2) Swift Agricultural Chemical Company in Brunswick County,
(3) USS Agri-Chemicals in Brunswick County,
(4) Wright Chemical Corporation in Columbus County, and
(5) Northeast Chemical Company in New Hanover County.
(b) There are no oleum plants.
(c) There are no bound sulfur feedstock plants.
(a) The plan applies to the following existing primary aluminum plant facilities.
(1) Two potlines of prebake cells at the Badin (Stanly County) plant of the Aluminum Corporation of America.
The plan applies to existing facilities at the following kraft pulp mills:
(a) Federal Paper Board in Rie-gel-wood,
(b) Hoerner-Waldorf in Roanoke Rapids,
(c) Champion International in Canton,
(d) Weyerhaeuser in New Bern, and
(e) Weyerhaeuser in Plymouth.
“Section 111(d) Plan for Municipal Solid Waste Landfills” and the associated State regulation in section 33-15-12-02 of the North Dakota Administrative Code, submitted by the State on September 11, 1997.
The plan applies to all existing municipal solid waste landfills for which construction, reconstruction, or modification was commenced before May 30, 1991 that accepted waste at any time since November 8, 1987 or that have additional capacity available for future waste deposition, as described in 40 CFR part 60, subpart Cc.
The effective date of the plan for municipal solid waste landfills is February 13, 1998.
The Ohio Environmental Protection Agency submitted on December 1, 1977, (resubmitted on April 1, 1985, and April 25, 1985) a letter certifying that there are no existing phosphate fertilizer plants in the State subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
On December 7, 1984, and April 23, 1986, Ohio submitted its plan for controlling total reduced sulfur from existing kraft pulp mills, including Rules 3745-73-01, 02, 03, and 04. The plan is being disapproved because:
(a) The requirements of § 60.24(f) of this chapter are not met because the State failed to justify the application of emission standards less stringent than the Federal emission standards. Additionally, USEPA does not have a bubble policy applicable to 111(d) plans.
(b) The plan does not contain monitoring requirements to ensure proper operation and maintenance of the affected facility as required by § 60.25(b) of this chapter.
(a)
(b) The plan was officially submitted as follows:
(1) Control of sulfuric acid mist from existing sulfuric acid production plants submitted on December 5, 1985, with
(2) Control of total reduced sulfur from existing kraft pulp mills was submitted on November 17, 1987, and supplemented on June 1, 1988.
(c)
(1) Sulfuric acid production plants.
(2) Kraft pulp mills.
(a)
(1) National Zinc Co. in Bartlesville, Oklahoma.
(2) Tulsa Chemical Co. in Tulsa, Oklahoma.
The State Department of Health submitted on October 25, 1977, a letter certifying that there are no existing phosphate fertilizer plants in the State subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
The Oklahoma State Department of Health submitted a letter on March 3, 1983, certifying that there are no existing primary aluminum reduction plants in the State of Oklahoma subject to 40 CFR part 60, subpart B, of this chapter.
The plan includes the following kraft pulp mill:
(a) Weyerhaeuser Paper Company in Valliant, Oklahoma.
(a)
(b) The plan was officially submitted as follows:
(1) Control of fluoride emissions from phosphate fertilizer plants, submitted by the Oregon State Department of Environmental Quality on June 1, 1977.
(2) Control of sulfuric acid mist emissions from sulfuric acid production units, submitted by the Oregon State Department of Environmental Quality on January 27, 1978.
(3) Control of fluoride emissions from primary aluminum reduction plants, submitted by the Oregon State Department of Environmental Quality on January 13, 1981 and August 9, 1982.
(4) Control of metals, acid gases, organic compounds and nitrogen oxide emissions from existing municipal waste combustors was submitted by Oregon Department of Environmental Quality on December 31, 1996.
(5) Control of landfill gas emission from existing Municipal Solid Waste Landfill plan was submitted by Oregon Department of Environmental Quality on May 14, 1997.
(c)
(1) Phosphate fertilizer plants.
(2) Sulfuric acid production units.
(3) Primary aluminum reduction plants.
(4) Existing municipal waste combustors.
(5) Existing municipal solid waste landfills.
At 63 FR 34818, June 26, 1998, § 62.9350 was amended by adding paragraphs (b)(5) and (c)(5), effective Aug.25, 1998.
The plan applies to existing facilities at the following primary aluminum reduction plants:
(a) Reynolds Metals Company in Troutdale, Oregon
(b) Martin-Marietta in The Dalles, Oregon.
The Oregon State Department of Environmental Quality submitted on June 1, 1977, certification that there are no existing phosphate fertilizer plants in the State subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
The Oregon State Deparetment of Environmental Quality submitted on January 27, 1978, certification that there are no existing sulfuric acid plants in the State subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
The plan applies to existing facilities at the following municipal waste combustor sites:
(a) Ogden Martin Systems, Marion County, Oregon.
(b) [Reserved]
The plan applies to all existing MSW landfill facilities in Oregon meeting the requirements as stated in their State regulations.
At 63 FR 34818, June 26, 1998, § 62.9510 and the undesignated center heading were added, effective Aug. 25, 1998.
(a) The Pennsylvania Department of Environmental Resources submitted on December 1, 1977, a letter certifying that there are no existing phosphate fertilizer plants in the State subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
(b) The Allegheny County Bureau of Air Pollution Control submitted a letter on August 18, 1978 certifying that there are no phosphate fertilizer plants in the County subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
(c) The City of Philadelphia Air Management Services submitted on February 22, 1985, a letter certifying that
(a) The Allegheny County Bureau of Air Pollution Control submitted a letter on August 18, 1978 certifying that there are no sulfuric acid plants in the County subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
(b) A plan for the control of sulfuric acid mist emissions from existing sulfuric acid plants in the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, submitted on May 30, 1978 and supplemented on August 17, 1981.
(c) The City of Philadelphia Air Management Services submitted on February 22, 1985, a letter certifying that there are no existing sulfuric acid plants in the City subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
(a) The Allegheny County Bureau of Air Pollution Control submitted a letter on February 14, 1985, certifying that there are no kraft pulp mills in the County subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
(b) The City of Philadelphia Air Management Services submitted on February 22, 1985, a letter certifying that there are no existing kraft pulp mills in the City subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
The Secretary, Department of Environmental Resources submitted on November 3, 1980, a letter certifying there are no primary aluminum plants in the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
The State Department of Environmental Management submitted on November 14, 1977, a letter certifying that there are no existing phosphate fertilizer plants in the state subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
The State Department of Environmental Management submitted on November 14, 1977, a letter certifying that there are no existing sulfuric acid plants in the state subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
The State Department of Environmental Management submitted on July 26, 1979, a letter certifying that there are no existing kraft pulp mills in the State subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
The State Department of Environmental Management submitted on December 8, 1989, a letter certifying that there are no existing primary aluminum reduction plants in the State
On February 5, 1992, the Rhode Island Department of Environmental Management submitted a letter certifying that there are no existing municipal waste combustors in the State subject to the emission guidelines published on February 11, 1991 (56 FR 5514) pursuant to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
(a)
(b) The plan was officially submitted as follows:
(1) Implementation Plan for Control of Designated Pollutants, including sulfuric acid mist from sulfuric acid plants and total reduced sulfur from kraft pulp mills, submitted on December 22, 1981.
(2) A revision to South Carolina's 111(d) plan for total reduced sulfur which was submitted on December 13, 1984. This revision approved an alternate emission limit for the digesters and an extended compliance schedule for the evaporators at Stone Container Corporation.
(c)
(1) Sulfuric acid plants.
(2) Kraft pulp mills.
The plan applies to existing plants at the following locations:
(1) Sulfur-burning plants of W. R. Grace and Company's plant in Charleston.
(2) There are no bound sulfur or oleum plants.
The plan applies to existing facilities at the following kraft pulp mills:
(1) Westvaco in North Charleston.
(2) International Paper Company in Georgetown.
(3) Bowater Carolina Company in Catawba.
(4) Stone Container Corporation in Florence.
The South Carolina Department of Health and Environmental Control submitted on November 2, 1977, a letter certifying that there are no existing phosphate fertilizer plants in the State subject to part 60, subpart B, of this chapter.
The South Carolina Department of Health and Environmental Control submitted on May 3, 1983, a letter certifying that there are no existing primary aluminum plants in the State which are subject to part 60 subpart B of this chapter.
The Tennessee Department of Health and Environment on April 4, 1985, submitted a letter certifying that there are no existing phosphate fertilizer plants in the State subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
On June 25, 1993, the State submitted revisions to the Tennessee State Implementation Plan (SIP). These were revisions to the process gaseous emission standards. These revisions incorporate changes to Rule 1200-3-7-.07, subparagraphs (4)(a) and (4)(b) of the Tennessee SIP which bring this into conformance with the requirements of 40 CFR part 62, subpart I.
(a)
(b) The plan was officially submitted as follows:
(1) Control of sulfuric acid mist from existing sulfuric acid production plants as adopted by the Texas Air Control Board (TACB) on May 12, 1989, and submitted by the Governor in a letter dated August 21, 1989.
(2) Control of total reduced sulfur from existing kraft pulp mills as adopted by the Texas Air Control Board (TACB) on May 12, 1989, and submitted by the Governor in a letter dated August 21, 1989.
(c)
(1) Sulfuric acid production plants.
(2) Kraft Pulp Mills.
(a)
(1) Diamond-Shamrock Corporation in Sunray, Texas.
(2) Amoco Oil Company in Texas City, Texas.
(3) E.I. duPont de Nemours & Company, Inc. in La Porte, Texas.
(4) Mobil Mining and Minerals in Pasadena, Texas.
(5) Rohm and Haas, Texas Inc. in Deer Park, Texas.
(6) Stauffer Chemical Company in Baytown, Texas.
(7) Stauffer Chemical Company in Houston, Texas.
(8) Olin Corporation in Beaumont, Texas.
(9) Stauffer Chemical Company in Pasadena, Texas.
(10) Stauffer Chemical Company in Fort Worth, Texas.
(a) Identification of sources. The plan includes the following kraft pulp mills:
(1) Simpson Paper Company in Pasadena, Texas.
(2) Champion International in Sheldon, Texas.
(3) Temple-Eastex, Inc. in Evadale, Texas.
(4) Champion International in Lufkin, Texas.
(5) International Paper Company in Domino, Texas.
(6) Inland-Orange, Inc. in Orange, Texas.
(a)
(b) The plan was officially submitted on March 1, 1982.
(c)
“Utah State Plan for Implementation of Emission Controls for Existing Designated Facilities, Section I. Municipal Solid Waste Landfills” and the associated State regulations in R307-20-2 and R307-21 of the Utah Air Conservation Regulations, submitted by the State on April 2, 1997 with amendments to the plan submitted on October 31, 1997.
The plan applies to all existing municipal solid waste landfills for which construction, reconstruction, or modification was commenced before May 30, 1991 that accepted waste at any time since November 8, 1987 or that have additional capacity available for future waste deposition, as described in 40 CFR part 60, subpart Cc.
The effective date of the plan for municipal solid waste landfills is March 16, 1998.
The State Agency of Environmental Conservation submitted on April 11, 1978, a letter certifying that there are no existing phosphate fertilizer plants in the state subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
The State Agency of Environmental Conservation submitted on April 11, 1978, a letter certifying that there are no existing sulfuric acid plants in the state subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
The State Agency of Environmental Conservation submitted on August 2, 1979, a letter certifying that there are no existing kraft pulp mills in the State subject to part 60, subject B of this chapter.
The State Agency of Environmental Conservation submitted on January 4, 1989, a letter certifying that there are no existing primary aluminum reduction plants in the State subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
On September 18, 1992, the Vermont Agency of Natural Resources submitted a letter certifying that there are no existing municipal waste combustors in the State subject to the emission guidelines published on February 11, 1991 (56 FR 5514) pursuant to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
The Secretary of Commerce and Resources, Office of the Governor submitted on May 13, 1977, a letter certifying that there are no existing phosphate fertilizer plants in the State subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
(a)
(b) The plan was officially submitted by the Secretary of Commerce and Resources, Commonwealth of Virginia, on September 29, 1978.
(c) [Reserved]
(d)
(e) A variance issued to the E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company James River Sulfuric Acid Plant located in Chesterfield County, Virginia exempting the plant from section 4.51(c)(2) until December 15, 1981, submitted on October 21, 1980 by the Virginia Secretary of Commerce and Resources.
(f) [Reserved]
(g) Section 4.51(c)(2) is replaced with Rule 4-21 (Emission Standards from Sulfuric Acid Production Units), section 120-04-2104 (Standard for Sulfuric Acid Mist), effective February 1, 1985. This revision was submitted on February 14, 1985 by the Commonwealth of Virginia.
The Commonwealth of Virginia, Office of the Governor, submitted on July 9, 1980, a letter certifying that there are no designated facilities in the Commonwealth subject to the emission guidelines set forth in the Final Guideline Document for the Control of Fluoride Emissions from Existing Primary Aluminum Plants.
The Washington State Department of Ecology submitted on August 29, 1979, certification that there are no existing phosphate fertilizer plants in the State subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
The West Virginia Air Pollution Control Commission submitted on October 25, 1977, a letter certifying that there are no existing phosphate fertilizer plants in the State subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
The State Department of Natural Resources submitted on May 24, 1977, a letter certifying that there are no existing phosphate fertilizer plants in the State subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
At 63 FR 29646, June 1, 1998, Subpart ZZ was added, effective July 31, 1998.
Section 35, “Municipal Solid Waste Landfills,” of the Wyoming Air Quality Standards and Regulations and associated documentation submitted by the State on February 13, 1998.
The plan applies to all existing municipal solid waste landfills for which construction, reconstruction, or modification was commenced before May 30, 1991 that accepted waste at any time since November 8, 1987 or that have additional capacity available for future waste deposition, as described in 40 CFR part 60, subpart CC.
The effective date of the plan for municipal solid waste landfills is July 31, 1998.
The Commonwealth Environmental Quality Board submitted, on January 31, 1978, a letter certifying that there are no existing phosphate fertilizer plants in Commonwealth subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
The Commonwealth Environmental Quality Board submitted, on January 31, 1978, a letter certifying that there are no existing sulfuric acid plants in the Commonwealth subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
The Commonwealth of Puerto Rico submitted on April 28, 1981, a letter certifying that there are no existing primary aluminum plants in the Commonwealth subject to part 60 subpart B of this chapter.
The Commonwealth of Puerto Rico submitted on April 28, 1981, a letter certifying that there are no existing kraft pulp mills in the Commonwealth
The Territory Department of Conservation and Cultural Affairs submitted, on November 3, 1977, a letter certifying that there are no existing phosphate fertilizer plants in the Territory subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
The Territory Department of Conservation and Cultural Affairs submitted, on November 8, 1977, a letter certifying that there are no existing sulfuric acid plants in the Territory subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
The Virgin Islands Department of Conservation and Cultural Affairs submitted, on July 31, 1979, a letter certifying that there are no existing kraft pulp mills in the Territory subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
The Virgin Islands Department of Conservation and Cultural Affairs submitted, on July 21, 1980, a letter certifying that there are no primary aluminum plants in the Territory subject to part 60, subpart B of this chapter.
A list of CFR titles, subtitles, chapters, subchapters and parts and an alphabetical list of agencies publishing in the CFR are included in the CFR Index and Finding Aids volume to the Code of Federal Regulations which is published separately and revised annually.
Material Approved for Incorporation by Reference
Table of CFR Titles and Chapters
Alphabetical List of Agencies Appearing in the CFR
Table of OMB Control Numbers
List of CFR Sections Affected
The Director of the Federal Register has approved under 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR Part 51 the incorporation by reference of the following publications. This list contains only those incorporations by reference effective as of the revision date of this volume. Incorporations by reference found within a regulation are effective upon the effective date of that regulation. For more information on incorporation by reference, see the preliminary pages of this volume.
The OMB control numbers for chapter I of title 40 were consolidated into § 9.1 at 58 FR 27472, May 10, 1993. Section 9.1 is reprinted below for the convenience of the user.
7 U.S.C. 135
This part consolidates the display of control numbers assigned to collections of information in certain EPA regulations by the Office of Management and Budget (OMB) under the Paperwork Reduction Act (PRA). This part fulfills the requirements of section 3507(f) of the PRA.
For Federal Register citations affecting § 9.1 see the List of CFR Sections Affected in the Finding Aids section of this volume.
All changes in this volume of the Code of Federal Regulations which were made by documents published in the
Title 40 was established at 36 FR 12213, June 29, 1971. For the period before January 1, 1986, see the “List of CFR Sections Affected, 1964-1972, 1964-1972, and 1973-1985,” published in seven separate volumes.